09_manual

Manual 04/2004 Edition

sinumerik

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components

04.2004 Edition

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Operator Components

Manual

Operator Panels

OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1

OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2

OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3


TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5

TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6


OP 015A Operator Panel Front 8

15”TFT OP (incl.VLR) 9

15”TFT OP (excl.VLR) 10

Direct Control Key Submodule 11

PCU 20 12

PCU 50 13

PCU 70 14

Distributed Installation (VL) 15

Distributed installation (TCU) 16

Handheld Units

Handheld Terminal HT 6 17

Handheld Unit/Distributor Box 18

Mini Handheld Unit 19

Machine Control Panels

Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20

Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21

Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22

Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23

Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24

MPI Interface for Customer OP 25

19” Machine Control Panel 26

Keyboards

Standard PC Keyboard MF–II 27

CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C 28

CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29

CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S 30

Storage Devices

Floppy Disk Drive 3.5” 31

Floppy Disk Drive 3.5” (USB) 32

Heat Dissipation 33

Connection Conditions 34

Appendix

SINUMERIK Documentation

Printing history

Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.

The status of each edition is shown by the code in the “Remarks” column.

Status code in the “Remarks” column:

A New documentation.. . . . . B Unrevised reprint with new order no.. . . . . C Revised edition with new status. . . . . .

If factual changes have been made on the page in relation to the same softwareversion, this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page.

Edition Order No. Remarks06.94 6FC5 297-0AA50-0BP0 A02.95 6FC5 297-2AA50-0BP0 C04.95 6FC5 297-2AA50-0BP1 C09.95 6FC5 297-3AA01-0BP0 Description of differences03.96 6FC5 297-3AA50-0BP0 C08.97 6FC5 297-4AA50-0BP0 C12.97 6FC5 297-4AA50-0BP1 C12.98 6FC5 297-5AA50-0BP0 C08.99 6FC5 297-5AA50-0BP1 C04.00 6FC5 297-5AA50-0BP2 C10.00 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP0 C09.01 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP1 C11.02 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP2 C06.03 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP3 C11.03 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP3 C04.04 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0 C

This book is part of the documentation on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)Edition Order No. Remarks09.04 6FC5 298-7CA00-0BG1 C

TrademarksSIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC NET, SIROTEC, SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE are trademarks ofSiemens. Other product names used in this documentation may be trademarks which, if used by third par-ties, could infringe the rights of their owners.

Further information is available on the Internet under:http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol

This publication was produced with Interleaf V7.

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or itscontents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenderswill be liable for damages. All rights, including those created by patentgrant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.

Siemens AG, 1994–2004. All rights reserved

Other functions not described in this documentation might beexecutable in the control. However, no claim can be made regardingthe availability of these functions when the equipment is first suppliedor for service cases.

We have checked that the contents of this document correspond tothe hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences mightexist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completelyidentical. The information contained in this document is, however,reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in thenext edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement.

Subject to changes without prior notice

Siemens AktiengesellschaftOrder No. 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0Printed in Germany

3ls

v Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Preface

The SINUMERIK documentation is organized on three levels:

General documentation

User documentation

Manufacturer/service documentation.

For more detailed information on SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC publicationsand other publications covering all SINUMERIK controls, please contact yourlocal Siemens office.

If you have queries regarding the control system, please contact the followinghotline:

A&D Technical Support Phone: ++49-(0)180-5050-222Fax: ++49-(0)180-5050-223Email: [email protected]

If you have queries regarding documentation (suggestions, corrections), pleasesend a fax to the following fax address:

Fax: ++49-(0)9131-98-2176Email: [email protected]

Fax form: See the feedback page at the end of the document

http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol

The products listed in this manual are marketed and sold in accordance with amanagement system certified by DQS. DQS certifies according to:

DIN EN ISO 9001: Quality management

DIN EN ISO 14001: Environmental management

Improved-performance variants

SINUMERIK 840D powerline and

SINUMERIK 840DE powerline

will be available from 09.2001 onwards. For a list of available powerlinemodules, please refer to Section 1.1 of the Hardware Description /PHD/.

Improved-performance variants

SINUMERIK 810D powerline and

SINUMERIK 810DE powerline

will be available from 12.2001 onwards. For a list of available powerlinemodules, please refer to Section 1.1 of the Hardware Description /PHC/.

Notes for thereader

Hotline

Internet addressfor SINUMERIK

Quality assurance

SINUMERIK 840Dpowerline

SINUMERIK 810Dpowerline

04.04

vi Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Configuring engineers Electricians and fitters Servicing and operating personnel

The information contained in this manual explains how to install the operatorcomponents for the 840D numerical controls and describes how to maintain andservice them.

This manual contains information which you should observe in order to ensureyour own personal safety, as well to avoid material damage. Information shownwith a warning triangle indicates a risk of personal injury. Explanation of sym-bols used:

Danger

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result indeath or serious injury or in substantial property damage.

Warning

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result indeath or serious injury or in substantial property damage.

Caution

Used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situationwhich, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property dam-age.

Caution

Used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situationwhich, if not avoided, may result in property damage.

Notice

Used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if notavoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.

Note

Note refers to an important item of information about the product, handling ofthe product or part of the documentation which is particularly relevant in thecurrent context.

Target readership?

Content of thismanual

Safety notices

Preface

04.04

vii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Machine Manufacturer

This symbol appears in this documentation whenever the machine manufac-turer can influence or modify the described functional behavior. Please observethe information provided by the machine manufacturer.

To safeguard your own personal safety as well as protect the product describedand all connected equipment and machines against damage, please read andobserve the following warnings and safety information.

Warning

Operational electrical equipment has parts and components which are athazardous voltage levels.

Allowing unqualified persons access to the equipment/system or failure toheed the safety information could result in serious physical injury or substantialproperty damage. Only properly qualified personnel who have been trained toerect, install, start up or operate the product should be allowed to work on theequipment/system.

Should it be necessary to test or take measurements on live equipment, thenthe specifications and procedures defined in Accident Prevention RegulationVBG 4.0 must be adhered to, in particular § 8 “Permissible deviations whenworking on live components”. Suitable electric tools must be used.

Warning

Repairs to equipment supplied by Siemens must always be carried out bySIEMENS after-sales service personnel or by repair centers authorizedby SIEMENS. Parts or components must always be replaced by parts orcomponents specified in the spare parts list.

Always disconnect the power supply before you open the unit.

EMERGENCY STOP devices in compliance with EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE0113) must remain operative in all operating modes of the automation de-vice. Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP device must not result in any un-controlled or undefined system restart.

Wherever faults in the automation device have the potential to cause sub-stantial material damage or even human injury, i.e. they can present a dan-ger, additional external precautions must be taken or devices providedwhich will guarantee or enforce a safe operating state in the event of a fault(e.g. through independent limit value switches, mech. interlocks, etc.).

Caution

Connecting and signal leads must be installed such that inductive and ca-pacitive interference cannot impair automation functions.

Warnings andsafety information

Preface

04.04

viii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved


Components which can be destroyed by ElectroStatic Discharge

Important

Handling ESDS boards:

When handling components which can be destroyed by electrostatic di-scharge, it must be ensured that personnel, the workstation and packagingare well grounded.

As a general rule, electronic boards should only be touched when absolu-tely necessary. Never hold PCBs in such a way that you touch the modulepins or printed conductors.

You may only touch ESDS components if

– you are continuously grounded via an ESDS bracelet,

– you are wearing ESDS shoes or ESDS shoe grounding strips in con-junction with an ESDS floor surface.

Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces (desk with ESDS sur-face, conductive ESDS foam rubber, ESDS packing bag, ESDS transportcontainers).

Boards may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or televisionsets (a minimum of 10 cm should be kept between the board and thescreen).

Boards may not be brought into contact with materials which can be char-ged and are highly insulating, e.g. plastic foils, insulating desktops, articlesof clothing manufactured from man-made fibers.

Measurements may be taken on the boards only if

– the measuring equipment is grounded (e.g. via the protective conductor)or

– in the case of floating measuring instruments, the probe is briefly dis-charged before a measurement is taken (e.g. through contact with barecontrol housing).

The unit may be used only for the applications described in the catalog, andonly in combination with the equipment and components recommended andapproved by SIEMENS (e.g. SINUMERIK 840D/FM-NC).

ESDS instructions

Proper use

Preface

ix Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Contents

Preface v. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 Overview 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 Operating and display elements 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 View 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Keyboard 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3 Interfaces 1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4 Installation 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 Preparation for mounting 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2 Softkey labeling 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.3 Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.4 Mounting 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5 Technical data 1-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.6 Spare parts 1-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.1 Spare parts list 1-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.2 Replacing spare parts 1-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front 2-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 Operator interface 2-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 Interfaces 2-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 Installation 2-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Mounting 2-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Mounting the PCU 2-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 Technical data 2-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 View 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 Description of the keyboard 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 Interfaces 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 Installation 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Preparation for mounting 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 Mounting 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5 Technical data 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6 Spare parts 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7 Changing key covers of short-stroke keys 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

04.04

x Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved



4.1 Overview 4-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 View 4-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


4.4 Interfaces 4-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 Installation 4-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU 4-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Preparing for mounting 4-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Mounting 4-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6 Softkey labeling 4-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 Technical data 4-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.8 Spare parts/accessories 4-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 Spare parts list 4-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2 Replacing spare parts 4-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front 5-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 View 5-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 Interfaces 5-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Arrangement 5-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 Installation 5-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Assembling the TP 012 and PCU 5-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Preparing for mounting 5-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Mounting 5-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 Touch screen calibration 5-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4 Technical data 5-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front 6-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 View 6-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


6.3 Interfaces 6-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4 Installation 6-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Assembling TP 015A and PCU 6-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 Mounting 6-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.3 Touch screen calibration 6-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


6.6 Technical data 6-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


6.8 Example when calculating the cooling 6-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

04.04

xi Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition


7.1 Operator interface 7-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 Interfaces 7-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 Arrangement 7-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.2 Assignments 7-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 Installation 7-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 Assembling OP 015 and PCU 50 7-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2 Preparation for mounting 7-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.3 Mounting 7-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4 Technical data 7-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


8 OP 015A Operator Panel Front 8-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1 View 8-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


8.3 Interfaces 8-105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.4 Installation 8-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1 Assembling OP 015A and PCU 50 8-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.2 Preparing for mounting 8-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.3 Mounting 8-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


8.6 Technical data 8-110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.7 Spare parts 8-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.1 Spare parts list 8-111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.2 Spare part replacement 8-112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm Wide, incl. Videolink Receiver 9-113. . . . . . . . .

9.1 Overview 9-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2 System features 9-115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.3 Description of functions 9-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.1 Overview of function blocks 9-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.2 Operator panel front 9-117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.3 Machine control panel for turning and milling 9-117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.4 Videolink transmitter 9-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3.5 Cable 9-119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.4 Interfaces 9-120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1 Hardware interfaces – overview 9-120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2 Interface assignment for operator panel front 9-121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.3 Interface assignment for QWERTY keyboard 9-123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.4 Interface assignment for MCP 9-125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.5 Interface assignment for videolink transmitter 9-127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.6 Internal status displays (LEDs) 9-131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.7 Software interfaces 9-132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.5 Mechanical design 9-134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

04.04

xii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved


9.5.1 Operator panel front 9-134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.2 MCP 9-135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.3 Videolink transmitter 9-139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.6 Installation 9-140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.1 Operator panel front 9-140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.2 Machine control panel 9-142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.3 Videolink transmitter 9-143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.7 Technical data 9-147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.8 Spare parts 9-148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.9 Heat dissipation 9-152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver 10-153. . . . .

10.1 Overview 10-154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2 System features 10-155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.3 Description 10-156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.1 Operator panel front 10-156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.2 Machine control panel for turning and milling 10-156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.3 Cable 10-157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.4 Interfaces 10-158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.1 Hardware interfaces – overview 10-158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.2 Interface assignment for operator panel front 10-158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.3 Interface assignments for machine control panel 10-158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4.4 Key layout 10-161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.5 Mechanical design 10-162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.1 Operator panel front 10-162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5.2 Machine control panel 10-164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.6 Installation 10-169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.7 Technical data 10-172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel 10-174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.9 Heat dissipation 10-178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 Direct Control Key Submodule 11-179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.1 Interfaces 11-180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.2 Mounting 11-182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 Combination with OP 012 11-182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.2 Combination with OP 015A 11-186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.3 Combination with TP 015A 11-188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 PCU 20 12-191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.1 View 12-192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.2 Interfaces and connections 12-193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.1 Interfaces on right side of casing 12-193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.2 Interfaces on left side of casing 12-194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.3 Mounting bracket on underside of casing 12-195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.4 Pin assignments 12-196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.3 Mounting 12-197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

04.04

xiii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

12.3.1 Assembly with operator panel front and installation 12-197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3.2 Preparing for operation 12-198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.4 Technical data 12-199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.5 Accessories 12-199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13 PCU 50 13-201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.1 Overview 13-201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.2 View 13-203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3 Interfaces and connections 13-204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.1 Interfaces on right side of casing 13-204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.2 Interfaces on left side of casing 13-205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.3 Ports on bottom side of casing 13-205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.4 Casing rear side 13-205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.4 Mounting 13-206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.1 Mounting preparation 13-206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.2 Notes on installation 13-207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.5 Startup 13-208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.1 Booting 13-208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.2 Touch screen calibration 13-212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5.3 Working with PC cards 13-215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.6 Technical data 13-216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.7 Spare parts 13-217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7.1 Replacing the hard disk 13-217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7.2 Changing the power supply 13-218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7.3 Changing the device fan 13-220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7.4 Changing the battery 13-221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.8 Accessories 13-223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.1 Mounting bracket 13-223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.2 Memory expansion 13-223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8.3 Expansion boards 13-225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14 PCU 70 14-229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.1 View 14-230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.2 Interfaces and connections 14-231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.1 Interfaces on right side of casing 14-231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.2 Interfaces on left side of casing 14-232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.3 Ports on bottom side of casing 14-232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.4 Casing rear side 14-233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.5 Pin assignments 14-233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.3 Start-up 14-234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.1 Mounting and installation 14-234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.2 Notes on installation 14-234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.3 Preparing for operation 14-235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.4 Booting 14-236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.5 Working with PC cards 14-236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.4 Technical data 14-237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.5 Spare parts 14-238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

04.04

xiv Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved


14.6 Accessories 14-238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6.1 External floppy disk drive 14-238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6.2 Memory expansion 14-239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6.3 Expansion boards 14-239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14.7 System information 14-239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 Distributed Installation with Videolink 15-241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.1 Overview 15-243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1 Configurations 15-243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.2 View 15-245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.2 Description of components 15-246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.1 Videolink receiver 15-246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.2 Cable 15-247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.3 Videolink transmitter 15-248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.3 Interfaces 15-249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1 Hardware interfaces – overview 15-249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2 Interface pin assignment for videolink transmitter 15-249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.3 Interface assignment for video link receiver 15-250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.4 Operating and monitoring devices 15-251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.1 Videolink transmitter 15-251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.2 Videolink receiver 15-252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.3 Operator panel interlock 15-252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU 15-253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.1 Flat mounting 15-253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.2 Upright mounting 15-257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5.3 Central mounting on operator panel front 15-259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.6 Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front 15-260. . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.7 Technical data 15-262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit) 16-265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.1 Overview 16-265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.2 Configurations 16-268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.3 Interfaces 16-269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.1 Overview 16-269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.2 Description of interfaces 16-269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.4 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front 16-270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.5 Technical data 16-272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.6 Accessories 16-273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17 Handheld Terminal HT 6 17-275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.1 Overview and function blocks 17-275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.2 User interface and interfaces 17-277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.1 User interface 17-277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.2 Interfaces 17-279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.3 Distribution box 17-283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

04.04

xv Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

17.3.1 Distribution box for 3-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2006-1BC01) 17-283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.3.2 Distribution box for 4-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2006-1BH01) 17-286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation 17-290. . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.5 Configuring the HT 6, setting interface parameters 17-294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.1 Interface signals of HT 6 17-294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5.2 Standard configuration of the HT 6 (without MCP) 17-296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.6 Technical data 17-297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.7 Spare parts and accessories 17-298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7.1 Spare parts 17-298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7.2 Accessories 17-302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box 18-305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.1 Handheld unit B-MPI 18-305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.2 Block diagram of HHU and distributor box 18-307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation 18-308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.4 Operating more than one HHU 18-311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.5 HHU control elements and interface 18-312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.6 Technical data for HHU 18-314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.7 Settings in the HHU 18-315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters 18-317. . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8.1 Interface signals for handheld unit 18-318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8.2 Example signal chart 18-322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.9 Distributor box for handheld unit 18-325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.10 Spare parts 18-329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19 Mini Handheld Unit 19-331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.1 Dimensions and control elements 19-331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1.1 General 19-332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1.2 Description of control elements 19-332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.2 Circuit diagram and sample connection 19-333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.3 Coding of axis selection switch 19-334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.4 Configuration 19-334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.5 Connections 19-335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.6 Technical data 19-336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19.7 Spare parts 19-337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C 20-339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.1 Brief description 20-339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.2 Control elements and interfaces 20-340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2.1 Control elements on front 20-340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2.2 Display and operating elements at rear 20-342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

04.04

xvi Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved


20.2.3 Interfaces 20-342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.3 Mounting, connection and settings 20-344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.1 Mounting 20-345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.2 Connections 20-345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.3 Settings 20-346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.4 Technical data 20-348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.5 Spare parts and accessories 20-349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483 21-351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


21.2 Control elements and interfaces 21-352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.1 Operating elements front face 21-352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.2 Operating and display elements to rear 21-353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.3 Interfaces 21-354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.3 Mounting and settings 21-357. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3.1 Mounting 21-358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3.2 Settings via DIP switch S3 21-359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.4 Technical data 21-361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.5 Spare parts and accessories 21-362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5.1 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels 21-363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 21-369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6.1 Prerequisites 21-369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6.2 Functions of the machine control panel 21-370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6.3 Configuring the DP slave MCP 21-371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6.4 Linking to the basic PLC and user program 21-374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6.5 Input/output image 21-377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22 Machine Control Panel MCP 310 22-381. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


22.2 Control elements and interfaces 22-382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2.1 Operating elements front face 22-382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2.2 Operating and display elements to rear 22-383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2.3 Interfaces 22-383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.3 Mounting and settings 22-384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3.1 Mounting 22-385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3.2 Settings via DIP switch S3 22-386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.4 Technical data 22-388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.5 Spare parts and accessories 22-389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5.1 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels 22-390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP 22-394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6.1 Prerequisites 22-394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6.2 Functions of the machine control panel 22-395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6.3 Configuring the DP slave MCP 22-396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6.4 Linking to the basic PLC and user program 22-399. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.6.5 Input/output image 22-402. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

04.04

xvii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S 23-405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.1 Control elements 23-406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.2 Interfaces 23-407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.3 Dimension drawing and panel cutout 23-413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23.4 Technical data 23-414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 24-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.1 System description 24-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1.1 Introduction 24-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1.2 Interfaces and monitoring 24-418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1.3 Operator panel front interface 24-419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.2 Function blocks 24-420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.3 Block diagrams 24-421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.4 Operating elements 24-423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.5 Interfaces 24-425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5.1 Overview 24-425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5.2 PP 012 individual wiring 24-427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5.3 Individual wiring PCB input/output 24-434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.6 Connection for handheld units 24-438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.1 Functional reliability of EMERGENCY STOP and enabling circuits 24-438. . 24.6.2 Two-channel enabling function 24-439. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.7 Dimension drawings and mounting instructions 24-442. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.8 Installation and mounting 24-443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.9 Labeling control elements 24-444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.10 PP 012 expansion 24-446. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A 24-448. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.11.1 Inputs/outputs 24-448. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.11.2 Key assignment within matrix 24-449. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.12 Circuits and wiring 24-451. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.13 Technical data 24-456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.13.1 PP 012 24-456. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.13.2 Input/output interface of individual wiring 24-457. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.14 PLC interface 24-460. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.15 Initialization 24-462. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.16 Example of parameter settings for communication SIMATIC S7 / PP 012 24-466. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.17 Service information 24-468. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.18 Configuration 24-470. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.18.1 Configurer 24-470. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.18.2 Project-specific components 24-472. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.18.3 Rating plates 24-473. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

04.04

xviii Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved


25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel 25-475. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.1 Interfaces 25-475. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.2 Settings 25-480. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25.3 Technical data 25-482. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26 19” Machine Control Panel 26-483. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.1 Function blocks 26-483. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.2 Block diagram 26-484. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.3 Control elements and interfaces 26-485. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3.1 Control elements 26-485. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3.2 Interfaces 26-487. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.4 Mounting, connection and settings of machine control panel 26-489. . . . . . . 26.4.1 Mounting 26-490. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4.2 Connections 26-491. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4.3 Machine control panel settings 26-492. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.5 Setting the interface parameters 26-494. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.6 Technical data 26-495. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.7 Spare parts 26-496. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.7.1 Slide-in label film 26-497. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27 Standard PC Keyboard MF-II 27-499. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C 28-501. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


28.2 Dimension drawings 28-502. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


28.4 Mounting 28-506. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


28.6 Technical data 28-508. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29 CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C 29-509. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


29.2 Dimension drawings 29-510. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


29.4 Mounting 29-512. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29.5 Technical data 29-514. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


30 CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S 30-517. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30.1 Interfaces 30-517. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

04.04

xix Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

30.2 Mounting instructions, dimension drawing and panel cutout 30-518. . . . . . . .

30.3 Technical data 30-519. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


31 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive 31-521. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface 32-525. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32.1 Notes about operation 32-526. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.1 Floppy disk drive (order no. 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1) 32-526. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.2 Floppy disk drive (Order No. 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2) 32-526. . . . . . . . . . . . .

32.2 Description 32-528. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.1 Dimension drawings 32-528. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.2 Hardware interface 32-529. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.3 Software interface 32-529. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.4 Installation instructions 32-530. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32.3 Technical data 32-532. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33 Heat Dissipation 33-535. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34 Connection Conditions 34-539. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34.1 Secondary electrical conditions 34-539. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 34-540. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.2 Power supply 34-541. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.3 Protective separation acc. to EN 50178 34-542. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.4 Grounding concept 34-544. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.5 RI suppression measures 34-545. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.6 Pin assignment for interfaces 34-547. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.7 Handling membrane connectors 34-554. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions 34-555. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.1 Transport and storage conditions 34-555. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.2 Operating conditions 34-557. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34.3 MPI/OPI network rules 34-558. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A Abbreviations A-561. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B References B-565. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C Index Index-581. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

04.04

xx Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved


Contents

Notes

1-21 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

OP 010 Operator Panel Front

1.1 Overview

The SINUMERIK OP 010 operator panel front with 10.4” TFT color display witha resolution of 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) features a 62-key membrane keypadwith 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys that has been optimized for pro-gramming subroutines.

Combined with a SINUMERIK PCU, the SINUMERIK OP 010 can be used tocreate a low-cost operator panel.

Mounting is from the rear using special clamps that are included in the scope ofdelivery.

The description below applies to the OP 010 operator panel front:order number 6FC 5203-0AF00-0AA1

19” mounting format, 7 HE (height units)

Panel cutout (W x H): 450 x 290 mm

Compact mounting depth (e.g. OP 010 with PCU 50: 108 mm + 10 mm ven-tilation clearance, measured from surface of mounting panel:)

10.4” slimline screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels (TFT)

Membrane keyboard with alpha, numerical, cursor, control and hotkey key-groups

Softkeys: 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys

Shift key for switching to the second key level(not for switching case, uppercase characters only)

Status LEDs for the power supply and overtemperature

USB interface at the front

IP65 degree of protection

Mounting: Tension jacks at the rear

Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see “DistributedInstallation with Video Link Receiver”)

External floppy disk drive can be connected via PCU.

Validity

Features

1

04.041.2 Operating and display elements

1-22 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved


1.2 Operating and display elements

1.2.1 View

Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *) Alpha key group Numerical key group

Cursor keygroup

Controlkeygroup

USBfrontinterface

Area switchoverEtc. keyMachine areaRecall

Sof

tkey

s

*) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed

Hotkeygroup

Softkeys

Fig. 1-1 Front view of OP 010 operator panel front

1.2.2 Keyboard

Fig. 1-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of differentkey groups:

The Alpha key group contains the letters A, ..., Z on two levels arranged inaccordance with programming requirements.

The numerical key group contains the digits 0 ... 9, the -, /,=, + charactersand the decimal point.

The cursor key group is used to navigate on the screen.

The control key group includes special functions.

The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas.

1 OP 010 Operator Panel Front

04.041.2 Operating and display elements


The key functions are summarized in the following list:

Key Function corresponds toPC key function:


Esc End

F11 Backspace

F12 Tab

Space–––(only intended for internalkeyboard switchover)

Home Ctrl key

Page up Alt key

Page down Delete

Cursor up Insert

Cursor left Enter

Cursor right F9

Cursor down F10

5 (in numerical key group) A, ..., Z <Shift> A, ..., Z

<Shift> F9 <Shift> F10


04.041.3 Interfaces



1.3 Interfaces

The OP 010 operator panel front provides the following interfaces:

USB 1.1 to connect an external keyboard or mouse (Fig. 1-1).

Note

When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is oftenonly designed for office use.

Components with a higher certification are recommended for industrial use.

Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (see figure below):

I/O USB cable K1 (ribbon cable):All signals which are used, in addition to the display interface, for the con-nection of operator panel fronts (e.g. supply voltages).

Display cable K2.

PCU 50main board

I/O USBcable K1

Display cable K2

OP 010

Direct controlkeyinterfaceX11

PCU 50

Connection X14 for backlight

Keyboardcontroller

Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1

InterfaceX12(reserved)

Cable clampfor connectionto direct controlkey submodule

Fig. 1-2 OP 010 – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections

See “Connection Conditions”

Front side

Rear side

Pin assignment


04.041.4 Installation


1.4 Installation

1.4.1 Preparation for mounting

Table 1-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see diagram below)

PCU typeused

Width(mm)

Height(mm)

Depth + clearance (mm)measured from the mounting panel surface

PCU 50450 290

100 + 10

PCU 70450 290

140 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010, holes or screw holes are notneeded.

This retaining method also affords degree of protection IP65 (but only in con-junction with a circumferential seal and when the protective USB cap is fitted).

450 +1

290

+1

1.5 min to 6 max

112.5 77.75* * 112.5*77.75*

112.

5*56

.25*

5

Sealing areaMounting panel

Setscrews

Tensionjacks

*) Dimensions for tension jack pressure points

Fig. 1-3 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010 operator panel front

1.4.2 Softkey labeling

The vertical and horizontal softkey bars can be assigned user-specific func-tions. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys.

Blank labels are already installed on delivery (see Subsection 1.4.3).





To make the labels, DIN-A4 filmis available (Order No., see Section 1.6). Pro-ceed as follows:

1. Letter the dull side of the film using a laser printer.

2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines.

3. Slide the labels from the rear of the operator panel front into the slots pro-vided (see Fig. 1-6).

1.4.3 Assembling an OP 010 and a PCU

When a combination of OP 010 and PCU (or video link receiver, see “VideoLink”) is to be used, it is advisable to assemble them prior to installation (Sub-section 1.4.4).

Proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Subsection “Assembling OP 012and PCU 50”.

4. Undo the shipping lock for the hard disk, otherwise the system will not boot.

1.4.4 Mounting

1. Insert the assembled components OP 010 and PCU from the front into thepanel cutout (see Fig. 1-3).

2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the sixtension jacks (see Fig. 1-3) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 –0.5 Nm).

Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so thatthe unit is ventilated sufficiently (see diagram “Mounting the PCU to the OP 012operator panel front” in Chapter “OP 012”).

For more detailed information, please refer to the relevant PCU chapters andChapter “Heat Dissipation”.

Mounting position Permissible mounting position: Deviating by up to 5 from the vertical.

Notice

This value can be further restricted by mounting components (PCU, Videolinkreceiver, ...).

Screen saverCaution

If a high-contrast image is displayed for more than one hour on a TFT display,there is a risk of irreversible damage to the display due to screen burn.

To prevent this undesirable effect the screensaver (screen darkening) must beactivated. For more details see /BEM/: HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide

/IAM/ IM2: Installing HMI EmbeddedIM4: Installing HMI Advanced

Making the labels


04.041.5 Technical data


1.5 Technical dataTable 1-2 Technical data

Safety

Protective class III; PELV acc. to EN 50178

Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529

Front side IP65 Rear side IP00

Approvals CE / cULus

Electrical data

Power supply (via I/OUSB cable and display cable)

Display Backlightinverter

Logic/USB (with/without load)

VoltageCurrent (typ./max. mA; appr.)

5 V +/– 5%280 / 380

12 V +/–10%750 / 1000

5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1000

Power consumption Typical, approx. 10 W Maximum approx. 16 W

Mechanical data

Dimensions Width: 483 mmHeight: 310 mmDepth: 30 mm

Mounting depth: 20 mmincl. PCU 50: 100 mm *)incl. PCU 70: 140 mm *)

Weight approx. 5 kg

Tightening torques, max.Tension jack

screws: 0.5 NmM3 screws:

0.8 NmM4 screws: 1.8

Nm

Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with PCU)

Operation Shipping(in packaging)

Vibration stressing 10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2

3M4 according to EN 60721-3-3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2


Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721-3-3

300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721-3-2

Climatic ambient conditions

Heat dissipation by natural convection

Moisture condensation, waterspray and the formation of ice

not permissible

Air inlet without aggressive gases, dusts and oils

Operation Transportation/storage(in packaging)

Relevant standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2

Climate class 3K5 1K3 / 2K4

Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)

–20 ... 60 °C

Temperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h

Relative air humidity limits 5 ... 80 % 5 ... 95 %

Permissible change in the rel-ative air humidity

max. 0.1 % /min

Display

Size / resolution 10.4” / 640 x 480 pixels

MTBF backlight typ. 50 000 h at 25 °C (dependent on the temperature)

*) Plus 10 mm clearance


04.041.6 Spare parts



1.6 Spare parts

1.6.1 Spare parts list

Spare parts for the OP 010 are as follows (see diagram below):

Component Order number Remarks

Operator panel frontwithout LCD unit

6FC5248-0AF00-0AA0

Sealing caps for USBconnection

6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10

Tension jacks 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6

Film DIN A4 6FC5248-0AF07-0AA0For slide-in softkey labelsSet of 3

Keyboard controller

LCD unit

Backlight withbacklightinverter

Cap for the USB port

Display holder

Front panel

Fig. 1-4 Spare parts for the OP 010 operator panel front




5

214.5

38.7

68

11

26

17

41.3

41.5

9.621.3

9.621.3

8.8

8.2

9.519

8.5

0.6

15P

art 1

Par

t 2

Par

t 3

Par

t 4

Par

t 5

Par

t 6

Center of the key

Slide-in labels

Fig. 1-5 Dimensions for DIN A4 blank film

1.6.2 Replacing spare parts

Caution

Only trained personnel may replace spare parts (there is a danger thatsensitive devices could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic discharge)!

The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks will not be described inthe following, since it is simple and self-explanatory.

When the front plate is replaced, the existing LCD unit and keyboard controllercan be reused and are therefore removed and installed again after the frontpanel has been changed.

Note

We recommend that the keypad controller is re-used so that the controlparameters that have been programmed-in are not lost.

Procedure:

1. Put the OP 010 face down on a flat, soft surface and loosen the 12 casingscrews (see figure below).

Operator panelfront





Cover plate forconnectionsKeyboard controller

Displaycable K2 2)

IO/USBcable K1 2)

2) Cable shown folded together

Top

4) Slit for softkey labeling strips

Width = 483

Hei

ght =

310

1) Mounting slots for PCU lugs

1)1)

1) 1)

Displaysupport plate

3)

3) 3)3)

3)

3) 3) 3)

3)

3)

3)

3) Enclosure screws

4)

3)

4)4)

4)

Cableclamp

Fig. 1-6 OP 010 rear side

2. Remove the softkey labeling strips and the cover plate.

3. Remove the following connectors from the keyboard controller (see Fig.1-7): Backlight (base X14) and I/O USB cable K1.

4. Keep the display plate with the display.In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of the mouse and USBinterface become visible.

Membrane connectorfor connecting thekeyboard of theoperator panel front

Keyboard controller

Direct control keyconnection X11

USB interface

Connection X4for mouse

Connection X14 forbacklighting

Connection X1for I/O USB cable K1

Connection X12(reserved)

Fig. 1-7 Changing the operator panel front




5. After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface.

6. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front key-board from the sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure).

7. Loosen the retaining screws from the keyboard controller.

8. Lift USB interface and keyboard controller off the front plate. The intercon-nections may remain plugged.

9. Install these components in the new operator panel front in reverse order(see note for procedure).

Note

– Releasing and connecting the membrane connector are described in the“Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Handling membraneconnectors”.

– When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Subsection“Technical data”).

The procedure for replacement is described in Section 3.7.

Film labels






Notes


OP 010S Operator Panel Front

The description below applies to the OP 010S operator panel front(order number 6FC5203-0AF04-0AA0)

The operator panel front OP 010S (successor to OP 032S) described in thefollowing is characterized by:

Mounting dimensions 310 x 330 mm


Compact mounting depth (example: OP 010S with PCU 50; calculated fromsurface of mounting panel: 120 mm + 10 mm ventilation clearance)

10.4” TFT slimline screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels

Mechanical keys:

– 8 horizontal soft keys

– 8 vertical softkeys

– Four control keys



Degree of protection: IP54


Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter “Distrib-uted Installation”) and the KB 310C keyboard or


Validity

Features

2

04.042.1 Operator interface



2.1 Operator interface

Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *)

USB frontinterface

Area switchoverEtc. key

Softkeys

Machine area

Recall

Sof

tkey

s*) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed

Fig. 2-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 010S

Fig. 2-1 shows the user interface of the OP 010S:

The 10.4-inch display

The USB front interface

Eight vertical and eight horizontal softkeys

Four control keys with the following functions:



<Shift> F10 F9

<Shift> F9 F10

2 OP 010S Operator Panel Front

04.042.2 Interfaces


2.2 Interfaces

The OP 010S operator panel front provides the following interfaces:


Note



Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (Fig. 2-2):

I/O USB cable K1: All signals which are used, in addition to the display inter-face, for the connection of operator panel fronts.

Display cable K2.

PCU 50main board

I/O USBcable K1

Displaycable K2

PCU 50

OP 010S

Fig. 2-2 OP 010S – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections

See “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secondary Electrical Condi-tions”

Front side

Rear side

Pin assignment





2.3 Installation

When you are using a combination of OP 010S and PCU, it is advisable toinstall the OP 010S in the assembly panel first and then mount the PCU on theOP 010S.

2.3.1 Mounting


PCU typeused

Width(mm)

Height(mm)


PCU 50285 304

120 + 10

PCU 70285 304

160 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010S, holes or screw holes are notneeded.

In addition, this type of fastening affords degree of protection IP 54 (but only inconjunction with a circular seal and plugged protective cap on the USB inter-face).

Proceed as follows:

1. Insert the OP 010S in the panel cutout from the front.

112 ± 0.5

± 156

±1

1511

2±

0.5

285+1

304

+1

13± 1

13±

1

1.5

min

– 6

max

Pressure points

Sealing area

Tension jacks with setscrews

In the sealing area: Rz120

for tension jacks

Fig. 2-3 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010S operator panel front




2. Fix it in the panel cutout from the rear using the six tension jacks (seeFig. 2-3) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 – 0.5 Nm).

2.3.2 Mounting the PCU

Note

The PCU must be mounted as illustrated in the Fig. 13-1 in Chapter “PCU 50”,i.e. any mounting brackets used must be removed.


Displaycable K2

I/O USBcable K1

Top

330

1) Casing screws M32) Casing screws M4 for PCU mounting (on the side)

Casingcover plate

1)2) 2)

2)

310

2)

1)

1)

1)

1)1)

1)

1)

1)

1) 1) 1)

Fig. 2-4 Rear side of operator panel front with arrangement of interfaces and mounting screws

1. Position the PCU at approximate right angles to the OP 010S (see Fig. 2-2).

2. Insert the cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP 010S into the correspond-ing mating pieces behind the opening in the PCU casing (see Fig. 2-2). Make sure that the connectors lock in and the locks are closed.

3. Swing the PCU onto the OP 010S.

4. Using the four M3 and four M4 screws supplied with the OP 010S, attachthe PCU to the side of the OP 010S. Torques M3: 0.8 Nm, M4: 1.8 Nm.

Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so thatthe unit is sufficiently ventilated (refer to Fig. 2-5).






ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

310

10

Clearance for cables and ventilation

PCU 50

10±0

.5

±0.5

35

+3

120

267 ±0.5 ±122

±0.3

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Additional clearance forconnection cable (for 840Di)

297

100

100

160

±0.5

330

±0.3

OP 010S

PC

U 5

0

OP

010

S

Dimensions in mm

Fig. 2-5 Mounting the PCU 50 to the OP 010S operator panel front with clearances


Notice


Screen saverCaution







2.4 Technical data

Table 2-2 Technical data

Safety



Front panel IP54 Rear side IP00

Approvals CE; cULus

Electrical data (without PCU)




VoltageCurrent (typ./max. mA; app.)

5 V +/–5 %420 / 600

12 V +/–10 %900 / 1050

5.2 V +/–2 %350 /1000


Mechanical data


Mounting depth: 35 mmincl. PCU 50: 120 mmincl. PCU 70: 165 mm

Weight approx. 5.5 kg




Nm





5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2







not permissible






–25 ... 55 °C




max. 0.1 % in 1 min

Display

Size 10.4” TFT

Resolution 640 x 480 pixels






2.5 Spare parts


Spare parts for the OP 010S are (see diagram below):


Front panel 6FC5248-0AF04-0AA0Without LCD unit, withoutUSB interface and with-out keyboard controller


6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10


LCD unit


Front panel

Cap for the USB portDisplay holder withkeyboard controller(rear)

Fig. 2-6 Spare parts for the OP 010S operator panel front


Caution






When changing the front plate, the existing USB interface and the displayholder (with display, backlight inverter and keyboard controller) can be reused.

Procedure:

1. Put the OP 010S and the replacement front plate face down on a flat, softsurface.

2. Undo the casing screws (see Fig. 2-4) and remove the casing cover plate.The display holder with the keyboard controller (Fig. 2-7) will be visible un-derneath and, in a cutout of the mounting plate, the rear side of the USBinterface (Fig. 2-8).

Direct control keyinterface X11

ConnectionX4 (reserved)

Connection X14for display andbacklighting

I/O USB cable K1


USB membrane line

Display cable K2

Connections for theoperator panel frontkeyboardX7X10X8

Membrane line fromthe operator panelfront keyboard

Membrane line fromthe operator panelfront keyboard

Fig. 2-7 Keyboard controller

3. Disconnect the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboardfrom the sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure).

4. Disconnect the membrane connection of the USB connection cable (Fig.2-8) (see note below for procedure).

USB interface

USB membraneline (see Fig. 2-7).

Display support

Fig. 2-8 USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side

Front panel





5. Undo the screws of the display holder and lift it off.

6. Pull the USB interface off its seat and insert it into the replacement frontplate.

7. Place the display holder on the replacement front plate.

8. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order (see note for procedure).

Note

– Releasing and connecting the membrane connectors are described in the“Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Handling membraneconnectors”.

– When tightening the screws, observe the torques (refer to the Section“Technical data”).



OP 010C Operator Panel Front

The description below applies to the OP 010C operator panel front(order number 6FC5203-0AF01-0AA0)

The OP 010C operator panel front described in the following is characterizedby:

19” mounting format, 7 HU (height units)


Compact mounting depth (example: OP 010C with PCU 50; calculated fromsurface of mounting panel: 100 mm + 10 mm ventilation clearance)

10.4” TFT slimline screen (color) with VGA resolution 640 x 480 pixels

Mechanical short-stroke keys with alpha, numerical, cursor, control andhotkey key groups

Softkeys:

– 1 horizontal row of 8 keys with softkey functions

– 1 vertical row of 8 keys with softkey functions




Degree of protection IP 54


Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter “Distrib-uted Installation”)

External floppy disk drive can be connected.

Validity

Features

3

04.043.1 View



3.1 View

The diagram below shows the front view of the OP 010C operator panel front.The individual operator keygroups are described in Section 3.2.


Alpha key group

Numerical key group

Cursor keygroup

Controlkeygroup

USB frontinterface

HotkeysArea switchoverEtc. keySoftkeys

Machine areaRecall

Sof

tkey

s


Fig. 3-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 010C

3 OP 010C Operator Panel Front

04.043.2 Description of the keyboard


3.2 Description of the keyboardFig. 3-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of differentkey groups:

The Alpha key group contains the letters A, ..., Z and the blank.

The numerical key group includes the digits 0 – 9, the – character and thedecimal point.



The hotkey group is used for the direct selection of operating areas.




Esc End

F11 Backspace

F12 Tab


Home Ctrl key

Page up Alt key

Page down Delete

Cursor up Insert

Cursor to the left Enter

Cursor to the right F9

Cursor down F10








KeyFunction corresponds toPC key function:

Reserved Reserved

Reserved Reserved

Reserved Reserved


04.043.3 Interfaces


3.3 Interfaces

The OP 010C operator panel front provides the following interfaces:


Note



See Figs. 3-2 and 3-3:

Two ribbon cables to connect the PCU:

– I/O USB cable K1:All signals, which in addition to the display interface, are used to connectthe operator front

– Display cable K2

Interface X11, reserved

PCU 50 main board

I/O USBcable K1

Displaycable K2

PCU 50

OP 010C

Fig. 3-2 OP 010C – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections

See “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secondary Electrical Condi-tions”

Direct control key interface X11

Connection forbacklighting

Keyboard controllerConnection X1for I/O USB cable K1

Interface X12 (reserved)

Fig. 3-3 OP 010C – connections on the rear of the enclosure: Customer interface

Front side

Rear side

Pin assignment





3.4 Installation

When combining an OP 010C and PCU, it is advisable to assemble them priorto installation in an assembly panel.

3.4.1 Assembling an OP 010C and a PCU


Displaycable K2 2)

I/O USBcable K1 2)


TopWidth = 483

Hei

ght =

310

1) Mounting slots for PCU lugsCasing screws


1) 1)

1)1)

Fig. 3-4 Operator panel rear with position of – the interfaces,– the mounting slots

Procedure Please proceed as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Section “Mounting”.



PCU typeused

Width(mm)

Height(mm)


PCU 50483 310

100 + 10

PCU 70483 310

140 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks on the OP 010C, holes or screw holes are notneeded.




450 +1

290

+1

1.5 min to 6 max

112.5 77.75* * 112.5*77.75*

112.

5*56

.25*

5

Sealing area (front)Mounting panel

Setscrews

Tensionjacks


Front side

Fig. 3-5 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 010C operator panel front

3.4.3 Mounting

1. Insert the assembled components OP 010C and PCU from the front into thepanel cutout.

2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the sixtension jacks (see diagram above) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 –0.5 Nm).

Clearance There must be a minimum of 10 mm clearance at the rear of the PCU so thatthe unit is sufficiently ventilated (see diagram below).






10

297

313.4 69.1

46.3

38.7

35.8

17.3

333

20100+

3

o

Mou

ntin

g br

acke

t

PC

U r

otat

ed th

roug

h 90

deg

rees

10

100.1

OP 010C

Clearance requiredfor ventilation

PCU 50 in the end position

Mounting bracket

Mou

ntin

g lu

gsw

ith w

ithou

thi

nged

cat

ches

Dimensions in mm

Fig. 3-6 Attaching the PCU 50 to the OP 010C operator panel front (viewed from above)


Notice


Screen saverCaution







3.5 Technical data


Safety





Electrical data



Logic/USB(with/without load)


5 V +/– 5%280 / 380

12 V +/–10%750 / 1000

5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1000


Mechanical data



Weight approx. 5 kg




Nm





5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2







not permissible






–25 ... 55 °C




max. 0.1 % /min

Display

Size 10.4” TFT




04.043.7 Changing key covers of short-stroke keys



3.6 Spare parts

Spare parts for the OP 010C are (see diagram below):


Key coversfor labeling

6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0

Set of90 ergo-gray20 red20 yellow20 green20 medium gray


6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10



Fig. 3-7 Spare parts for the OP 010C operator panel front

3.7 Changing key covers of short-stroke keys

The key covers for the vertical softkeys (short-stroke keys) can be replaced forthe product SINUMERIK 840D/810D ManualTurn.They are included in the scope of supply.

Procedure:

1. Lever off the key cover of the short-stroke key

2. Press new key cover onto the frame of the short-stroke key




4.1 Overview

The SINUMERIK OP 012 operator panel front with 12.1” TFT color display witha resolution of 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) features a 59-key membrane keypadas well as 2 x (8 + 2) horizontal and 2 x 8 vertical softkeys. The 2 x 8 verticalsoftkeys can be used as direct control keys.

Combined with SINUMERIK PCUs, the SINUMERIK OP 012 can be used tocreate fully featured operator panels with integral mouse.

Mounting is from the rear using special clamps that are included in the scope ofdelivery.

Validity The description below applies to the OP 012 operator panel front (order number 6FC5203-0AF02-0AA0)

19” mounting format, 7 HE (height units)


Compact mounting depth (example of OP 012 with PCU 50; calculated fromsurface of mounting panel: 100 mm + 10 mm ventilation clearance)

12.1” TFT slimline screen (color) with SVGA resolution 800 x 600 pixels

Membrane keyboard with alpha, numerical, cursor and control key groups

Softkeys/direct control keys:

– 2 x 8 horizontal rows of keys with softkey function

– 2 x 8 vertical rows of keys with softkey and direct control key functions

– Direct control keys via direct control key submodule (optional), PP031MC or directly connectable to the I/Os


Integrated mouse





Can be combined with a PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter “Distrib-uted Installation”)

External floppy disk drive can be connected.

Features

4

04.044.2 View



4.2 View


Alpha key group

Numerical key group

Cursor keygroup

Controlkeygroup

USBfrontinterface

MouseArea switchoverEtc. key

Softkeys

Machine areaRecall

Sof

tkey

s an

d di

rect

con

trol

key

s

Sof

tkey

s an

d di

rect

con

trol

key

s


Fig. 4-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 012

Fig. 4-1 shows the front view of the OP 012 operator panel front.The individual operator keygroups are described in Section 4.3.




4.3 Description of the keyboardFig. 4-1 shows how the operator panel front is arranged in a number of differentkey groups:

The ALPHA key group includes the letters A, ..., Z and the space character.




The mouse comprises the actuation field (corresponds to the function of atracker ball) and two mouse keys.




Esc End

F11 Backspace

F12 Tab


Home Ctrl key

Page up Alt key

Page down Delete

Cursor up Insert



Cursor down F10




04.044.4 Interfaces



4.4 Interfaces


Low-current (100 mA) USB interface (version 1.1) to connect an external key-board or mouse (Fig. 4-1).

For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” Chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”

Note



See photo below:




Interface X11, normally hidden under the cover plate (Fig. 4-3):Signals from the 16 “vertical softkey” direct control keys

For pin assignment and key assignment see “Direct control key submodule”.

PCU 50main board

I/O USBcable K1

Display cable K2

OP 012

Direct controlkey interfaceX11

PCU 50

Connection X14 for backlight

Keyboardcontroller


Interface X12(reserved)



Front side

Rear side




4.5 Installation

For a combination of an OP 012 and PCU or a video link receiver (see Chapter“Distributed Installation”) and possibly a direct control key submodule (refer tothe Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule”), we recommend that these areassembled prior to installation in a mounting panel.

4.5.1 Assembling an OP 012 and a PCU

The PCU must now be bolted to the mounting brackets prior to assembly (if thishas not already been done) (see Chapter “PCU 50”, Section “Commissioning /Mounting”)


Displaycable K2 2)

IO/USBcable K1 2)


Top


Width = 483

Hei

ght =

310


1)1)

1) 1)


3)

3) 3)3)

3)

3) 3) 3)

3)

3)

3)

3) Enclosure screws

4)

3)

4)4)

4)

Cableclamp


Procedure1. Place the OP 012 face down on a flat, soft (to avoid scratches) surface.

– See Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule” for instructions on mount-ing the direct control key submodule.

– To install or replace the softkey labeling strips, see Section 4.6.

2. Place the PCU with the lugs of the bolted-on mounting brackets intothemounting slots on the OP 012 as shown by the white arrows in the pic-ture below. To make it easier to insert the lugs, it can be helpful to reducethe 90 angle between the PCU and OP 012 by tilting the PCU as shown bythe black arrow in the picture.





PCU 50

OP 012

Displaycable K2IO/USB

cable K1

Fig. 4-4 Assembling the PCU 50 and OP 012

3. Insert the cable connectors K1 and K2 of the OP 012 into the plug connec-tors behind the opening in the PCU 50 casing (see gray arrows in pictureabove). Make sure that the connectors lock in audibly and that the locks(see arrows in next picture) are closed.

OP 012

PCU 50

Displaycable K2

IO/USBcable K1

Fig. 4-5 Correct connection of IO/USB and display cables to the PCU 50

4. Swing the PCU 50 to the limit position and fix it using the knurled screws(see next photo; torque 1.8 Nm).




10

297

313.4 69.1

46.3

38.7

35.8

17.3

333

20100+

3

o

Mou

ntin

g br

acke

t

PC

U r

otat

ed th

roug

h 90

deg

rees

10

100.1

OP 012



Mounting bracket

Mou

ntin

g lu

gsw

ith w

ithou

thi

nged

cat

ches

Dimensions in mm

Fig. 4-6 Attaching the PCU to the OP 012 operator panel front (viewed from above)





The photo below shows the PCU 50 – OP 012 unit in its final assembled state.

Knurled screw

Knurled screw

Knurledscrews

OP 012

PCU 50

Fig. 4-7 PCU 50 – OP 012 unit in its final assembled state

4.5.2 Preparing for mounting

Table 4-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (see Fig. 4-8)

PCU typeused

Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth + clearance(mm)

PCU 50450 290

100 + 10

PCU 70450 290

145 + 10


This retaining type also permits degree of protection IP65 to be achieved (how-ever, only when a seal is used around the complete circumference and whenthe protective cap is installed on the USB interface).




450 +1

290

+1

1.5 min to 6 max

112.5 77.75* * 112.5*77.75*

112.

5*56

.25*

5

Sealing areaMounting panel

Setscrews

Tensionjacks



4.5.3 Mounting

1. Insert the preassembled OP 012 components (complete with any direct con-trol key submodule; see Subsection 11.2.1) and the PCU into the panel cut-out from the front.



For more detailed information, please refer to Chapters “PCU 50” and “HeatDissipation”.


Notice






Screen saverCaution




4.6 Softkey labeling

The two vertical and two horizontal softkey bars can be assigned user-specificfunctions. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys.


To make the labels, DIN-A4 filmis available (Order No., see Section 4.8).

Procedure:

1. Letter the dull side of the film using a laser printer.

2. Cut the printed labels along the preprinted lines.

3. Undo the four PCU retaining screws and swing out the PCU away from theoperator panel front.

4. Insert the labeling strips into the slits provided from the rear of the operatorpanel front (refer to Fig. 4-3).

5. Swing the PCU back to the operator panel front and secure by tightening thescrews.

If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled, omit steps 3. and 5.

Making the labels




4.7 Technical data


Safety





Electrical data





5 V +/– 5%280 / 380

12 V +/–10%750 / 1000

5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1200


Mechanical data



Weight approx. 5 kg




Nm





5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2







not permissible






–20 ... 60 °C




max. 0.1 % /min

Display

Size 12.1” TFT




04.044.8 Spare parts/accessories



4.8 Spare parts/accessories


Spare parts for the OP 012 are (see diagram below):


Front panel 6FC5248-0AF02-0AA0

Without LCD unit, withoutmouse, without keyboardcontroller, without direct con-trol key submodule

USB mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0

Direct control keysubmodule

6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0

Sealing caps forUSB connection

6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 Set of 10

DIN A4 film 6FC5248-0AF08-0AA0 For slide-in softkey labels

Tension jackset 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0 Set of 6

Keyboard controller

LCD unit

Backlight withbacklight inverter

Front panel Mouse Cap for the USB port

Display support






175

229.8

292

63.5

2

24.859.39

8.212.4

8.5

20.6

15

10

Par

t 1P

art 2

Par

t 3P

art 4

Center of the key

Slide–in labels

Fig. 4-10 Dimensions for DIN A4 blank film


Caution

Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive componentsmay be damaged due to static electricity)!


When changing the front plate, the existing mouse, LCD unit and keyboard con-troller can be reused and are therefore removed and installed again after thefront panel has been changed. The following description therefore applies bothto the operator panel front and for the mouse.

Note


Operator panelfront/mouse





Procedure:

1. Put the OP 012 face down on a flat, soft surface and undo the 12 casingscrews (see Fig. 4-3).

2. Remove the softkey slide-in labels and the cover plate (see Fig.4-3).

3. Remove the following connectors from the keyboard controller (see Fig.4-11): Backlight (base X14) and IO USB cable K1.

4. Keep the display plate with the display.In addition to the keyboard controller, the rear sides of mouse and USB in-terface become visible.

Membrane connectorfor connecting thekeyboard of theoperator panel front

Keyboard controller

Direct control keyconnection X11

Mouse

USB interface

Connection X4for mouse

Connection X14 forbacklighting

Connection X1for IO USB cable K1




6. Disconnect the three membrane connectors of the operator panel front key-board from the sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure).

7. Undo the fastening screws from mouse and keyboard controller.

8. Lift USB interface, mouse and keyboard controller off the front plate. Theinterconnections may remain plugged.

9. Install these components in the new operator panel front in reverse order(see note for procedure).

Note



The front plate is replaced as described in Section 4.6.

Film labels



TP 012 Operator Panel Front

The description below applies to the TP 012 operator panel front(order number 6FC5203-0AF07-0AA0)

The TP 012 operator panel front described below is characterized by:

Mounting format 400 x 310mm, 7 HU (height units)


Mounting depth (measured from the surface of the mounting panel) in con-junction with PCU 50: 125 mm + 10 mm clearance

Color display (touch screen) incl. backlighting in12.1” TFT technology with resolution of 800 x 600 pixels


Front USB interface (Version 1.2)



Can be combined with the components PCU 50/70 under Windows XP.:– in a centralized configuration (as described in this chapter)– in a distributed configuration (see “Distributed Installation”)

The panel is operated by touching the application-specific functions shown onthe touch-sensitive display, e.g. by touching a displayed button.

Note

The touch panel TP 012 can be used in conjunction with customer-specific HMIsoftware.

Validity

Features

Operation

5

04.045.1 View



5.1 View

Status LEDs: POWER TEMP (illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear)

Front USB interface forconnecting an external keyboardor mouse

Fig. 5-1 Front view of TP 012 operator panel

5 TP 012 Operator Panel Front

04.045.2 Interfaces


5.2 Interfaces

5.2.1 Arrangement

The TP 012 operator panel front provides the following interfaces:



Note

When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is oftenonly designed for office use. Components with a higher certification arerecommended for industrial use.

See photo below:


– I/O USB cable K1: All signals, which in addition to the display interface,are used to connect the operator front


I/O USBcable K1 Display

cable K2

TP 012

PCU 50

Fig. 5-2 TP 012 – connections on the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections

Front side

Rear side





5.3 Installation

With a centralized configuration, the operator unit (TP 012) and the processingunit (PCU) are connected to each other using the piggyback method. It is advis-able to connect the units in an assembly panel prior to installation.

5.3.1 Assembling the TP 012 and PCU

Displaycable K2

IO/USBcable K1

Top

Width = 400

Hei

ght =

310


1)

1)

1)

1)

Rating plate

Test label

2)

2)

2)

2)2) Casing screws

Fig. 5-3 TP 012 rear side




PCU typeused


PCU 50368 290

125 + 10

PCU 70368 290

165 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks on the TP 012, holes or screw holes are notneeded.





L1

L2

112 ± 0.5

112

±0.5

±156

1.5mm to mm6

S1± 1

A1±1

A2

± 1

L1 L2 S1 S2 A1

368 290 35 19 16

Tens

ion

jack

s w

ith s

etsc

rew

s

+1

+1

Rz 120

In the sealing area

Sealing area

Pressure pointsfor tension jacks

S2± 1 112 ± 0.5

S1± 1 S1± 1

A2

10 Dimensions in mm

Fig. 5-4 Dimension sheet for installing the TP 012 operator unit

5.3.3 Mounting

1. Insert the assembled components TP 012 and PCU 50 from the front intothe panel cutout.

2. Locate the touch panel in the panel cutout from the rear using the six ten-sion jacks (see Fig. 5-4) by tightening the setscrews (torque 0.4 ... 0.5 Nm).

Clearance The clearance at the PCU rear side must be at least 10 mm to ensure that suffi-cient ventilation is provided (see figure below).


Mounting position Permissible mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical.

Notice






o

Mou

ntin

g br

acke

t

PC

U r

otat

ed th

roug

h 90

deg

rees

TP 012



Mounting bracket

28.6313.6 57.8

33

297

1012

5+3

3650.1

55.9

353

17.4

10

*) Bottom: Mounting bracket with hinged catches

Lugs *)

Fig. 5-5 Mounting the PCU 50 to the TP 012 operator panel front (as seen from above)

Screen saverCaution




5.3.4 Touch screen calibration

Whenever a new TP 012 operator panel front is connected, a screen calibra-tion must be performed.

For procedure see Chapter “PCU 50”, Subsection “Touch screen calibration”.




5.4 Technical data


Safety





Electrical data





5 V +/– 5%280 / 380

12 V +/–10%750 / 1000

5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1000


Mechanical data






0.8 NmM4 screws:

1.8 Nm





5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2







not permissible






–20 ... 60 °C




max. 0.1 % /min

Display

Size 12.1” TFT









Spare parts for the TP 012 are (see Fig. 5-6):

SINUMERIK operator panel front without LCD unit for SINUMERIK TP 012(Front panel + touchscreen) Order No. 6FC5248-0AF16-0AA0

Sealing caps Order No. 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0for USB port (10)

Tension jacksset (6) Order No. 6FC5248-0AF06-0AA0

Note

A sealing cap for the USB connection is factory-fitted on all initial orders.

Keyboardcontroller

Touchscreen *)

Backlightinverter forbacklighting

Front panel *)

Sealing cap for USBconnection *)

Display support

Housing

Display

*) Spare parts

Fig. 5-6 Components of TP 012 touch panel





Caution



If only the front panel is to be replaced, the display, touch controller, USB mod-ule and keypad controller can re-used. They are therefore disassembled andre-assembled after the appropriate component has been replaced.

Note


Procedure:

1. Put the TP 012 face down on a flat, soft surface and undo the 12 casingscrews (see Fig. 5-3).

2. Unplug the following connectors (see Fig. 5-7):

– from the keypad controller:Backlighting (base X14), IO USB cable K1, membrane connector (seenote below)

– the plug-in cable from the touch controller to the touch screen

3. Remove the screws from the display holder.

4. Keep the display plate with the display.


6. Install the components into the new front panel in the inverse sequence.

Note



Front panel





USB module

Base X14backlighting

Keyboard controller

Touch controller

IO USB cable K1

Membraneconnector

Display support




TP 015A Operator Panel Front

The description below applies to the TP 015A operator panel front(order number 6FC5203-0AF08-0AA0)

The main features of the TP 015A operator panel front described below are asfollows:

Color display (touch screen) incl. backlighting in15” TFT technology with XGA resolution 1024 x 768 pixels





– The direct control keys can be connected through the direct control keysubmodule (optional) or directly to the I/O peripherals


Integrated mouse



Degree of protection IP65 (front side)


Can be combined with the components PCU 50/70 under Windows XP.:– in a centralized configuration (as described in this chapter)– in a distributed configuration (see “Distributed Installation”)

Note

The combination with PCU 50 is described in this documentation as anexample. You can proceed in the same way if you wish to operate the TP 015Ain conjunction with a PCU 70.

Validity

Features

6

04.04



The TP 015A is operated by means of

The touch screen can be used to select the application-specific functions,e.g. by touching one of the displayed buttons,

Softkeys (refer to Section 6.1)

Keys (refer to Section 6.2)

Caution

The lifetime of the screen could be significantly reduced if sharp or hard objectscome into contact with it.

The following is included in the scope of supply with the initial order:

Operator panel front

12 tension jacks

Operation

Scope of delivery

6 TP 015A Operator Panel Front



6.1 View


Alpha key group

Numerical keygroup

Cursor keygroup

Control keygroup

USBfrontinterface

MouseArea switchover Etc. key

Softkeys

Machine areaRecall

Sof

tkey

s an

d di

rect

con

trol

key

s

Sof

tkey

s an

d di

rect

con

trol

key

s


Fig. 6-1 Front view, TP 015A operator panel

6.2 Description of the keyboard














Esc End

F11 Backspace

F12 Tab


Home Ctrl key

Page up Alt key

Page down Delete

Cursor up Insert



Cursor down F10




04.046.3 Interfaces


6.3 Interfaces

The TP 015A operator panel front has the following interfaces:



Note

When using standard I/Os, please note that their EMC noise immunity is oftenonly designed for office use. Components with a higher certification arerecommended for industrial use.

See photo below:


– I/O USB cable K1: All signals, which in addition to the display interface,are used to connect the operator front


Interface X11: Signals from the 16 “vertical softkey” direct control keys


I/O USBcable K1

Display cable K2

TP 015A


PCU 50/70

Keyboardcontroller

Connection X1 for IO-USB cable K1 Interface X12 (reserved)

Fig. 6-2 TP 015A – connections at the rear of the enclosure: Connections to the PCU

Front side

Rear side





6.4 Installation

For a combination of TP 015A and PCU and possibly a direct control key sub-module (refer to Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule”), we recommend thatthese are assembled prior to installation in a mounting panel.

6.4.1 Assembling TP 015A and PCU


Displaycable K2 2)

IO/USBcable K1 2)


Top


Width = 483

Hei

ght =

355


1) 1)

1)

1)

Displaymounting plate(rear coverplate)

3)

4)

3)

4) Ground terminal

3)

3)

Fig. 6-3 TP 015A rear side


6.4.2 Mounting

Table 6-1 Dimensions of the mounting hole (refer to the next diagram)

PCU typeused


PCU 50450 335

132 + 10

PCU 70450 335

172 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks, holes or screw holes are not needed.

In addition, this type of fastening affords degree of protection IP 65 (but only inconjunction with a circular seal and plugged protective cap on the USB inter-face).




1.5min – max.6

Dimens. L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 A1 A2 S6450 335 47 456 160 16 10 4

Tens

ion

jack

s w

ith s

etsc

rew

s

Rz 120

In the sealing area

Sealing

in mm

area

Mounting panel

L1+1

L4+1

Pressure point for tension jacks

A1 ± 1

A2

±1

±1

80

±1

160

L1 ± 1

L4 ± 1

M6/diameter7

L2±

1

L5±

0:2

S6

±0:

5± 0:5140 L3 ± 1 L3 ± 1 ± 0:5120

Fig. 6-4 Dimension drawing for mounting the TP 015A operator panel front

1. Insert the assembled components TP 015A (possibly with direct control keysubmodule; refer to Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule”) and PCU fromthe front into the appropriate cut-out.

2. Use 12 clips to retain the operator panel front in the appropriate cut-out (re-fer to Fig. 1-3) and tighten the threaded studs (torque 0.4 – 0.5 Nm).

Clearance The clearance to the rear of the PCU must be at least 10 mm to ensure that it isproperly ventilated (see diagram below).

For more detailed information, refer to the Chapter “PCU 50/70 component” andChapter “Cooling”.


Notice






10.8

74.5

131

48.7

29.5

220

10

17.3

359.

6

297

62.4

87.8 320.4

Required clearance for cooling

Mounting rail

Mou

ntin

g ra

il

Lugs

± 1± 2

± 0.3

PCU 50 in the endposition

PC

U 5

0 sw

ung

out b

y 90

°Additional clearancefor connecting cable

+3

± 0.5

Fig. 6-5 Mounting the PCU 50 to the TP 015A operator panel front (as seen from above)

Screen saverCaution





Whenever a new TP 015A operator panel front is connected, a screen cal-ibration must be performed.

For procedure see Chapter “PCU 50”, Subsection “Touch screen calibration“.





User-specific functions can be assigned to the two vertical softkey bars. Printedlabeling strips can be used to label the softkeys.

When the equipment is supplied, blank labeling strips are already inserted (referto Fig. 6-3).

If new labeling strips are required, you can produces these yourselves. To dothis, you will require a film (dimensions, refer to the next diagram, type HP ColorLaserJet film C2936A). Please observe the following:

– The film is printed from the rear (in the area around the strip)

– Background color: Medium Basic 701

– Film structure at the front

– Printing the slide-in labels from the front, withHP Color LaserJet printer (+ types 5/5M, 4500/N/DN, 8500/N/DN)

Procedure:




If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled, omit steps 1 and 3.

When producingyour own labelingstrips

Inserting the strips





6.6 Technical dataTable 6-2 Technical data for TP 015A

Safety


Deg. of prot. acc. to EN 60529 Front side IP65 Rear side IP00

Approvals CE

Electrical data


Display Backlight in-verter

Logic / USB


5 V +/– 5%500 / 650

12 V +/–10%900 / 1100

5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1500 2)


Mechanical data


Mounting depth: 3) 49 mmincl. PCU 50: 132 mmincl. PCU 70: 172 mm

Weight approx. 10 kg

Tightening torques Screws, max.

Tension jacks:0.5 Nm

M2: 1)

M3: 0.8 Nm

M4: 1.8 Nm





5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 4.9 m/s2


Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN60721-3-3

300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN60721-3-2


Heat dissipation through self-convection; without a fan


not permissible



Applicable standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / -3-2



–20 ... 60 °C



Per. change in the rel. air hu. max. 0.1 % /min

Display

Size / resolution 15 ” TFT / 1024 x 768 pixels


1) hand-tight + locking agent2) incl. 500 mA load on USB front connector and direct control key submodule3) measured from the mounting panel surface; plus 10 mm clearance for cable and ventilation




6.7 Spare parts


Spare parts for the TP 015A include (refer to Fig. 6-6):

Designation Order number Comment

Front panel 6FC5248-0AF17-0AA0Without LCD unit, mouse, USB in-

terface and keyboard controller

USB mouse 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0 –

Direct con-trol key sub-module

6FC5247-0AF11-0AA0 –

Caps 6FC5248-0AF05-0AA0 For USB port (10)

Tension jackset

6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 2 x 9

Mountingbracket

6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0For PCU or Videolink

receiver behind operator panelfront

Mountingbracket flat

6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0For PCU with videolink transmitter

in control cabinet

3 films 6FC5248-0AF24-0AA0 With printable slide-in labels

Cap for the USB port Mouse

Front panel

LCD unit Display support

Keyboardcontroller

Protectivecover

Direct controlkeysubmodule *)

Backlightinverter forbacklighting

Tensionjacks

*) optional

Fig. 6-6 Components of the TP 015A operator panel front





16.67

25.3

8

210

297

8

12

( )50 5

Center of the key

Part1

Part2

Fig. 6-7 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels




305

371402

8

1625

.38

38.5

11.5 12

15+

0.4

–0.8

8+0.

4–0

.8

Slide–in labels

Center ofthe key

Part2

Part3

Part4

Part1

Fig. 6-8 Dimensions for slide-in labels


Caution

Spare parts may only be replaced by trained personnel (sensitive componentsmay be damaged due to static electricity)!

Display, keyboard controller *), touch controller, USB module, mouse and USBinterface can be re-used. They are therefore disassembled and re-assembledafter the appropriate component has been replaced.

*) Re-use is also recommended to avoid loss of the control parameters whichhave already been programmed in.

Front panel





Procedure:

1. Place the TP 015A face downwards on a flat, soft surface and undo the 4screws in the cover plate for the keyboard controller connections (see Fig.6-3).

2. Undo the 13 housing screws and lift the housing off.

3. Disconnect the plug-in connection between the touch controller and thetouch screen.

4. Disconnect the following terminals on the keyboard controller:

The 3 membrane connectors (for procedure see note below),

The USB interface cable:

– Detact the membrane connector by pushing the dark locking leverhorizontally towards the USB cable,

– Detach the 3 cable support clamps,

The mouse cable (in a similar way to the USB interface cable).

5. Undo the 13 screws in the display support and lift it off.

The replacement front panel is supplied without mouse and USB interfacewhich means that these must be removed from the old panel and installed in thenew one:

6. Dismantling and assembling the mouse and USB interface:

Mouse:

– Detach the cable clamps,

– Pull both cables out of the cable converter,

– Undo the 4 internal mouse fixing screws.

USB interface:

– After bending back the two lugs, withdraw the USB interface.

Install the mouse and USB interface into the new front panel.

7. Remove the transportation safety precautions (adhesive strip for securingcables) and the inner screen protective sheeting.

8. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order.

Note



The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks is self-explanatory andis therefore not described.

USB sealing capand tension jacks


04.046.8 Example when calculating the cooling


6.8 Example when calculating the cooling

The power loss (thermal) dissipated by the components in an operator unit is tobe dissipated using open-circuit ventilation. The required volumetric flow V mustbe calculated for a temperature difference of:

T2 – T1 = ∆T 10K.

External temperature = T1 = 45 degreesInternal temperature = T2 = 55 degrees ––> ∆T = 10 K

TP 015A 15 WPCU 50 V2 65 W

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––PVtotal = 80 W

(max. 109 W)

Example for heat dissipation with open-circuit ventilation:PCU 50 with TP 015A

Calculating the thermal power loss(including internal power supply unit):

3.5 * PVtotal [W] V = = 28 [m3/h]

T [K]Operatorpanel front

T1 T2

PCU

Fig. 6-9 Calculating the cooling for PCU 50 with TP 015A

Calculating thethermal power lossPCU 50


04.046.8 Example when calculating the cooling




Notes



The description below applies to the OP 015 operator panel front(order number 6FC5203–0AF03–0AA0)

The OP 015 operator panel front described in the following is characterized by:



Mounting depth (measured from the surface of the mounting panel) in con-junction with PCU 50: 130 mm + 10 mm clearance

15” TFT slimline screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels

Membrane keyboard:

– 8 horizontal softkeys

– 8 vertical softkeys



Degree of protection: IP65


Can be combined with the component PCU 50


Validity

Features

7

04.047.1 Operator interface



7.1 Operator interface


USBfrontinterface

Areaswitchover

Etc. key

Softkeys

Machine area Recall

Sof

tkey

s


Fig. 7-1 Front view of operator panel front OP 015

Fig. 7-1 shows the user interface of the OP 015:

the 15 inch display

the USB front interface

eight vertical and eight horizontal softkeys

four control keys with the following functions:



<Shift> F10 F9

<Shift> F9 F10


04.047.2 Interfaces


7.2 Interfaces

7.2.1 Arrangement



Note



Two ribbon cables for connecting the PCU (Fig. 7-2):

I/O USB cable K1: All signals, which in addition to the display interface, areused to connect the operator front

Display cable K2

PCU 50main board

I/O USBcable K1

Displaycable K2

PCU 50

Cover plate for keyboardcontroller (see Fig. 7-7)

OP 015


7.2.2 Assignments

Table 7-1 Assignment of the USB front interface (low current USB: 100 mA)

Pin Name Type Remarks

1 USB_P5V_fused V + 5V (fused) for ext. USB interface

2 USB_D0M B Data–, USB channel 0

3 USB_D0P B Data+, USB channel 0

4 USB_GND V Ground for external USB interface

Signal type B: Bidirectional V: Voltage

Front side

Rear side

USB front interface





7.3 Installation

When combining OP 015 and PCU 50, it is advisable to assemble them prior toinstallation in an assembly panel.

7.3.1 Assembling OP 015 and PCU 50


Displaycable K2

IO/USBcable K1

Top

483

310

1) Mounting slots for PCU lugs2) Casing screws M33) Casing screws M4

Casingcover plate

1)

1) 1)

1)

2) 2) 2)

2) 2) 2)

3) 3)

3) 3)

Fig. 7-3 Rear side of operator panel front with position of interfaces and mounting slots




PCU typeused


PCU 50450 290

130 + 10

PCU 70450 290

170 + 10






L1

L2

112 ± 0.5

112

±0.5

±156

1.5min – max.6

L3 ± 1

A1±1

A2

± 1

L1 L2 L3 A1 A2

450 290 81 16 10

Tens

ion

jack

s w

ith s

etsc

rew

s

+1

+1

Rz 120

In the sealing area

Sealing area

Pressure pointsfor tension jacks

L3 ± 1 112 ± 0.5


7.3.3 Mounting

1. Insert the assembled components OP 015 and PCU from the front into thepanel cutout.








T±

0.5

10

A± 2± 0.5297

10

L ±0.3

Ü

B±

126

7±

0.5

H±

0.5

K

T2

±0.

5

L H T T2 A B Ü K 483 310 130 42 87 23 22 220

PCU in end position

Clearance for cables and ventilation

+3

All dimensions without the screws protruding

Additional clearance for connection cables


(for 840Di only)

PC

U 9

0 t

ilted

off

o

Fig. 7-5 Attaching the PCU to the OP 015 operator panel front


Notice


Screen saverCaution







7.4 Technical data


Safety





Electrical data



Logic / USB(with / without

load)

VoltageCurrent (typ. / max. mA;approx.)

5 V +/– 5%420 / 600

12 V +/–10%900 / 1050

5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1000


Mechanical data


Mounting depth: 42 mmincl. PCU 50: 130 mm

Weight approx. 7 kg



0.8 NmM4 screws:

1.8 Nm




3M4 according to EN 60721–3–3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2


Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3

300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2




not permissible



Relevant standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2



–20 ... 60 °C




max. 0.1 % /min

Display

Size 15 ” TFT









Spare parts for the OP 015 are (see Fig. 7-6):

Front panel Order No. 6FC5248–0AF03–0AA0(without LCD unit, without USB interface and without keyboard controller)

Sealing caps Order No. 6FC5248–0AF05–0AA0for USB port (10)

Tension jacksset (6) Order No. 6FC5248–0AF06–0AA0

LCD unit


Front panel


Display holder withkeyboard controller(rear)



Caution






When changing the front plate, the existing USB interface and the displayholder (with display, backlight inverter and keyboard controller) can be reused.

Procedure:

1. Put the OP 015 and the replacement front plate face downwards on a flat,soft surface.

2. Undo the casing screws (see Fig. 7-3) and remove the casing cover plate.The display holder with the keyboard controller (Fig. 7-7) will be visible un-derneath and, in a cutout of the mounting plate, the rear side of the USBinterface (Fig. 7-8).



Connection X14for display andbacklighting

IO USB cable K1


USB membrane line

Display cable K2X10 X8 X7

Connections for Operatorpanel front keyboard

Membrane lines from theoperator panel front

keyboard

Fig. 7-7 Keyboard controller

3. Disconnect the membrane connectors of the operator panel front keyboardfrom the sockets X7, X8 and X10 (see note below for procedure).

4. Disconnect the membrane connection of the USB connection cable(Fig. 7-8; see note below for procedure).

USB interface

USB membraneline (see Fig. 7-7)

Display support

Fastening screw M4

Fig. 7-8 USB interface viewed from the operator panel rear side

5. Undo the screws of the display holder and lift it off.

6. Pull the USB interface off its seat and insert it into the replacement frontplate.

Front panel





7. Place the display holder on the replacement front plate.

8. Assemble the operator panel front in reverse order.

Note





OP 015A Operator Panel Front

The description below applies to the OP 015A operator panel front(order number 6FC5203–0AF05–0AA0)

The main features of the OP 015A operator panel front described below are asfollows:



Mounting depth (measured from the surface of the mounting panel) in con-junction with PCU 50: 130 mm ( + 10 mm clearance for ventilation)

15” TFT slimline screen (color) with resolution 1024 x 768 pixels





– Direct control keys via direct control key submodule (optional), PP031MC or directly connectable to the I/Os


Integrated mouse




Mounting: tension jacks at the rear

Can be combined with the component PCU 50

Validity

Features

8




8.1 View


Alpha key group

Numerical keygroup

Cursorkeygroup

Controlkeygroup

USBfrontinterface

MouseArea switchover etc. key

Softkeys

Machine areaRecall

Sof

tkey

s an

d di

rect

con

trol

key

s

Sof

tkey

s an

d di

rect

con

trol

key

s

*) When the TEMP LED is lit, then increased wear must be assumed.

Fig. 8-1 Front view of the OP 015A operator panel front

8.2 Description of the keyboard







The functions of the keys are described in detail in Section “Description of key-board” of Chapter “Operator Panel Front OP 012”.

8 OP 015A Operator Panel

04.048.3 Interfaces


8.3 Interfaces

The OP 015A operator panel front has the following interfaces:

Low-current (100 mA) USB interface (version 1.1) to connect an external key-board or mouse (Fig. 8-1)


Note



See photo below:




Interface X11, normally hidden under the cover plate (Fig. 8-3):Signals from the 16 “vertical softkey” direct control keys


PCU 50main board

I/O USBcable K1

Display cable K2

OP 015A


PCU 50

Connection of backlighting

Keyboardcontroller


interface X12(reserved)


Fig. 8-2 OP 015A – connections at the rear of the enclosure: PCU 50 connections

Front side

Rear side





8.4 Installation

For a combination of OP 015A and PCU and possibly a direct control key sub-module (refer to the Chapter “Direct control key submodule”), it is advisable toassemble them prior to installation in an assembly panel.

8.4.1 Assembling OP 015A and PCU 50


Displaycable K2 2)

IO/USBcable K1 2)


top


Width = 483

Hei

ght =

355


1) 1)

1)

1)


3)

3)3)3)

3)

3) 3) 3)

3)

3)

3)

3) Enclosure screws

3)

4) 4)

4)

Cableclamp

3) 3)

Fig. 8-3 OP 015A rear side




PCU typeused


PCU 50450 321

127 + 10

PCU 70450 321

167 + 10

Thanks to the tension jacks, holes or screw holes are not needed.





L1

L2

112± 0.5

112

± 0.5

±1

56

1.5 min – max.6

L3± 1 L3± 1112±0.5

A1 ± 1

A2

±1

S5± 0.5

S4± 0.5

S3± 0.5

S3± 0.5 S

6±

0.5

Dimensions L1 L2 L3 A1 A2 S3 S4 S5 S6450 321 51 16 17 24 186 135 5

Tens

ion

jack

s w

ith s

etsc

rew

s

Pressure points

+1

Rz 120

In the sealing area

Sealing

in mm

area

+1

for tension jacks

Mounting panel

Fig. 8-4 Dimension sheet for installing the OP 015A operator panel front





8.4.3 Mounting

1. Insert the assembled components OP 015A (possibly with direct control keysubmodule; see Chapter “Direct Control Key Submodule” and PCU into thepanel cut-out from the front.

2. Fix the operator panel front in the panel cutout from the rear using the sixtension jacks (see Fig. 8-4) by tightening the setscrews (torque0.4 – 0.5 Nm).



10

297

313.6 80.3

27.5

61.5

17.4

358.

7

42

130

10

88.8

OP 015A

Cle

aran

ce r

equi

red

for

vent

ilatio

n

PCU 50 in the endposition

Lugs *)

Mounting bracket

57.5

Mou

ntin

g br

acke

t

PC

U 5

0 sw

ung

out b

y 90

°

*) bottom: mounting bracket with hinged catches

Fig. 8-5 Mounting the PCU 50 to the OP 015A operator panel front (as seen from above)

Mounting position Permissible mounting position: deviating by up to 5 from the vertical.

Notice





Screen saverCaution





The two vertical and two horizontal softkey bars can be assigned user-specificfunctions. Printed labeling strips can be used to label the softkeys.


If required, you can have new labels prepared and printed by Rafi or a screen-printing shop. See Fig. 8-7 for dimensions.

Procedure:




If the PCU and operator panel front are already dismantled, omit steps 1. and 3.

Making the labels

Inserting the strips





8.6 Technical data


Safety





Electrical data




load)

VoltageCurrent (typ. / max. mA;approx.)

5 V +/– 5%420 / 600

12 V +/–10%900 / 1050

5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1200


Mechanical data


Mounting depth: 42 mmincl. PCU 50: 130 mm

Weight approx. 9 kg


screws:0.5 Nm

M3 screws: 0.8 Nm

M4 screws: 1.8Nm




3M4 according toEN 60721–3–3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2


Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721–3–3

300 m/s2, 6 ms,18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2




not permissible






–20 ... 60 °C




max. 0.1 % /min

Display

Size 15 ” TFT






8.7 Spare parts


Spare parts for the OP 015A include (refer to Fig. 8-6):

Designation Order number Comment

Front panel 6FC5248–0AF15–0AA0

without LCD unit, without mouse,without keyboard controller,

without direct control key submo-dule

USB mouse 6FC5247–0AF01–0AA0 –

Direct controlkey submo-dule

6FC5247–0AF11–0AA0 –

Caps 6FC5248–0AF05–0AA0 for USB port (10)

Tensionjackset

6FC5248–0AF06–0AA0 6 jacks

Mountingbracket (x 2)

6FC5248–0AF20–2AA0for PCU or Videolink

receiver behind operator panelfront

(x 2) 6FC5248–0AF20–3AA0

for PCU and videolink transmitterbehind operator panel front

Keyboard controller

LCD unit


Front panel

MouseCap for the USBport

Display support


Fig. 8-6 Spare parts for the OP 015A operator panel front





16.67

25.3

8

210

297

8

12

( )50 5

Center of the key

Part2

Part1

Fig. 8-7 Dimensions for vertical slide-in labels

8.7.2 Spare part replacement

Caution


The replacement of USB sealing cap and tension jacks is self-explanatory andis therefore not described.

The replacement of the front panel and the mouse is described in Chapter “Op-erator Panel Front OP 012” in Section “Spare part replacement”.



15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide,incl. Videolink Receiver

The following description applies to the components:

Designation Properties Order number

SINUMERIK 15” TFT operator panelFor integrated installation 6FC5203-0AF50-0AA0

SINUMERIK 15 TFT operator panelfront 416 mm wide, with mech. keysi l Vid li k R i

For distributed installation up to 10 m 6FC5203-0AF50-1AA0yincl. Videolink Receiver For distributed installation up to 20 m 6FC5203-0AF50-2AA0

SINUMERIK 810D/840D machine

Variant Milling, mech. keys, rapid tra-verse and feed override, mouse,standard / US layout

6FC5203-0AF50-3AA0

SINUMERIK 810D/840D machinecontrol panel, 416 mm wide Variant Turning, mech. keys, hand-

wheel and feed override, mouse,standard / US layout

6FC5203-0AF50-4AA0

SINUMERIK operator panel front, vi-deolink transmitter for distributed

1–10 m 6FC5247-0AF20-0AA0deolink transmitter for distributedinstallation 1–20 m 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0

SINUMERIK 810D/840D mountingbracketfor mounting PCU and video link

Flat mounting 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0

for mounting PCU and video linktransmitter with distributed configura-tion

Upright mounting 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0

SINUMERIK 810D/840D mountingbracket

Mounting of PCU behind operatorpanel front

6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0

Video link cable 5 m 6FX2002-1VL01-1AF01)

Video link cablefor connection between 10 m 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA01)for connection betweendisplay unit and video link transmitter,with detachable rack

15 m 6FX2002-1VL01-1BF01)with detachable rack

20 m 6FX2002-1VL01-1CA01)

1) ...–1XX0: XX is the length code: A = 0, B = 1, etc.

Validity

9

04.049.1 Overview



9.1 Overview

The 15” TFT operator panel (416 mm wide) comprises

an operator panel front with preassembled videolink receiver,

a machine control panel (MCP) with CNC keyboard (QWERTY) with integratedmouse.

The PCU belonging to the overall system (see Fig. 9-1) is installed separately from theoperator panel (distributed installation).

Caution

The PCU should not be mounted in the “air flow downwards” position (i.e. the interfacesat the top) to prevent heat accumulation.

Information is transferred between the NC controller and PCU, operator panel front andMCP using MPI, USB and videolink transmission technology (see Fig. 9-1).

Note

Where the Windows NT operating system is used, the USB interface only supportskeyboards and mouse units.

If other USB devices are used, the noise immunity of the entire system may be reduced.The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices.

The operator panel front consists of a 15” display with horizontal and vertical softkeys (inthe form of short-stroke keys) with preinstalled videolink receiver.

In the case of turning and milling technologies, the MCP keys are labeled differently, thedisplays on the operator panel front are different and a handwheel instead of the secondoverride switch is provided for the turning variant.

9 15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm wide, incl. Videolink Receiver

04.049.2 System features


9.2 System features

The operator panel (see Fig. 9-1) consists of

an operator panel front with integrated operator control functions in the form of verticaland horizontal softkeys and a preinstalled videolink receiver, and

a machine control panel with integrated CNC keyboard

Since the PCU is installed physically separated from the operator panel front (distributedinstallation), a data transmission line has been created:

The operator panel front (operator panel front + MCP) communicates with the PCU bymeans of a cable and a videolink transmitter. The PCU transmits the image data us-ing videolink technology and the keyboard data using USB technology.

As a result, the PCU and operator panel can be installed up to 20 m apart (XGA reso-lution).

The NC and MCP functions on the operator panel communicate via MPI.

NC and PCU also communicate by means of MPI.

Only TFT displays (12” and 15”) are supported

Hardware support for USB only for version 1.1 and earlier

There is an EMERGENCY STOP button on the operator panel. This also has to be wiredup (see Fig. 9-8).

The operator panel and PCU must be supplied with 24V.

Note

To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted, the operator panel front should beswitched on at the same time as the PCU using the 24V supply.

Operator panel

Communi-cation

EMERGENCYSTOP

Power supply


04.049.3 Description of functions



9.3 Description of functions

9.3.1 Overview of function blocks

The entire system is shown in the schematic diagram in Fig. 9-1.

1. Operator panel front with videolink receiver (behind the operator panel front, not vis-ible in the diagram)

2. MCP with QWERTY keyboard and machine control panel (MCP)

3. Videolink transmitter

4. PCU

5. NC unit

The subject of this hardware description are the function blocks 1 to 3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

PCU

QW

ER

TY

MC

P

Videolinktransmitter

Operator panel front with videolink receiver

15” TFT

Machine control panel

NC

X103 X104

X101

X102

MP

I

MPI

US

B

Videolinkwith USB

X201

X202

X203/204

X206

X205

X301

X302(USB-B)

X303/304(2 x USB-A)

X401

X404(24 V)

EMERGENCY STOP

Override

Override/handwheel

(24 V)

(2x USB-A)

(USB-A)

1. + 2. = operator panel

Fig. 9-1 Function blocks of SINUMERIK operator panel 15” TFT (width 416 mm)




9.3.2 Operator panel front

Resolution: XGA (1024x768 pixels), 15” TFT

Control elements: Horizontal and vertical softkeys

Interfaces: Inputs:– 1 x Videolink MDR 36– 1 x USB-B– 1 x 24V power supply, 3-pin terminal

Outputs:– 1 x plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock– 2 x USB-A

Dimensions: W x H x D (in mm): 416 x 382 x 65

Bearing edge: Top/bottom: 18 mmRight/left: 16 mm

Fastening: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5

Seal: To be provided by customer

Degree of protection: Max. IP54 at front / IP00 at rear

9.3.3 Machine control panel for turning and milling

1. QWERTY keyboard area

The QWERTY keyboard features:

MF2 keyboard (without function keys)

Operating area keys: MACHINE, PROGRAM, OFFSET, PROGRAM MANAGER,ALARM and CUSTOM

Other keys: ALARM CANCEL, HELP, GROUP CHANNEL, INSERT, SELECT andNEXT WINDOW

Integrated mouse

2. MCP area

The MCP features:

54 keys (technology-specific and manufacturer-specific)

Turning: – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %, 23 latched positions)– 1 x handwheel (100 pulses/revolution), wheel diameter approx. 60 mm

Milling: – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %, 23 latched positions)– 1 x rapid traverse override (0 – 100 %, 23 latched positions)

3. Other operator panel components

1 x EMERGENCY STOP button, 2-channel (small)

1 x illuminated key, machine ON (22 mm system).





4. Interfaces

Inputs: – 1 x plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock– 1 x USB-B 2 – 1 x MPI interface, Sub-D, 9-pin– 1 x 24V power supply: terminal (3-pin)

Outputs: – 2 x USB-A– 2 x 4-pin (reserved for optional interfaces, not fitted in standard production)

5. Dimensions

– W x H x D (mm): 416 x 370 x 107 (turning) / 84 (milling)

6. Fastening: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5

7. Seal: To be provided by customer

8. Degree of protection: Max. IP54 at front, IP00 at rear

9.3.4 Videolink transmitter

1. Videolink transmitter 1 ... 10 m

Function: Transmitter module for video transmission

Interfaces:

– Inputs:1 x plug connector (20-pin) with lock1 x plug connector (26-pin) with lock

– Outputs:1 x videolink MDR 36 for 1, ..., 10 m (max. 20m) (video data plus USB signals)1 x USB-A

2. Videolink transmitter 1 ... 20 m

Function: As above, plus ExtremeUSB for 20m and branch for second operatorpanel front with videolink output for 1 ... 20 m

Interfaces: Outputs– 2 x videolink MDR 36 for 1, ..., 15 m (max. 20 m)– 2 x USB-A




9.3.5 Cable

1. Videolink cable

5 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1AF0

10 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA0

15 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1BF0

20 m: Order No. 6FX2002-1VL01-1CA0

Fig. 9-2 Videolink cable

2. MPI cable: MPI/PROFIBUS cable (cut-to-length) and connector from Siemens

3. USB connection cable between X205 (operator panel front ) and X301 (MCP):10-pin ribbon cable with fitted socket connectors (supplied with operator panel front)


04.049.4 Interfaces



9.4 Interfaces

9.4.1 Hardware interfaces – overview

Table 9-1 Overview of hardware interfaces

Interface

Type Function Designation Type

Operatorpanel front

– Videolink interface (incl. USB)– USB input (reserved)– 2 x USB output– USB output

– 24V power supply

X201

x202X203/204

X205

X206

MDR 36

USB-B2 x USB-A

Plug connector, 2 x 5-pinwith lock

terminal (3-pin)

– USB input X301 Plug connector, 2 x 5-pinith l kMCP

(QWERTY

p

– USB input X302

g pwith lockUSB-B(QWERTY

keyboard)– USB input (reserved – option for X301)

X302 USB-Bkeyboard) (reserved option for X301)

– USB output X303/304 2 x USB-A

– MPI interfaceOptional interface

X401X402

SUB-D, 9-pinPlug connector 1 x 4 pin

MCP

– Optional interface (Input, reserved)

X402 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pin

MCP (Input, reserved)– Optional interface

(Input reserved)X403 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pin

(Input, reserved)– 24V power supply X404 Terminal (3-pin)

Videolinktransmitter1 ... 10 m

– Videolink (incl. USB)– USB interface– LVDS input– I/O interface for operator panel front for PC– LVDS output– I/O interface for local operator panel front

X101X102X103X104

X107X108

MDR 36USB-A

Plug connector, 2 x 10-pinPlug connector, 2 x 13-pin

Plug connector, 2 x 10-pinPlug connector, 2 x 13-pin

Videolinktransmitter1 ... 20 m

As for videolink transmitter 1 ...10 m; plus:– second videolink (incl. USB)– USB interface

X105X106

MDR 36USB-A

Cable

– Video link transmitter <=> Display unit

– Videolink transmitter <=> PCU

Videolink

LVDS

5 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1AF010 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1BA015 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1BF020 m: 6FX2002-1VL01-1CA0

Flat ribbon 20-pinCable – Videolink transmitter <=> PCU– Videolink transmitter <=> PCU– Display unit <=> Operatorpanel front– NC <=> Operator panel front

LVDSI/O

USB

MPI

Flat ribbon, 20-pinFlat ribbon, 26-pinFlat ribbon, 10-pin

Standard Profibus

The abbreviations in the “Signal type” column in the tables below have the fol-lowing meanings:

I Input O OutputB Bidirectional V Power supplyOC Open collector

Signal types


04.049.4 Interfaces


9.4.2 Interface assignment for operator panel front

Connector designation: X201; Mini D Ribbon (MDR), multiple contact strip (36-pin)

Table 9-2 X201 pin assignments

Pin Signal name Signal type Meaning

1 A0M I

2 A0P

II

3 A1M IData OPENLDI

4 A1PII

Data OPENLDI

5 A2M I6 A2P

II

7 CLK1M II Clock OPENLDI

8 CLK1PI Clock OPENLDI

9 ENVCC_12VI

Enabling of LCD power supply(12V level)

10 M_12V

IVI Reference ground

for signals with 12V level

11 ShieldShield for twisted pair

cables; connected to ground

12, ..., 21 ––– Reserved

22 M (GND) Reserved (ground)

23 ––– Reserved

24 M (GND) Reserved (ground)

25 M (GND) V Ground

26 ShieldShield

for twisted pair cables

27 RX_A / USB_MI/B

Received data A(Extreme USB) / USB data–

28 RX_B / USB_P

I/BI/B Received data B

(Extreme USB)/USB data+

29 TX_AO

Transmitted data A (ExtremeUSB)

30 TX_B

OO Transmitted data B (Extreme

USB)

31 BL_ON_12VI

Backlight On (12V signal)

32 M_12VI

VI Ground

33 XRESET_HUB IRESET to hub

(low active, 12V signal)

34 M_12V Ground

35 XPAN–PRESO

Operator panel front is present

36 XPAN–PRES

OI Ground of videolink transmitter,

transmitted to Pin 35

Twisted Pair (shielded)

X201 (Videolink incl. USB)


04.049.4 Interfaces



Connector designation: X202; USB socket connector (4-pin), type B



1 –––Reserved

(capacitive connection to ground)

2 USB_DMB

Data–; USB channel 0

3 USB_DPB

Data+; USB channel 0

4 USB_GND VGround

for external USB interface

Connector designation: X203 / 204; USB socket connector (2x4-pin),type A

Table 9-4 X203 / 204 pin assignments


A1 P5V_3_fused VO+5 V (protected)


A2 USB_D3MB


A3 USB_D3PB


A4 USB_GND VGround


B1 ––– VO+5 V (protected)


B2 USB_D4MB


B3 USB_D4PB


B4 USB_GND VGround


Connector designation: X205; plug connector (2x5-pin), grid 2.54 mmInterface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA)



1 P5V_fused VO+5 V (protected)


2 USB_DMB


3 USB_DPB


4 / 5 M (GND) V Ground

6, ..., 10 NC ––– Not connected

X202 (USB interfaceinput)

X203 / 204 (USBinterface output)

X205 (QWERTYinterface)


04.049.4 Interfaces


Connector designation: X206; terminal block (3-pin)



1 P24 24V potential

2 M24 V Ground 24V

3 Shield Shield connection

Accessible internally only

with “Extreme USB”: both switches set to 1 (factory setting)

without “Extreme USB”: both switches set to 2

9.4.3 Interface assignment for QWERTY keyboard

The QWERTY keyboard has a total of five USB interfaces, four of which can beused by the user (see Fig. 9-1). The integrated mouse is connected to the fifthUSB interface (X305).

Interface X301 connects the keyboard to the videolink receiver. The maxi-mum cable length is 10 m.

The keyboard can be connected to the PCU using interface X302 and acable of max. 5 m in length.

The two interfaces X303 and X304 are accessible by means of a two-tierUSB-A connector.

The two interfaces X301 and X302 (see Fig. 9-1) are connected in parallel andconfigured as “high powered interfaces” with max. 500 mA, 5 V.

X301 is used to form the connection to the videolink receiver; max. permissi-ble ribbon cable length: 1 m.

X302 supports a standard USB cable with length of max. 5 m. This cablecan be used to form a direct connection to, for example, the PCU (e.g. forloading customer-specific keyboard tables).

Caution

The two interfaces X301 and X302 should not be used simultaneouslybecause they are connected in parallel.

X206 (24 V powersupply)

Coding switch S1

X301 / X302


04.049.4 Interfaces



Connector designation: X301; plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock



1 P5 V Supply voltage 5 V

2 USB_PB

Data +

3 USB_MB

Data–

4/5 M (GND) V Ground

6/7/8 NC – Not assigned

9 SDA B Serial data for EEPROM

10 SCL I Clock for EEPROM

Connector designation: X302; USB-B connector (4-pin)



1 P5 V Power supply +5 V

2 USB_DM0B

Data–; channel 0

3 USB_DP0B

Data+; channel 0

4 M (GND) V Ground

X303 / 304 is a double standard USB-A connector (see Fig. 9-1). X303 andX304 are configured as “low powered interfaces” with max. of 100 mA, 5 V.

Connector designation: X303; USB-A connector (4-pin)



A1 1P5 VPower supply +5 V

for external USB device

A2 USB_DM2B

Data–; channel 2

A3 USB_DP2B

Data+; channel 2

A4 M (GND) V Ground




B1 2P5 VPower supply +5 V


B2 USB_DM3B

Data–; channel 0

B3 USB_DP3B

Data+; channel 0

B4 M (GND) V Ground

X303 / X304


04.049.4 Interfaces


9.4.4 Interface assignment for MCP

The MCP is connected to the MPI of the NC by means of interface X401.

Connector designation: X401; 9–pin Sub–D socket



1/2 NC – Not assigned

3 RS_OPI B RS-485 data

4 ORTSAS_OPIO

Output Request to Send, user in-terface

5 M5EXTV

5V external ground

6 P5EXTV

5V external potential

7 NC – Not assigned

8 XRS_OPI B RS-485 data

9 IRTSPG_OPI I In Request to Send PG

Baud rate (max. of 1.5 Mbaud) and station address of the MCP at the MPI busare set at DIP switch S3 of the keyboard controller.

Not available

See X206 (Subsection 9.4.2)

Depending on the panel variant, the operator panel front has one or two axisoverride switches. These switches are connected to the MCP by means of rib-bon cables.

Connector X11 is used to connect the rotary selector switch for feedrate over-ride (32 graduations), irrespective of its installation position.

With the “milling” version, the rotary selector switch for rapid traverse (32graduations) is connected to X12.

With the “turning” version, a handwheel is fitted in place of the rotary selectorswitch. The handwheel is directly connected to the NC controller.

X401 (MPI)

X402 / 403

X404 (powersupply)

X11 / 12 (axisoverride interface)


04.049.4 Interfaces



Connector designation: X11; plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock






Setting of override rotary selectorswitch

6 IN3_4 Significance 16


8 IN3_2 I Significance 4



Connector designation: X12; (optional interface for milling variant) Plug connector, 2 x 5-pin, with lock






Setting of override rotary selectorswitch



8 IN7_2 I Significance 4




04.049.4 Interfaces


9.4.5 Interface assignment for videolink transmitter

Connector designation: X101/105; Mini D Ribbon (MDR), multiple contact strip, 36-pin

Table 9-14 X101/105 pin assignments


1 A0M O

2 A0P

OO

3 A1M OData OPENLDI

4 A1POO

Data OPENLDI

5 A2M O6 A2P

OO

7 CLK1M OO Clock OPENLDI

8 CLK1PO Clock OPENLDI

9 ENVCC_XEnabling of LCD power supply

(12V level)

10 M (GND) Ground

11 ShieldShield for twisted pair cables;

connected to ground

12, ..., 22 –––

23 ––– Reserved

24 –––

25 M (GND) V Ground

26 ShieldShield for twisted pair

cables

27 TX_A / USB_MO/B

Transmitted data A (ExtremeUSB) / USB data–

28 TX_B / USB_P

O/BO/B Transmitted data B (Extreme

USB) / USB data+

29 RX_A I Received data A (Extreme USB)

30 RI_BII Received data B (Extreme USB)

31 BL_ON_xO

Backlight On (12V signal)

32 M (GND)OO Ground

33 XRESET_HUB ORESET to downstream hub (low

active, 12V signal)

34 M (GND) Ground

35 XPAN–PRES_x Operator panel front is present

36 M (GND) V Ground

Twisted pair (shielded)

X101 / X105(Videolink incl.USB)


04.049.4 Interfaces



Interface is configured as high-current USB (500 mA)

Connector designation: X102 / X106; USB socket connector (4-pin),type A

Table 9-15 X102 / X106 pin assignments


1 USB_P5V_fused VO+ 5 V (fused) for external USB in-

terface

2 USB_D0MO

Data–, USB channel 0

3 USB_D0PO

Data+, USB channel 0

4 USB_GND V Ground for external USB interface

Note

X106 is not available at present.

Connector designation: X103; plug connector (2x10-pin), grid 2.54 mm



1/2 P5V VI + 5 V

3 RXIN0–I

LVDS input signal Bit 0 (–)

4 RXIN0+I

LVDS input signal Bit 0 (+)

5/6 P3V3 VI +3.3 V

7 RXIN1–I


8 RXIN1+I


9/10 GND V Ground

11 RXIN2–I


12 RXIN2+I


13/14 GND V Ground

15 RXCLKIN–I

LVDS cycle clock signal (–)

16 RXCLKIN+I

LVDS cycle clock signal (+)

17/18 GND V Ground

19/20 ––– ––– Reserved

X102 / X106 (USBdownstream)

X103 (LVDSinput from PCU)


04.049.4 Interfaces


Connector designation: X104; plug connector (2-row), grid 2.54 mm



1 GND V Ground

2 P12V VIPower supply for inverter (max.

1.1A)

3 BL_ON I Backlight On (5 V ... 12 V = On)

4 P5V_fused VI + 5 V VCC (fused)

5 GND V Ground

6 P3V3_fused VI + 3.3 V VCC (fused)

7, ..., 10 ––– ––– Reserved


12 USB_D1MB

USB data– Channel 1

13 USB_D1PB

USB data+ Channel 1

14 GND V Ground

15 LCDSEL0 Display type–Select signal 0

16 LCDSEL1 Display type–Select signal 1

17 LCDSEL2O

Display type–Select signal 2

18 LCDSEL3O

Display type–Select signal 3

19 RESET_NReset signal (low active, withpull-up resistor set to high)

20 ––– –––(Connection for

system loudspeaker)

21 ––– ––– (HD LED) *)

22 ––– ––– (MPI/DP LED) *)

23 ––– ––– (Ethernet LED) *)

24 TEMP_ERR O (Temperature error LED) *)

25 ––– ––– (Watchdog error LED) *)

26 ––– ––– (Watchdog OK LED) *)

*) Anode with 1 kΩ in series on mainboard

X104 (IO interfacefor operator panelsfrom PC)


04.049.4 Interfaces



Connector designation: X107; plug connector (2 x 10-pin), grid 2.54 mm



1/2 P5V VO + 5 V

3 TXOUT0–O

LVDS output signal Bit 0 (–)

4 TXOUT0+O

LVDS output signal Bit 0 (+)

5/6 P3V3 VO +3.3 V

7 TXOUT1–O


8 TXOUT1+O


9/10 GND V Ground

11 TXOUT2–O


12 TXOUT2+O


13/14 GND V Ground

15 TXCLKOUT–O


16 TXCLKOUT+O


17/18 GND V Ground

19/20 ––– ––– Reserved

Connector designation: X108; plug connector (2 x 13-pin), grid 2.54 mm



1 GND V Ground

2 P12V VIPower supply for inverter (max.

1.1 A)

3 BL_ON I Backlight On (5 V ... 12 V = On)


5 GND V Ground

6 P3V3_fused VI + 3.3 V VCC (fused)



12 USB_D1MB


13 USB_D1PB

USB data+ Channel 1

14 GND V Ground


24 TEMP_ERR O(Temperature error LED; anodewith 1 kΩ in series on mother

board)

25/26 NC ––– Not connected

X107 (LVDSoutput to operatorpanel front)

X108 (IO interfaceto local operatorpanel front)


04.049.4 Interfaces


Factory setting for selection of display type: Setting 9 corresponds to 15” TFT display.

Note

All the displays used in a system must be of the same type (e.g. 3 times 15”TFT XGA resolution).

If the setting is incorrect, the display may be irreparably damaged in a shorttime.

10 m transmitter variant (1 x Videolink): 1 and 3 = any or not S2 fitted

2, 4 – 8 = OFF

20 m transmitter variant (2 x Videolink): 1 and 3 = ON2, 4 – 8 = OFF

9.4.6 Internal status displays (LEDs)

The following LEDs indicate the operating status of the transmitter:

Table 9-20 Operating status indicators on the transmitter

Designation Color Source Meaning

+3V3 Red On ExtremeUSB module at + 3.3 V supply OK

+5V RedOn ExtremeUSB module at

X21/22/23 + 5 V supply OK

H1 Green ExtremeUSB module at Host OK

H2 GreenExtremeUSB module at

X21/22/23 Link OK

+3V3 Red On ExtremeUSB module at + 3.3 V supply OK

+5V RedOn ExtremeUSB module at

X11/12/13 + 5 V supply OK

H3 Green ExtremeUSB module at Host OK

H4 GreenExtremeUSB module at

X11/12/13 Link OK

When the ExtremeUSB line is operating properly, both green LEDs of the transmittermodule (LEX) and both green LEDs of the receiver module (REX) light up on the video-link transmitter.

Rotary selectorswitch S1

DIL switch S2

Transmitter


04.049.4 Interfaces



The following LEDs indicate the operating status of the receiver:

Table 9-21 Operating status indicators on the receiver

Designation Color Source Meaning

+3V3 RedOn the ExtremeUSB module

+ 3.3 V supply OK

+5V RedOn the ExtremeUSB module

+ 5 V supply OK

H1 GreenExtremeUSB module

USB port OK

H2 GreenExtremeUSB module

Link OK

H3 Green OpenLDI receiver Video interface (OpenLDI) active

H4 Green +12V, +3.3V, +5V of powersection

Power o.k.

When the ExtremeUSB line is operating properly, both green LEDs of the transmittermodule (LEX) and both green LEDs of the receiver module (REX) light up on the video-link receiver.

9.4.7 Software interfaces

Table 9-22 Layout of the machine control keys (applies to “turning” and “milling”)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

43 44 45 46 47 48 4940 42

50 51 52 53 54

Low-active keys

Receiver

Key layouton the MCP


04.049.4 Interfaces


Table 9-23 Assignment of input words/bytes to the machine control keys(Key 00, ..., 54 corresponds to the key numbers in Table 9-22)

Input Bit 7(MSB)

Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0(LSB)

Word 0Low

Key 40*)

Key 36 Key 35 Key 34 Key 30 Key 00 Key 10 Key 20

Word 0High

Key 42 Key 09Key 08

*)Key 07 Key 04 Key 02 Key 01 Key 11

Word 1Low

Key 46Key 45

*)Key 03 Key 05 Key 43 Key 33 Key 23 Key 13

Word 1High

Key 31 Key 06 Key 14Over-

ride1 EOver-

ride1 DOver-

ride1 COver-

ride1 BOver-

ride1 A

Word 2Low

Key 49 Key 47 Key 28 Key 15 Key 16 Key 17 Key 19 Key 21

Word 2High


Word 3Low


Word 3High

Key 52 Key 53 Key 54Over-

ride2 EOver-

ride2 DOver-

ride2 COver-

ride2 BOver-

ride2 A

*) Low-active keys

Remarks:

The “Override2” function only exists in the “milling” version. This function does notexist in the “turning” version; the bits concerned are each set to 1.

Significance with override: A = 1, B = 2, C = 4, D = 8, E = 16.

Input imageon the MCP


04.049.5 Mechanical design



9.5 Mechanical design


Dimensions in mm

Videolink receiver

Fig. 9-3 Front, side and rear view of operator panel front




Videolinkreceiver

Supporting plate

Connection forvideo link cable

Keyboard interface


Power supply

2x USB-A

Fig. 9-4 Rear perspective of the operator panel front with premounted videolink receiver

9.5.2 MCP

The following diagram shows the front and side view of the “milling” MCP. Fig. 9-7 showsthe rear view with the connections, programming switch S3 and the status LEDs.

Dimensions in mmThreaded bolt M5(for detailed drawing see Fig. 9-6)

Fig. 9-5 “Milling” MCP

Milling MCP





Welded threaded bolts (see Fig. 9-5) instead of drilled holes with press-in sleeves areused to secure the operator panel front and the MCP.

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

523

10

Spacer ringThreaded bolt M5

M5

Front panel

Fig. 9-6 Bolt for securing operator panel front and MCP

X302

X303/4

X40

1

X404

X402 X403

X301

87654321

H1H2H3H4

S3

Grounding connectionM5 thread

Fig. 9-7 Rear view of MCP (“milling” and “turning”) showing position of the connections,programming switch S3 and the status LEDs H1, ..., H4

Table 9-24 Meaning of status LEDs

No. Color Meaning

H1 Red Hardware faults

H2 Red Temperature error

H3 Green Power OK

H4 Yellow Operator panel front interface active

Threadedbolt




Table 9-25 Assignment of DIP Fix switch S3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning /value

Meaning /value

Baud rate

onoff

1.5 Mbaud187.5 kbaud

Cyclictransmit time frame

Receptionmonitoring

onoffoff

offonoff

200 ms100 ms50 ms

2400 ms1200 ms600 ms

Bus address

offoff 0

off

offon 1

off

onoff 2

off

onon 3

off

offoff 4

on

offon 5

on

onoff 6

onon 7

offoff 8

off

offon 9

off

onoff 10

on

onon 11

on

offoff 12

on

offon 13

on

onoff 14

onon 15

onoff

Interface to MPI customer operator panelStandard hardware

Fig. 9-8 shows the wiring of the emergency stop button.

1 12 2

Fig. 9-8 Block diagram of emergency stop button

EMERGENCYSTOP





All of the information given above for the “milling” MCP also applies to the “turning” MCP.

Exceptions (see diagram below): – A handwheel is integrated in place of the second override switch.– The keys are different.

Dimensions in mmThreaded bolt M5(for detailed drawing see Fig. 9-6)Exchangeable key caps

Exchangeable keys

Fig. 9-9 “Turning” MCP

Turning MCP





The following diagram shows the PCU with the mounted videolink transmitter(see Subsection 9.6.3 for information on mounting).

Dimensions in mm

PCU 50


PCU 50

114

Ret

aini

ng s

crew

s fo

r vi

deol

ink

tran

smitt

er

Mounting bracket

PC

U 5

0

Fig. 9-10 PCU 50 with videolink transmitter

PCU





9.6 Installation

Operator panel front with premounted videolink receiver

Machine control panel with QWERTY keyboard and MCP

Videolink transmitter


The panel cutout for the operator panel front is shown in the following diagram:

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

Dimensions in mm

386+1

329+

1

6

4.5

341

395

6.

5

Fig. 9-11 Panel cutout for operator panel front

Individualcomponents




The operator panel front is connected to the other components by means of cables(see Fig. 9-1)

Machine control panel (MCP):For noise immunity reasons, the USB ribbon cable connection from the operatorpanel front (interface X205) to the MCP (interface X301) must always be installedand secured close to the top side of the metal plate.

No other cables which could cause noise interference should be installed in theimmediate vicinity.

Videolink receiver:The videolink cable connects interface X201 of the videolink receiver (mounted onthe rear of the operator panel front) to interface X101 of the videolink transmitter(mounted on the rear of the PCU).

The cable is secured at the U-shaped panel cutouts on the rear of the operatorpanel front using cable ties (see picture below).Securing in this way also relieves the strain on connectors which do not havestrong connector catches (e.g. USB).

Videolink cable Cable tie Panel cutouts for cable attachment

Videolink receiver

Operator Panel Front(rear)

Fig. 9-12 Cable attachment on rear of operator panel front

Notes

In cases where a high degree of noise interference is likely or the distancebetween the operator panel front and the MCP is relatively large, it isadvisable to purchase USB cables with shielding. Interface X203 behind thefront and interface X302 behind the machine control panel are thenconnected to each other. The ribbon cable does not need to be fitted in thiscase.

Connector X302 on the machine control panel (QWERTY keyboard) can alsobe connected directly to the PCU or a PC using a standard USB cable.

Cableconnections





Screen saverCaution




9.6.2 Machine control panel

The panel cutout for the machine control panel is shown in the following diagram:

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

Dimensions in mm

384 +1

334

+1

7.5

5.5

349

395

6.

5

Fig. 9-13 Panel cutout for machine control panel




Proceed as follows:

1. Position the operator panel front so that its four threaded bolts (Fig. 9-9) are in-serted in the mounting holes of the prepared panel cutout (Fig. 9-13). The spacer rings (Fig. 9-9) ensure that the rubber seal is not squashed wheninstalled.

2. Secure the operator panel front from the rear side using the M5 nuts and suitablecirclips.

3. Attach the ground connection (see Fig. 9-7).

4. Connect the interfaces, except X404 (see Fig. 9-7).

5. Connect X404 to the 24 V power supply (see Fig. 9-7).


The videolink transmitter is fitted between the mounting brackets under the PCU(see Fig. 9-10).

1. Plug the supplied cables into the connectors of the videolink transmitter, asshown in the photo below.

Hingebolt

Threaded holesfor fasteningscrews

Fig. 9-14 Videolink transmitter with connecting cables

Caution

To prevent damage, plug the cable connectors only into the sockets shown inthe photo.

2. Mount the first mounting bracket on the PCU (see picture below).





Mounting bracket

Fig. 9-15 PCU 50 with mounting brackets

3. Hook the videolink transmitter into this mounting bracket (see Fig. 9-17).

4. Mount the second mounting bracket after attaching it to the opposite hingebolt (see Fig. 9-14) of the videolink transmitter.

5. Plug the connecting cable into the connectors on the PCU (see picture be-low).

PCU 50


Fig. 9-16 Videolink transmitter hooked into place with the hinge bolts

6. Swivel the videolink transmitter into place on the PCU (see picture below).




Hingebolts

PCU 50PCU 50

Fig. 9-17 Hinge of the videolink transmitter before being locked in position

7. Push the videolink transmitter forwards in the locking mechanism (to the leftin Fig. 9-17, see arrow) until it locks down into place (see picture below).

Mountingscrew

Hingebolts

PCU 50


PCU 50

Fig. 9-18 Videolink transmitter, locked in position and screwed tight

8. Secure the videolink transmitter to the mounting brackets with the screwssupplied (see Fig. 9-18).

The videolink transmitter is then securely attached to the PCU mounting brack-ets (see figure below) and can be mounted with the PCU in accordance withrequirements.





PCU 50


Fig. 9-19 Videolink transmitter fully mounted to the PCU 50

Caution

If it is necessary to dismantle the videolink transmitter, please release thefastening screws and slide the video transmitter horizontally before swiveling itaway from the PCU, in accordance with step 7. and Fig. 9-17. Otherwise, damage is likely.




9.7 Technical data

Operator panel frontTable 9-26 Technical data for operator panel front

Dimensions (WxHxD) approx. 416 x 382 x 65mm


Display 15” TFT

Keys Vertical and horizontal softkeys (short-stroke keys)

Voltage supply Rated voltage 24 V, voltage range 19 – 31 V

Power consumption approx. 19 W

Interfaces Videolink, USB, 24 V terminal connection

Degree of protection Front: IP54; rear: IP00

Ambient temperatureduring operation

External: 0 °C to 45 °C(on display)

Internal: 0 °C to 55 °C

Ventilation Free convection, without fan

Housing Front panel: Stainless steel, brushed diagonally (grain 240)Rear panel: Galvanized steel plate

Machine control panelTable 9-27 Technical data for MCP

Dimensions (WxHxD) Turning: approx. 416 x 370 x107 mm

Milling: approx. 416 x 370 x 84 mm

Mounting depth max. 65 mm


Keys Mechanical short-stroke keys

Voltage supply Rated voltage 24 V, voltage range 19 – 31 V

Interfaces USB, MPI, 24 V terminal connection

Degree of protection Front: IP54; rear: IP00

Ambient temperatureduring operation

External Internalduring operation

0 °C to 45 °C (due to display) 0 °C to 55 °C


Housing As for operator panel front

Videolink transmitterTable 9-28 Technical data for videolink transmitter

Dimensions (WxHxD) approx 265 x 277 x 35 mmDimensions (WxHxD) approx. 265 x 277 x 35 mm

Weight approx. 2.2 kg with two brackets, without PCU

Voltage supply Videolink transmitter is supplied with power from the PCU

Interfaces Videolink, USB, LVDS, keyboard and special interface

Degree of protection IP00 / mounted on PCU: IP20

Ambient temperature 0 °C to 55 °C during operation


Housing Galvanized steel plate





9.8 Spare parts

The following spare part kits are available for the operator panel front 15” TFT(width 416 mm):

Table 9-29 Spare part kits for operator panel front 15” TFT

Name Description Order No. (MLFB)

HandwheelHandwheel for machine control panel,width 416mm, T-version 6FC5247-0AF50-0AA0

Rotary switchRotary selector switch for feedrate /rapid traverse override, 1x23G,grad=32, knob and cover

6FC5247-0AF50-1AA0

Mouse USB mouse for front 6FC5247-0AF01-0AA0

EMERGENCYButton 3SB2000-1AC01

EMERGENCYSTOP 1)

Holder 3SB2908-0AASTOP 1)

Switching element 3SB2404-0C

Ill i t d kComplete 3SB3001-0AA71

Illuminated key1)

Switching element 3SB3400-0A1)Switching element with lamp 3SB3400-1D

1) Submit orders to SIEMENS Amberg

Remove the handwheel in the following way (see picture below):

1. Slacken the two hexagon-socket screws in the rotary knob and pull therotary knob off the spindle.

2. Undo the three M3 fastening screws using a T10 Torx screwdriver.

3. Pull the handwheel backwards out of the front panel and disconnect thewiring.

Handwheel spindle Fastening screws M3

O-ringGrub screw(hexagon socket)

Rotary knob (detached) HandwheelSupply terminals

Fig. 9-20 Removal of handwheel

Installation is performed in the reverse order (installation kit is shown on theright-hand side of Fig. 9-20). Make sure that the O-ring is fitted correctly.

Exchangehandwheel




Remove the rotary switch in the following way (see picture below):

1. Prise the cap (cover) off the rotary knob (snap-on fitting!).

2. Loosen the nut of the collet using a wrench (width 10).

3. Pull the complete rotary knob off the shaft of the rotary selector switch.

4. Remove the nut on the shaft of the rotary selector switch from the front sideusing a wrench (width 14).

5. Unplug the connector at the end of the rotary selector switch cable from thereceptacle.

6. Remove the rotary selector switch.

Fastening nut

Rotary knob

Cap

Scale

Rotary selector switch spindleCollet nut

Fig. 9-21 Removal of rotary selector switch

Install the rotary selector switch in the following way:

The installation kit for a rotary selector switch is shown on the left in the follow-ing picture.

Fastening nut

Terminal board

Rotary knob

Cap

Connecting cable

O-ring

Arrow ring

Fig. 9-22 Installation of rotary selector switch

1. Push the O-ring onto the shaft of the new rotary selector switch (for sealingpurposes).

2. Insert the rotary selector switch into the front cutout so that pressure is ap-plied to the O-ring.

3. Fasten the nut on the shaft of the rotary selector switch from the front sideusing a wrench (width 14).

Exchange rotaryswitch





4. Attach the arrow ring to the rotary knob.

5. Attach the complete rotary knob to the shaft.

6. Tighten the collet nut of the rotary knob using a wrench (width 10). Whendoing so, make sure that the arrow point is aligned with “0”.

7. Place the cap (cover) on the rotary knob and snap on.

8. Connect the cable in the way shown on the right-hand side of Fig. 9-22.Observe the recommended cable folds.

The second rotary selector switch is installed in the same way, except that therecommended cable folds shown in the picture below should be used.

Fig. 9-23 Both rotary selector switches installed (top switch [right] not yet connected)

The following picture shows the mouse prior to removal.

Mouse boardConnecting cable Cable connector

Fastening screwClamping frame

Fig. 9-24 Mouse prior to removal

Replacement ofmouse




Remove in the following way:

1. Unplug the cable connector from the mouse board.

2. Undo the four M3x6 fastening screws using a T10 Torx screwdriver.

3. Release the clamp frame.

The following picture shows how the unit should then look.

Fig. 9-25 Mouse fastening released

4. Lever the mouse out of the front panel.

The picture below shows the removed mouse.

Fig. 9-26 Removed mouse

Installation is performed in the reverse order.Make sure that the mouse symbol is the correct way up.


04.049.9 Heat dissipation



9.9 Heat dissipation

The following correlations apply to heat dissipation at the operator panel front(the surfaces of the front and bottom side are not considered when calculatingthe convection surface):

The heat produced by the operator panel front is generated almost exclusivelyby the display unit (approx. 19W). It is therefore sufficient to apply 20W as thebasis for calculation.

T1 T2

The necessary free convection surface area of the space to be enclosed (steel oraluminum sheet, 1.5 mm thick) is calculated, referred to a temperaturedifference T2 – T1 = T 10 K, approximately from:

Pvtot. [W]A [m2] =

5 T [K]

Example: T1 = 45 °C, T2 = 55 °CPvtot = 20 W

A = 0.4 m2

Ope

rato

r pa

nel f

ront

MCP

Fig. 9-27 Heat dissipation by means of natural convection



15” TFT Operator Panel, 416 mm Wide,without Videolink Receiver


Designation Remarks Order number

SINUMERIK operator panel front Width 416 mm

With mech. keys, without integratedVideolink receiver

6FC5203–0AF50–0AA0

SINUMERIK machine control panelMCP 416C–M

Variant Milling, mech. keys,rapid traverse and feed override,mouse

6FC5203–0AF50–3AA1

SINUMERIK machine control panelMCP 416C–T

Variant Turning, mech. keys, hand-wheel and feed override, mouse

6FC5203–0AF50–4AA1

Validity

10

04.0410.1 Overview



10.1 Overview

The operator panel consists of

a 15” TFT operator panel front

a machine control panel (MCP 416C–M or T) with integrated CNC keyboardand mouse

The following diagram shows how these components are bedded into a com-plete, distributed system. For more information, see Chapter “Distributed Instal-lation”.

PCU


15” TFT operator panel front

EMERGENCYSTOP

Override

Override/handwheel C

NC

key

boar

dar

ea

1)

1) The videolink receiver must be ordered separately

Con

trol

ele

men

tsar

ea

Videolinkreceiver


*) IO front interface 26-pin

**) LVDS 20-pin

1) Direct installation

Fig. 10-1 Config. with SINUMERIK 15” TFT operator panel front, 416 mm wide, without integrated videolink receiver

CautionThe PCU should not be mounted in the “air flow downwards” position (i.e. theinterfaces at the top) to prevent heat accumulation.

Note

The videolink receiver must be ordered separately. Order No.: 6FC5247–0AF22–0AA0

10 15” TFT Operator Panel Front, 416 mm Wide, without Videolink Receiver

04.0410.2 System features


10.2 System features

The operator panel (Fig. 10-1) consists of

an operator panel front with 15” display and integrated operator control functions inthe form of vertical and horizontal softkeys and

a machine control panel with integrated CNC keyboard.The key labels and displays on the panel front are different for variants “T” (Turning)and “M” (Milling). In addition, the “T” variant has a handwheel instead of the secondoverride switch.

A data transmission line has been created to allow the PCU to be installed at a distance(distributed installation) from the operator panel:

The operator panel front (operator panel front + MCP) communicates with the PCUvia transmission path videolink receiver – videolink cable – videolink transmitterngvideo, where the image data are transmitted using videolink technology and the key-board data using USB technology.

As a result, the PCU and operator panel can be installed up to 20 m apart (XGA reso-lution).

The NC and MCP functions on the operator panel communicate via MPI.

NC and PCU also communicate by means of MPI.

Only TFT displays are supported.

Hardware support for USB only for version 1.1 and earlier

There is an EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine control panel. This also has tobe wired up (see Fig. 10-8).

The machine control panel and PCU must be supplied with 24 V DC

Note

To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted, the operator panel front should beswitched on at the same time as the PCU using the 24 V supply.

Operatorpanel

Communi-cation

EMERGENCYSTOP

Powersupply


04.0410.3 Description



10.3 Description


Control elements: Horizontal and vertical softkeys

Interfaces: – I/O interface cable K1 (connector 2 x 13-pin)– Display cable K2 (connector 2 x 10-pin)

Bearing edge: Top/bottom: 18 mmRight/left: 16 mm

Fastening: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5

Seal: To be provided by customer

10.3.2 Machine control panel for turning and milling

1. CNC keyboard

MF2 keyboard (without function keys)

Operating area keys: MACHINE, PROGRAM, OFFSET, PROGRAM MANAGER,ALARM and CUSTOM

Other keys: ALARM CANCEL, HELP, GROUP CHANNEL, INSERT, SELECT andNEXT WINDOW

Integrated mouse

2. Machine control panel operating elements

54 keys (technology-specific and manufacturer-specific)

Turning: – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %, 29 latched positions)– 1 x handwheel (100 pulses/revolution), wheel diameter approx. 60 mm

Milling: – 1 x feed override (0 – 120 %, 29 latched positions)– 1 x rapid traverse override (0 – 100 %, 23 latched

positions)

1x EMERGENCY STOP button, 2 x NC contacts (16 mm system)

1x illuminated key, machine ON (22 mm system).

3. Interfaces

Inputs: – 1 x plug connector (2x5-pin) with lock– 1 x USB-B 2 – 1 x MPI interface, Sub-D, 9-pin– 1 x 24 V power supply: terminal (3-pin)

Outputs: – 2 x USB-A– 2 x 4-pin (reserved for optional interfaces, not fitted in standard production)

4. Fastening: Four welded-on threaded bolts M5

5. Seal: To be provided by customer




10.3.3 Cable

1. MPI cable: MPI/PROFIBUS cable (cut-to-length) and connector from Siemens

2. USB connection cable between X205 (video link receiver) and X301 (MCP):10-pin cable with fitted socket connectors (supplied with operator panel front)

3. Videolink cablesee “Distributed Installation”


04.0410.4 Interfaces



10.4 Interfaces

10.4.1 Hardware interfaces – overview

Table 10-1 Overview of hardware interfaces

Interface

Type Function Designation Type

Operatorpanel front

– IO interface cable– Display interface cable

K1K2

Connector 2 x 13-pinConnector 2 x 10-pin

– USB inputUSB i t

X301X302

Plug connector, 2 x 5-pinUSB B

p– USB input

(reserved – option for X301)X302

g pUSB-B

(reserved – option for X301)– USB output X303 USB-A

Machine

USB output– USB output

X303X304

USB AUSB-A

controlpanel

– MPI interfaceOptional interface

X401X402

SUB-D, 9-pinPlug connector 1 x 4 pinpanel – Optional interface

(Input, reserved)X402 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pin

(Input, reserved)– Optional interface

(Input reserved)X403 Plug connector, 1 x 4-pin

(Input, reserved)– 24 V power supply X404 Terminal (3-pin)


I Input O OutputB Bidirectional V Power supply

10.4.2 Interface assignment for operator panel front

Connecting leads K1 and K2 between operator panel front and videolink re-ceiver (see Fig. 10-1).

For pin assignments of IO/USB and LVDS interfaces, see Chapter “ConnectionConditions”.

10.4.3 Interface assignments for machine control panel

The two interfaces X301 and X302 (see Fig. 10-1) are connected in parallel andconfigured as “high powered interfaces” with max. 500 mA, 5 V.

X301 is used to form the connection between the keyboard and videolinkreceiver (X205); max. permissible ribbon cable length: 1 m.

X302 supports a standard USB cable with length of max. 5m. This cable canbe used to form a direct connection between the keyboard and the PCU(e.g. for loading customer-specific keyboard tables).

Signal types

IO/USB and LVDSinterface

X301 / X302




Caution

The two interfaces X301 and X302 should not be used simultaneouslybecause they are connected in parallel.

Connector designation: X301; plug connector (2 x 5-pin) with lock



1 P5 V Supply voltage 5 V

2 USB_PB

Data+

3 USB_MB

Data–

4 / 5 M (GND) V Ground

6 / 7 / 8 NC – Not assigned

9 SDA B Serial data for EEPROM

10 SCL I Clock for EEPROM

Connector designation: X302; USB-B connector (4-pin)



1 P5 V Power supply +5 V

2 USB_DM0B

Data–; channel 0

3 USB_DP0B

Data+; channel 0

4 M (GND) V Ground

X303 / 304 are used to connect simple USB expansion such as a USB mouseor USB keyboard and are designed as a “low powered interface” with max.100 mA, 5 V.




A1 1P5 VPower supply +5 V


A2 USB_DM2B

Data–; channel 2

A3 USB_DP2B

Data+; channel 2

A4 M (GND) V Ground

X303 / X304








B1 2P5 VPower supply +5 V


B2 USB_DM3B

Data–; channel 0

B3 USB_DP3B

Data+; channel 0

B4 M (GND) V Ground

The MCP is connected to the MPI of the NC by means of interface X401.(See Figure 10-7).

Connector designation: X401; 9-pin Sub-D socket




3 RS_OPI B RS-485 data

4 ORTSAS_OPIO

Output Request to Send, user in-terface

5 M5EXTV

5V external ground

6 P5EXTV

5V external potential


8 XRS_OPI B RS-485 data


Baud rate (max. of 1.5 Mbaud) and station address of the MCP at the MPI busare set at DIP switch S3 of the keyboard controller.

Option

Connector designation: X404; 3-pin Phoenix terminal block (see Fig. 10-7)

Table 10-7 Assignments of connector X404


1 PE Shield connection

2 0V V Ground

3 24V Power supply +24 V

X401 (MPI)

X402 / 403

X404 (powersupply)




10.4.4 Key layout

Table 10-8 Layout of the machine control keys (applies to “turning” and “milling”)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

43 44 45 46 47 48 4940 42

50 51 52 53 54

Low-active keys





10.5 Mechanical design


Dimensions in mm

59.5

34

IO front interface (26–pin)

LVDS (20-pin)

Fig. 10-2 Front, side and rear view of operator panel front without videolink receiver




Videolink receiver


382

73

Dimensions in mm

Fig. 10-3 Example: Side and rear views of operator panel front with videolink receiver installed (for mounting seeChapter “Distributed Installation”)





10.5.2 Machine control panel

Fig. 10-4 shows front and side views of the machine control panel “Milling” vari-ant, Fig. 10-5 the exchangeable key caps.

Dimensions in mm

Threaded bolt M5(for detailed drawingsee Fig. 10-6)

416

370

Fig. 10-4 MCP 416C-M: Front and side views

Exchangeable key caps

Fig. 10-5 Exchangeable key caps

MCP 416C-M




The MCP 416C-M is shipped with a set of 10 exchangeable key caps (color:light basic) with the following labeling:

Table 10-9 Labeling of exchangeable key caps supplied with MCP

Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol

Info (7155) (6035) H(7159)

Spray gun(7156)

Chuck Open/Closed(7158)

Unlock door forworkpiece conveyor

(7162)

Change axis(7154)

Axis5...n

(7161)

Acknowledgment(7158)

Chip conveyor(7160)

Welded threaded bolts (see diagram below) are used to mount the operatorpanel front and machine control panel:

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

523

10

Spacer ringThreaded bolt M5

M5

Front panel

Fig. 10-6 Bolt for securing operator panel front and machine control panel (detail ofFig. 10-4)





The next diagram shows the rear of the machine control panel with the position of ter-minals and operating and display elements:

X302

X303/4

X40

1

X404

X402 X403

X301

87654321

H1H2H3H4

S3

Grounding connectionM5 thread

Status LEDs

Programmingswitch

Detail X404(power supply)

Fig. 10-7 Rear of machine control panel (MCP 416C-M and MCP416C-T)

The meaning of the status LEDs is as follows:

Table 10-10 Meaning of status LEDs

No. Color Meaning

H1 Red Hardware faults

H2 Red Temperature error

H3 Green Power OK

H4 Yellow Operator panel front interface active

Table 10-11 Assignment of DIP Fix switch S3

No. Meaning Default

Setting Value

1 Baud rate ON 1.5 Mbaud

2Cycle

OFF Cyclic transmit time frame:100 ms

3Cycle

ON100 msReception monitoring: 1200 ms

4 OFF

5Bus address

ON6

6Bus address

ON6

7 OFF

8 HW platform OFF Standard hardware




Fig. 10-8 shows the wiring of the emergency stop button.

1 12 2

Fig. 10-8 Block diagram of emergency stop button

All information given above for the MCP 416C-M also applies analogously to theMCP 416C-T.

Exceptions (see diagram below): – A handwheel is integrated in place of the second override switch.– The keys are different.

59.75

238.340.2

Dimensions in mmThreaded bolt M5(for detailed drawing see Fig. 10-6)Exchangeable key caps

416

370

Fig. 10-9 MCP 416C-T: Front and side views

EMERGENCYSTOP

MCP 416C-T





The MCP 416C-T is shipped with a set of 30 exchangeable key caps (color:light basic) with the following labeling:

Table 10-12 Labeling of exchangeable key caps supplied with MCP

Meaning Sym-bol

Meaning Sym-bol

Meaning Sym-bol

Pick-up(7135)

Tailstock(7143)

Teststop_Safety(7149)

Minus(7111) – Chuck_3

(7146)

Tool_monitor_Ar-tis

(7136)

Program control(7141)

Bar_Feed (7150)Workpiece_time

(7153)

Turret_2 (7095)Work-

piece_changer(7093)

P1(7055) P1

Spindle(7148)

Tool_moni-tor_Leukhardt

(7151)

P2(7056) P2

Turret_1 (7094)Conveyor_belt

(7138)P3

(7059) P3

Workpiece_counter(7152)

Plus(7112) + P4

(7060) P4

Control_switching(7137)

Turret(7092)

P5(7063) P5

Oil_trap(7140)

Chuck_4(7147)

P6(7064) P6

P7(7067) P7

P8(7068) P8 Unlabeled




10.6 Installation



The panel cutout for the operator panel front is shown in the following diagram:

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

Dimensions in mm

386+1

329+

1

6

4.5

341

395

6.

5

Fig. 10-10 Panel cutout for operator panel front

Proceed as follows to install the operator panel front:

1. Insert the operator panel front and the machine control panel with their fourthreaded bolts (Figs. 10-6 and 10-9) into the mounting holes of the preparedpanel cut-out (Figs. 10-10 and 10-11). The spacer rings (Fig. 10-6) ensure that the rubber seal is not squashedwhen installed (required to afford degree of protection IP54; not included inscope of delivery).

2. Secure the components from the rear side using the M5 nuts and suitablecirclips (torque 1.8 Nm).

Individualcomponents

Panel cutout foroperator panelfront

Mounting





3. Make the ground connections (see Fig. 10-7).

4. Connect the interfaces, except X404 (see Fig. 10-7).

5. Connect X404 to the 24V power supply (see Fig. 10-7).

The panel cutout for the machine control panel is shown in the following dia-gram:

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

Dimensions in mm

384 +1

334

+1

7.5

5.5

349

395

6.

5

Fig. 10-11 Panel cutout for machine control panel

Note

For noise immunity reasons, the USB connection from the videolink receiver(interface X205) to the MCP (interface X301) must always be installed andsecured close to the top side of the metal plate.

The shield must be connected if a shielded cable is used.

No other cables which could cause noise interference should be installed in theimmediate vicinity.

Panel cutout formachine controlpanel




Screen saverCaution








10.7 Technical data


Table 10-13 Technical data for operator panel front

Safety




Approvals CE

Electrical data




load)

VoltageCurrent (typ. / max. mA; approx.)

5 V +/– 5%420 / 600

12 V +/–10%900 / 1050

5.2 V +/–2%350 / 1000


Mechanical data

Dimensions Width: 416 mm Height: 382 mm Depth: 59.5 mm

Weight approx. 6 kg

Tightening torques, max.Tension jacks:

0.5 NmWelded studs:

M3: 0.45 Nm / M4: 1 NmM5: 1.8 Nm





5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2



300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721–3–2




not permissible



Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1 / –3–2



–25 ... 55 °C




max. 0.1 % /min

Display

Size 15” TFT







Table 10-14 Technical data for MCP 416C–M or –T

Safety




Approvals CE

Electrical data

Input voltage 24 V DC

Power consumption, max. 2 W

Mechanical data

Dimensions Width: 416 mmHeight: 370 mm

Depth MCP–M: 84 mmDepth MCP–T: 100 mm

Weight approx. 7 kg

Mechanical ambient condi-tions




5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2







not permissible






–25 ... 55 °C




max. 0.1 % /min


04.0410.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel



10.8 Spare parts for the machine control panel

Table 10-15 Spare parts packages for machine control panel

Name Description Order No. (MLFB)

HandwheelHandwheel for machine control panel,width 416 mm, T-version

6FC9320–5DM00

Rotary switchrapid traverse

1x23G, T=32, cap, button, pointer anddial

6FC5247–0AF21–0AA0

Rotary switchfeed

1x29G, T=32, cap, button and pointer 6FC5247–0AF21–0AA0

Mouse USB mouse for front 6FC5247–0AF01–0AA0

EMERGENCYButton 3BS2000–1AC01

EMERGENCYSTOP

Holder 3SB2908–0AASTOP

Switching element 3SB2404–0C

Ill i t dComplete 3SB3001–0AA71

Illuminatedkeys

Switching element 3SB3400–0Akeys

Switching element with lamp 3SB3400–1D

Key cover (forlabeling)

1 set of 90, ergo-gray and 20 each ofred / green / yellow / medium gray

6FC5248–0AF12–0AA0

Remove the handwheel in the following way (see picture below):

1. Slacken the hexagon-socket screw in the rotary knob and pull the rotaryknob off the axis.

2. Undo the M15 fastening nut,

3. Remove the washer

4. Pull the handwheel backwards out of the front panel and disconnect thewiring.

Handwheel spindleGrub screw(hexagon-socket)(not visible)

Rotary knob

Supply terminals

Seal

M15 fastening nut

Fig. 10-12 Removal of handwheel

Installation is performed in the reverse order (for installation kit, seeFig. 10-12). Make sure that the seal is fitted correctly.

Exchangehandwheel




Remove the rotary switch in the following way (see picture below):

1. Prise the cap (cover) off the rotary knob (snap-on fitting!).

2. Loosen the nut of the collet using a wrench (width 10).

3. Pull the rotary knob off the shaft of the rotary selector switch.

4. Remove the fastening nut on the rotary switch axis from the front side usinga wrench (width 14).

5. Remove the connector at the end of the rotary switch cable from its socket(make a note of connector orientation).

6. Remove the rotary selector switch.

CapRotary selector switch spindle Collet nut

Fig. 10-13 Removal of rotary selector switch

Install the rotary selector switch in the following way (installation kit in next pic-ture):

Fastening nut

Terminal board

Rotary knob

Cap Connecting cable

O-ring

Fig. 10-14 Installation of rotary selector switch

1. Push the O-ring onto the shaft of the new rotary selector switch (for sealingpurposes).

2. Insert the rotary selector switch into the front cutout so that pressure is ap-plied to the O-ring.

3. Fasten the nut on the shaft of the rotary selector switch from the front sideusing a wrench (width 14).

4. Attach the arrow ring to the rotary knob.

Exchangerotary switch





5. Attach the complete rotary knob to the shaft.

6. Tighten the collet nut of the rotary knob using a wrench (width 10) (distancebetween knob and assembly front approx. 0.5 mm). When doing so, makesure that the arrow point is aligned with “0”.

7. Place the cap (cover) on the rotary knob and snap on.

8. Connect the cable in the way shown on the right-hand side of Fig. 10-14.Observe the recommended cable folds.

The second rotary selector switch is installed in the same way, except that therecommended cable folds shown in the picture below should be used.

Fig. 10-15 Both rotary selector switches installed (top switch [right] not yet connected)

The following picture shows the mouse prior to removal:

Mouse boardConnecting cable Cable connector

Fastening screwClamping frame

Fig. 10-16 Mouse prior to removal

Replacement ofmouse




Remove in the following way:

1. Unplug the cable connector from the mouse board.

2. Undo the four M3x6 fastening screws using a T10 Torx screwdriver.

3. Release the clamp frame.

The following picture shows how the unit should then look:

Fig. 10-17 Mouse fastening released

4. Lever the mouse out of the front panel.

The picture below shows the removed mouse:

Fig. 10-18 Removed mouse

Installation is performed in the reverse order.Make sure that the mouse symbol is the correct way up.


04.0410.9 Heat dissipation



10.9 Heat dissipation

The following correlations apply to heat dissipation at the operator panel front(the surfaces of the front and bottom side are not considered when calculatingthe convection surface):

The heat produced by the operator panel front is generated almost exclusivelyby the display unit (approx. 19 W). It is therefore sufficient to apply 20 W as thebasis for calculation.

T1 T2

The necessary free convection surface area of the space to be enclosed (steel oraluminum sheet, 1.5 mm thick) is calculated, referred to a temperaturedifference T2 – T1 = T 10 K, approximately from:

Pvtot. [W]A [m2] =

5 T [K]

Example: T1 = 45 °C, T2 = 55 °CPvtot = 20 W

A = 0.4 m2

Ope

rato

r pa

nel f

ront

Machinecontrolpanel

Fig. 10-19 Heat dissipation by means of natural convection



Direct Control Key Submodule


Designation Order number

Direct control key submodule 6FC5247–0AF11–0AA0

Installation kit for OP 015A and TP 015A *) 6FC5247–0AF30–0AA0

*) Installation kit for OP 012 included in the scope of delivery of the direct control key sub-module

LEDs

Connection forOP12 cable(not visible)

Coding switches:top = onesbottom = tens

Fig. 11-1 Direct control key submodule complete with coding switches and LEDs

The task of the direct control key submodule (DKM) is to directly transfer theoperating signals for the two rows of keys on the sides of an operator panelfront to SIMATIC without diversion through intermediate firmware. The signal-to-key assignments are shown in Table 11-1 and Figure 11-3.

The DKM can be combined with operator panel fronts of type OP 012 (see Sub-section 11.2.1), OP 015A (see Subsection 11.2.2) or TP 015A (see Subsec-tion 11.2.3).

The DKM converts the key signals to PROFIBUS DP protocol by means of theASIC LSPM2 (PROFIBUS DIN 19245 Part 1, 12 Mbaud).

Power is supplied via the operator panel front. The Profibus is completely iso-lated from the DKM/operator panel front by means of an opto-coupler andDC/DC converter.

The DKM operates as a slave on PROFIBUS. The address can be set between1 and 99 using rotary switches. Two bytes of data are transferred.

In SIMATIC, the keys are handled as if they were 16 ordinary digital inputs.

Validity

Brief description

11




11.1 Interfaces

The DKM has the following interfaces:

Connection foroperator panelfront

PROFIBUSconnection

Fig. 11-2 Direct control key submodule with connections

The ribbon cable from the operator panel front (see e.g. Figure 11-8) is insertedthrough the cutout in the enclosure (see illustration above).

Here, the switching states of the vertical direct control keys can be tapped with-out intermediate firmware. These signals can be evaluated in the direct controlkey submodule and in pushbutton panels (e.g. PP031-MC).

Direct control key interface X11 on the keyboard controller for the operatorpanel front: to DIN 41651, plug connector, cable length max. 0.5 m.

Table 11-1 Assignment of interface X11: 2 x 8 vertical direct control keys


1, ..., 16 DT 1, ..., 16 Data O Data output, direct control key #1, ..., 16

17 / 18 P5V_D_fusedV

+ 5 V (fused)

19 / 20 GNDV

Ground

Operator panelconnection

11 Direct Control Key Submodule



DT1

DT2

DT3

DT4

DT5

DT6

DT7

DT8

DT9

DT10

DT11

DT12

DT13

DT14

DT15

DT16

Fig. 11-3 Assignment of direct control keys on an operator panel front

9-pin connector (see Figure 11-2).

Note

The Profibus cable used should have a connector with a straight outgoingcable.

Profibusconnection


04.0411.2 Mounting



11.2 Mounting

The DKM is installed to one side of the PCU on the operator panel front andconnected to the keyboard controller via a short ribbon cable.

Mounting the DKM requires an installation kit appropriate to the operator panelfront used (kit for the OP 012 already included with the DKM).

OP 015A and TP 015A require an installation kit (see illustration below) whichmust be ordered separately (see “Validity” at the start of this chapter).

Keyboard controllercover plate for OP 015A

OP 012 DKM cable for TP 015ADKM cable for OP 015A

Fig. 11-4 DKM installation kit for OP 015A and TP 015A

11.2.1 Combination with OP 012

The OP 012 outputs the signals from the direct control keys (see Figure 11-3) atconnector X11 (see illustration below).

I/O USBcable K1

Displaycable K2

OP 012 Direct controlkeyinterfaceX11


Installation kit


04.0411.2 Mounting


1. Deinstall the PCU (if it is already installed) by removing the knurled-headscrews at the four corners and lifting off the PCU.

Cover plate forkeyboardcontroller

Displaycable K2 2)

I/O USBcable K1 2)

2) Cable shown folded together4) Slit for softkey labeling strips

Width = 483

Hei

ght =

310


1)1)

1) 1)


3)

3) 3)3)

3)

3) 3) 3)

3)

3)

3)

3) Enclosure screws

4)

3)

4)4)

4)

Cableclamp


2. Remove the ribbon cable clamp alongside the keyboard controller coverplate (see illustration above), by inserting a pointed tool in each of the twoslits and loosening the fixing cams by levering in the direction shown (seeillustration below).

OP 012

Previous cover plate

Cableclamp

Tilting motion oftool

Rubber rim

Fig. 11-7 Removing the cable clamp from the OP 012

Preparation


04.0411.2 Mounting



3. Unscrew the keyboard controller cover plate. It is no longer needed for assembly.

4. Remove the rubber rim from the edge of the housing cutout (used to securea pushbutton panel cable) (see Fig. 11-7).

1. Insert the non-rubber-coated end of the ribbon cable supplied with the DKMthrough the slit in the cover also supplied with the DKM and into socket X11on the keyboard controller.

2. Screw down the new cover tightly using the screws supplied (see illustrationbelow).

OP 012

Fixing nipple for DKM(1 of 3)

Cable to DKM

New cover plate

Fig. 11-8 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the OP 012

3. Install the PCU as described in Chapter “OP 012”, Section “Mounting”.

4. Set the PROFIBUS address 01 to 99 with the coding switches on the DKM(see Fig. 11-1; upper/lower coding switch: “Ones”/“Tens”).

5. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (see illustration below).

Assembly


04.0411.2 Mounting


DKM

PCU 50

OP 012

Fixing nipple for DKM

Cover plate

Cable from OP 012 to DKM

Retainingscrews

Fig. 11-9 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the OP 012

6. Screw the DKM firmly to the cover using the knurled screws on the side.

The illustration below shows the fully assembled unit comprising OP 012,PCU 50 and DKM:

PCU 50

DKM

OP 012

Fig. 11-10 Installed direct control key submodule

7. Insert the PROFIBUS plug (with straight outgoing cable) into the socket ofthe DKM (see Fig. 11-10).

If the DKM is not connected to PROFIBUS (or in the event of another fault), the“bus error” LED lights up (see Fig. 11-1).

Note

The direct control key submodule must be removed first on deinstallation of thePCU.


04.0411.2 Mounting



11.2.2 Combination with OP 015A


2. Unscrew the keyboard controller cover plate (see illustration below):

Cover plate forkeyboard controller

Fig. 11-11 OP 015A rear side

1. Insert the non-rubber-coated end of the DKM ribbon cable (Figure 11-4; la-beled “OP 015A”) into socket X11 on the keyboard controller (see illustrationbelow, observe folding).

Directcontrol keyinterfaceX11

I/O USB cableK1

Direct control keycable

Display cableK2

Fig. 11-12 OP 015A: Keyboard controller connections

2. Screw down the cover plate supplied with the installation kit and labeled “OP015A” (see Figure 11-4).

Preparation

Assembly


04.0411.2 Mounting


3. Fold the DKM cable as shown in the illustration below:

DKM cable

I/O USB cableK1

Display cableK2

Fig. 11-13 OP 015A: DKM cable routing


5. Set the PROFIBUS address 01 to 99 with the coding switches on the DKM(see Fig. 11-1).

DKM

PCU 50

OP 015A

Fixing nipple fordirect control keysubmodule

Keyboardcontroller coverplate

Cable from TP 015A toDKM

Retainingscrews

Fig. 11-14 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the OP 015A

6. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM.

7. Screw the DKM firmly to the keyboard controller cover plate using theknurled screws.


04.0411.2 Mounting



11.2.3 Combination with TP 015A


Cover plate forkeyboard controller

Fig. 11-15 TP 015A rear side

2. Unscrew the keyboard controller cover plate (see illustration below).

The plate is required for installation.

DKM interfaceX11

I/O USB cable K1

Display cableK2

Fig. 11-16 TP 015A: Keyboard controller connections

1. Insert the DKM ribbon cable (Figure 11-4; labeled “TP 015A”) into socketX11 on the keyboard controller (see illustration below).The cable is ready folded.

Preparation

Assembly


04.0411.2 Mounting


DKM cable

I/O USB cable K1

Display cableK2

Fig. 11-17 TP 015A: DKM cable routing

2. Tighten the screws in the cover plate. To do this, turn over the cable asshown in the illustration below:

DKM cable

I/O USB cable K1

Display cableK2

Fig. 11-18 TP 015A: Fitting the cover plate


4. Set the PROFIBUS address 01 to 99 with the coding switches on the DKM(see Fig. 11-1).

5. Connect the ribbon cable to the DKM (see illustration below).

6. Screw the DKM onto the fixing nipple with the knurled screws.


04.0411.2 Mounting



DKM

TP 015A Fixing nipplefor direct control keysubmodule

Cable from TP015A to DKM

Retainingscrews

PCU 50

Fig. 11-19 Installation of the direct control key submodule on the TP 015A



PCU 20

The PCU 20 component can be used in combination with the operator panelfronts OP 010, OP 010C, OP 010S, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012 andTrumpf operator panel. It is available in the following variants:

Processorclock speed

User memory(SDRAM)

Onboard FLASHmemory

Order number6FC5210–0DF00 ...

166 MHz 16 MB 8 MB ...–0AA0

66 MHz 32 MB 16 MB ...–0AA1

233 MHz 32 MB 16 MB ...–1AA0

233 MHz 32 MB 16 MB ...–1AA1

Robust, easy-to-service design (continuous operation, high noise immunity)

Compact construction for space-saving installation

All-around fire protection (to EN60950)

Single-chip PC processor with embedded operating system

Linear Flash Memory Card (ATA Flash)or Flash Card 100/200 type I/II, max. 64 MBor CompactFlash Card (PCMCIA) with adapter

Screen resolution: 640 x 480 (VGA), up to 1024 x 768 (XGA)

Power supply : 24 V DC

Interfaces:

– COM1 serial RS-232 interface (25-pin Sub-D socket connector)

– COM2 serial RS-232 interface (9-pin Sub-D socket connector)

– PS/2 keyboard (6-pin mini-DIN)

– USB interface (4-pin USB socket connector)

– MPI/DP interface RS-485 (9-pin female Sub-D), max. 1.5 Mbaud

– Ethernetport 10/100 Mbaud (8-pin RJ45 socket)

– Memory card interface (68-pin PC card connector)

– Floppy disk drive interface (34-pin ribbon cable connector socket)

– Interfaces to operator panel front:– LVDS interface for TFT operator panel front (20-pin connector,

2.54 mm)– CMOS interface for STN operator panel front (34-pin

connector, 2.54 mm)– operator panel front I/O interface for USB data signal/display selection/ LEDs/power supply (26-pin connector, 2.54 mm), – USB interface for operator panel front (internal)

Features

12

04.0412.1 View



12.1 View

The Figures 12-1 to 12-5 show different views of the PCU 20.

Top *)

*) Orientation based on operation with the 19” operator panel front

Right *)

Left *)

Bottom *)

Fig. 12-1 PCU 20: viewed in perspective

Fix

ing

lugs

Inte

rfac

es

Fix

ing

lugs

Ret

aini

ng s

crew

s

Pow

er s

uppl

y in

terf

ace

Ret

aini

ng s

crew

s

Width = 297

Hei

ght =

267

Ext

. flo

ppy

disk

driv

e (o

ptio

nal)

Depth: 53 mm (without screws protruding)

Rating plate

Fig. 12-2 Top view PCU 20

12 PCU 20

04.0412.2 Interfaces and connections


12.2 Interfaces and connections

Note

The orientation drawings “top”, “right”, “left” etc. refer to the mounting positionwhen operated with OP 012 (see Fig. 12-1 and 12-7) viewed at the rear of thePCU 20/OP 012 combination.

The pin assignments of the individual interfaces can be found in Chapter “Con-nection Conditions”, Subsection “Secondary electrical conditions”.

12.2.1 Interfaces on right side of casing

Ethernet MPI/L2-DPUSBCOM1/V.24PS/2 mouse

53

Memory card slotCOM2/RS-232

Dep

th =

56

Fig. 12-3 PCU 20 side view from right with interfaces

Table 12-1 Interfaces on right side of housing

Name Connection Function

COM1/RS-232 25-pin sub-D socket Serial interface (RS-232-C)

COM2/RS-232 9-pin male sub D connector Serial interface (RS-232-C)

PS/2 mouse/keyboard

PS/2 Mouse connector/keyboard connection

USB 4-pin USB socket External connection for Universal Serial Bus

MPI/DP(RS 485)

9-pin sub-D socket Multi-Point-Interface/Profibus DP connectionConnection of an S7 programmable controller

Ethernet 8-pin RJ45 socket Connection for local area network (LAN), softwareoption

Memory card 68-pin PC card connector Slot for– Linear Flash Memory Card (ATA Flash) or– Flash Card 100/200 type I/II or– CompactFlash Card (PCMCIA) with adapter

Pin assignments

12 PCU 20




12.2.2 Interfaces on left side of casing

The following interfaces are located on the left-hand casing panel:

Interfaces for the operator panel front:

CMOS for STN display(OP 010)

I/O USB interface

LVDS for TFT display

Data interface forexternal floppy diskdrive

Reset

24 V supply connection

Fig. 12-4 Interfaces on left side of casing

Fastening screw for cover plate ofexternal floppy disk drive port

Shield connection

Ground terminal

Interfaces for the operator panel front:

I/O USB interface

LVDS interface for TFTdisplay

Fig. 12-5 Rear of PCU 20 housing complete with interfaces

12 PCU 20



Interfaces for the operator panel front to be mounted:

– Front interface for connecting the I/O USB cable

– LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display

– CMOS interface for connecting an STN display (X420)

Procedure for mounting the operator panel front: see Subsection 12.3.1.

Table 12-2 Interfaces on the left side of the casing

Connection Function

LVDS LVDS interface for TFT operator panel front

I/O USB I/O interface/USB data

CMOS CMOS interface for STN operator panel front (X420)

24 V 24 V supply connection

Floppy Data interface (34-pin ribbon cable plug socket) for externalfloppy disk unit

Note

Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. The PCU reboots.

12.2.3 Mounting bracket on underside of casing

Mounting bracket for screwing to theoperator panel front

Fig. 12-6 View of PCU 20 from below

12 PCU 20




12.2.4 Pin assignments

Cable length: max. 30 m




Cable length: max. 5 m


Cable length: max. of 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud


Cable length: max. 0.5 m

Cable length: max. 0.5 mThis interface is accessed through the opening in the base plate.

Cable length: max. 0.5 mThis interface is on the mother board and cannot therefore be seenfrom the outside! This interface can only be accessed by opening thecasing. Details can be found in the documentation for the operatorpanel fronts.

Caution

The STN interface is mechanically identical to the external floppy disk interfacewhich is accessible from the outside. The devices may be damagedpermanently if the STN display is inadvertently connected to the floppy diskinterface!

Serial port COM 1(X9)

Serial port COM2(X11)

PS/2 keyboard/mouse interface(X6)

USB interface(X40)

MPI/DP interface(X800)

Ethernet/RJ45interface (X805)

Display interface(LVDS) for TFToperator panelfront X400)

I/O interface foroperator panelfront (X44)

X420:STN interface foroperator panelfront

12 PCU 20

04.0412.3 Mounting


12.3 Mounting

12.3.1 Assembly with operator panel front and installation

The PCU 20 meets the relevant demands placed on a fire protection casing toEN60950. It can therefore be integrated without an additional fire protection sur-round.

When used in combination with the operator panel front (e.g. OP 012), thePCU 20 is first screwed to the operator panel front and this is then secured tothe assembly panel using tension jacks. The procedure is described in this manual in the chapter relating to the individ-ual operator panel front.

Please note the following during installation:

As far as possible, extreme environmental conditions should be avoided.Protect the PCU from dust, humidity and heat.

Do not expose the PCU to direct sunlight.

Install the device such that no danger (e.g. by falling down) may result.

The clearance at the PCU rear side must be at least 10 mm to make surethat sufficient ventilation is provided (see Fig. 12-7). Clearances on thesides, see Chapter “Heat Dissipation”.

Do not cover the vent slots.

Permissible mounting positions:

Interfaces

Interfaces

Inte

rfac

es

Interfaces

Preferred mounting positionwhen operating with the 19”operator panel fronts

Interfaces

Interfaces

*)

*) Clearance for ventilation: 10 mm

*)

To beavoided

Preferred mountingposition when operatingwith OP 010S

Fig. 12-7 Permissible installation positions of the PCU 20 with the 19” operator panel frontAn inclined position of ± 5 is permitted. Vertical mounting is recommended.

Combination withoperator panel front

12 PCU 20

04.0412.3 Mounting



12.3.2 Preparing for operation

Before you connect the PCU to a power supply, you must connect an operatorpanel front.

1. Insert the interconnecting cables for the operator panel front into the ap-propriate sockets on the interface side of the PCU 20 (see Fig. 12-4 and12-5).

2. After the operator panel front has been connected, the device is ready.

Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable is required can be found in the manual for your I/O device.

Note

When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components aredesigned for use in industry.

Caution

When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, memorycard, etc.), make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected fromthe power supply. Otherwise damage may result.This does not apply to USB connections.

The PCU 20 is supplied with 24 V DC (see Fig. 12-3).

A mains switch is not provided so that the power supply is turned on/turned offby plugging/unplugging the power supply plug (see above).

After connection of the power supply, the preinstalled system boots automati-cally and finally shows the start screen.

ConnectingI/O devices

Connecting thepower supply

Turning on andturning off

Booting

12 PCU 20

04.0412.5 Accessories



Safety



IP20

Approvals CE

Electrical data



Mains buffering time 20 ms

Mechanical data

Dimensions (mm) Width 297 Height 267 Depth 56

Weight approx. 4 kg

Mechanical ambient condi-tions (with OP 010)




5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2





Heat dissipation Open circuit ventilation


not permissible





Temperature limiting values 0 ... 55 °C –25 ... 55 °CTemperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h



max. 0.1 % /min

12.5 Accessories

The external floppy disk drive can be connected to the PCU 20.The port for the external floppy disk drive is located on the left side panel of thecasing (see Fig. 11-4).For further information on the floppy disk drive, see Section “3.5 Floppy DiskDrive” in this manual.

Floppy disk drive

12 PCU 20




12 PCU 20

Notes


PCU 50

13.1 Overview

The high-performance SINUMERIK PCU 50 features onboard interfaces forcommunication via Ethernet and PROFIBUS DP/MPI, leaving the integratedslots free for other cards. The USB port at the back of the device provides “hotplug and play” functionality for a standard PC keyboard and mouse.

The SINUMERIK PCU 50 comes supplied with the operating system WindowsNT 4.0 EmbSys or Windows XP ProEmbSys, and for backing up and restoringdata, the Ghost 6 data backup software.

The HMI-Advanced software can be ordered separately

The description applies to the following devices:

ProcessorOperating

systemRAM Other features

Order number6FC5 2...

P ti II128 MB – ...10-0DF01-0AA0

Pentium II,333MHz

NT 4.0 128 MB incl. HMI Advanced ...10-0DF02-0AA0333MHz

128 MB incl. MCI board ...20-0AA00-1AA0

Pentium III,NT 4 0

128 MB – ...10-0DF05-0AA0Pentium III,500MHz

NT 4.0128 MB incl. MCI board ...20-0AA01-1AA0

C l NT 4 0128 MB – ...10-0DF20-0AA0

Celeron,566 MHz


566 MHzXP 256 MB – ...10-0DF21-2AA0

C l NT 4 0256 MB – ...10-0DF22-0AA0

Celeron,1.2 GHz


1.2 GHzXP 256 MB – ...10-0DF22-2AA0

Rugged design (continuous operation, high noise immunity)


Easy-to-service design

Easy installation with four screws at the rear side of the operator panel front

Mounting position and location to a large degree variable

Processor: See table above

Validity

Features

13

04.0413.1 Overview



User memory (RAM), max. 512 MB

10.4 GB hard drive

Operating system Windows NT (not touch panels) or Windows XP

Screen resolution:

– Max. 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) with Pentium processors

– Max. 1600 x 1200 pixels with Celeron processors

Power supply 24V DC

Interfaces:

– Parallel interface (LPT1)

– Serial interfaces: 1 x RS-232-C (25-pin), 1 x RS-232-C (9-pin)

– PS/2 keyboard interface

– PS/2 mouse interface

– MPI/DP (max. 12 Mbaud)

– VGA interface for external monitor

– Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbaud

– 2 slots: 1 x PCI and 1 x shared PCI/ISA

– PC card slot

– USB interface (for Windows NT: For standard PC keyboard and mouse)

– With PCU > 500 MHz: Additional USB interface

– Interfaces to operator panel front:LVDS interfaceCMOS interfaceIO interface

Note

Where the Windows NT operating system is used, the USB interface onlysupports keyboards and mouse units.

Combination with touch panels TP 012 and TP 015A is only possible underWindows XP.

If other USB devices are used, the noise immunity of the entire system may bereduced. The end user takes responsibility for the use of such devices.

13 PCU 50

04.0413.2 View


13.2 View

Top *)

*) Orientation relates to operation with OP 012

Right *)

Fig. 13-1 PCU 50 500MHz: Perspective view with the hard disk drive installed

Inte

rfac

es

Inte

rfac

e fo

r ex

tern

al fl

oppy

dis

k dr

ive

Casing cover screws

Screws for power supply cover

HandleShipping lock

Rating platePower supply

Hard disk drive

Width = 297

Hei

ght =

267

Depth: 80 mm (without screws protruding)

Fig. 13-2 Top view of PCU 50

13 PCU 50







Cover plate for PCI slotconnection

Cover plate for connectionPCI/ISA slot

Ethernet

MPI/DP

USB *)

COM2(serialmouse)VGA

COM1LPT1

PS/2 keyboard

PS/2 mouse

24 V power supply

Dep

th =

80Slot 1

Slot 2

Cover plate for PC card slot

*) Top USB interface only for PCU 50 > 500MHz

Fig. 13-3 PCU 50 side view from right with interfaces


Interface/connection Function

LPT1/Printer Parallel interface (e.g. printer), 25-pin sub D socket connector

COM1/RS-232 Serial interface 1 (RS-232), 25-pin sub D socket connector

COM2 Serial interface 2 (RS-232), 9-pin male sub D connector

Keyboard PS/2 keyboard connection

Mouse PS/2mouse connector

USBPCU 50 500 MHz One external USB connection Windows NT: one connection

can be used for a standard PCUSBPCU 50 > 500 MHz Two external USB connections

can be used for a standard PCor mouse

MPI/DP (RS-485)Multi-Point Interface/Profibus DP connectionConnection of an S7 PLC, 9-pin sub D socket connector

VGA VGA interface for external monitor, 15-pin female sub D connector

Ethernet Connection for local area network (LAN)

PC cardslot Slot for ATA flash card/memory card or Flash Card 100/200 Type I/II

PCI slot Slot for expansion boards 1)

PCI/ISA slot Slot for expansion boards 1)

Power supply connection 24 VDC

1) If expansion boardsare installed, the cover plates in Fig. 13-3 are replaced by the front plates of theboards. Please refer to the module documentation for more details.

Pin assignments

13 PCU 50




Connection for external floppy disk drive (34-pin plug connector)Device fan Reset pushbutton switch

Fig. 13-4 Side view of PCU 50 from left with the port for an external floppy disk drive

The connection shown in Fig. 13-4 can be used to connect an external floppydisk drive (see Section 13.8 and Fig. 14-7).

Note

Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. The PCU reboots.

13.3.3 Ports on bottom side of casing

There is a ground connection on the bottom side of the casing (see Fig. 13-5).

Ground terminal

Fig. 13-5 Bottom side of the PCU 50

13.3.4 Casing rear side

The two interfaces for the operator panel front to be mounted are located behinda rectangular cutout in the rear side of the casing:

– the IO interface for connecting the IO USB cableand

– the LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display

Procedure for mounting the operator panel front: See Subsection 13.4.1.

13 PCU 50

04.0413.4 Mounting



13.4 Mounting

13.4.1 Mounting preparation

The appropriate mounting brackets must be screwed to the PCU before it isattached to an operator panel front or a videolink transmitter (see Subsection13.8.1 or catalog).

Appropriate mounting brackets are provided for each of the following PCU 50mounting options:

1. Standard mounting for assembly of PCU + operator panel front

2. Flat mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter

3. Upright mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter

4. Central mounting for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter

The illustration below shows the PCU and mounting brackets (standard) cor-rectly positioned before they are screwed together. Torque M3: 0.8 Nm; M4: 1.8 Nm.

M3

M3

M3

M3

M4

M4

M4

M4

Lugs with hinged catch

Lugs without hinged catch

Notice: The lugs with hinged catch must point towards the fan end!

Fig. 13-6 PCU 50 with standard mounting brackets

You can find the assembly instructions:

for option 1 in “Mounting” in Chapter “OP 012”

for options 2, 3 and 4 in “Mounting PCU with videolink transmitter” in Chap-ter “Distributed Installation”.

Mounting bracket

Assembly withother components

13 PCU 50

04.0413.4 Mounting


13.4.2 Notes on installation


As far as possible, extreme environmental conditions should be avoided.Protect the PCU from severe vibrations / jolts, dust, humidity and heat.

An external fire protection casing is required.

Do not expose the PCU to direct sunlight.


Ventilation clearance:

– On fan side: 100 mm

– On rear side: 10 mm (see Fig. 13-7)


The permitted installation positions are shown in Fig. 13-7:

Interfaces

Device fan

Interfaces

Interfaces

Device fan

Inte

rfac

es

Device fan

Device fan

Device fan

Dev

ice

fan

Mounting positionfor operation with OP 012

Hard disk

Hard disk Interfaces

Inter-faces

Hard disk

Hard disk

Hard disk

Hard disk

Impermissible mounting position

*)

*) 10 mm clearance for ventilation

*)

Fig. 13-7 Permitted installation positions of the PCU 50Inclined position: Deviations of ± 5 relative to the installation positions shown in the illustration are per-mitted.

Mounting position

13 PCU 50

04.0413.5 Startup



13.5 Startup

Before you connect the PCU to a power supplyyou must unlock the harddiskand connect up the I/O devices (operator panel front, keyboard, mouse... ).

1. Insert the interconnecting cables of the I/O devices into the appropriatesocket connectors on the interface side of the PCU 50 (see Fig. 13-3 andTable 13-1.)

2. After the I/O devices have been connected, the device is ready.

Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable is required, is to be found in the User’s Manual of your I/O device.

Note

When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components aredesigned for use in industry!

Caution

When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, etc.),make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the powersupply. Otherwise damage may result.This does not apply to USB connections.

The PCU 50 is supplied with 24VDC (see Fig. 13-3 and Subsection 13.7.2).

Caution

The device should only be connected to a 24VDC power supply which satisfiesthe requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV).

The cable cross-section must be large enough to ensure that no damage canbe caused by the cables if there is a short-circuit at the PCU.

A mains switch is not provided which means that the device must be switchedon and off at the external power supply.

13.5.1 Booting

When the power supply is switched on, the preinstalled system boots automati-cally and finally shows the start screen (see IM4: Start-up Guide, Section “Boot-ing the system”).

When the system boots, the system parameters stored in the BIOS (Basic InputOutput System, see below) become operative.




13 PCU 50

04.0413.5 Startup


If you let the system boot automatically, a query will appear on the screen ask-ing whether you wish to go

1. to the User main menu or

2. to the Service menu

As a user you will generally select number 1. Use the Input key (see Fig. 13-8)to confirm your selection and let the system boot to the chosen menu.

The following table contains all adjustable BIOS parameters together with theirdefault values:

Table 13-2 Adjustable standard BIOS parameters of the PCU 50

Designation Standard setting

Menu / Parameter PCU 50/70 500 MHz

PCU 50/70> 500 MHz

Main

System Time xx:xx:xx

System Date xx/xx/xxxx

Disk A:1.44 MB, 3 1/2” (connected externally

=> disable floppy disk check)

Primary Master Depending on hard disk

Primary Slave None

Secondary Master None

Secondary Slave None

Memory Cache Write back

Boot Options

Quick Boot Mode Enabled

SETUP prompt Enabled

POST Errors Enabled

Floppy check Disabled

Summary screen Enabled

Keyboard Features

Num Lock Off

Key Click Disabled

Keyboard auto-repeat rate 30/s

Keyboard auto-repeat delay 1/2secs

Hardware options

PCI MPI/DP Enabled

On-board Ethernet Enabled

LAN Remote Boot Enabled

Cardbus/PCMCIA slot Enabled

Fan control ––– Enabled

SafeCard functions Enabled

Boot manager

BIOS settings

13 PCU 50

04.0413.5 Startup



Menu / Parameter PCU 50/70> 500 MHz

PCU 50/70 500 MHz

Legacy USB support Enabled

CRT/LCD selection Simultaneous

LCD screensize Expand

DSTN contrast 154

PS2 mouse Auto Detect

Advanced

COM/LPT Configuration

Internal COM1 Enabled

Base I/O address 3F8

Interrupt IRQ4

Internal COM2 Enabled

Base I/O address 2F8

Interrupt IRQ3

Internal LPT1 Enabled

Mode EPP

Base I/O address 378 –––

Interrupt IRQ7

PCI Configuration: PCI Device Slot 1 / 2

Option ROM scan Enabled

Enable master Enabled

Latency timer 0040 h

PCI Device Slot 3 / 4 *)

Option ROM scan Disabled –

Enable master Disabled –

Latency timer 0040 h –

PCI/PnP ISA IRQ Exclusion

IRQ3 Available

IRQ4 Available

IRQ5 Available

IRQ7 Available

IRQ9 Available

IRQ10 Available

IRQ11 Reserved

PCI IRQ line 1 5

PCI IRQ line 2 Auto-select

PCI IRQ Line 3 / 4 *) Auto-select

Installed O/S Other

Reset configuration data No

Floppy disk controller Enabled

13 PCU 50

04.0413.5 Startup


Menu / Parameter PCU 50/70> 500 MHz

PCU 50/70 500 MHz

Local bus IDE adapterPrimary

& SecondaryBoth

Large disk access mode DOS

Hard disk pre-delay Disabled –––

Memory gap at 15MB Disabled

Video Adapter Settings

Frame Buffer Size ––– 8MB

AGP Rate ––– 4 x

Default Primary Video Adaptor ––– AGP

Security

Supervisor password is Disabled

User password is Disabled

Set supervisor password [Enter]

Set user password [Enter]

Password on boot Disabled

Fixed disk boot sector Normal

Diskette access Supervisor

Power

APM Enabled

Power savings Disabled

Standby timeout off

SuspendTimeout off –––

Hard disk timeout Disabled

Boot Sequence

Hard drive

Removable devices

CD–ROM Drive

–––IBA 4.0 22 Slot

0048

*) BIOS lines ” PCI Device Slot 3 / Slot 4” and “PCI IRQ Line 3 / Line 4”:relevant only for PCU 70

After installing or mounting additional components (e.g. ext. floppy disk drive),these must be registered with the system in the BIOS setup.

You can activate this via the operator panel front (Fig. 13-8) as described below.

1. Boot the device.

2. After you are prompted to activate BIOS Setup, press key <F2>. The BIOSSetup menu will appear.

3. In the menu, use the cursor keys for navigating to the desired selection field,e.g. ”Disk A:”

Changing BIOSsettings

13 PCU 50

04.0413.5 Startup



4. Change the setting using the + key (simultaneously press <SHIFT> and <X>keys) or the <–> key (in the numerical key group).

5. If required, you can use the right/left cursor keys to go to other Setupmenus.

6. Use <Escape> (<Alarm Cancel> key) to access the “Exit” menu (can also beaccessed by continuously pressing the cursor right key).

7. Press the <Input> key to quit the setup menu.

8. Press the <Input> key to confirm your decision to exit BIOS Setup with“Yes”.

The system will then boot as described above.

F2 key

Shift key

Input key

Escape key

press <F2> to enter BIOS setup

ALARMCANCEL

SHIFT

INPUT

Fig. 13-8 PCU 50: Using the BIOS Setup via an operator panel front

Note

Any changes to BIOS settings, with the exception of the Boot sequence andthe LPT mode (EPP, EPC), require you to sign an OEM agreement.


Whenever a new touch panel (TP 012 or TP 015A, combined with PCU 50 with500 MHz processor > and Windows XP) is connected, a calibration must beperformed.

Versions 5.63 SR3 and 5.64 SR3 of the 3M Touch software are included in thebasic software for WinXP up to and including V07.03.03 and WinXP V07.03.05onwards, respectively.

A functioning touch panel system with PCU 50 (see above) is required.

1. Boot up the system in service mode.

2. Start the SINUMERIK desktop (password-protected).

3. Open the calibration menu with “Start” –> “Programs” –> “Touchware” –>“Touchware” (see illustration below).

Procedure

13 PCU 50

04.0413.5 Startup


Note

On the TP015A the default calibration is centrosymmetric to the centerpoint. This means that you must press the top right of the screen to activatethe “Start” button (bottom left).

Fig. 13-9 Menu for touchscreen calibration (Touchware version 5.64 SR3)

Note

Depending on the software version and setting, the screen can include 2, 4or 5 calibration points.

You can toggle between 2 and 5 points (Touchware version 5.63 SR3) orbetween 2 and 4 points (Touchware version 5.64 SR3) from the menu“Tools” –> “Options” –> “Advanced” –> “Style”.

4. Press the “Calibrate” button.

13 PCU 50

04.0413.5 Startup



The following display appears:

Fig. 13-10 Calibration screen

5. Using the tip of one finger, touch the calibration point indicated by the handsymbol as precisely as possible for as long as the “Hold” prompt is dis-played.

“Hold” disappears after a few seconds and the hand symbol moves to thenext calibration point.

6. Repeat step 5 until all available points have been calibrated.

When the parameters have been saved, the following menu appears:

Fig. 13-11 Test menu

7. To test the calibration, move your finger around the screen and watch thecursor.

You can calibrate the screen again if necessary by pressing “Calibrate”.

8. Once calibration has been successful, leave the menu by pressing “Done”–> “Close”.

If you take too long, the action will be aborted with a timeout and you will haveto start again.

13 PCU 50

04.0413.5 Startup


13.5.3 Working with PC cards

The PCU 50 is equipped with a PC card interface. This can be used to oper-ate cardbus cards (32 bit) and PCMCIA cards (16 bit). Communicationboards for MODEM, FAX MODEM, ISDN, Token Ring, ETHERNET, memoryextensions and SCSI interfaces can be inserted in checkcard format.

Before using these cards:

Software The “Cardware” software is required for Windows NT.See catalog for information on ordering.

BIOS settings See IAD, SINUMERIK 840D Start-Up Guide

Caution– Before you insert the PC card, the ejector for cardbus/PC cards must be

fully depressed. Otherwise, if you are inserting slim PC cards (e.g. FlashMemory Cards), the card may get stuck in the slot.

The PC card then cannot be inserted properly.

– Before you insert or withdraw cardbus/PC cards, you must discharge yourbody’s static loading by briefly touching a grounded object.

Otherwise faults can occur.

– When you plug it in, the PC card nameplate must point towards the back ofthe PCU.

Otherwise the PC card and/or the PCU could be damaged.

– Only take out the card when data is no longer being transferred (risk of lossof data and system crash).

Handling When inserting the card, proceed as follows (see Fig. 13-12):

1. Open the interface cover by loosening the plastic rivets with a flat-bladedscrewdriver (there are two parts).

2. Remove the cover plate from the guide.

3. Insert the required PCMCIA card or cardbus card.

Cover plate fastening rivets

PC card eject button

Cover platePC card slot

Fig. 13-12 PC card interface

13 PCU 50





Safety



IP20

Approvals CE

Electrical data


Max. power consumption PCI / ISA slot Total

5 V12 V

–12 V

2 A0.3 A0.1 A

3 A0.6 A0.15 A

Power consumption typically 40 W maximum 130 W


Mechanical data


Weight approx. 6 kg





5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2




Noise < 55dB(A) to DIN 45635




not permissible





Temperature limiting values15 W 1): 5 ... 55 °C20 W 1): 5 ... 50 °C30 W 1): 5 ... 45 °C

–20 ... 60 °C




max. 0.1 % /min

1) Max. output expansions (PCI/ISA slots, PC card, USB interface)

13 PCU 50



13.7 Spare partsSpare parts for the PCU 50 are:

Spare part PCU variant Order number

Hard disk with mounting plate PCU 50 500 MHz 6FC5247-0AF08-0AA0g pand damper PCU 50 > 500 MHz 6FC5 247-0AF08-0AA1 *)

Device fan A5E00019079

Backup battery 3.6 V W79084-E1003-B1

Power supply 24V DCPCU 50 500MHz A5E00166828

Power supply 24V DCPCU 50 > 500 MHz A5E00100846

*) Can also be installed in PCU 50 500MHz

13.7.1 Replacing the hard disk

Ribbon cable for hard disk connection

Plug connector for connectingan external floppy disk drive

Hard disk holder

Fig. 13-13 PCU 50 500MHz: Perspective view with the hard disk drive swung out

13 PCU 50




The installed hard disk drive is connected via a ribbon cable to the socket in thePCU mother board (see Fig. 13-13).

Procedure:

1. Lock the shipping lock of the hard disk by turning the handle to the “non op-erating” position (see Fig. 13-14 on the left).

2. Loosen the four fastening screws of the drive holder

3. Swing the drive holder open (see Fig. 13-13).

4. Remove the ribbon cable from the socket. To do this, push back the twolatching lugs on the connector.

5. Repeat the above steps in reverse order to install the new drive. The newdrive must be of the same type as the removed one.

6. Release the shipping lock or else the system will not boot (“operating” posi-tion; see Fig. 13-14 on right).

Fig. 13-14 Shipping lock of hard disk drive: left locked; right unlocked

13.7.2 Changing the power supply

1. Lock the shipping lock for the hard disk (see Fig. 13-14).

2. Loosen the fastening screws of the hard disk. The hard disk cables, how-ever, may remain connected.

3. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws (see Fig. 13-2).

4. Remove the screws securing the power supply cover to the casing and liftoff the cover (see Fig. 13-15).

5. Only for power supply No. A5E00100846: Unplug the connecting cable con-nector from the main board (see Fig. 13-16).

6. Release the two fastening screws on the casing.

7. Pull the power supply up and out of the casing.

8. Repeat the above steps in reverse order to install the new power supply.

13 PCU 50



Split rivets fordevice fan

Power supply cover

Power supply

Device fan*) *)

*)

*) Retainingscrews for the power supply cover

*)

Retaining screwsfor the power supply

Fig. 13-15 Removal/installation of the power supply (Art. No. A5E00166828)

Power supplycover

Power supply

Fixingscrews

Fixingscrews

Connector for powersupply

Fig. 13-16 Removal/installation of the power supply, Art. No. A5E00100846

13 PCU 50




13.7.3 Changing the device fan

To change the device fan, proceed as follows:

1. Open the casing by loosening the casing cover screws(see Figure 13-2).

2. Pull the top, long card (if inserted) out of the PCI slot (see Fig. 13-26).

3. Remove the card guide rail by taking out the split rivets (Fig. 13-17).

4. Disconnect the device fan cable from the socket (see Fig. 13-18 and Fig.13-19).

5. Pull out the two split rivets, then the hollow rivets (see Figs. 13-17, 13-19and 13-25).

6. Change the device fan.

7. Installation is in reverse order.

Note

When installing the device fan, note the direction of flow from the device fan(blower outward; note the arrow on the device fan casing).

Split rivets forsecuring the devicefan (see also Fig.13-25)

Split rivets forsecuring the cardguide rail (see alsoFig. 13-26)

Devicefan

*)

*) Direction of air flow

Fig. 13-17 Device fan replacement for PCU 50 500 MHz

13 PCU 50



13.7.4 Changing the battery

A backup battery (3.6 V lithium battery) supplies the hardware clock with powereven when the device has been switched off. In addition to the time, the BIOSsettings of the device are also stored. If the backup battery fails to operate or if itis separated from the plug contact, these data are lost.

Thanks to the low power consumption of the clock and the high capacity of thelithium battery, the battery can back up the clock for at least 8.5 years. For thisreason, changing the battery is hardly ever necessary.

If the battery voltage is too low, the current time will be lost and a correct deviceconfiguration can no longer be ensured.

In this case, the backup battery must be replaced with a new one. The battery islocated on the main board (see Figs. 13-18 and 13-19).

WarningRisk of injury and damage, risk of pollutant discharge.

A lithium battery can explode if handled incorrectly. Pollutants can bedischarged if old batteries are not disposed of correctly.

Do not throw new or discharged lithium batteries into a fire. Do not solder thecell body. Do not recharge lithium batteries. Do not force open lithium batteries.

Lithium batteries should only be ordered from Siemens (Order No.:W79084-E1003-B1).

Wherever possible, old lithium batteries should be returned to the batterymanufacturer/recycler and disposed of as special waste.

Proceed as follows (PCU 50 500 MHz, see Fig. 13-18; PCU 50 > 500 MHz,see Fig. 13-19):

1. Turn off the device, remove the mains cable and release all interconnectingcables.


3. Remove the battery plug (see also Fig. 13-26) from the socket on the motherboard and release the battery clip.

4. Install the new battery and secure it.

5. Plug the battery plug on the mother board.

6. Close the device.

Battery supply forclock andconfiguration

Battery voltage toolow

Changing thebattery

13 PCU 50




Plug for device fanconnection

Batteryconnectingplug

RAM bank 0 Base for RAM bank 1(not assigned)

Backup battery

Locating hole for boardretainer

Fig. 13-18 Main board PCU 50 500 MHz (cutout) with location of RAMs and backup battery

RAM bank 0

RAM bank 1

Backup batteryPlug for device fanconnection

Connector forprocessor fan

Fig. 13-19 Main board PCU 50 > 500 MHz (cutout) with location of RAMs and backup battery

13 PCU 50



13.8 Accessories

The following accessories are available for the PCU 50:

Table 13-4 Accessories for PCU 50

Component Order number

PCU 50 500 MHz PCU 50 > 500 MHz

Component PCU 50 6ES7791-0KS00-0XA0 6ES7648-2AC10-0CA06ES7791-0KT00-0XA0

6ES7648 2AC10 0CA06ES7648-2AC20-0CA0

Mounting bracket(see Subsection13.8.1)

standard 1)flat 2)

book 2)central 3)

6FC5248-0AF20-2AA06FC5248-0AF20-0AA06FC5248-0AF20-1AA06FC5248-0AF20-3AA0

Memory expansion(see Subsection

PCU 50 500 MHz(SO-DIMM PC 100)

PCU 50 > 500 MHz(SO-DIMM PC 133)

(see Subsection13 8 2) 4) 128MB 6ES7791-0KS00-0XA0 6ES7648-2AC10-0CA013.8.2) 4) 128MB

256 MB6ES7791-0KS00-0XA06ES7791 0KT00 0XA0

6ES7648-2AC10-0CA06ES7648 2AC20 0CA0

) )256 MB 6ES7791-0KT00-0XA0 6ES7648-2AC20-0CA0

Expansionboards (see Subsection13.8.3)

(according to AT/PCI specification)

Floppy disk device (parallel con-nection; see Chapter “3.5” FloppyDisk Drive” in this manual)

6FC5235-0AA05-0AA1

Floppy disk device (USB connec-tion; see Chapter “3.5” Floppy DiskDrive with USB interface” in thismanual)

6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1

____________________________________________1) for PCU or videolink receiver behind operator panel front 2) for PCU + videolink transmitter in control cabinet (see “Distributed Installa-tion”)3) for PCU + videolink transmitter behind operator panel front (see “DistributedInstallation”)4) see Figures 13-18 and 13-19.

13.8.1 Mounting bracket

The four mounting options for the PCU 50 have already been described in Sub-section 13.4.1.

A special set of mounting brackets is available for each of these mounting op-tions (see table 13-4).

13.8.2 Memory expansion

Two slots are provided on the mother board (“Banks, see Fig. 13-18 and 13-19)for 144-pin SO DIMMmemory modules. Use these modules to extend the usermemory of the PCU to 512MB.

The basic configuration is a 128/256MB SDRAM module.Standard memory

13 PCU 50




Memory (MByte) 64 MB module 128 MB module 256 MB module

128 2 – –

128 – 1 –

192 1 1 –

256 – 2 –

256 – – 1

320 1 – 1

384 – 1 1

512 – – 2

Procedure:


2. Insert the module(s) into the base (Fig. 13-18). When doing so, pay attentionto the recess (anti-rotation element) on the plug side of the SO-DIMM mod-ule.

3. Press the module downwards, applying slight pressure until the lockingsnaps into place.


Caution

Risk of damage! The submodules must be seated firmly in the receptacle,otherwise they may fall out and be damaged.

The memory configuration is detected automatically when the system is booting(see IAM: Start-up Guide, Section “Booting the system”).

After expanding the memory, it is advisable to then optimize the use of the com-puter resources.

To do this, in the Windows interface Control Panel, increase the size of virtualmemory (also called the “SWAP file”) to correspond to the memory extension.

Proceed as follows:

1. When booting, use the Service menu to start the SINUMERIK Desktop, as de-scribed in the “HMI Advanced installation and startup (IM4)” document in Sub-section 3.4.5.

2. Activate the Control Panel by means of “Start” / “Settings” / “Control Panel”.

3. In the Control Panel, choose “System” / “Performance” / “Virtual Memory” /“Change”. This will display a window corresponding to Fig. 13-20.

4. Modify the values “Initial Size” and “Maximum Size”. These should be the samesize and exceed the installed RAM by at least 12 MByte.

*) For Windows XP: See IM4 (Start-up Guide for HMI Advanced).

Typical recommended values:

Mounting

System boot

Memoryoptimization(Windows NT *)

13 PCU 50



Memory capacity (MB) Initial Size Maximum Size

512 550 550

5. Activate the “Set” menu button and exit the menu by pressing “OK”.

Fig. 13-20 Adjusting the virtual memory

Note

In the event of a repair and return of equipment, the memory extension is takeninto account.

In the event of a spare parts and return goods service, the memory extension isnot taken into account.

13.8.3 Expansion boards

The PCU 50 is designed for use of modules according to the AT/PCI specifica-tion (see Fig. 13-25).

Note

You must sign an OEM agreementbefore you can use PCI/ISA modules.

It is not recommended to use ISA modules, since with future PCUs, thisinterface is not installed.

13 PCU 50




The dimensions of the boards must not exceed the specified dimensions.Otherwise, contact problems, malfunctions and installation difficulty cannot beruled out. The diagrams show cards of the full AT/PCI overall length. Dependingon the slot, restrictions may apply with respect to the overall length.

175 mm

106.

7 m

m

A31 A1

6.89 ”

4.20

1”

Fig. 13-21 XT module

121.

92 m

mA31 A1C18 C1

4.8”

175 mm6.89 ”

Fig. 13-22 AT module

174.63 mm

106.

68 m

m

8.19

mm

6.875”

0.32

2” 4.2”

Fig. 13-23 Short PCI module (5 V)

13 PCU 50



265 mm10.48 ”

106.

68 m

m4.

2”

8.19

mm

0.32

2”

Fig. 13-24 2/3-length PCI module (5 V)

Note

To allow longer PCI modules to be guided along the guide rails of ISA modules,they must be provided with a so-called extender. This should be included in thescope of supply of the longer PCI module.

Split rivetsfor devicefan(see alsoFigure13-17)

PCI slot

Boardretainer

Bus board

Retaining screw forboard retainer

For expansion boards

Shared ISA/PCI slot Device fan

Cover plates

Retainingscrews forcover platesor external boardconnections

Fig. 13-25 Slots for expansion boards

13 PCU 50




Board retainer

Retaining screwfor boardretainerDevice

fan

Plasticsupport

Guide rail for expansionboard

Batteryconnector

Fig. 13-26 Mounting of an expansion board

Proceed as follows:


2. Release the fastening screw to remove the board retainer and remove theplastic support (if fitted) from its slot by pushing it through to the inside (seeFigs. 13-25 and 13-26).

3. Release the fastening screws to be able to remove the corresponding coverplate (see also Fig. 13-3).

4. Carefully insert the module into the desired slot; firm seat should be en-sured.

5. Screw the connecting plate of the module tight.

6. Mount the board retainer.

7. Locate the module by inserting a new plastic holder (enclosed) into the ap-propriate slot of the board retainer until it locates the edge of the module withits groove. Use a diagonal cutter to cut off the protruding part of the plasticholder.


Mounting

13 PCU 50


PCU 70

Note

The component PCU 70 is based on the PCU 50. For this reason, reference isfrequently made to the PCU 50 in the following technical description. The maindifference is the increased number of PCI slots and the resulting increase in theoverall depth of the device.

The SINUMERIK component PCU 70 can be installed in two different ways:

Centrally (on the rear panel of a SINUMERIK operator panel front: see rele-vant operator panel front chapter)

Distributed (in a control cabinet: see Chapter “Distributed Installation”).

The description applies to the following devices:

ProcessorOperating

systemRAM

Screen resolutionmax.

Order number6FC5210...

Pentium III,NT 4 0 126 MB

1024 x 768 pixels–0DF04–0AA0

Pentium III,500 MHz

NT 4.0 126 MB1024 x 768 pixels

(XGA)...–0DF04–0AA0

Celeron,NT 4 0 256 MB 1600 x 1200 pixels –0DF24–0AA0

Celeron,1.2 GHz

NT 4.0 256 MB 1600 x 1200 pixels ...–0DF24–0AA0

Celeron,1.2 GHz

XP 256 MB 1600 x 1200 pixels ...–0DF24–2AA0

Robust, easy-to-service design (continuous operation, high noise immunity)


User memory (RAM), max. 512 MB

Hard disk, min. 10.4 GB (interchangeable)

Power supply 24 V DC

Interfaces:

– Parallel interface LPT1/2 serial interfaces V.24

– PS/2 keyboard interface/PS/2 mouse interface

– MPI/DP (max. 12 Mbaud)

– VGA interface for additional monitor

– Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbaud

– 4 slots: 3x PCI and 1x shared PCI/ISA

– PC card slot

– USB interface (for Windows NT: for standard PC keyboard and mouse)– on PCU (1.2 GHz): Two USB interfaces

– 2 interfaces to the operator panel front or videolink transmitter:LVDS interface/IO interface

Introduction

Features

14

04.0414.1 View



14.1 View

Top

Right

Left

Fig. 14-1 Perspective view of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz version)

Inte

rfac

es

Inte

rfac

e fo

r ex

t. flo

ppy

disk

driv

e

Hard disk module

Width = 297

Hei

ght =

267

Housing cover screws

Screws for power supply cover

HandleShipping lock

Depth = 122 mm (without screws protruding)

ScrewsHard disk module

Rating plate for power supply

Fig. 14-2 Top view of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz version)

14 PCU 70





Slot 1 (master/slave)

Cover plate for connectionPCI/ISA slot

Ethernet

MPI/DP

USB *)

COM2(serialmouse)VGA

COM1LPT1

PS/2 keyboard

PS/2 mouse

24 V power supply

Dep

th =

122

Cover plate for PC card slot

Slot 4 (slave)

Slot 3 (slave)

Slot 2 (master/slave)

Cover plates for PCI slot connections

*) O

n P

CU

70

(500

MH

z) o

nly

on

e U

SB

inte

rfac

e

Fig. 14-3 Side view of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz; see Fig. 14-1) from right with interfaces


Connection Function

LPT1/Printer Parallel interface (e.g. printer), 25-pin Sub-D socket connector

COM1/RS-232 Serial interface 1 (RS-232-C), 25-pin Sub-D socket connector

COM2 Serial interface 2 (RS-232), 9-pin male Sub-D connector

Keyboard PS/2 trackballkeyboard connection

Mouse PS/2 mouse connector

USBPCU (500 MHz) One ext. USB port (can be used only for standard PC keyboard or mouse)

USBPCU (1.2 GHz) Two external USB connections

MPI/DP (RS-485)Multi-Point Interface / PROFIBUS DP connection; Connecting an S7 program-mable controller, 9-pin Sub-D socket connector

VGA VGA interface for external monitor, 15-pin Sub-D socket connector

Ethernet Connection for local area network (LAN)

PC card slot Slot for ATA flash card/memory card or 100/200 Type I/II flash card

PCI slot Three slots for expansion boards 1)

PCI/ISA slot Slot for expansion board 1)

Power supply 24 V DC

1) If expansion boards are installed, the cover plates in Fig. 14-3 are replaced by the front plates of the relevant board. See description of the relevant board.

CautionThe MCI board of the SINUMERIK 840Di should be fitted in Slot 1 only.

14 PCU 70





Device van

Connection for externalfloppy disk drive (34-pinplug connector)

Reset pushbutton switch

Fig. 14-4 Side view of PCU 70 from left (1.2 GHz; see Fig. 14-1) with the port for an external floppy disk drive

The connection shown in Fig. 14-4 can be used to connect an external floppydisk drive (see Section 14.6 and Fig. 14-7).

Note

Pressing the Reset button will cause a hardware reset. The PC reboots.

14.2.3 Ports on bottom side of casing

There is a ground connection on the bottom side of the casing (see Fig. 13-5).

Ground terminal

Fig. 14-5 Bottom side of PCU 70 (1.2 GHz) with ground connection

14 PCU 70



14.2.4 Casing rear side

The two interfaces for connecting an operator panel front or, in a distributedconfiguration, a videolink transmitter are behind a rectangular cutout in the rearside of the casing:

– the IO interface for connecting the IO cableand

– the LVDS interface for connecting a TFT display.

Procedure for mounting: see Subsection 14.3.1.

14.2.5 Pin assignments


14 PCU 70

04.0414.3 Start-up



14.3 Start-up

Caution

In a distributed configuration, the display type must be set on the videolinktransmitter before the system is first switched on as it is not automaticallydetected (see Chapter “Distributed Installation”, Section “Operating andmonitoring devices”).

If the settingis incorrect, the display could sustain damage within a fewseconds.

14.3.1 Mounting and installation

A special set of mounting brackets is required for each mounting method. Theseare not supplied with the PCU 70 and must be ordered separately (see Sec-tion 14.6).

Two methods can be used to mount the PCU 70:

1. Central installation when PCU is mounted on the operator panel front.

For installation instructions, see relevant operator panel front chapter, “Mounting” section.

2. Flat installation for distributed configuration of PCU + videolink transmitter.

In this case, the PCU can be installed at a distance of up to 20 m from the operator panel front (e.g. in a control cabinet).

For installation instructions see “Distributed Installation”, “Mounting aPCU 50 with videolink transmitter”.

Notice

When attaching the mounting brackets, make sure that they are positionedcorrectly (the brackets are not symmetrical). The hinged catches must pointtowards the fan end.

14.3.2 Notes on installation


As far as possible, extreme environmental conditions should be avoided.Protect the PCU against severe vibration / shocks, dust, humidity, direct sun-light and heat.

An external fire protection casing is required.


Ventilation clearance:

– Fan end: 100 mm

– Elsewhere: 10 mm


14 PCU 70

04.0414.3 Start-up


Interfaces

Interfaces

Device fan

Inte

rfac

es

Device fan

Dev

ice

fan

Hard disk

Hard disk

Hard disk

Impermissible mountingposition

Fig. 14-6 Preferred mounting positions of PCU 70Inclined position: Deviations of ± 5 relative to the installation positions shown in the illustration are per-mitted.

14.3.3 Preparing for operation

With a distributed configuration, make sure that you read the warning notice atthe beginning of Section 14.3 before you switch on the power!

Before you connect the PCU to a power supplyyou must unlock the harddiskand connect up the I/O devices (operator panel front, keyboard, mouse... ).

1. Insert the interconnecting cables of the I/O devices into the appropriatesocket connectors on the interface side of the PCU 70 (see Fig. 14-3 andTable 14-1).

2. After the I/O devices have been connected, the device is ready.

Information on how to adapt and set the interface and which connection cable is required, is to be found in the User’s Manual of your I/O device.

Note

When connecting I/O devices, please make sure that the components aredesigned for use in industry.

Caution

When plugging/unplugging I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer, etc.),make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the powersupply. Otherwise damage may result.

This does not apply to USB connections.

The PCU 70 is supplied with 24 V direct voltage.

Mounting position



14 PCU 70

04.0414.3 Start-up



Caution

The device should only be connected to a 24 V DC power supply whichsatisfies the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV).

The cable cross-section must be large enough to ensure that no damage canbe caused by the cables if there is a short-circuit at the PCU.

A mains switch is not provided which means that the device must be switchedon and off at the external power supply.

14.3.4 Booting

See Chapter “PCU 50”, Section “Booting”.

14.3.5 Working with PC cards

See Chapter “PCU 50”, Section “Working with PC cards”.


14 PCU 70




Safety



IP20

Approvals CE, cULus

Electrical data


Max. power consumption PCI / ISA slot Total

5 V12 V

–12 V

2 A0.3 A0.1 A

3 A0.6 A0.15 A

Power consumption typically 40 W maximum 140 W


Mechanical data







5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2




Noise < 55 dB(A) to DIN 45635




not permissible





Temperature limiting values15 W 1): 5 ... 55 °C20 W 1): 5 ... 50 °C30 W 1): 5 ... 45 °C

–20 ... 60 °C




max. 0.1 % /min

1) max. output expansions (PCI/ISA slots, PC card, USB interface)

14 PCU 70




14.5 Spare parts

Spare part Order number

Hard disk with mounting plate and damper 6FC5247–0AF08–0AA1Hard disk with mounting plate and damper 6FC5247–0AF08–0AA1

Device fan A5E00019079

Backup battery 3.6 V W79084–E1003–B1

Power supply 24 V DC500 MHz (85 W) A5E00117073

Power supply 24 V DC1.2 GHz (105 W) A5E00188815

Information on spare part replacement can be found in the “PCU 50 Compo-nents” chapter.

14.6 Accessories

Component Order numbers

3.5” floppy disk drive, external 6FC5 235–0AA05–0AA1

3.5” floppy disk drive, USB 6FC5 235–0AA05–1AA1

PCU 70 (500 MHz) PCU 70 (1.2 GHz)

Memory expansion 128 MB 6ES7791–0KS00–0XA0 6ES7648–2AC10–0CA0Memory expansion(SDRAM PC 100) 3)

128 MB256 MB

6ES7791–0KS00–0XA06ES7791 0KT00 0XA0

6ES7648–2AC10–0CA06ES7648 2AC20 0CA0(SDRAM PC-100) 3) 256 MB 6ES7791–0KT00–0XA0 6ES7648–2AC20–0CA0

Expansion boards (according to AT/PCI specification)

Mounting bracketstandard 1)

flat 2)6FC5248–0AF20–2AA06FC5248–0AF20–0AA0

____________________________________________1) for PCU + operator panel front assembly2) for distributed installation of PCU + videolink transmitter3) see Figures 13-18 and 13-19.

14.6.1 External floppy disk drive

Fig. 14-7 shows the external floppy disk drive that can be connected to the driveconnection on the left side of the casing (see Fig. 14-4).For further information, see Chapter “3.5 Floppy Disk Drive” in this manual.

Fig. 14-7 External floppy disk drive

Replacing spareparts

14 PCU 70

04.0414.7 System information


14.6.2 Memory expansion

Two slots are provided on the mother board (“Banks”, see “Changing battery” inthe “PCU 50 Components” chapter) for 144-pin SO DIMM memory modules.You can use these modules to extend the user memory of the PCU to 512 MB.

The basic configuration is a 128/256MB SDRAM module.

Memory (MB) 128 MB module 256 MB module

128 1 –

256 2 –

256 – 1

384 1 1

512 – 2

See “Memory expansion” in Chapter “PCU 50”.

14.6.3 Expansion boardsSee “Expansion boards” in Chapter “PCU 50”.

14.7 System information

Information on the boot manager and reading out/changing BIOS settings canbe found under “System information” in Chapter “PCU 50”.

Standard memory

Mounting, systemboot

14 PCU 70

04.0414.7 System information



14 PCU 70

Notes


Distributed Installation with Videolink

With “Distributed Installation with Videolink” in SINUMERIK, up to three identicaloperator panel fronts (see Table 15-2) can be operated at a distance of up to 20m from the PCU.This spatial flexibility allows you to install the PCU at less hazardous locationsof the system (e.g. control cabinet).



Videolink receiver ...–0AA0

Videolink transmitter1 : 1 1) 6FC5247–0AF22–... ...–1AA0

Videolink transmitter1 : 2 ...–2AA0

Mounting bracket forVideolink receiver

behind operator panel front(identical to that for PCU)

...–2AA0

Mo nting bracket forFlat for PCU 50/70 6FC5248–0AF20–... ...–0AA0

Mounting bracket forVideolink transmitter

Upright for PCU 506FC5248 0AF20 ...

...–1AA0Videolink transmitter

Central for PCU 50 ...–3AA0

5 m ...–1AF0 2)

Videolink cable10 m

6FX2002 1VL01...–1BA0 2)

Videolink cable 20 m

6FX2002–1VL01–......–1CA0 2)

25 m ...–1CF0 2)

1) see Fig. 15.42) ...–1XX0 is the length code: A = 0, B = 1, etc.

Table 15-1 Possible combinations of the various transmitter and receiver types

receiver

transmitter 6FC5247–0AF20–0AA0

6FC5247–0AF21–0AA0

6FC5247–0AF22–1AA0

6FC5247–0AF22–2AA0

6FC5247–0AF20–1AA0 + + – –

6FC5247–0AF21–1AA0 + + – –

6FC5247–0AF22–0AA0 – – + +

Use

Validity

15

04.04



Table 15-2 Maximum permitted number of operator panel fronts which can be combined with a PCU in a distributedinstallation with videolink

PCU ...

Operatorpanels

NumberOP 010

from.._0AA1

NumberOP

010S

NumberOP

010C

NumberOP 012

NumberTP 012

NumberOP 015

NumberOP

015A

Number15” OPs416 mm

NumberTP

015A

PCU 50 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

PCU 70 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Used for

– Slimline operator consoles with any orientation

– Closed fan-free operator consoles

Robust due to separate installation of the PCU in protected areas (e.g. con-trol cabinet)

Simple implementation of a second/third operator panel front with digitalscreen quality

Additional USB ports for service and I/O devices (keyboard, mouse, etc.)

Extensive use of software-neutral technology for all operating systems

SINUMERIK “distributed installation with videolink” comprises a selection ofcomponents based on the building block principle – suitable for a wide variety ofoperator panel fronts:

Videolink transmitter for mounting on a PCU 50/70

– 1:1 (with one output) or

– 1:2 (with two outputs)

Videolink receiver for mounting on a TFT operator panel front (OP 010 S/C,OP 012, OP 015, OP 015 A, TP 012 or TP 015A)

Note

OP 010 is not supported (owing to STN color display).

Videolinkcable in standard lengths 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 25 m

Application-specific fixing sets such as

– flat mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter in control cabinet

– upright mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter in controlcabinet

– central mounting bracket for PCU with videolink transmitter behind oper-ator panel front (not with OP 010S)

– standard mounting bracket for mounting the receiver on the operatorpanel front (not required for OP 010S).

Features

Components

15 Distributed Installation with Videolink

04.0415.1 Overview


15.1 Overview

The maximum cable length for the videolinks is 20 m.

Caution

All of the displays used in a system must have the same resolution since theycan be damaged within a few seconds if they are incorrectly set.It is therefore essential to observe the “Caution” note in Subsection 15.4.1.

15.1.1 Configurations

Figs. 15-1 and 15-2 show the possible configurations for the distributed installa-tion with videolink:

Mounting bracketflat6FC5248–0AF20–0AA0

PC

U

Vid

eolin

ktra

nsm

itter

PCU


VideolinkreceiverVideolink receiver

Operator panel frontOperator panel front

USB

2 x USB

Mounting bracket6FC5 248–0AF20–0AA0 or6FC5 248–0AF20–1AA0 required

USB

Videolink–Transmitter 1:1

Videolinktransmitter 1:1

PCUPCU



USB

Mounting bracket6FC5 248–0AF20–0AA0 or6FC5 248–0AF20–1AA0 required



Videolink–Transmitter 1:2

Videolink

PCUPCU

USB

USB

USB

6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0

Mounting bracketupright6FC5248–0AF20–1AA0

USBMounting bracket6FC5248–0AF20–2AA0required

6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0

6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0

2 x USB

2 x USB

transmitter 1:2

Fig. 15-1 Distributed installation with videolink configuration with up to two operator panel fronts


04.0415.1 Overview



In Fig. 15-1 (left top and center), the PCU and videolink transmitter componentsare combined to form a unit. They can be mounted physically separated fromthe operator panel front, i.e. in a distributed installation (e.g. in a control cabi-net).

The two installation options shown bottom left can be used: “flat mounting” and“upright mounting”.

A third installation option (not shown here), “central mounting”, is identical to “flatmounting”, except an additional operator panel front is directly mounted behindthe videolink transmitter (see Fig. 15-2).

The mounting kits (see Subsection 9.5.3) must be ordered separately (see be-low).

The associated operator panel front and videolink receiver components whichare combined to form a unit are shown on the right. They can be mounted in anoperator console.

Fig. 15-2 shows another application option for distributed configuration with vi-deolink:The PCU with the videolink transmitter is mounted behind an additional (central)operator panel front (not intended for OP 010S). This allows up to three operatorpanel fronts to be operated at a PCU at the same time.

PCUPCU USB

VideolinkVideolink transmitter


Videolink–receiverVideolink receiver


2 x USB

Mounting bracket



USB

Mounting bracket6FC5248–0AF20–2AA0

PCUPCU USB

Videolink




Mounting bracket

required

USB

USB

6FC5248–0AF20–3AA0

6FC5 248–0AF20–3AA0 required

required

USB

USBUSB

USB

6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0

6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0

6FX2002–1VL01–1xx0


1:1

1:2

2 x USB

2 x USB

Fig. 15-2 Configuration with up to three operator panel fronts on one PCU

Configuration withup to two operatorpanel fronts

Configuration withup to 3 operatorpanel fronts


04.0415.1 Overview


Notice

If a central operator panel front is used, it is important to ensure that DIP switchS2 of the videolink transmitter is set to the correct position (see Section 15.4).

15.1.2 View

Videolinktransmitter1:2

*) see note below

PCU 50

Videolinkcable (≤ 20 m)

Fig. 15-3 View of distributed installation with videolink: Example with two OP 012 operator panel fronts

Fig. 15-3 shows the components for distributed installation with videolink:The PCU communicates with two operator panel fronts (here OP 012) bymeans of

– videolink transmitters 1:2 mounted on the PCU

– two videolinkcables and

– two videolinkreceivers (not visible in the illustration since they are mountedbehind the operator panel fronts; see Figs. 15-4 and 15-19).

Operator panel fronts, PCU and videolinkreceivers should be supplied with24 V DC (the videolink transmitter is supplied with power from the PCU).

Note

To prevent error messages when the PCU is booted, the operator panel frontshould be switched on at the same time as the PCU via the 24 V DC supply.

Power supply


04.0415.2 Description of components



15.2 Description of components

15.2.1 Videolink receiver

Videolink receiver

Supporting plate

Keyboard interface

Power supply

Standard mounting bracket(not required for OP 010S)

2 x USB-A

Cable tie(see Section 15.6)

Videolink cable

Hinged catches (covered) tohelp attach videolinkreceiver to operator panelfront (see Section 15.6)

Fig. 15-4 Videolink receiver for mounting to OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012 or TP 015A

Fig. 15-4 shows the position of the receiver interfaces:

Inputs:

– 1 x videolink for 1, ..., 20 m (video data plus USB signals)

– 1 x 24 V DC power supply

Outputs:

– 2 x USB-A

– 1 x keyboard interface (for USB keyboard)

– 1 x LVDS interface (not visible in Fig. 15-4)

– 1 x IO/USB interface ( “ “ “ )




15.2.2 Cable

The videolink cable is available in four standard lengths:

5 m: Order No. 6FX2002–1VL01–1AF0

10 m: Order No. 6FX2002–1VL01–1BA0

20 m: Order No. 6FX2002–1VL01–1CA0

25 m: Order No. 6FX2002–1VL01–1CF0

Other lengths require special preparation and have longer delivery times.

Fig. 15-5 Videolink cable

The housing can be removed on angular connectors. This reduces the outerdimensions and allows the connector to be introduced into conduits with 35 mmdiameter or greater. The minimum diameter for permanently mounted connec-tors is 42 mm.

Note

These high-quality cables should not be shortened or lengthened.

For technical reasons, the length is limited to max. of 20 m.






Fig. 15-6 shows a videolink transmitter (mounted on the PCU with the aid of the“flat” mounting bracket, see Subsection 15.5.1).


PCU 50Connections forvideo link cable

USB-A

Display codingswitch S1 *)

USB-A

Mounting bracket (flat)

Cover platefor covering the opening usedto connect a central operatorpanel front

*) IMPORTANT: Please read Subsection 15.4.1!

Fig. 15-6 PCU with videolink transmitter (1:2 variant) and flat mounting bracket

The videolink transmitter is mounted on the underneath of the PCU between themounting brackets. It does not require a separate power supply because it issupplied via the interfaces to the PCU.

The videolink transmitter is available in two versions:

1. Videolink transmitter 1:1

Inputs (not visible in Fig. 15-6):

– 1 x LVDS interface

– 1 x IO/USB interface

Outputs:


– 1 x USB-A

– 1 x LVDS interface (for connecting a centr. operator panel front)

– 1 x IO/USB interface ( “ “ “ “ “ “ “)

2. Videolink transmitter 1:2

Inputs: same as 1.

Outputs:


– 2 x USB-A

– 1 x LVDS interface (for connecting a centr. operator panel front)

– 1 x IO/USB interface ( “ “ “ “ “ “ “)

Design

Description




15.3 Interfaces

The standard pin assignments for the interfaces are summarized in “ConnectionConditions”, “Pin assignments” section.

15.3.1 Hardware interfaces – overviewTable 15-3 Overview of hardware interfaces

Interface

Type Function Designation I/O Type


1:1

– Videolink (incl. USB)– USB interface– LVDS interface– I/O interface for operator panel for PC– LVDS interface for central operator pane front– I/O interface for central operator panel front

X101X102X103X104

X107

X108

OOI

I/O

O

I/O

Socket connector,36-pin USB-A

Plug conn., 2 x 10-pinPlug conn., 2 x 13-pin

Plug conn., 2 x 10-pin

Plug connector, 2 x13-pin


1:2

as for videolink transmitter 1:1plus:– second videolink (incl. USB)– USB interface

X105X106

OO

Socket connector,36-pin USB-A

Videolink re-ceiver

– Videolink (incl. USB)– USB interface– Keyboard interface– Power supply– I/O interface for operator panel– LVDS interface

X201X203/204

X205X206X207

X208

IOOI

I/O

O

Socket connector,36-pin 2 x USB-A

Plug conn., 2 x 5-pinTerminal block, 3-pinPlug conn., 2 x 13-pin

Plug connector, 2 x10-pin

Vid li k t itt 5 m

– Video link transmitter<=>video Videolink I/O

10 m

Cable

<=>video link receiver

Videolink I/O20 m

Cable link receiver25 m

– Videolink transmitter <=> LVDSI/O

Flat ribbon, 20-pin Videolink transmitter < >PCU I/O

I/OFlat ribbon, 26-pin

15.3.2 Interface pin assignment for videolink transmitter


I InputO OutputB BidirectionalV Supply voltageOC Open collector

Signal types






Connector designation: X102 / X106; USB socket connector (4-pin),type A

Max. line length: 5 mMax. number of hubs: 3

Note

It is advisable to use only “self-powered” hubs (i.e. hubs with their own powersupply).

X106 is switched off with switch S2 with transmitter 1:2 (see Section 15.4).

15.3.3 Interface assignment for video link receiver

Both interfaces are designed as high-current USB (500 mA)

Plug identifier: X203/X204; USB socket,2 x 4-pin, Type A

Max. cable length: Mouse, printer, keyboard: 5 mIf hub used: 3.5 m *)

_________________________________________________________1) Length incl. supply lead to hub and connected terminal; max. of one hub is permitted. It isimportant to note that some keyboards already have a hub.


Connector designation: X205; plug connector, 2x5-pin

Max. line length: 0.5 m

Table 15-4 Pin assignment of connector X205 (USB keyboard interface)


1 P5V_fused VO + 5 V (fused) for external USBinterface

2 USB_DMB

USB data –

3 USB_DPB

USB data +

4, 5 GND V Ground

6, ..., 10 NC ––– Not assigned

Connector designation: X206; terminal block, 3-pin

Table 15-5 Pin assignment of connector X206 (videolink receiver)


1 24 V DC VI 24 V DC

2 GND V Ground for 24 V DC

3 PE ––– Protective earth

X102/X1061 (USB)

X203/X204 (USB)

X205 (USBkeyboardinterface)

X206 (powersupply)


04.0415.4 Operating and monitoring devices


15.4 Operating and monitoring devices


For selecting the display type.

Setting 0 Display switched off (factory setting)

Setting 8 12” TFT SVGA 800 x 600 pixels

Setting 9 15” TFT XGA 1024 x 768 pixels

Setting B 10” TFT VGA 640 x 480 pixels

USBinterface


Illustration not toscale!

Fig. 15-7 Rotary switch S1 for setting of display type in delivered status(switch position 0)The values 1, 3, ..., F are displayed as dashes due to lack of space.

Note

– On delivery, S1 is set to “0”.

– Before starting operation, S1 must be set to the display type being used as described in the list above.

– The selected switch setting only becomes effective when the PCUis (re)started.

– All displays used in a system must have the same resolution.

Caution

If the settingis incorrect, the displays could be damaged within a few seconds.

Rotary selectorswitch S1


04.0415.4 Operating and monitoring devices



With the 1:2 configuration, the USB signal must be switched to the selectedinterfaces (X106 or X108) using S2. The default setting is activation of the inter-nal interface X108. Interface X106 can only be used for flat and upright mount-ing.

Table 15-6 Function of selector S2

Function Keyswitch pos.

USB signal ⇒ X 106(X 108 not effective, 2nd USB interface active)

1/1

USB signal⇒ X 108 (X 106 not effective, central operator panel front active)

2/2 (default)

1

12

2

X 1

06

X 1

08

Fig. 15-8 DIP switch S2 for controlling the USB signal

The recommended default setting for S2 is 2/2 (central operator panel front).

Notice

If a central operator panel front (see Subsection 15.1.1) is connected toX107/108, the DIP switch S2 must be set to “X108” (2/2), otherwise thekeyboard, mouse and USB connector on the operator panel front will notfunction.

The second USB interface X106 cannot then be used.

15.4.2 Videolink receiver

A temperature monitor is integrated in the receiver module. When the threshold75 ± 5 °C is exceeded, the “TEMP” LED on the operator panel front lights up.The LED goes out again when the temperature falls below the threshold69 ± 5 °C.

15.4.3 Operator panel interlock

The purpose of the operator panel interlock is to prevent operator inputs beingmade at different panels simultaneously. The screen display must remain activeand is not affected by the interlock.

DIP switch S2

Temperaturemonitor

Function


04.0415.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU


15.5 Mounting videolink transmitter to PCU

Note

The tightening torques for all screws are: M3: 0.8 Nm / M4: 1.8 Nm

We recommend the following mounting directions for optimum heatdissipation:

– “Device fan upwards”

– “Device fan to left” (not possible with “upright” mounting;Subsection 15.5.2)

15.5.1 Flat mounting

Assemble the PCU and videolink transmitter in the following way:

1. Check switch S2 (if fitted). With “flat” mounting, it must be set to 1/1 (X 106)(see Subsection 15.4.1).

2. Set S1 according to the used display type.

Caution

To prevent damage, it is essential to observe Subsection 15.4.1 whensetting S1.

Hingebolt

Threaded holesfor fasteningscrewsDIP switch S2 Rotary selector switch S1

⇒ PCU

USB interfaceX 102

USB interfaceX 106

I/O/USB cable K1Display cable K2

Fig. 15-9 Videolink transmitter 1:2 with connecting cables

PCU + videolinktransmitter





“Flat” mounting bracket

Connection for centraloperator panel front

PCU 50

Fig. 15-10 PCU with flat mounting brackets

3. Mount one mounting bracket on the PCU first (see Fig. 15-10).

4. Hook the videolink transmitter into this mounting bracket (see Fig. 15-12).

5. Attach the second mounting bracket after you have positioned it on thevideo link transmitter hinge pin opposite (see Fig. 15-9).

6. Plug the connecting cable into the socket on the PCU (see illustration be-low).

PCU 50


I/O/USB cable K1

Display cable K2

Fig. 15-11 Videolink transmitter hooked into place with the hinge bolts

7. Swivel the videolink transmitter into place on the PCU (see illustration be-low).




Hinge bolts

PCU 50


Mountingbracket (flat)

Hingebearing

Fig. 15-12 Hinge of the videolink transmitter prior to alignment on the PCU

8. Slide the videolink transmitter along the angular hinge bearing (to left inFig. 15-12, see arrow) and push it into the position shown in the illustrationbelow.

Mountingscrew

Hinge bolts


PCU 50

Fig. 15-13 Videolink transmitter, aligned and screwed tight

9. Secure the videolink transmitter to the mounting brackets with the screwssupplied (see Fig. 15-13).

The videolink transmitter is then securely attached to the PCU mounting brack-ets (see figures 15-14 and 15-15) and can be mounted with the PCU in accor-dance with requirements.

Caution

If it is necessary to dismantle the videolink transmitter, please release thefastening screws and slide the video transmitter horizontally before swiveling itaway from the PCU, in accordance with step 8. and Fig. 15-12. Otherwise, damage is likely.





Cover plateoverconnectionfor centraloperatorpanel front

PCU 50


Fig. 15-14 PCU/transmitter unit assembled for “flat” mounting

Dimensions in mm

PCU 50Videolinktransmitter

PCU 50

114

Ret

aini

ng s

crew

sfo

r th

e vi

deo

link

tran

smitt

er

Mountingbracket (flat)

PC

U 5

0

290

309

232

337

Mounting slotsfor M4 screws

Device fan

Fig. 15-15 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the flat mounting brackets

With “flat” mounting, the assembly unit comprising the PCU and videolink trans-mitter is mounted flat against the control cabinet wall panel (see Fig. 15-1).

Features:

Easily accessible hard disk

Relatively large amount of space required in control cabinet

Installation ofPCU/transmitterunit




15.5.2 Upright mounting

Assemble the PCU and videolink transmitter in the following way:

1. Set the switch S2 (if fitted) to 1/1 (X106; see Subsection 15.4.1).

2. Disconnect the two cables from the transmitter.

3. Insert the free ends of the ribbon cables in the sockets of the PCU first (seeFig. 15-11).

4. Reconnect the two cable ends to the transmitter.

5. Screw the PCU and videolink transmitter together using the “upright” mount-ing bracket (see Fig. 15-16).

6. Set the display switch S1 to the used display type.

Caution

To prevent damage, it is essential to observe Subsection 15.4.1 whensetting S1.

PCU 50

Dimensions in mm


PC

U 5

0

113

5017.5

360

7,3

85

PCU 50

280

Upr

ight

mou

ntin

g br

acke

t

Mountingslots forM4/M5screws

Device fan

Upr

ight

mou

ntin

g br

acke

t for

join

ing

the

PC

U a

nd v

ideo

link

tran

smitt

er to

geth

eran

d fo

r at

tach

ing

to th

e m

ount

ing

pane

l

Upr

ight

mou

ntin

g br

acke

t for

join

ing

the

PC

U a

nd v

ideo

link

tran

smitt

er to

geth

er a

ndfo

r m

ount

ing

to th

e as

sem

bly

pane

l

375.

6

Fig. 15-16 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the upright mountingbrackets






With “upright” mounting, the rear plate of the PCU/videolink transmitter unit ismounted at an angle of 90 ° to the rear panel (see Fig. 15-1).

Features:

Only one mounting position possible: Fan at top

Space required with PCU 50 less than that required for flat mounting

Keep a clearance for hard disk operation (approx. 10 cm).





15.5.3 Central mounting on operator panel front

The components are joined together in the same way as for “upright” mounting,with the following exceptions:

Switch S2 (see Subsection 15.4.1) (if fitted) must be set to 2/2 (X108).

The cover plate on the transmitter (see Fig. 15-14) must be removed prior tomounting.

The “central” mounting brackets are used (see Fig. 15-17).

The assembled PCU/videolink transmitter unit is connected to an operatorpanel front and secured using the knurled screws of the mounting bracketsin the way described under “Installation” in Chapter “Operator Panel FrontOP 012”.

Dimensions in mm


PC

U 5

0

117.8

124

338.

424

.8

289

PCU 50

PCU 50Device fan

Mou

ntin

g br

acke

ts (

cent

ral)

Fig. 15-17 Joining of PCU 50 and videolink transmitter using the central mountingbrackets to be attached to the operator panel front

With “central” mounting, the PCU/videolink transmitter unit is mounted in theusual way directly behind an operator panel front.

Features:

Mounting depth of the operator panel front increased by approx. 30 mm

Not possible with OP 010S, not possible with PCU 70 (too heavy).




04.0415.6 Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front



15.6 Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front

Before the receiver is mounted on the panel front, the two interface cables forthe panel front (IO/USB cable K1 and display cable K2) must be inserted intothe correct sockets on the videolink receiver (visible behind the casing cut-out).

For more information, see Chapter “OP 012”, Sections “Interfaces” and “Mount-ing”.

The operator panel front OP 010S and the receiver are screwed together with-out additional mounting brackets.

265

260

86,8

36

13,4

Dimensions in mm

Videolinkreceiver

OP 010S

Videolink cableUSB cable

Supporting plate

Retaining screws4 x M3 to secure thereceiversupport plate tothe operator panelfront (2 of 4)

Fig. 15-18 Front, side and rear view of operator panel front OP 010S with screwed-on videolink receiver

OP 010S


04.0415.6 Mounting videolink transmitter to operator panel front


Two mounting brackets (must be ordered separately) are required to mount thereceiver on a panel front of type OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012or TP 015A (see Fig. 15-4) (see Subsection 15.1.1).

1. The mounting brackets are screwed to the receiver; the ends with the hinge-type catches must point to the right (in Fig. 15-4) or to the left (in Fig. 15-19).

2. The receiver mounting bracket unit is latched (like a PCU) into the operatorpanel front by means of the two hinged catches, closed shut and securedwith the four knurled screws.

338.4260

269

Dimensions in mm

Videolinkreceiver

OP 012

42

Videolink cable

USB cable

OP

012

Mounting bracket

OP 012

Knurled screw forattaching the mountingbracket to the operatorpanel front (1 of 4)

Mounting bracket

Hinged catch for latching intooperator panel front (1 of 2)

Fig. 15-19 Operator panel front (example OP 012 with bolted-on videolink receiverorder no. 6FC5247–0AF22–0AA0), front, rear and side view

Fig. 15-4 shows the outward-bound connections: the dual USB interface, the videolink interface (cable connected),the keyboard interface and the power supply connection.

Since some of the connections do not have a cable strain relief, it is recom-mended to fix the cables to the U-shaped lugs on the supporting plate usingcable ties (see Fig. 15-4).

OP 010C, OP 012,OP 015, OP 015A,TP 012, TP 015A

Cable connections





15.7 Technical data

For the technical data of the operator panel fronts, please refer to the corre-sponding Chapters: “OP 010S”, “OP 010C”, “OP 012”, “OP 015”, “OP 015A”, “TP 012” and “TP 015A”.

For the technical data of the PCUs, please refer to the corresponding Chapters:“PCU 50” and “PCU 70”.


Table 15-7 Technical data for videolink transmitter

Safety



IP00/mounted on PCU: IP20

Approvals CE/cULus

Electrical data

Voltage supply from the PCU

Power consumption, max. ...–1AA0: 1.9 W ...–2AA0: 2.5 W

Mechanical data

Dimensions Width: 265 mm Height: 277 mm Depth: 35 mm

Weights

Videolinktransmitter:

1.2 kg

Mountingbracket

flat/central: 0.6 kg

Mountingbracketupright:1.0 kg



Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2


5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2


Shock stressing




Heat dissipation Free convection, without fan


not permissible



Relevant standards EN 60721–3–3 EN 60721–3–1/–3–2

Climate class 3K5 1K3/2K4

Temperature limiting values 5 ... 55 °C –25 ... 55 °CTemperature rate of change max. 10 K/h max. 18 K/h



max. 0.1 % /min

Operator panelfront

PCU 50/70




Videolink receiver

Table 15-8 Technical data for videolink receiver

Safety



IP00

Approvals CE/cULus

Electrical data

Voltage supply from the PCU


Mechanical data


Weights 1.8 kg

Mechanical ambientconditions


Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2


5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2


Shock stressing






not permissible





Temperature limiting values 0 ... 45 °C (to front)0 ... 55 °C (to rear)

–25 ... 55 °C




max. 0.1 % /min






Notes


Distributed Installation with TCU(Thin Client Unit)

16.1 Overview

The Thin Client Unit (TCU) for distributed installation allows the spatial separa-tion of SINUMERIK OP/TP operator panel fronts and SINUMERIK PCUs andthe connection of up to four operator panel fronts to a PCU with one TCU each.To this end the user interface of a PCU 50/70 is copied to several OPs with oneTCU each.

Ethernetswitch

PCU 50/70 (+ OP/TP)

Up to 4OP/TPs+ TCUs

Ethernet

USB floppy

SINUMERIK 840D

Fig. 16-1 Distributed installation with TCU (example configuration with connection to the SINUMERIK system)

The description applies to the following SINUMERIK 810/840D components:

Designation Order number

Thin Client Unit (TCU) 6FC5312-0DA00-0AA0

Basic ThinClient PCU soft-ware for PCU 50/70 with

Single license on CD-ROM6FC5253-1CX10-0XA8ware for PCU 50/70 with

WinXP

Single license on CD ROM05/04; software version 1.0

6FC5253-1CX10-0XA8

Flat OP layout thanks to minimized mounting depth and low power loss

Graphics: Resolution 640 x 480 to 1024 x 768 pixels; 16-bit color resolution

Low-vibration installation of the SINUMERIK PCU in the control cabinet

Validity

Features

16

04.0416.1 Overview



Efficient operator control of larger machines thanks to up to 5 identical oper-ator panels

Signal transmission between PCU and operator panel front via IndustrialEthernet (see Section 16.6 “Accessories”)

Easy installation and service-friendly layout thanks to the component struc-ture

PCU functionality the same as in a centralized configuration (e.g. number ofPCI slots). The same operator screen is shown synchronously at all OPsand can be used from all OPs. Use via a Thin Client is the same as use viaan operator panel front connected directly to the PCU. The screen on thepassive operator panel is blacked out.

The system can be operated from the active operator panel. Operation froma passive operator panel can be selectively enabled.

Mixed use of operator panel fronts on a TCU or with an integrated TCU andan operator panel front directly on the PCU is possible.

The distance between the PCU and the operator panel fronts is determinedby the maximum distance between two network nodes/access points(100 m).

Operator panel fronts OP 010/OP 010C/OP 010S/OP 012/TP 012/ OP 015/OP 015A/TP 015A with TFT display

Operator panel fronts with the same screen resolution

SINUMERIK PCU 50/PCU 70 1.2 GHz with Windows XP and with basicPCU software WinXP 7.4 and basic PCU software Thin Client.

The TCUs are connected to the PCU via Ethernet as Thin Clients in their ownsubnetwork (via DHCP server on the PCU).

Ports:

2 x USB 1.1 for connection of mouse and keyboard

Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s

Prerequisites

Design

16 Distributed Installation with TCU (Thin Client Unit)

04.0416.1 Overview


X206: 24 V DCpower supply

X203/X204: 2 USB-A ports

X202: Ethernet interface

X201: Compact Flash interfaceDetail

X207/X208: interfaces forconnecting cables K1 and K2 tothe operator panel front (covered)

Cable tieto secure theconnector

Hinged catch forlatching intooperator panelfront (1 of 2)

24 V 0V PE

Mounting bracket (1 of 2)

Ethernet cable

Fig. 16-2 View of TCU with the interfaces (Ethernet cable connected and 1 mounting bracket already fitted)

View


04.0416.2 Configurations



16.2 Configurations

PCU TCU

Mounting brackets required: flat for PCU 50/70 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 (for mounting in controlcabinet)upright for PCU 50 6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0 ( “ “ “ )for TCU 6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0

Operator panelfrontEthernet

Fig. 16-3 Distributed installation with TCU: minimum configuration with no central operator panel front on the PCU

PCU TCU

Mounting brackets required: 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0 (for PCU 50/70 and TCU)

Operator panelfrontEthernet

Operator panelfront

Fig. 16-4 Distributed installation with TCU: minimum configuration with central operator panel front on the PCU

PCU

TCU

TCU

TCU

TCU

Operator panelfront

Operator panelfront

Operator panelfront

Operator panelfront

Operator panelfront Ethernet

Mounting brackets required: for PCU 50/70 and TCU 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0(without operator panel front, see Figure 16-3).

Switch

Fig. 16-5 Distributed installation with TCU: maximum configuration




16.3 Interfaces

16.3.1 Overview

Table 16-1 Overview of interfaces

Function Designa-tion

I/O Type

– CompactFlash interface– Ethernet interface– USB interface– 24 V DC power supply– I/O interface *)– LVDS display interface *)

X201X202

X203/204X206X207X208

I/OOOI

I/OO

50-pin base8-pin RJ45 socket2 x USB-A3-pin terminal block2 x 13-pin plugconnector2 x 10-pin plugconnector

*) for connection to an operator panel front

16.3.2 Description of interfaces

If not stated specifically below, the pin assignments for the connections can betaken from the “Connection Conditions” Chapter.

50-pin base

8-pin standard Ethernet socket

Both interfaces are designed as high-current USB (500 mA).

Plug identifier: X203/X204; USB socket,2 x 4-pin, Type A

Max. cable length: Mouse, printer: 5 mIf hub used: 3.5 m *)

_________________________________________________________*) Length incl. supply lead to hub and connected terminal; max. of one hub is

permitted. It is important to note that some keyboards already have a hub.

Terminal block, 3-pin

24 V DC; for detailed view of terminal assignments see Figure 1-1

X207: 26-pin plug connector for the IO/USB cable K1 for connecting the opera-tor panel front

X208: 20-pin plg connector for the LVDS display cable K2 for connecting theoperator panel front

Pin assignments

CompactFlashinterface X201

Ethernet interfaceX202

USB X203/X204

Power supply X206

Operator panelinterfacesX207/X208


04.0416.4 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front



16.4 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front

Before the two components are assembled, the two interface cables for the op-erator panel front (IO/USB cable K1 and display cable K2, see illustration below)must be inserted into the correct sockets on the TCU (visible behind the casingcut-out).

For more information, see Chapter “OP 012”, Sections “Interfaces” and “Mount-ing”.

The operator panel front OP 010S and the TCU are screwed together withoutadditional mounting brackets.

84.8

34

Dimensions in mm

TCU

OP 010S

Supportingplate

Retaining screws4 x M3 to secure the TCUsupporting plate tothe operatorpanel front (2 of 4)

265

13.4

260

2 x USB Ethernet

OP

010

S

OP 010S

Fig. 16-6 Mounted TCU with OP 010S, front, side and rear view

OP 010S


04.0416.4 Mounting the TCU on the operator panel front


Two mounting brackets (must be ordered separately) are required to mount theTCU on an OP 010S, OP 010C, OP 012, OP 015, OP 015A, TP 012 or TP015A operator panel front (see Fig. 16-2 and “Accessories” subsection).

1. The mounting brackets are screwed to the TCU; the ends with the hinge-type catches (in Figure 16-7) must point to the left.

2. Latch the TCU mounting bracket unit into the operator panel front by meansof the two hinged catches (like a PCU), close it after connecting cables K1and K2 and secure it with the four knurled screws.

Dimensions in mm

TCU

OP 012

Ethernet cable

2 x USB

OP

012

Mounting bracket

OP 012

Knurled screw forsecuring the mountingbracket on the operatorpanel front (1 of 4)

Mountingbracket

Hinged catch for latching intooperator panel front (1 of 2)

40

269

260338.4

Power supplyconnection

Fig. 16-7 Mounted TCU (example: with OP 012), front, side and rear view

Fig. 16-7 shows the outward-bound connections: the dual USB interface, the Ethernet interface (cable connected),the keyboard interface and the power supply connection.

Since some of the connections do not have a cable strain relief, it is recom-mended to fix the cables to the U-shaped lugs on the supporting plate usingcable ties (see Fig. 16-2).

OP 010C, OP 012,OP 015, OP 015A,TP 012, TP 015A

Cable connections





16.5 Technical data

Table 16-2 Technical data for Thin Client Unit

Safety



IP20


Electrical data

Voltage supply 24 V DC


Mechanical data


Weight 1.8 kg

Mechanical ambientconditions


Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm58 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2

3M4 according toEN 60721-3-3

5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2


Shock stressing

50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721-3-3

300 m/s2, 6 ms,18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721-3-2




not permissible



Applicable standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1/-3-2

Climate class 3K5 1K3/2K4

Temperature limiting values 0 ... 55 °C –25 ... 55 °C




max. 0.1 % /min




16.6 Accessories

Table 16-3 Accessories for Thin Client Unit

NameDescription Num-

berOrder number

Mounting bracketfor TCU behindoperator panelfront

6FC5248-0AF20-2AA0

Mountingbracket

SINUMERIK810D/840D

Flat mountingbracket forPCU 50/70

1 set(x 2) 6FC5248-0AF20-0AA0

Upright mountingbracket forPCU 50

6FC5248-0AF20-1AA0

Ethernetcable

SIMATIC NET,IE FC TP cable

Standard cablefor universal use

1 6XV1840-2AH10

cable IE FC TP cableTrailing cable 1 6XV1840-3AH10

Ethernetswitch

SIMATIC NET Electrical Lean SwitchELS TP 40 for linear network struc-tures

1 6GK1102-6AA00

switchSIMATIC NET Electrical Lean SwitchELS TP 80 for star network structures

1 6GK1102-7AA00






Notes


Handheld Terminal HT 6

17.1 Overview and function blocks

Validity The following description applies to the handheld terminal HT 6(order number 6FC5403-0AA10-0AA0)

The SINUMERIK HT 6 (Handheld Terminal with a 6” display diagonal) is an op-eration and programming device and can be used in conjunction with the SI-NUMERIK 810D, 840D, FM 357-2H and 840Di controllers. The following components and cables are necessary for connection:

X5

X4

X3

Distributor box,e.g.6FX2006-1BH01

Terminal block– for HT 6 power supply– EMERGENCY STOP wiring for HT 6– Enabling button wiring for HT 6

Computer unit

MPI (187.5 kbaud) for SINUMERIK 840D/810DMPI cable

Otherbus devices

HT 6 cable

OPI (1.5 Mbaud) for SINUMERIK 840D

Handheldterminal (HT 6)

MPI (1.5 Mbaud) for SINUMERIK 840Di

Fig. 17-1 Connection diagram for Handheld Terminal HT 6

The handheld terminal must be connected to the MPI bus as the final node onthe MPI bus. The bus terminating resistors are integrated in the device.

Note

The HT6 cannot be connected using the MPI cable 6FX2002-4EA04-... sincethe bus terminators are integral components of this cable. Please use the MPI cable specified in the catalogReferences: /Z/ Catalog NCZ

Overview

Connections

17

04.0417.1 Overview and function blocks



HT 6 cableOrder No.: 6FX2002... Comment Appropriate distribution box...-1AA83-10 3-core enabling cable 6FX2006-1BC01...-1AA23-10 4-core enabling cable 6FX2006-1BH01

Examples (available by the meter, max. 40 m):...-1AA83-1BA0 10 m ...-1AA23-1CA0 20 m

Note

Distributor box 6FX2006-1BF00 cannot be used.

Caution

An EMERGENCY STOP is triggered if the connection between the HT 6 andthe distributor box is interrupted (e.g. the HT 6 cable was unplugged).EMERGENCY STOP overriding does not take place automatically (seeSection 17.4).

80486DX4 microprocessor

– Operating system DR-DOS

– Clock frequency 100 MHz

Memory:

– SDRAM 16 MB

– FLASH 8 MB

– PC memory card: 8 MB FLASH, can be plugged in externally

LCD with

– 5.7” diagonal, monochrome (blue) STN, 320*240 pixels (1/4 VGA),backlit, variable brightness and contrast

– 16, ..., 20 lines, 38, ..., 52 characters per line (as configured)

Membrane keyboard with

– Machine control key block: RESET, ALARM CANCEL, JOG, TEACH,AUTO, CONTROL PANEL FUNCTION, STOP, START, 12 traversing keys (6+ and 6– with slide-in labels)

– Horizontal softkey bar with eight keys

– Number block (12 keys, shift key switches to alpha characters)

– Cursor key block (nine keys)

– Customer-configurable keys: S1, S2, U1, ..., U8 (with slide-in labels)

– Function keys: Operating area (MENU SELECT), HELP, Recall (^)

Rotary override switch (19 positions with stop)

EMERGENCY STOP button

At the rear of the device:

– Enabling buttons (two buttons with two channels each, with two positionsfor Safety Category 3)

Function blocks

17 Handheld Terminal HT 6

04.0417.2 User interface and interfaces


– HT 6 cable connection

– Serial RS-232 interface (COM1)

– PC memory card interface

– PS/2 keyboard interface

– Reset pushbutton switch

– Belt fastener

– Two M5 threaded holes for customized bracket.

17.2 User interface and interfaces

17.2.1 User interface

X1

Y2

Z3

A4

B5

C6

Display

Softkeys

EMERGENCY STOP

Traversing keys,for configuring andlabeling by thecustomer 1)

Special keys,for configuration bythe customer

Function keys,for configuring andlabeling by thecustomer 1)

Rear side: Two enablingbuttons

Connectingcable

Override switch(with fixed stop)

1) See Section 17.7

Fig. 17-2 User interface of HT 6





The Shift key is used to switch the function of the number block keys betweentext and numerical mode. Changeover only becomes effective when the Shiftkey is released. In text mode, each key is assigned to several alpha characters.The required character is selected with Shift + character key.

EMERGENCY STOP buttonPress the red button in emergency situations:

when a person is at risk,

when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.

As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives arebrought to a standstill with max. braking torque.


For other reactions to the EMERGENCY STOP, please refer to the machinetool manufacturer’s instructions!

The rear of the HT 6 complete with the enabling buttons and the interface cov-ers is shown in Fig. 17-3.

– PC-MEMORY card interface– MF2 keyboard interface– RESET key (under the cover)

Enabling button

RS-232 interface(under the cover)

Connecting cable

Belt fastener

Interface cover:

M5 threaded boltsfor fixing bracket

Fig. 17-3 Rear of the HT 6 with the interfaces

The enabling button is designed as a 2-channel, 2-position switch (see Sec-tion 17.3).

In the case of operations that require enabling (e.g. manual traversing within adanger zone), only one enabling button has to be operated.

Note

Press the enabling button firmly as far as the stop to ensure reliable action.

Number block

EMERGENCYSTOP

Enabling button




There are two M5 threaded bushes on the rear of the HT 6 for attaching to afixing bracket supplied by the customer, see following Figure. For both threads, compliance with the maximum tightening torque of 1.8 Nm isessential to ensure that the bushes are not overloaded.

16

117

M5

Fig. 17-4 M5 threaded bushes for fixing bracket

17.2.2 Interfaces

Connector designation:X101Connector type: 15-pin high-density Sub-D pin with UNC 4-gland

Table 17-1 Pin assignments on connector X101

Pin Signal name Signal mode Signaltype

1 B RS485 differential signal B

2 NC Not connected

3 ZS2.2 Enabling button, Contact 2


5 NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button, Contact 1

6 A RS485 differential signal B

7 NC Not connected




11 GND M (Mext for HT 6) VI

M5 threadedbushes for fixingbracket

HT 6cable interface(X101)





Table 17-1 Pin assignments on connector X101

Pin Signaltype

Signal modeSignal name

12 Ub 24 V (power supply for HT 6) VI


14 SHIELD Shield


Installation of connecting cable:

Release the two M3 Torx screws of the connecting cable cover

Remove cover

Plug connecting cable into the socket and attach with the fixing screws

Replace cover and tighten screws again.

Connector designation: X201Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D, pinMax. cable length: 30 m



1 DCD Data Carrier Detect O

2 RxD Receive Data I

3 TxD Transmit Data O

4 DTR Data Terminal Ready I

5 1M Ground VO

6 DSR Data Send Ready O

7 RTS Request To Send I

8 CTS Clear To Send O

9 RI Ring Indicator I

Signal type

B: Bidirectional I: Input O: OutputVI: Voltage Input VO: Voltage Output

Releasing the RS-232-C cover:

Pull the lug on the cover upwards.

Rotate the cover to the side; the RS-232-C is accessible.

To reassemble, place cover on the HT 6 and latch in place with gentle pres-sure.

RS232C interface(X201)




Connector designation: X401Connector type: 68-pin PC card connector


Pin Signal name Signal type Pin Signal name Signal type

1 1M VO 35 1M VO

2 D3 36 XCARDDET O

3 D4 37 D11

4 D5 B 38 D12

5 D6 39 D13 B

6 D7 40 D14

7 XCSCARDF 41 D15

8 A10 42 XCSCARDF O

9 XOEP 43 NC

10 A11 44 NC

11 A9 O 45 NC

12 A8 46 A17

13 A13 47 A18

14 A14 48 A19 O

15 XWEP 49 A20

16 NC 50 A21

17 1P5VO

51 1P5VO

18 VPPVO

52 VPPVO

19 A16 53 A22

20 A15 54 A23O

21 A12 55 A24O

22 A7 56 A25

23 A6O

57 NC

24 A5O

58 RESET O

25 A4 59 NC

26 A3 60 NC

27 A2 61 XREG O

28 A1 62 NC

29 1M VO 63 NC

30 D0 64 D8

31 D1 B 65 D9 B

32 D2 66 D10

33 NC 67 NC

34 1M VO 68 1M VO

Explanation

A0, ..., A25: Address 0, ..., 25 B: BidirectionalD0, ..., 15: Data 0, ..., 15 O: Output VO: Voltage Output

PC memory cardinterface (X401)





Release interface cover:

Unlatch cover by depressing the lug

Hold the cover at the two recesses and pull off

To reassemble, place cover on the HT 6 and latch in place with gentle pres-sure.

Connector designation: X301Connector type: 6-pin mini DIN socket



1 KDATA Keyboard Data I

2 NC Not connected

3 1M GroundVO

4 1P5 +5 V (power supply)VO

5 KCLK Keyboard Clock O

6 NC Not connected

Signal type

I: Input O: Output VO: Voltage Output

Release the interface cover: As described above

The HT 6 can be booted up again using the RESET button.The RESET button is located under the interface cover and can be accessedthrough an opening using a screwdriver.

Release the interface cover: As described above

The following manuals are available for the handheld terminal (HT 6):

References: /BAH/ Operator’s Guide HT 6/IAM IM2/ “HT 6 Start-Up” Chapter/PJE/ HMI Embedded Configuring Package/IAM/BE1/ HMI Option Package

Note

The IP 54 degree of protection is only ensured when the interface covers andthe RS-232-C covers are closed.

PS/2 keyboardinterface (X301) forMF2 keyboard

RESET button

References forfurther reading


04.0417.3 Distribution box


17.3 Distribution box

The handheld terminal is connected to a distribution box. The distribution boxhas an interface to the MPI bus and a terminal block for connecting the EMER-GENCY STOP circuit, enabling button circuit, 24 V power supply and an equipo-tential bonding connection.

The following are suggested for the connections

– Distribution box (Order No. 6FX2006-1BC01) for 3-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2002-1AA83, see Subsection 17.3.1)

– Distribution box (Order No. 6FX2006-1BH01) for 4-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2002-1AA23, see Subsection 17.3.2)

To ensure that the drained currents do not become a source of interference intheir own right, compliance with the following points is essential: Use a stranded reference potential conductor (of up to 30cm in length and at

least 10 mm2 cross-section). Securely tighten all fixing screws of cable connectors, modules and cables

referred to a potential. Make sure that all contacting areas of cables referred to a potential are pro-

tected against corrosion. In order to avoid capacitive charges on unused cable cores, the unused

cores of the EMERGENCY STOP and enabling buttons (terminalsNAUS1.1, NAUS1.2, NAUS2.1, NAUS2.2, ZS1, ZS2, ZUSTICO) must beconnected to the equipotential bonding terminal.

17.3.1 Distribution box for 3-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2006-1BC01)

10.5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

X5

X4

X3

Equipotentialbondingconnection

11 12 1326 hole forM25connector

X5

X3

Rating plate

34

X4

120

110

52

50

10090

36.5

Fig. 17-5 Distribution box 6FX2006-1BC01: Location of interfaces and terminal blocks

Distribution boxand HT 6

EMC measures

Position ofinterfaces andterminal blocks





The 24 V supply is connected to terminal block X3 (see illustration below):

Terminal 9 UbTerminal 10 GND

The HT 6 is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distribution box bymeans of the HT 6 cable.

Note

When drilling a hole (e.g. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal, therequirements of degree of protection IP54 must be complied with.

The distribution box is connected to the appropriate interface via MPI bus termi-nal X5, e.g. on the MPI bus.

The EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to terminal block X3 (see illustra-tion below).

Terminal Assignments

1 / 2EMERGENCY STOP contact 1

Input / output

11 / 12EMERGENCY STOP contact 2

Input / output


12 2

X4

Enabling button

X33 4 5 6 7 8

Ub GND

9 101 11 13

2.1 2.21.1 1.2 1.1 2.1 1.2/2.2

X1015 10 15 9 8 13

HT 6

3 4

HT 6 cable6FX2002-1AA83

Distribution box6FX2006-1BC01

1 2

Cableconnector

Fig. 17-6 Distribution box 6FX2006-1BC01: Connection to the HT 6

24 V supply for theHT 6

Connecting theHT 6

Connection toMPI bus

Connecting theEMERGENCYSTOP button

Connecting theenabling button(three-core)




Connector designation: X3Connector type: Terminal block for 1.5 mm2

Table 17-5 Distribution box 6FX2006-1BC01: X3 pin assignments for terminal block


1 NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 (24 V, 1 A) I

2 NA1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.2 (24 V, 1 A) O

3, ..., 6 NC Not connected

7 ZS1.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A)O


9 Ub 24V (power supply for HT 6)

10 GND M (Mext for HT 6) I

11 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.1 (24 V, 1 A)

12 NA2.2 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.2 (24 V, 1 A) O

13 ZS1.2/ZS2.2 Enabling button (24V, 1A) I

Connector designation: X4Connector type: Circular connector for screw connectionSpecial requirement Interface must comply with IP54

Table 17-6 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: X4 pin assignments


1 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24V, 1A) I

2 MPI_A

3 GND M (Mext for HT 6)I

4 Ub 24 V (power supply for HT 6)I

5 ZS1.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1A) O

6 ZS1.2/ZS2.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1A) I

7, 8 NC Not connected

9 NA1.2 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) O

10 NA1.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A) I

11 NC Not connected


13 MPI_B

14 ZS2.1 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) O

15, ... 17 NC Not connected

Terminal block(X3)

HT 6 interface (X4)





Connector designation: X5Connector type: 9-pin sub-D socket connectorMax. cable length: 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud

Table 17-7 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: Pin assignment of connector X5


3 MPI_BB

8 MPI_AB

Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection be-tween the distributor box and the earth potential.

17.3.2 Distribution box for 4-core enabling cable(Order No. 6FX2006-1BH01)

10.5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

X5

X4

X3

Equipotentialbondingconnection

11 12 13 141526 hole forM25connector

X5

X3

Rating plate

34

X4

120

110

52

50

10090

36.5

Fig. 17-7 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Location of interfaces and terminal blocks

The 24 V power supply is connected to terminal block X3.

Terminal 9 UbTerminal 10 GND

The HT 6 is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distributor box bymeans of the HT 6 cable.

MPIinterface(X5)

Connecting theequipotentialbonding


24 V supply for theHT 6

Connecting theHT 6




Note

When drilling a hole (e.g. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal, therequirements of degree of protection IP54 must be complied with.

The distributor box is connected to the appropriate interface via MPI bus termi-nal X5, e.g. on the MPI bus.

The EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to terminal block X3 (see illustra-tion below).

Terminal Assignment

1EMERGENCY STOP contact 1

Input


Output


Input


Output


12 2

X4

Enabling button

X33 4 5 6 7 8

Ub GND

9 101 11 13

2.1 2.21.1 1.2 1.1 2.1 2.2

X1015 10 15 9 8 13

HT 6

3 4

HT 6 cable6FX2002-1AA23

Distributor box6FX2006-1BH01

1 2

14

1.2

Cableconnector

Fig. 17-8 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Connection to the HT 6

Connection toMPI bus


Connecting theenabling button(four-core)





Connector designation: X3Connector type: Terminal block for 1.5 mm2

Table 17-8 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: X3 pin assignments for terminal block

Terminal Signal name Signal mode Signaltype



3, ..., 6 NC Not connected



9 Ub 24V (power supply for HT 6)

10 GND M (Mext for HT 6) I

11 NA2.1 EMERGENCY STOP button (24 V, 1 A)


13 ZS2.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A)I

14 ZS1.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A)I

15 KEY2Indicator for plugged in short-circuit plug. Ifso –> 24 V

O

Connector designation: X4Connector type: Circular connector for screw connectionSpecial requirement: Interface must comply with IP54

Table 17-9 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: X4 pin assignments



2 MPI_A B

3 GND M (Mext for HT 6)I

4 Ub 24 V (power supply for HT 6)I


6 ZS2.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) I

7, 8 NC Not connected



11 KEY2Indicator for plugged in short-circuit plug. If so–> 24 V

O


13 MPI_B B


15 NC Not connected

16 ZS1.2 Enabling button (24 V, 1 A) I

17 HR_B Not connected

Terminal block(X3)

HT 6 interface (X4)




Connector designation: X5Connector type: 9-pin sub-D socket connectorMax. cable length: 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud

Table 17-10 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Pin assignment of connector X5

Pin Signal name Signal mode Signal type

3 MPI_BB

8 MPI_AB

Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection be-tween the distributor box and the earth potential.

MPIinterface(X5)



04.0417.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation



17.4 Connecting and disconnecting HT 6 during operation

Trouble-free disconnection and connection of the HT 6 during machine opera-tion requires the following:

Release or override of the HT 6 EMERGENCY STOP

Connection of the HT 6 to the OPI/MPI via a PROFIBUS repeater.

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

NCU/CCU

HT 6

Distributor

MPI/OPI

Terminating resistor closed

Terminating resistor open

Repeater RS-485

Distributor

Fig. 17-9 Connecting the HT 6 using a PROFIBUS repeater

A PROFIBUS repeater must be connected upstream of the HT 6 distributor boxfor each branch. The individual bus segments (MPI/OPI cable and/or the localsegments between repeater and HT 6) must be terminated with connector resis-tors at the ends of the bus.

The repeater can be ordered under Order No. 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0. For fur-ther information please refer to the Catalog

/IK10/ Industrial Communication Networks SIMATIC-NET

Note

The HT 6 already has an installed bus terminating resistor.

The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed 2m.

Cable lengths for MPI/OPI, see /IAD/ Start-Up Guide 840D or /IAC/ Start-UpGuide 810D, Chapter 3.

Purpose

Repeater RS 485




M (GND)

HT 6

P (24 V) M (0 V)

Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01

1 2

EMERGENCY STOP circuit (system EMERGENCY STOP)

9 10

EMERGENCY STOPbutton

11 12

24 V

Keyswitch 1) with positive-action contacts

X3

X4

1) Keyswitch consisting of

2 switching elements 3SB3400-0A and

Operator control element 3SB30 or 3SB36(appropriate safety lock as required)Catalog: Switchgear and Systems (NSK) from A&D CD

Signal to PLC 2)

Short-circuit connector

2) triggers a timer. If the signal level is still “low” after themonitoring period (approx. 5 min), the PLCmust initiate an EMERGENCY STOP.To ensure a reliable HIGH/LOW signaltransition, use a pull-down resistor ifnecessary.

10 1 12 9

10 1 12 9

X4 (distributor):

Keyswitch = ON(EMERGENCY STOP bypasspassive)HT 6 plugged in

Sample circuit

Fig. 17-10 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BC01: Sample circuit for EMERGENCY STOP override (illustration showskeyswitch set to “ON” with HT 6 connected)

Note

Please note that the customer is responsible for implementing the samplecircuits.





M (GND)

HT 6

P (24 V) M (0 V)

Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01

1 2


9 10


11 12

24 V


X3

X4

1) Keyswitch consisting of

Two switching elements 3SB3400-0A and

Operator control element 3SB30 or 3SB36(appropriate safety lock as required)Catalog: Switchgear and Systems (NSK) from A&D CD

Signal to PLC 2)

short-circuit connector

Keyswitch = ON(EMERGENCY STOP bypasspassive)HT 6 plugged in

2) triggers a timer. If the signal level is still “low” after the monitoringperiod (approx. 5 min), the PLC must initiate anEMERGENCY STOP.

To ensure a reliable HIGH/LOW signal transition,use a pull-down resistor if necessary.

4 10 1 12 9 11

10 1 12 9

3) At 24 V, when short-circuit connector is pluggedin. Can be routed to the PLC.

Signal KEY2 to PLC 3)

X4 (distributor):

4

15

11

Sample circuit

Fig. 17-11 Distributor box 6FX2006-1BH01: Sample circuit for EMERGENCY STOP override (illustration showskeyswitch set to “ON” with HT 6 connected)

Note





Keyswitch is set to “ON” position, HT 6 connection at distributor is active (incl.EMERGENCY STOP).1. Override the EMERGENCY STOP circuits of the HT 6 using the keyswitch.

2. This connects the HT 6 supply voltage and the signal to the PLC to the LOWsignal level (provide a pull-down resistor if necessary). This HIGH-LOW tran-sition starts a timer in the PLC, which opens the EMERGENCY STOP circuitvia the relevant PLC outputs and series-connected relays after the change-over period (approx. 5 min) if the keyswitch is not reset to its initial positionwithin this period.

3. The HT 6 must be removed within the changeover period and the EMER-GENCY STOP circuit overridden using a short-circuit connector.

Changeover from short-circuit connector to HT 6 connection is carried out inreverse order.

Danger

EMERGENCY STOP switches that are inactive

may not be recognizable as such

may not be accessible.

This is to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP switch from being usedinadvertently.

Sequence ofoperationsDisconnecting the

HT 6

Sequence ofoperationsConnecting the

HT 6


04.0417.5 Configuring the HT 6, setting interface parameters



17.5 Configuring the HT 6, setting interface parameters

Note

Interface parameters are configured using the IK Screen Kit.

References: /FBPH/, Configuring HT 6 Operator InterfaceIK, Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration

17.5.1 Interface signals of HT 6

MCP simulation is available for the HT 6. MCP simulation of the HT 6 must beparameterized with the function block FB1 as MCP, to enable the basic PLCprogram to monitor the HT 6 for failure.

The parameter setting for the start address n is set in the PLC user program(FB1).

Table 17-11 HT 6 interface -> PLC

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

EBFunction key block

EBn

(REF) TEACH AUTO (MDA) JOG QUIT RESET(WCS/MCS)

EB 1Function key block

EBn+1Controlpanelfunction

U4 U3 Reserved U2 U1 (INC) (REPOS)

JOG keys positive direction

IBn+2 Reserved(AXSEL1) AXSEL0 JOG6+ JOG5+ JOG4+ JOG3+ JOG2+ JOG1+

JOG keys negative direction

IBn+3 Reserved Reserved JOG6– JOG5– JOG4– JOG3– JOG2– JOG1–

IBn+4 Reserved

IBn+5 Reserved U8 U7 U6 U5 Step Reserved Reserved

EBn 6Start key block

EBn+6Reserved(HW1) * (HW0) *

Reserved ReservedSF2 SF1 START STOP *

EBn 7Feed override

EBn+7

E * D * C * B * A *

Notes:– Only the keys on light gray background are evaluated by the basic PLC program (FC26).– Only the keys on dark gray background are evaluated in FC26 from SW 6.1.– Signals shown in () brackets do not exist, but are emulated by the software (e.g. with a softkey).– Transfer of the signals to the PLC can be inhibited in the software, except for those marked with *.– Use of keys U1 to U8 and S1, S2 and their inputs can be customized by the PLC user.

Input signals




The parameter setting for the start address n is set in the PLC user program(FB1).

Table 17-12 PLC –> HT 6 interface

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

QBn WCS/MCS

QBn+1

Traversing keysfor axis system

QBn+2 (reserved) AXSEL0

QBn+3

QBn+4

QBn+5

QBn+6

QBn+7

Notes:– Signals are evaluated by the HT 6 status display.– Signals on a gray background are supplied by the basic PLC program (FC26).– The other signals may need to be supplied by the user program.

FC 26 exists analogous to PLC functions FC 19 and FC 25. It is described in References: /FB/ P3, Basic PLC Program

Machine data that specify the coding of compensation values must be set asfollows:

MD 12000: OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1

MD 12020: OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1

MD 12040: OVR_RAPID_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1

MD 12060: OVR_SPIND_IS_GRAY_CODE = 1

As standard, the following signals cannot be influenced by means of MCPemulation; they are initialized on control power-up:

Keyswitch to position 0

Spindle speed override to 0

Rapid traverse overlay to 0

The only parameters for FC 26 are “BAGNo” and “ChanNo”. That is why theinformation that is normally transmitted to the caller via the parameters “Feed-Hold” and “SpindleHold” has to be calculated by the user.

Output signals

Signals notsupported





17.5.2 Standard configuration of the HT 6 (without MCP)

For the default setting of the HT 6, the FB1 call in DB100 available on the basicprogram diskette (tool box) must be used.This call is valid for the first MCP or the HT 6.

This setting corresponds to the hardware of the HT 6 when supplied.The default setting is:

MPI address: 14

+ The parameter settings in FB1 for the handheld programming unit correspond tothose of the first MCP:MCPNum:=1 // One HT 6MCPIn:=P#E0.0 // HT 6 input signalsMCPOut:=P#A0.0 // HT 6 output signalsMCPStatRec:=P#A12.0 // Status double wordMCPStatSend:=P#A8.0 // MCPMPI:=TRUE // MCP1BusAdr:=14 //

Please note the following when using SW 05.03.04 (for 840D) or SW 03.03.04(for 810D):The following must be set while OB 100 is booting:DB8.DBB2=0, if HT 6 is configured as the first MCPDB8.DBB64=0, if HT 6 is configured as the second MCP

This is not necessary with any of the higher SW versions.

Parameterizationof basicPLC program(FB1)

PLC SW




17.6 Technical data


Safety



IP54


Electrical data

Input voltage DC 24 V (via HT 6 cable)

Current, typ. 500 mA EMERGENCY STOP/enabling but-ton: 1 A


Mechanical data

Dimensions Diameter:approx. 290 mm

Depth: 53 mm70 mm (incl. override)






5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2


Shock stressing 50 m/s2, 30 ms, 18 shocks3M2 according toEN 60721-3-3

300 m/s2, 6 ms, 18 shocks2M2 according toEN 60721-3-2




not permissible









max. 0.1 % /min

Display

Size 5.7 ” STN


Service life At ambient temperatures of > 40 °C and long periods ofnon-use, it is advisable to activate the screen saverfunction (via display machine dataDISPLAY_BLACK_TIME).


04.0417.7 Spare parts and accessories



17.7 Spare parts and accessories

17.7.1 Spare parts

The following spare parts are available for the HT 6:

Table 17-14 Spare parts for HT 6

Designation Order number Remarks

Front with keyboard 6FC5448-0AA10-0AA0 –

EMERGENCY STOP androtary override switch

6FC5447-0AA10-0AA0Kit contains both spareparts

Warning

– Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel!

– Unintentional machine movements are dangerous! We therefore strongly recommend a function test after spare partreplacement.

Instructions on how to replace spare parts can be found in Subsection 17.7.2(replacement of labeling strips).

Fig. 17-12 Front with keyboard

Note

The inner protective film on the front face must be pulled off before the newfront with keyboard is installed.

Replacing the frontwith keyboard




Caution

– Make sure your workstation complies with anti-static (ESD) guidelines!

– Wear anti-static overalls!

– Protect the display and protective glass against scratches!

1. Remove the front with keyboard (see Subsection 17.7.2 [Changing theslide-in labels], points 1. ..., 3.).

2. Remove the base of the housing by unscrewing the 8 housing screws andopen it carefully.One of these screws is located under the connecting cable cover (see pic-ture below). This cover (secured with 2 screws) must therefore be removedbeforehand.

Housing base

Housing lid

EMERGENCYSTOP cable

LCD interface cable

Override cable MPI connectingcable

Cover forconnecting cable(rear)

Fig. 17-13 HT 6 after housing has been unscrewed and opened

3. Undo the connectors on the two cables which are still connecting the hous-ing parts (EMERGENCY STOP and MPI connecting cable) and put thehousing base to one side.

4. Remove the EMERGENCY STOP switch by unscrewing the threaded ring,either manually or with a wrench (supplied by Rafi, Order No. 5.58002.019)and pull the switch out downwards.

Removing theEMERGENCYSTOP and rotaryoverride switch





EMERGENCYSTOP switch

Rear face ofhousing lid

Threaded ring

Flat gasket

Positioning pin

Fig. 17-14 Dismantled EMERGENCY STOP switch

5. Remove the override switch, backlight inverter connector and LCD ribboncable from the board (pull the latter carefully out sideways when the clamp-ing frame has been removed; see Fig. 17-16).

EMERGENCYSTOP switch

LCD ribbon cable

Override connector

Backlight inverterconnector

Override rotary switch(covered)

Fig. 17-15 Rear view of housing lid after housing base has been removed

Clamping frameof socket

Fig. 17-16 Releasing (left) and attaching (right) a membrane connector(on the OP 012)

6. Undo the 8 fixing screws in the board.

7. Pull the board carefully upwards off the housing lid and turn the lid over. Caution: Protect the plug connectors on the rear against damage!

8. Unscrew the nut securing the rotary override switch (12 mm A/F) and pullthe switch out downwards.




Sealing ring

Fastening nutA/F 12

Fig. 17-17 Dismantled rotary override switch

Install the unit by following the same procedure in the reverse order, but notethe following points:

Note

EMERGENCY STOP switch– Hole in flat gasket must be centered over the positioning pin.– Positioning pin must latch into hole in housing.– Torque for threaded ring: 0.8 Nm.

Rotary override switch:– Make sure that the sealing ring is seated correctly.– When fitted, the cable must be pointing towards the edge of the housing and

folded so that it remains inside the housing seal.– Torque for fastening nut: 0.7 Nm.

Board:– Before installation the backlight inverter cable must be connected and

the ribbon cable threaded through the slit in the board.– Place the board in position vertically, making sure that you do not bend the

plug connectors.– Tighten the board fastening screws (torque: 0.8 Nm).– Connect the cable again (carefully push in the ribbon cable as far as the stop,

then secure with the clamping frame).

Front with keyboard:– Install as described in Subsection 17.7.2 (procedure for changing the

slide-in labels, point 6).– Push the override knob (in zero position) onto the axis and tighten the

screws.– Fit the cover to the override knob.

Housing:– Place base on lid, making sure that seal is correctly seated.– Screw together with a torque of 0.8 Nm

Fitting theEMERGENCYSTOP and rotaryoverride switch





17.7.2 Accessories

The following accessories are available for the HT 6:

Table 17-15 Accessories for HT 6

Designation Order number Remarks

Distributor incl. short-circuitconnector

6FX2 006-1BH01 for 4-core enabling

Connecting cable for distribu-tor 6FX2006-1BC01

6FX2 002-1AA83-10for 3-core enabling, lengthmax. 40 m

Connecting cable for distribu-tor 6FX2006-1BH01

6FX2 002-1AA23-10for 4-core enabling, lengthmax. 40 m

Slide-in labels––– (included in HT 6scope of supply)

for user labeling (seeabove)

In the case of the HT 6, the traverse and function keys U1, ..., U8 (seeFig. 17-2) can be labeled by the customer as required.

Changing the slide-in labels

The labeling strips can be replaced after the HT 6 front with keyboard has beendisassembled (Fig. 17-18, right).

Note

The deinstalled front with keyboard must be totally protected from soiling,otherwise the readability of the display and key labels can be permanentlyaffected.

If the inner face becomes dirty, any dirt must be carefully removed using anIsopropanol cleansing agent or a cellulose cloth soaked in Isopropanol.

Slide-in labels




Knob of rotaryoverride switch

Clamping lugs(2 of 4)

Film labels

Groove for levering offthe front and keyboard

Flat connector

Cover

Fig. 17-18 Changing the slide-in labels

Procedure

1. Deinstall knob for rotary override switch in the zero position (Fig. 17-18, left):

– Lever off the cover plate with a flat-ended tool (screwdriver),– Release expansion screw with screwdriver,– Pull knob off the spindle.

2. Depress the four clamping lugs and lever off the front with keyboard by in-serting e.g. a screwdriver in the grooves in the handhold (Fig. 17-18, right).

3. Pull out flat connector carefully vertically.

4. Turn front with keyboard round and pull out labeling films (if fitted).

5. Push in the new labeling strips.

6. When replacing the front with keyboard, plug in the flat connector verticallytaking care not to bend the protruding pins in the base and latch the cover inplace applying gentle pressure.

7. Install the override button following the previous steps in reverse order:– Replace with pointer at zero.– Clamp with expanding screw.– Put on the cover.

Labeling the slide-in labels

You can also make your own slide-in labels from normal paper(80 g/m2).

The dimensions (in mm) can be obtained from Fig. 17-19. The crosses indicatethe center of the text or symbol.





Slide-in labels fortraversing keys

Slide-in labels forfunction keys

14,7

Fig. 17-19 Dimensional drawing for labeling the slide-in labels



Handheld Unit and Distributor Box

18.1 Handheld unit B-MPI

SIEMENS

%5060

708090

1001100102030

40

A

B

CD

IF

G

H

I

J

K

A

114 110

252

77

Fig. 18-1 Handheld unit

A EMERGENCY STOP button, two-channelB Two-line digital display 2 x 16 charactersC 20 keys freely assignable by userD 16 LEDs freely controllable by userE Keyswitch with On/Off positionF Override switch with 12 positionsG Electronic handwheelH Connecting cable, 10 m, or max. 3.5 m as a coiled cableI 2 enabling buttons designed as 2-position, 2-channel switchesJ Magnetic clampK Suspension lug

Operating anddisplay elements

18

04.0418.1 Handheld unit B-MPI



Key symbols The key symbols are on a slide-in label that can be changed as necessary.

The labeling strip is located between the PCB and the front of the housing andcan be accessed from the right.

To change the labeling strip, proceed as follows.

Remove the labeling strip carefully to approx. halfway using flat pliers.

Slide half of the new labeling strip under the old one.

Remove the old labeling strip and slide the new one in to its final position.

Magnetic clamp The magnetic clamp is not intended for permanent fixing of the HHU to the per-pendicular sheet metal parts.

Caution

The HHU cannot be connected using the MPI cable 6FX2002-4EA04-IAF0(or other lengths), since the bus terminators are integral components of thiscable. Please use the MPI cable specified in the catalogReferences: /Z/ Catalog NCZ

If the connection between the HHU and the distributor box is interrupted(HHU cable pulled out), an emergency stop is triggered. There is noautomatic EMERGENCY STOP overriding.

The handheld unit and the distributor are offered in two wiring versions.

1. In the version with 2-channel enable keys and 3-core connection of thesekeys.

2. In the version with 2-channel enable keys and 4-core connection of thesekeys.In this version, monitoring for cross short-circuit in the enable circuit is pos-sible.

Due to modified connector design, these HHUs can only be operated on thedistributor designed for the corresponding mode. In the version with 4-core con-nection of the enable keys, the connector insert of the connector is arrangedcoded at an angle of 45to avoid destruction of the unit by accidental wrongconnection.

Changing thelabeling strip

HHU variants

18 Handheld Unit and Distributor Box

04.0418.2 Block diagram of HHU and distributor box


18.2 Block diagram of HHU and distributor box

LEDs Keys Digital

display

Rotaryswitch

Keyswitch

Enablingbutton

Distri-butor

MPI bus

EMERGENCYSTOP

Enabling button

Handwheel pulses

24V DC

Male connector

EMER-GENCYSTOP

HHU

MPI sub-module

DIP switch

Hand-wheel

Fig. 18-2 Block diagram of HHU and distributor box

The HHU is connected to the distributor box, connector X4. The EMERGENCYSTOP button, enabling buttons and handwheel signals are not transmitted tothe PLC but decoupled in the distributor box terminal block X3. Power supply tothe HHU is via the distributor box. All other signals are transmitted to the PLCvia the MPI/OPI bus.

Note

Bus terminating resistors are integral components of the HHU.

A maximum of two handheld units may be connected per bus segment.

Further HHUs may be connected using repeaters.

Connection todistributor box


04.0418.3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation



18.3 Plugging and unplugging HHU during operation

Trouble-free plugging and unplugging of the HHU during machine operationrequires:

activation and deactivation of the power supply to the distributor box,

release or override of the EMERGENCY STOP switch of the HHU,

connection of the HHU to the OPI/MPI via PROFIBUS repeater.

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

NCU/CCU

HHU

Distributor

MPI/OPI



Repeater RS-485

Distributor

Fig. 18-3 Connecting the HHU via PROFIBUS repeater

A PROFIBUS repeater must be connected upstream of the HHU distributor boxfor each branch. The individual bus segments (MPI/OPI line and/or the repeaterand HHU) must be terminated with terminating resistors at the ends of the bus.

The repeater can be ordered under the number 6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0. For further information please refer to the Catalog


Note

The HHU already has an installed bus terminating resistor.

The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed2 m.

Purpose

Repeater RS-485




A keyswitch with two positions and two contacts must be installed at each HHUconnection point.

EMERGENCY STOPterminals

M(GND)

HHU

P (24V) M (0V)

Distributor box for HHU

Circular connector forconnecting the HHU

1 2


9 10


11 12

24V


X3

X4

1) Keyswitch consisting of 2 switching elements 3SB3400-0A and operator control element 3SB30 or 3SB36(appropriate safety lock as required)Catalog: Switching devices and systems (NSK) at A&D CD

Sample circuit

Signal to PLCtriggers a monitoring timer. If the signal level is still “low”after the monitoring period(approx. 5 min), the PLCmust initiate anEMERGENCY STOP.

Keyswitch = ON(EMERGENCY STOP passive)HHU connected

Fig. 18-4 Sample circuit for emergency stop override (illustration shows keyswitch set to “ON” with HHU connected)

Note






Initial state

Keyswitch is set to “OFF” position, HHU connection at distributor is passive.

EMERGENCY STOP terminals to the HHU are short-circuited.

Signal “HHU Stop” = 1 (or “HHU”=0), end communication.

1. Plug in the HHU connector and tighten the screwsThe EMERGENCY STOP on the HHU must be released.

2. Set keyswitch to “ON”, active. HHU is activated.

3. Signal “HHU Stop” = 0, communication commences with the HHU.

Initial state

Keyswitch is set to “ON” position, HHU connection at distributor is active (incl.EMERGENCY STOP).

Set keyswitch to “OFF”, passive position.

Signal “HHU Stop” = 0 switchover to 1 (end communication).

HHU has no voltage and goes into passive mode.

EMERGENCY STOP of HHU is short-circuited.

1. Loosen the HHU connector and unplug it.

2. The keyswitch is required for reasons of security, to ensure that an EMER-GENCY STOP is triggered if an attempt is made to activate the HHU while itis not connected.

Danger

EMERGENCY STOP switches that are inactive

may not be recognizable as such

may not be accessible.

This is to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP button (e.g. on the HHU) from beingused inadvertently.

Sequence ofoperationsConnecting the

HHU

Sequence ofoperationsDisconnecting the

HHU


04.0418.4 Operating more than one HHU


18.4 Operating more than one HHU

If more than one HHU is to be connected to a bus segment, or if the HHU can-not be connected at the end of the bus, a PROFIBUS repeater is recommendedfor the connection of the HHUs.

OFF

ON

OFF OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

NCU/CCU

HHU

Distributor

MPI/OPI



OFF

ON

MCP

Repeater RS-485HHU

Distributor

Fig. 18-5 Connecting the HHU via repeater

The repeater can be ordered under Order No. 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0. For fur-ther information please refer to the Catalog


Note

If HHUs are connected to the ends of the bus, the repeaters may be omittedsince the HHU already contains an installed bus terminating resistor.

The cable length from the repeater to the distributor box must not exceed2 m.

Cable lengths for MPI/OPI, see /IAD/ Start-Up Guide 840D or /IAC/ Start-UpGuide 810D, Chapter 3.

For further information about simultaneous operation of several HHUs on oneNCU, please refer to the Description of Functions, Basic Machine, Part 1,Chapter “Basic PLC Program” (P3), Section “Configurability of machine controlpanel, handheld unit”, subheading “Switchover of MPI, OPI address”.

Purpose

Repeater RS 485


04.0418.5 HHU control elements and interface



18.5 HHU control elements and interface

EMERGENCY STOP button, NC contact, 24V/2A contact load

Press the red button in emergency situations:

1. if life is at risk,

2. when there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.

As a rule, when operating the EMERGENCY STOP button, all drives arebrought to a standstill with max. braking torque.


For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP:See machine tool manufacturer’s instructions!


HHU

Distributor 1 2

X4

Enabling button

X33 4 5 6

Handwheel

A BA B

7 8

EMERGENCY STOP

24V 0V

9 1011 12 13

2.1 2.2 1.1 1.2 ZS1 ZS2 COM

Fig. 18-6 Internal circuit of EMERGENCY STOP button, handwheel, enabling buttons3-core

Description ofcontrol elements

Internal circuit ofHHU anddistributor boxwith 3-coreconnection ofenabling button


04.0418.5 HHU control elements and interface



HHU

Distributor1 2

X4

Enabling button

X33 4 5 6

Handwheel

A BA B

7 8

EMERGENCY STOP

24V 0V

9 1011 12 13

2.1 2.2 1.1 1.2

14 15

ZS

1.2ZS

2.2

Key2ZS

2.1

ZS

1.1

Fig. 18-7 Internal circuit of EMERGENCY STOP button, handwheel, enabling buttons4-core

The enabling buttons are designed as 2-position switches and are located atthe left and right of the handheld unit. The keys are NO contacts and connectedin parallel. They are two-channel keys. Connection 3- or 4-core, depending ontype. A 4-core connection allows cross short-circuit monitoring in the enablecircuit.

24 V/2 A contact load.

The electronic handwheel supplies two tracks with rectangular signal. The sig-nals can be tapped from the distributor box and taken to the NCU connectorX121 via the cable distributor.

Keyswitch with two positions is transmitted to the PLC.

Switch with 12 positions is transmitted to the PLC.

20 keys are transmitted to the PLC and are freely assignable by the user. Thelabeling symbols can be changed (unscrew HHU).

16 LEDs in the keys, freely controllable via the PLC.

2-tier digital display, each with 16 characters controlled via the PLC.

The HHU is connected to the distributor box via the connecting cable (either acoiled cable with max. length 3.5 m or a 10 m connecting cable).

The EMERGENCY STOP button and the enable keys, as well as handwheelsignals and power supply are connected to terminal block X3.

Internal circuit ofHHU anddistributor boxwith 4-coreconnection ofenabling button

Enabling button

Handwheel

Keyswitch

Override switch

Keys

LED

Digital display

Connecting cable

Interface todistributor box


04.0418.6 Technical data for HHU



18.6 Technical data for HHU

Table 18-1 Technical data for HHU

Electrical data

Power supply 24 V

Power consumption approx. 250 mA

EMERGENCY STOP button 24 V 2 A NC contact

Enabling buttons designed as2-position switches

24 V 2 A 2 parallel NOcontacts

Electrical handwheel 2 tracks 500 mA TTL level

General data

Keyswitch 2 positions ON/OFF

Override switch 12 positions

Connecting cable 3.5 m or 10 m long

Mechanical data

Dimensions Height Width Depth

252 mm 114 mm 110 mm

Weight 1.2 kg without connecting cable

Ambient conditions

Temperature ranges Application/op-eration

Transportation/Storage

0 ... 55 C –20 ... 60 C

Temperature rate of change within 1 minute max. 0.2 K

Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721–3–3, Class 3K5

Within 1 minute max. 0.1 %

Protective class IP65


04.0418.7 Settings in the HHU


18.7 Settings in the HHU

The software version of the HHU is displayed after booting as long as the HHUis not communicating with the PLC.

Example: Display on the HHU

Waiting for PLC

V04.01.01 F / 1.5 M *)

→ SW version of HHU is V04.01.01→ Bus address of HHU is Fhex (15dec) *) Display switches→ Baud rate of HHU is 1.5 MBaud between F and 1.5 M

To set the bus parameters and the IDLE time, two quadruple DIP switches areprovided on the basic module of the HHU.

The HHU must be opened for access to the DIP switches.

Note

Open the device only if the HHU connector has been previously removed!

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

123412

4ON OFF

S1

S2

ON OFF

S1

S2

via DIPswitch

1.5 Mbaud

BusAddress15

IDLE time100 ms

1

2

3

4

ON OFFSetting for baud

rate and bus address

Keyswitch pos.not used

1

2

3

4S2

Keyswitch pos.not used

S1

Switch settings

viadisplay *)

____________________________*) from SW V04.01.01

3

Fig. 18-8 DIP switches in the HHU

Displaying theHHU’s softwareversion

DIP switch


04.0418.7 Settings in the HHU



Table 18-2 Settings on switches S1 and S2 in HHU

Meaning S11

S12

S13

S14

S21

S22

S23

S24

Setting thebaud rate and

via display(SW 4.1.1 only)

on

baud rate andbus address via DIP switches (all

SW versions)off

IDLE time *) 100 msecs off onIDLE time *) 100 msecs off on

Baud rate *)1.5 Mbaud on

Baud rate *)187.5 kbaud off

Bus address *) 1514131211109876543210

ononononononononoffoffoffoffoffoffoffoff

ononononoffoffoffoffononononoffoffoffoff

ononoffoffononoffoffononoffoffononoffoff

onoffonoffonoffonoffonoffonoffonoffonoff

As-deliveredstate

SW V01.01.02 off on on off on on on onstate(Default) SW V04.01.01 off on on on on on on on

*) If S1.4 = on and SW version V04.01.01: Switch has no function

Note

The maximum possible transmission rate for SINUMERIK 810D is 187.5kbaud. Therefore set switch S1.3 to “off” before start-up.

With switch position S1.4 = on and software version V04.01.01, busaddresses from 0 to 31 can be set, i.e. up to 32 nodes can be supported onthe OPI/MPI.

Bus addresses that are already assigned are preceded by the * characteron the display.

Meaning of DIPswitches


04.0418.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters


18.8 Configuring the HHU, setting the interface parameters

It is necessary to set the GD parameters for the submodule to communicate viathe MPI interface. The setting can be activated in the boot phase (while waitingfor the first GD message frame) from the PLC (“Waiting for PLC” status) via the

operator interface of the HHU using the key combination Jog (top left out-

side) and T2 T2

(top right outside). The individual parameters are then inter-rogated via the HHU display and entered via the HHU keyboard. The defaultvalues can be changed within the permissible value range by means of keys +

and -. The Automatic key selects the next parameter. Selection of thenext parameter causes the preceding parameter to be stored in the flashEPROM. The parameters need therefore only be set during start-up and wheninterfaces are changed. If interface parameter assignment is not activated afterpower On, the stored values are accepted or the default values (see table) areloaded.

HHUAS 315(PLC)

Send

Receive

Fig. 18-9 Sending and receiving seen from the HHU

There are separate GD parameters for sending and receiving.

GD 1 . 1 . 1

Object number

GBZ number (global identifier number)

GD circle number (global data number)

Fig. 18-10 Meaning of GD parameters

Note

The GD parameters of the HHU and AS315 or PLC block FB1/0B100 must beset identically.

Meaning of GDparameters





Table 18-3 Value range for the GD parameters on the HHU

Designation Display Defaultvalue

Valuerange

Receive GD circle no. Rec-GD-No: 2 1-16

Receive global identifiernumber

Rec-GBZ-No: 1 – (fixed)

Object number for re-ceive global identifiernumber

Rec-Obj-No: 1 – (fixed)

Transmit GD circle no. Send-GD-No: 2 – (fixed)

Transmit GI no. Send-GBZ-No: 2 – (fixed)

Object number for sendglobal identifier number

Send-Obj-No: 1 – (fixed)

In software ver-sion 4 and higher

Baud rate Baud rate: 1.5 M(baud)

187.5 /1.5M

Bus address Bus address: 15 0–31

18.8.1 Interface signals for handheld unit

The FC13 “HHUDisp” supports operation of the LCD display. For a detailed de-scription, please refer to:

References: /FB/, P3, “Basic PLC Program”.

Note

The customer is responsible for programming the transfer of key signals to theinterface in a PLC user program.

Layout of keys and LEDs

T21 T11 T2

T7

T16

T12

T13

T14

T1 T6 T21 T11

T3 T8 T22 T12

T4 T9 T23 T13

T5 T10 T24 T14

T2

T7

T16

T15

a) Standard inscription b) Numbered keys

Fig. 18-11 HHU control keys

PLC module

User interface




You can tap the signals for the keys, feedrate override switch, keyswitch andacknowledgment of the digital display at the input area. The address range isset by parameter assignment with STEP7 tools.

ByteNo. Input signals to PLC

Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

EBm

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

EBm + 1

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

EBm + 2

Feedstart

user-as-signable

key

AUTO-MATIC

NC Stop Spindlestop

Feedstop

user-as-signable

keyJOG

m + 2T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1

EBm + 3

user-as-signable

key

Hand-wheel

user-as-signable

key

user-as-signable

key

user-as-signable

key

user-as-signable

keyNC Start Spindle

startm + 3

T16 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9

EBm +4

Directionkey –

Rapid tra-verse

override

Directionkey +

user-as-signable

keym +4T24 T23 T22 T21

EBAcknow-ledgment

di it lKey-

Rapid traverse/feedrate override switch

m + 5g

digitaldisplay

yswitch

I D C B A

Tx = 1 key pressedTable 18-4

Setting % EDCBA

1 0 00001

2 10 00100

3 20 01100

4 30 01101

5 40 01111

6 50 01110

7 60 01010

8 70 01011

9 80 01000

10 90 11001

11 100 11010

12 110 11111

0 (horizontal position) 1 (vertical position)

Input image ofhandheld unit

HHU rotary selector switchsettings

HHU keyswitch





The signals for controlling the LEDs, HHU mode, display signals and digital dis-play are present at the output area.

L1

L3

L4

L5

L6

L8

L9

L10

L11 L2

L12 L7

L13

L14

L16

L15

Fig. 18-12 Control keys with integrated LEDs in HHU

ByteNo. Output signals to HHU


OBm 1

OBm + 1

New datafor se-

lected line

Selec-tion line

OBm + 2 L 8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1

OBm + 3 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9

Lx = 1 LED lights up

Output image ofhandheld unit




Control of the digital display in the HHU

ByteNo. Output signals to HHU


OB Default setting of 1st character (right) of selected lineOBm + 4

OB Default setting of 2nd character of selected lineOBm + 5

OB Default setting of 3rd character of selected lineOBm + 6

OB Default setting of 4th character of selected lineOBm + 7




OB Default setting of 8th character of selected lineOBm +11








OB Default setting of 16th character (left) of selected lineOBm + 19

Output image ofdigital display





Note

The value of the output byte QBm bit 7 must always be 1!This sets the output mode of the display.

The digital display is used as a 2-line alphanumeric display with 16 digits perline. The display data are coded according to the character set given in the ASCIIcode table for the digital display via the QBm + 4...19 bytes. The decimal pointis a separate character. The display always starts line by line right-justified withthe byte QBm + 4 and is built up towards the left up to QBm + 19.

QBm + 1, Bit 0This bit is used to select the line to be written.Bit 0 = 0: The 1st line is selected.Bit 0 = 1: The 2nd line is selected.

QBm + 1, Bit 7This bit is used to request writing in of new data into a line. The bit is set by theuser program and can be reset on detection of the acknowledgment bit IBm + 5,bit 7.Bit 7 = 0: Reset requestBit 7 = 1: Set request

IBm + 5, Bit 7This bit is set by the system after the new data has been accepted.Bit 7 = 0: No new dataBit 7 = 1: New data has been accepted

18.8.2 Example signal chart

Example of a signal chart when writing data for two lines

1. Selecting the line with QBm + 1, bit 0.

2. Writing new data with QBm + 4...19.

3. Set request: New data for selected line QBm + 1, bit

4. Acknowledgment digital display IBm + 5, bit 7, via system.

5. Reset request

Display

Selecting the line

New data forselected line

Acknowledgmentof digital display

Example signalchart




Note

The request must be reset before a new line is written!

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1.

2.

3.

4.

Upper line

Lower line

Data for upper line Data for lower line

a : PLC user sets signal and waits for acknowledgmentb : System sets acknowledgmentc : User resets requestd : System resets acknowledgement

a

b

Selecting the line

Writing new data

Requirement: New data

Acknowledgement digital

dc

a

b

dc

display

Fig. 18-13 Signal chart example for writing data into the HHU display

Representation of characters on specification of the corresponding bit pattern orhexadecimal format in the bytes QBm + 4...19. The characters from Hex 20 toHex 7F are default values.

ASCII code fordigital display





Table 18-5 ASCII coding for HHU display

0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Bit 7...4

20H 30H 40H 50H 60H 70H A0H B0H C0H D0H E0H F0H Bit 3 ... 0

0000

21H 31H 41H 51H 61H 71H A1H B1H C1H D1H E1H F1H

0001


0010


0011


0100


0101


0110


0111


1000


1001

2AH 3AH 4AH 5AH 6AH 7AH AAH BAH CAH DAH EAH FAH

1010

2BH 3BH 4BH 5BH 6BH 7BH ABH BBH CBH DBH EBH FBH

1011

2CH 3CH 4CH 5CH 6CH 7CH ACH BCH CCH DCH ECH FCH

1100

2DH 3DH 4DH 5DH 6DH 7DH ADH BDH CDH DDH EDH FDH

1101

2EH 3EH 4EH 5EH 6EH 7EH AEH BEH CEH DEH EEH FEH

1110

2FH 3FH 4FH 5FH 6FH 7FH AFH BFH CFH DFH EFH FFH

1111


04.0418.9 Distributor box for handheld unit


18.9 Distributor box for handheld unit

The handheld unit is connected to the distributor box.The distributor box is designed for installation in the control cabinet or in a sepa-rate housing.The distributor box has an interface to the MPI bus and a terminal block for con-necting the EMERGENCY STOP button, the enabling buttons, the handwheeland the 24 V power supply. The equipotential bonding connector is also ar-ranged at the distributor box. Equipotential bonding has to be made using alow-resistance connection between the distributor box and the earth potential.The equipotential bonding conductor should be a stranded cable having across-section of at least 10 mm2 and a length of less than < 30 cm, if possible.

References: /PHF/ Configuring, Manual/PHD/ Configuring, Manual

The distributor box is available both in standard version and in a UL-certifiedversion. In conjunction with the UL-certified distributor box, HHU and HT 6 areUL-certified for USA and Canada. Both variants of the distributor box are me-chanically installation-compatible and electrically connection-compatible.

The distributor must be designed for 3-core or 4-core connection of the enablekeys, depending on the HHU used.

The 24VDC power supply is connected to terminal block X3, terminals 9 and 10.

The HHU is connected to the X4 screw connection on the distributor box. Whendrilling a hole (e.g. into a housing) for the X4 screw terminal, the requirements ofdegree of protection IP54 must be complied with.

The distributor box is connected to the relevant interface (e.g. to the MPI bus forFM-NC, 810D, 840D or to the OPI - possible only for 840D) via the X5 MPI busconnection.

The first channel of the EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to the X3 ter-minal block, terminals 1 and 2. The second channel of the EMERGENCY STOP button is connected to the X3terminal block, terminals 11 and 12.

The electronic handwheel can be connected to terminal block X3, terminals 3 to6. If the handwheel is to be connected to the NCU, a connection must be madeto the cable distributor.

The enabling buttons are connected to terminal block X3.

Equipotential bonding has to be made using a low-resistance connection be-tween the distributor box and the earth potential. The equipotential bonding con-ductor should be a stranded cable having a cross-section of at least 10 mm2

and a length of less than < 30 cm, if possible.

Distributor boxand HHU

Versions of thedistributor box

Connecting the24VDC powersupply

Installing thedistributor box

Connecting theMPI bus or OPI


Connecting thehandwheel

Connecting theenabling button






Caution

The 2nd channel of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit may be connected only if a2-channel handheld unit is used,i.e. 6FX2007-1AC01 or 6FX2007-1AC11 and

6FX2007-1AC02 or 6FX2007-1AC12 and6FX2007-1AC03 or 6FX2007-1AC13 and6FX2007-1AE03 or 6FX2007-1AE13

10.5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

X5

X4X3

11 12 13 141526 hole forM25connector

X5

X3

34

X4

120

110

52

50

36.5

Front view Side view

Equ

ipot

entia

l bo

ndin

g co

nnec

tion

10090

X111

X121

Fig. 18-14 Distributor box for MPI and MPC bus

X111 and X121 exist only in the 3-core connection version of the enable but-tons.X3/terminals 14/15 exist only in the 4-core connection version of the enablebuttons.

For link to MPC bus.The distributor box can be used for the MPI or the MPC bus.

Terminal block for HHU control elementsTerminal block designation X3Terminal block Terminals for 1.5 mm2

Table 18-6 Assignment of terminal block X3 with enable key, 3-core

Pin Signal, name Signal type

1 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 (24V, 2A) I, input

2 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.2 (24V, 2A) O, output

3 / 4 Handwheel track A / handwheel track A I/O, bidirec-5 / 6 Handwheel track B / handwheel track B

I/O, bidirectional

7 / 8 Enable key ZS1 (24V, 2A) / Enable key ZS2 (24V, 2A) O, output


X111, X121

X3





Pin Signal typeSignal, name

9 24V (power supply for HHU)

10 0V (Mext for HHU) I, input

11 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.1 (24V, 1A)

p


13 Enabling button ZS1 (24V, 2A) I, input



1 EMERGENCY STOP button 1.1 (24V, 2A) I, input


3 / 4 Handwheel track A / handwheel track A I/O,5 / 6 Handwheel track B / handwheel track B

I/O,bidirectional

7 / 8 Enable button ZS1.1 (24V, 2A) / Enable button ZS2.1 (24V, 2A) O, output

9 24V (power supply for HHU)

10 0V (Mext for HHU) I, input

11 EMERGENCY STOP button 2.1 (24V, 1A)

p


13/14 Enable button ZS 2.2 / Enable button ZS 1.2 I, input

15 Key 2 Not as-signed

BHG interfaceConnector designation X4Connector type Circular connector for screw connectionSpecial requirement Interface must comply with IP54

Signal names

EMERGENCY STOP buttonEMERGENCY STOP buttonProtective conductorEnabling buttonEnabling button+24V0VHandwheel track AHandwheel track AHandwheel track BHandwheel track BMPI bus cables

MPI interfaceConnector designation X5Connector type 9-pin sub-D socket connectorMax. cable length 200 mSpecial feature Electrical isolation

X4

X5





Table 18-8 Pin assignment of connector X5

X5

Pin Name Type Pin Name Type

1 / 2 Not assigned 6 P5 VO

3 RS_KP B 7 Not assigned

4 RTSAS_KP O 8 XRS_KP B

5 M (GND) VO 9 RTSPG_KP I

Signal names

RS_KP, XRS_KP differential RS485 data - C bus from PLCRTSAS_KP Request to Send AS - C bus from PLCRTSPG_KP Request to Send PG - C bus from PLCM GroundP5 5 V

Signal type

B Bidirectional O OutputVO Voltage Output I Input

The interference currents are earthed via the shield plates. To prevent thesedischarged currents from becoming a source of interference themselves, makesure that the path of the interference currents to earth is of low-resistance.

Securely tighten all fixing screws of cable connectors, modules and cablesreferred to a potential.

Make sure that all contacting areas of cables referred to a potential are pro-tected against corrosion.

Use short potential reference cables of < 30cm and a cross section of 10mm2.

In order to avoid capacitive charges on unused cable cores, the unusedcores of the EMERGENCY STOP and enabling buttons (terminalsNAUS1.1, NAUS1.2, NAUS2.1, NAUS2.2, ZS1, ZS2, ZUSTICO) must beconnected to the equipotential bonding terminal.

EMC measures




18.10 Spare parts

The following spare parts are available:

Table 18-9 Spare parts HHU

Designation Length Connector Coding Remarks Ident No.(EuchnerOrder No.,see below)

Coiled cable 3.5 m 17-pin0

for 6FX2007-1AB03...-1AC03

075384Coiled cable 3.5 m 17 pin

45 for 6FX2007-1AE03 078999

Straight cable 10 m 17-pin0

for 6FX2007-1AB13...-1AC13

075385Straight cable 10 m 17 pin

45 for 6FX2007-1AE13 079000

Terminator,for 3-core ZS circuits

for 6FX2006-1BC01...1BF00

075910

Terminator,for 3-core ZS circuits,permanently attachedwith chain

17-pin 0 for 6FX2006-1BC01

...1BF00072764

Terminator,for 4-core ZS circuits,permanently attachedwith chain

17-pin 45 for 6FX2006-1BH01 078952

Keyswitch Complete 072604

Spare key for Key-operated switch 075387

EMERGENCY STOP switch, turn to resetwith 1 NC contact

Replacement for oldHHUs6FX2007-1Axx0

052958

EMERGENCY STOP switch, pull to reset,2-channel, tamper-proof

Replacement for newHHUs6FX2007-1Axx1 andthe following

073985

Handwheel (encoder HKD100V100A05) with ribbon cable 057036

Setting wheel C1702 (operating wheel) for handwheel 071380

Cover for keyboard 075772

Slide-in plastic stripsSet, 1 x printed,1 x unprinted

075909

Override stepper switch, 12-way gray-coded 077097

Rotary button for override stepper switch with arrow dial 073973

For detailed description, see Prodis, article no. 490 700 4 dated 18.5.2000.

Euchner GmbH + CoVertrieb TechnikKohlhammerstr. 16D-70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen

Telephone +49 711 7597-0Fax +49 711 7597 303

Order address






Notes


Mini Handheld Unit

19.1 Dimensions and control elements

A

B

C

H

D

F

G

I

I88 83.5

20 60 108

216

Fig. 19-1 Mini handheld unit

A Emergency stop button, two-channelB Enabling button, two-channelC Axis selection switch for 5 axes and neutral positionD Function keys F1, F2, F3E Traversing keys, +, –F Rapid traverse button for rapid traverse with traversing keys or handwheelG HandwheelH Magnetic clamps for fixing to metal componentsI 1.5 m–3.5 m connecting cable

Operatingelements

19

04.0419.1 Dimensions and control elements



19.1.1 General

The mini handheld unit (Mini HHU) is a small easy-to-handle unit for setting upand operating simple machines in the JobShop area or similar applications.Special attention has been paid to ergonomics and logical operating in the de-sign of the housing and the arrangement of the control elements.

The Mini HHU is intended for connection to 810D and 840D controls. It can alsobe used with the 840C and FM-NC.

19.1.2 Description of control elements

The EMERGENCY STOP button must be operated in cases of emergency

1. when a person is at risk,


The enabling button is designed as a 2-way switch. It must be pressed to initiatetraversing movements.

The axis selection switch can be used to select up to five axes.

The function keys can be used to trigger machine-specific functions.

The +, – traversing keys can be used to trigger traversing movements at theaxis selected using the axis selection switch.

The handwheel can be used to initiate movements at the axis selected usingthe axis selection switch. The handwheel supplies two guide signals with 100I/U.

The rapid traverse button can be used to increase the traversing speed of theaxis selected using the axis selection switch. The rapid traverse button is activeboth for traversing commands issued via the +/– keys and for handwheel sig-nals.

EMERGENCYSTOP button

Enabling button

Axis selectionswitch

Function keys

Traversing keys

Handwheel

Rapid traversebutton

19 Mini Handheld Unit

04.0419.2 Circuit diagram and sample connection


19.2 Circuit diagram and sample connection

2

14

2324

12

34

56

7–X

1

1311

21

1222

0.34 mm 2wh

0.34 mm 2bn

0.34 mm 2gn

0.34 mm 2ye

0.34 mm 2gr

0.34 mm 2rs

0.34 mm 2bu

–S2

–S1

Em

ergency stopE

nabling button

EM

ER

GE

NC

Y S

TO

P/enable circuit

128

C

0.14 mm 2rd

–S3

0 – Z – X

– Y – 4 – 5

49 0.14 mm 2bk

810

0.14 mm 2vt

16C

–A2

–A2

15

34

6

23

0.14 mm 2wh–rd 2

22

0.14 mm 2bn–bu 3

21

0.14 mm 2wh–bu 5

20

0.14 mm 2rs–bn 4

19

0.34 mm 2wh–rs 1

18

0.34 mm 2gr–bn 6S

M

–B1

G

24

Axis selection

Handw

heel

Shield

0 V

+5 V

/B

B

/A

A

–B1

17

0.14 mm 2wh–gr

S6

F3

6

15

0.14 mm 2wh–ye

S5

F2

5

14

0.14 mm 2bn–gn

S4

F1

4

13

0.14 mm 2wh–gn

S3

3

12

0.14 mm 2rd–bu

S2

–

2

11

0.14 mm 2gr–rs

S1

+

1

160.14 mm 2ye–bn

78

–A1

to PLC

+24 V D

C+

–F

1F

2F

3S

M0 V

/B/A

BA

5 V D

C

0.14 mm

2bu

–A1

Fig. 19-2 Circuit diagram and sample connection


04.0419.4 Configuration



The mini HHU is connected to the PLC or the connector for handwheels via aflange socket. There is no need for an additional distributor. The signals aresent to the NC in parallel (without MPI). The flange socket is contained in theconnection kit.

19.3 Coding of axis selection switch

The coding of the axis selection switch is carried out in Gray Code.

Table 19-1 Coding of axis selection switch

Connector X1 Switch posi-tion

Function

Pin 8 Pin 9 Pin 10tion

0 0 0 – Mini HHU not connected

1 1 0 0 No axis selected

0 1 0 Z Z axis selected

0 1 1 X X axis selected

1 1 1 Y Y axis selected

1 0 1 4 Axis 4 selected

0 0 1 5 Axis 5 selected

19.4 Configuration

The FC76 module supplied in the toolbox supports configuration of the miniHHU. It is located in the toolbox in the BSP_PROG directory in the file Mi-nibhg.zip. This module is included in the toolbox in version 5.1 and later only.For example inToolbox 5.1.x(8x0d\050104\disk1\Bsp_prog\Minibhg.zip orToolbox 6.1.2(8x0d\060102\bsp_prog\Minibhg.zip.

The FC76 contains a standard program for the mini HHU and is valid for usewith SINUMERIK 840D/810D. The program is generally valid and therefore re-quires several input and output signals when called.

To avoid collisions (caused by simultaneous access to one and the same sig-nal), the FC2 (NCK-PLC interface) that occurs in the basic program must beprocessed before the FC76.


04.0419.5 Connections


19.5 Connections

A connection kit that must be ordered separately is required for connection ofthe mini HHU. This connection kit contains a 24-way flange socket for installa-tion at the machine and a dummy plug for overriding the EMERGENCY STOPcircuit when the HHU is not connected.

The 6FX2002-4AA21-1xx0 cable can be used to connect the handwheel sig-nals to the NC.

The pin contacts on the cable must be replaced with the socket contacts con-tained in the connection kit.

Connection in accordance with circuit diagram (see Fig. 19-2).

36.6 mm

39 m

m

Casing wallSealing ring

Seal

3.8mm

View of connection side

14591015

16202124

Fig. 19-3 Dimensions of the flange socket

Use the contacts supplied when connecting the cables.

20 x AMP crimp socket contactNo. 163088-2 for AWG 24–20; 0.20 – 0.56 mm2

6 x AMP crimp socket contactNo. 163092-2 for AWG 26–24; 0.12 – 0.25 mm2

Note

The crimping tool suggested should be used:

AMP crimping tool No. 169475-1 or 90277-1.

Connection kit

Connection ofhandwheel signals





19.6 Technical data

Table 19-2 Technical data for mini HHU

Control elements

Enabling button 1 x: floating

two-channel NO contact

EMERGENCY STOP button 1 x: floating

two-channel NC contact,turn to release

Axis selection switch 5 axes: X, Y, Z, 4, 5 and neutral position

Jog key + Positive traverse direction

Jog key – Negative traverse direction

Jog key Rapid traverse for jog keys and handwheel

Function keys 3 x: F1, F2, F3

Handwheel 100 I/U

Electrical data

Operating voltage for switch-ing signals

24 V

Operating voltage for hand-wheel

5 V

Power consumption 5 V approx. 90 mA

Handwheel signals RS-422

EMERGENCY STOP button 24 V 2 A NC contact

Enabling button 24 V 2 A NO contact

General data

Housing Ergonomically designed housing made from polyamide6, touch-oriented arrangement of control elements

Mounting 2 magnetic clamps

Connecting cable Coiled cable 1.5 m; extendable to 3.5 m;Connector with pin contacts

CE conformity Yes

Mechanical data

Dimensions Height Width Depth

Approx. 250 mm 110 mm 90 mm

Weight Approx. 0.8 kg without connecting cable

Ambient conditions

Temperature ranges Application/op-eration

Transportation/Storage

0 ... 55 C –20 ... 60 C

Temperature rate of change within 1 minute max. 0.2 K

Permissible change in relative humidity EN 60721-3-3, Class 3K5


Protective class IP65

Connection kit

Flange socket 24-pin with socket contacts and dummy plug

Dummy for overriding the EMERGENCY STOP circuit




19.7 Spare parts

The following spare parts are available:

Table 19-3 Spare parts for mini HHU

Designation Ident No.

Servo handwheel, 5 V DC, A/B push-pull, without dial 1009 010

Rotary selector switch, 6 positions, without dial 1009 219

EMERGENCY STOP button, complete with keyset, label and switchingelement

1009 221

Enable key, complete 1009 933

Set of control knobs, for servo handwheel, rotary selector switch andenable key

1009 227

Connection cable, coiled, wired on connector, connection end preas-sembled

1009 081

Flange-mounting socket-outlet, complete with seals and contacts 1009 084

Jumper connector, with jumpered EMERGENCY STOP contacts 1009 046

Crimp contacts

Set of crimp contact sockets,consisting of 10 x 0.12-0.25 mm2, 30 x 0.20-0.56 mm2

Set of crimp contact pins,consisting of 10 x 0.12–0.25 mm2, 30 x 0.20–0.56 mm2

1009 222

1009 223

Tool T

Ejector for crimp socket and pin contacts

Assembly tools for EMERGENY STOP button

Pressure-cap remover for enable key

0080811

1009 224

1009 217

See PRODOK, document “Current position measurement” for detailed descrip-tion.

Current No. 1999/019

Dated: 13.12.1999

R&D Steuerungstechnik GmbH + Co KGService DepartmentHocksteiner Weg 87–95D–41189 Mönchengladbach

Telephone +49 (0) 2166-5506-34Fax +49 (0) 2166-5506-55

Order address






Notes


Machine Control Panel MCP 483C

This description applies to the following Machine Control Panels:

Type Key type Order number

MCP 483C mechanical 6FC5203–0AF22–0AA0

20.1 Brief description

The machine control panel permits user–friendly control of machine functions. Itis suitable for machine–level operation of milling, turning, grinding and specialmachines.

All keys are designed with replaceable caps for machine–specific adaptations.The covers can be freely inscribed using laser. Clear key covers can be usedas an alternative.

The machine control panel is mounted from the rear with special clamping ele-ments supplied with the panel.

Operating elements

Operating modes and function keys

– 50 keys with LEDs

– Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override (key cov-ers for direction keys for turning machines supplied separately pack-aged)

– Default key assignment includes 17 freely assignable customer keys

Spindle control with spindle override (rotary switch with 16 positions)

Feed control with feed override (rotary switch with 23 positions)

Keyswitch (4 positions and 3 different keys)

Emergency stop button (2 NC contacts)

Ports: MPI interface

Expansion slots: 2 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm)

Key type: Mechanical keys

Key cap covers for the Turning version are supplied separately packaged (see“Spare parts and accessories”).

Validity

Design

Design turning

20

04.0420.2 Control elements and interfaces



20.2 Control elements and interfaces

20.2.1 Control elements on front

Front view

A B C FI G HD I J

Fig. 20-1 Machine control panel (milling version)

A: Emergency stop buttonB: Slots for control devices (d = 16 mm)C: Reset buttonD: Program controlE: Operating modes, machine functionsF: Customer-definable keys (T1 to T15)G: Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15)H: Spindle control with override switchI: Feed control with override switchJ: Keyswitch (four positions)

64 inputs (50 keys, two rotary selector switches, keyswitch with four posi-tions)

48 outputs (LEDs, assigned to the keys)

EMERGENCY STOP button (A)Press the red button in emergency situations:



Position of controlelements

Designation ofoperatingelements

Overviewoperatingelements


20 Machine Control Panel MCP 483C



An EMERGENCY STOP generally shuts down all drives with the greatest pos-sible braking torque in a controlled manner.

Turn the EMERGENCY STOP button counterclockwise to unlatch it.


For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP:Please read the information supplied by the machine tool manufacturer!

Attach cable tobutton

EMERGENCY STOP machine control

Emergency stop button

Push-onconnection

1

2

41 2

2 (4)

1 (3)

3

Connection numbering: Defaults; in brackets: Optional

Fig. 20-2 Suggested circuit for EMERGENCY STOP circuit

Warning

The openings for mounting control devices (letter B in Fig. 20-1) must not bechipped out, but drilled to the required width (risk of damage!).

Circuit forEMERGENCYSTOP button

Mounting slots forcontrol devices





20.2.2 Display and operating elements at rear

Operating and display elements (see diagram below) are located to the rear ofthe panel:

Sets e.g. baud rate, addresses and protocol (see Subsection 20.3.3)

LED1 (H1): Hardware test running. A red LED lights up to indicate a fault.

LED2 (H2): Temperature monitor: If a temperature of60°C (+/–3°C) is exceeded, a red LED lights up.

LED3 (H3): Voltage monitoring responded

LED4 (H4): During data transfer via the operator panel interface a yellow LED flashes.

Power supplyinterface X10

123M24 P24Shield

Slot for 2 additional controldevices (16 mm)

Operator panel interface(MPI) X20


LED1...4

Switch S3Customer groundingterminal

Fig. 20-3 Interfaces, operating and display elements on rear of MCP 483C

20.2.3 Interfaces

The location of the interfaces is shown in Fig. 20-3.

X10: Power supply interface

Phoenix terminal block: 3-pin, straight

X20: Operator panel interface (MPI)

Socket: 9-pin female Sub-D connector strip, straight

X30: Interface for rotary switch feed override

Plug connector, 2 x 5-pin, with lock

S3 DIP switch

Diagnostic LEDs1..4

Position ofinterfaces

Overviewof interfaces




X31: Interface for rotary switch spindle override

Plug connector, 2 x 5-pin, with lock

References: /PHF/, NCU 570 Manual/PHD/, NCU 571-573 Manual

Connector designation: X10Connector type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal block, straight


Pin Name Meaning Type

1 P24 24 V potentialV

2 M24 Ground 24VV

(Supplyvoltage)

3 SHIELD Shield connectionvoltage)

Connector designation: X20

Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socketMax. cable length: 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud (MPI connection)

Table 20-2 X20 pin assignments for machine control panel

X20

Pin Name Type Meaning

1/2 Not assigned – –

3 RS_OPI B Differential RS485 data

4 ORTSAS_OPI O Out Request to Send AS (not connected)

5 M5EXT V 5 V external ground

6 P5EXT V 5 V external potential

7 Not assigned – –

8 XRS_OPI B Differential RS485 data


Signal type

B Bidirectional V Voltage O Output I Input

Power supplyinterface

Operator panelfront interface(MPI)


04.0420.3 Mounting, connection and settings



20.3 Mounting, connection and settings

Dimension drawing

482.6

155

20.2

32.1

18.9

45.1

A

A

132.6 132.4

103.3

164.6114.7

37

95.9

37

95.81.5mm –6mm

A–A2:1

Rz

120

Mountingframe

Tension jacks9 jacks

Mounting frame

Surface quality to DIN ISO 2768-L

1)

1) Mounting slots for control devices

Fig. 20-4 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 483C




20.3.1 Mounting

The machine control panel is attached by means of 9 tension jacks (tighteningtorque 0.8 Nm; see also dimension drawing 20-4).

450+1

135+1

Fig. 20-5 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 483C

Max. 60 off vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60 a fan must addi-tionally be installed to keep the ambient temperature of the machine controlpanel constantly below 55 C.

20.3.2 Connections

The 24V supply is connected to the X10 connector at the rear of the machinecontrol panel via a 3-pin terminal block (see Fig. 20-3). The equipotential bond-ing conductor is fixed by means of an M5 screw.

The machine control panel is connected to the OPI on the NCU (X101) using anMPI bus cable via the PCU interface (MPI/DP). The MPI connector is pluggedinto X20 on the rear of the machine control panel (see Fig. 20-3) and fixed withtwo locking screws.

Tension jackfastening

Mounting position

Connecting the24 V power supply

Connecting theMPI connection(X20)





20.3.3 Settings

The following settings are possible with the S3 DIP switch (see Fig. 20-3):

Table 20-3 S3 jumpering on machine control panel

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning / value

onoff

Baud rate1.5 Mbaud187.5 kbaud

offonoff

onoffoff

Transmission cycle time200 ms100 ms50 ms

Reception monitoring2400 ms1200 ms600 ms

onoff

on

on

Bus address1514

onoff

off

on

on

1312

onoff

on

off

on1110

onoff

offoff

9 8

onoff

on

on

7 6

onoff

offon

off

5 4

onoff

on

off

off 3 2

onoff

offoff

1 0

onoff

Interface to MPI customer operator panelstandard hardware

The following default setting (840D) is suggested:

Table 20-4 Default settings S3

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning

off off on on off on off onBaud rate: 1.5 Mbaud / Transmission cycle time: 100 ms / bus address: 6 / serialhardware

The PLC expects a message frame from the machine control panel at least ev-ery 500 msecs. The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLCat cyclic intervals when no key is pressed. This cycle time is set with S3 DIPswitches 2 and 3. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machinecontrol panel to be adjusted.

Settings fortransmissioncycle time




The machine control panel receives message frames at cyclic intervals from thePLC and answers these at cyclic intervals. The receive monitoring time is linkedto the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with theS3 DIP switch (2 and 3).

The bus address for 840D must be set to “6”. Other addresses can be selected,but these must then also be set at FB1 in the basic PLC program.

Before the machine control panel can exchange data with the PLC CPU via theMPI interface, the appropriate interface parameters for the configuration mustbe activated. They are activated by means of the MPI bus address settings us-ing DIP switch S3 in accordance with the following table.

Table 20-5 Correlation between MPI bus address and GD parameters with machinecontrol panel

MPI ad-dress

Preset GD parameters Receive – Transmit

0, ..., 3 Reserved

4 5 . 1 . 1 – 5 . 2 . 1

5 5 . 1 . 1 – 5 . 2 . 1

6 Reserved

7 4 . 1 . 1 – 4 . 2 . 1

8 4 . 1 . 1 – 4 . 2 . 1

9 3 . 1 . 1 – 3 . 2 . 1

10 3 . 1 . 1 – 3 . 2 . 1

11 2 . 1 . 1 – 2 . 2 . 1

12 2 . 1 . 1 – 2 . 2 . 1

13 1 . 1 . 1 – 1 . 2 . 1

14 1 . 1 . 1 – 1 . 2 . 1

15 1 . 1 . 1 – 1 . 2 . 1

(PLC)

Send

Receive

Mac

hine

cont

rol p

anel

Fig. 20-6 Receiving and transmitting from view of machine control panel

Settings forreceive cycle time

Bus address

Interfaceparameters forcommunication viaglobal data





20.4 Technical data

Table 20-6 Technical data for machine control panel MCP 483C

Safety



Front: IP54 Keyswitch:IP54

Rear: IP00

Approvals CE

Electrical data



Mechanical data

DimensionsWidth: 483 mmHeight: 155 mm

Depth: 77 mmMounting depth: 45 mm




Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0,015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2


5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2


Shock stressing






not permissible





Temperature limiting values0 ... 45 C (to front)0 ... 55 C (to rear)

–25 ... 55 C




max. 0.1 % /min





Table 20-7 Spare part kits for machine control panel MCP 483C

Name DescriptionNum-ber

Order number

EMER-

Actuating element 16 mm EmergencyStop mushroom-head pushbutton(red)

1 3SB20 00-1AC01

EMER-GENCYSTOP

Switching element with one contact,1NO contact

1 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0STOPbutton Switching element with one contact, 1

NC contact2 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0

Holder for 2 switching elements 1 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0

Keyswitch Keyswitch with key 1 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0

Set of keys Set of keys MSTT 10 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0

Rotaryswitchspindle

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, overridespindle / rapid traverse, rotary switch1x 16G, T=24, cap, knob, pointer, dialsfor spindle and rapid traverse

6 6FC5247-0AF12-0AA0

Rotaryswitch feed

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, overridefeed / rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x23G, T=32, cap, knob, pointer, dialsfor feed and rapid traverse

6 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0

Set of ten-sion jacks

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, tension jackset for supplementary componentswith 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm

9 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0

Instructions on how to replace the handwheel, rotary switch and mouse can befound in section “15” TFT operator panel, width 416 mm, without videolink re-ceiver”.

Table 20-8 Accessories for machine control panel MCP 483C


Order number

Key cover(for labeling)

1 set of 90, ergo-gray and 20 each ofred / green / yellow / medium gray

1 6FC5248-0AF12-0AA0

Key cover(for labeling)

1 set of 90, clear 1 6FC5248-0AF21-0AA0

Key coversfor turning

supplied separately packaged with MCP

Spare parts


Accessories






Notes


Machine Control Panel MCP 483



MCP 483 Film 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA1


The machine control panel MCP 483 permits user-friendly operation of the ma-chine functions. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning,grinding and special machines.

The fifty keys and two control device slots have user-labeled slide-in strips foradapting to specific machines. A DIN-A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips isincluded in the scope of delivery.

The machine control panel is mounted from the rear with special tension jackssupplied with the panel.

Operating elements

Operating mode and function keys:

– 50 keys with LEDs

– Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override


Spindle control with rotary override switch (16 positions)

Feed control with rotary override switch (23 positions)


Emergency-off pushbutton (2 NC contacts)

Interfaces:

MPI interface / PROFIBUS DP

For 6 control devices when connected via PROFIBUS DP

For 16 direct control keys for OP 012/OP 015A/TP 015A when connectedvia PROFIBUS DP

For 2 handwheels when connected via PROFIBUS DP (max. cable length:5 m)

Expansion slots:

2 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm)

Key type:

Membrane keys

Validity

Design

21





21.2.1 Operating elements front face

Position of operating elements

A B C FE G HD I J

Fig. 21-1 Position of control elements on machine control panel MCP 483 (milling version)

A: Emergency stop buttonB: Slots for control devices (d = 16 mm)C: Reset buttonD: Program controlE: Operating modes, machine functionsF: Customer-definable keys (T1 to T15)G: Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15)H: Spindle control with override switchI: Feed control with override switchJ: Keyswitch (four positions)










21 Machine Control Panel MCP 483



Attach cable tobutton


Emergency stop button

Push-onconnection

1

2

41 2

2 (4)

1 (3)

3

Connection numbering: Defaults; in brackets: Optional


Warning


21.2.2 Operating and display elements to rear

The control and display elements on the rear of the MCP 483 are located on theCOM board (shown with a gray background in the illustration below):

X30 X31

X50

X10 X20 X60 X61 X70S1

X51, ..., X54 S3

H1, ..., H5

COM board

Equipotential bonding

Fig. 21-3 Rear of the MCP 483 showing the control and display elements and the interfaces



COM board





Setting the handwheel signal type– S1 open: TTL interface– S1 closed: Differential interface

Sets e.g. baud rate, addresses and protocol

Table 21-1 Meaning of diagnostic LEDs H1,..., H5

No. Monitoring of Effect: LED... Diagnostics

H1 Hardware lights up red Initialization error

H2 – (reserved) – –

H3 Voltage lights up green Logic voltages on board OK

H4Operator panel in-terface

flashes yellow Data transfer in progress

flashes green Ready for communication

H5 PROFIBUSlights up green Communication in progress

H5 PROFIBUS

lights up redChannel interference or not yet ready (de-fault after Power On)

21.2.3 Interfaces

The MCP 483 communicates via the COM board (see above). For position ofinterfaces, see Fig. 21-3.


3-pin Phoenix terminal block

X20: Operator panel interface (MPI/PROFIBUS)

9-pin Sub-D socket connector

X30: Interface for connecting rotary feed override switch (23 graduations)

2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock

X31: Interface for connecting rotary spindle override switch (16 graduations)

2 x 5-pin plug connector with lock

X50: Interface to 4-way keyswitch

1 x 6-pin plug connector

X51-X54: Interface for additional control devices (buttons with 24 V lamps)

each 1 x 4-pin plug connector

X60/X61: Connection for 2 handwheels (TTL/DTTL)

each 15-pin Sub-D socket

Jumper S1

S3 DIP switch

Diagnostic LEDs1...5


Overview ofinterfaces




X70: Connection of direct keys (16 digital inputs; opto-decoupled)

2 x 10-pin plug connector


The equipotential bonding conductor is attached by means of an M5 screw

Connector designation: X51, ..., X54Connector type: 4-pin plug connector

Table 21-2 Pin assignment for connectors X51/X52 *)


1 KT-IN1/4 *) Customer key 1/4

2 KT-IN2/5 Customer key 2/5 O

3 KT-IN3/6 Customer key 3/6

4 M (GND) Ground V

*) KT-IN1/2/3: X51; KT-IN4/5/6: X52



1 KT-OUT1/4 *) Customer key 1/4 lamp

2 KT-OUT2/5 Customer key 2/5 lamp O

3 KT-OUT3/6 Customer key 3/6 lamp

4 M24 Ground 24V V

*) KT-OUT1/2/3: X53; KT-OUT4/5/6: X54

Connector designation: X60, X61Connector type: 15-pin Sub D socket



1 PV5 Supply voltage 5 VV

2 M (GND) GroundV

3 HWi_A *) Handwheel pulses track AI

4 HWi_XA Handwheel pulses track A (negated)I

5 N.C. Not assigned –

6 HWi_B Handwheel pulses track BI

7 HWi_XB Handwheel pulses track B (negated)I


9 PV5 Supply voltage 5V V


11 M (GND) Ground V

12 – 15 N.C. Not assigned –

*) i = 1: X60; i = 2: X61

Interfaces foradditional controldevices

Interfaces for 2handwheels





Connector designation: X70Connector type: 2 x 10-pin plug connector, 2.54 mm grid

Table 21-5 Pin assignment for connector X70


i = 1, ..., 16 DT_i Direct control key i I

17, 18 P5V_TACO P5 keyboard controllerV

19, 20 M_TACO M keyboard controllerV





2 M24 Ground 24 VV

(Supplyvoltage)


Interface for directcontrol keys



04.0421.3 Mounting and settings


21.3 Mounting and settings

Dimension drawing

A

A

132.6132.4 95.9

37114.7

164.637

95.8

482.6

155

20.2

32.1

18.9

45.1

1.5mm –6mm

In the sealing area

A–A

Mounting frame

Rz

120

2:1

Tension jacks (x 9)Tightening torque 0.8 Nm

Mounting frame

Dimensions in mm

Fig. 21-4 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 483





21.3.1 Mounting


450+1

135+1

Fig. 21-5 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 483

Max. 60 off vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60 a fan must addi-tionally be installed to keep the environmental temperature of the machine con-trol panel constantly below 55 C.


Mounting position




21.3.2 Settings via DIP switch S3

The connection type is set via switches 9 and 10:

Table 21-7 Connection type

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value

– – – – – – – – on on PROFIBUS DP

– – – – – – – – off off MPI

For connection type MPI, the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7:

Table 21-8 MPI parameters

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value

Data transfer rate

on – – – – – – – – 1.5 Mbaud

off – – – – – – – – 187.5 kbaud

Transmissioncycle time

Reception moni-toring

– on off – – – – – – – 200 ms 2400 ms

– off on – – – – – – – 100 ms 1200 ms

– off off – – – – – – – 50 ms 600 ms

MPI address

– – – off off off off – – – 0

– – – off off off on – – – 1

– – – off off on off – – – 2

– – – off off on on – – – 3

– – – off on off off – – – 4

– – – off on off on – – – 5

– – – off on on off – – – 6

– – – off on on on – – – 7

– – – on off off off – – – 8

– – – on off off on – – – 9

– – – on off on off – – – 10

– – – on off on on – – – 11

– – – on on off off – – – 12

– – – on on off on – – – 13

– – – on on on off – – – 14

– – – on on on on – – – 15

Choosing theconnection type

Connection type:MPI





For connection type PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS address is set usingswitches 1 to 7:

Table 21-9 PROFIBUS address

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value

PROFIBUS address

off off off off off off off – – – 0

on off off off off off off – – – 1

off on off off off off off – – – 2

on on off off off off off – – – 3

: : : : : : : – – – : (etc.)

on off on on on on on – – – 125

off on on on on on on – – – 126

The code for the standard hardware is set with switch 8:

Table 21-10 Hardware code

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value

– – – – – – – off – – Standard hardware

The default setting for DIP switch S3 is:

Data transfer rate: 1.5 Mbaud

Transmission cycle time: 100 ms; reception monitoring 1200 ms

Bus address: 6

Connection type: MPI

Table 21-11 Default setting

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value

on off on off on on off off off off Standard hardware

Note

Switches 9 and 10 on DIP switch S3 (see Fig. 21-3) are used to set theconnection type, i.e. the transfer protocol and the interface used:

– MPIIf MPI is selected, the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7.

– PROFIBUS DPIf PROFIBUS DP is chosen, the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1to 7.

The same code should be used for the standard hardware (switch 8 = off).

Connection type:PROFIBUS DP

Hardware code

Default settings




21.4 Technical data

Table 21-12 Technical data for machine control panel MCP 483

Safety



Front: IP65

Keyswitch:IP54

Rear side:IP00

Approvals CE

Electrical data


Power consumption, max.Board7 W

Lamps6 x 1.2 W

Handwheels2 x 0.9 W

Total16 W

Mechanical data






Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2


5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2


Shock stressing






not permissible



Applicable standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / –3–2



–20 ... 60 °C




max. 0.1 % /min






Table 21-13 Spare parts for machine control panel MCP 483

Name Description Number Order number

Actuating element 16 mm EmergencyStop mushroom-head pushbutton (red)

1 3SB2000-1AC01

EMER-GENCYSTOP

Switching element with one contact,1NO contact

1 3SB2404-0B

STOPbutton Switching element with one contact, 1

NC contact1 3SB2404-0C

Holder for 2 switching elements 1 3SB2908-0AA

Key-switch

Keyswitch with key 16FC5247-0AF02-0AA0

Sets ofkeys

Set of keys (10 sets) for machine con-trol panel

1 set6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0

Rotaryspindleoverrideswitch

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, overridespindle / rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, knob, pointer, dials forspindle and rapid traverse

16FC5247-0AF12-0AA0

Rotaryfeedoverrideswitch

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, override feed /rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x 23G,T=32, cap, knob, pointer, dials for feedand rapid traverse

16FC5247-0AF21-0AA0

Set oftensionjacks

Set of tension jacks (x 9) for supple-mentary componentswith 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm

1 set6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0

Instructions on how to replace the rotary switch can be found in section “15 inchTFT operator panel, 416 mm wide, without videolink receiver”.

Table 21-14 Accessories and options for machine control panel MCP 483

Name Description Number Order number

Slide-inlabels

SINUMERIK 810D/840D slide-inlabels (3 A4 films)

1 set6FC5248-0AF22-1AA1

Cable set foradditionalcontrol de-vices

SINUMERIK 810D/840D Cable setfor additional control devices

1 set6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0

Cable forhandwheelconnection *)

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, Cablefor handwheel connectionMax. cable length: 5 m

16FX8002-4AA21-1xx0

Direct controlkey/handwheelconnection

Direct control key/handwheel con-nection option for6FC5203-0AF22-1AA1/-0AF23-1AA0

16FC5252-0AF00-0AA0

*) See illustration below

Spare parts


Accessories




30

100

100 ± 50

1

234

GEORRT

1 0.18 GN

7911

Shield

VIBRSW

6 BL

YEOGRD

GN

VTBNBK

BU

1P51MA_HWXA_HWB_HWXB_HW1P51M

3

4

Shield

5

Pin 1

Housing

2

Explanation:1 Signal connector2 Signal cable

3 Pin-end connector, insulated4 Ring-end connector, insulated

5 Flexible cable 0.75 mm3

*) Max. approved system cable length: 5 m

Dimensions in mm

Length according to length code *) 100

0.180.180.180.180.180.180.18

Fig. 21-6 Connecting cable for handwheelOrder no. 6FX8002-4AA21-1xx0 (xx is the length code: A = 0, B = 1, etc.)

21.5.1 Membrane keyboard: Labeling the slide-in labels

Fig. 21-7 Machine control panel MCP 483

The machine control panel (MCP) shown above is the standard shipped variant.

You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently. A printableblank film (A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose.

A spare parts kit containing 3 blank films is also available:Order No.: 6FC5248-0AF22-1AA1 (Item No. A5E00179123)





Fig. 21-8 Blank film for MCP 483

Instructions are given below on how to print the required key symbols on thefilm supplied or how to create your own individual film.

The software on the DOCONCD includes three files for the blank films:

Template_M_MCP483.doc (defaults for milling – standard shipped file; seeFig. 21-9)

Template_T_MCP483.doc (defaults for turning; see Fig. 21-10)

Template_MCP483.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205579;see Fig. 21-11)

Symbols.doc Key symbols as Word file, strip lettering as jpg file (see Table 21-15)

Files Template_M_MCP483.doc, Template_T_MCP483.doc and Tem-plate_MCP483.docinclude a table function showing the corresponding key-board positions.

Preparing slide-inlabels




One example of the three MCP files (milling and turning) is given below:

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 5

Part 5

Part 6

X Y Z

–

–

+

+

Fig. 21-9 Template_M_MCP483.doc for the “Milling” version

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 5

Part 5

Part 6

+Y +X +C

–C –X –Y

–Z +Z

Fig. 21-10 Template_T_MCP483.doc for the “Turning” version





Part 5

Part 5

Part 6

Fig. 21-11 Template_MCP483.doc(blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205579)

Within the table cells the key symbol required in each case can be copied andpasted into the corresponding table field.

The vertical bars shown in the diagram do not appear on the printed-out labels.

The strip “Part5” is included twice so that it is available optionally as either a1-color or 3-color strip.

Printing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, CorelDraw):

– Draw a 15 x 15 mm square, with fill color white and an invisible borderline.

– Place the symbol in the center of this square.

– Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into a Word doc-ument (Symbols.doc).

Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher,Paint):

– Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) with fill color white.

– Draw the symbol in the center of this square.

– Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Worddocument (Symbols.doc).

Creating your ownsymbols




The following is a dimension drawing for the blank template for MCP 483:

5

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1

2 2

2 2

3

34 4

Part 5

Part 5

Part 6

1: Width 1.9 cm

2: Width 1 cm

3: Width 3.3 cm

4: Width 0.3 cm

5: Width 0.6 cm

Narrow label: width 23 cm, height 0.06 cm

Narrow label: width 24.34 cm, height 0.06 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Fig. 21-12 Dimension drawing for slide-in labels for MCP 483

Note

The slide-in strips are printed on the front with a laser printer. HP Color LaserJet film C2936A is used.

To make the labels easier to slide in, they should be rounded by about 1.5 mm.

The outer lines of the strip are the cutting edge.

It is advisable to run a test print on normal paper before printing the labels onfilm.

Dimensiondrawings





The file Symbols.doccontains the following key symbols:

Table 21-15 File Symbols.doc

7001 7013 7025 7124

7002 7014 7026 +C 7125

7003 7015 7027 +X 7126

7004 7016 Z 7028 –Y 7127

7005 7017 7029 +Z 7128

100% 7006 7018 7030 –X 7129

7007 7019 7031 +Y 7130

7008 7020 – 7032 –Z 7131

7009 7021 + 7033 –C 7132

7010 Y 7022 7120

X 7011 7023 7121

7012 7024 7123


04.0421.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP


21.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP

This chapter describes:

Requirements for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration fora SIMATIC S7 project.

Configuring a DP slave MCP with STEP7 “HW config”.

Details of how to link the DP slave MCP to the basic PLC program and userprogram (optional)

Note

The instructions given in this chapter are essentially limited to the specialrequirements for configuring the DP slave MCP. For more details about workingwith SIMATIC STEP 7 please refer to the relevant SIMATIC documentation oronline help.

21.6.1 Prerequisites

The following components are needed to add a DP slave MCP to the hardwareconfiguration:

SIMATIC STEP 7

GSD file for DP slave MCP

Graphics files for DP slave MCP

SIMATIC STEP 7 is required in the following version or later:

SIMATIC STEP 7 as from Version 5.2, Service Pack 1

The GSD file for the DP slave MCP is required in the following version or later:

SI008109.GSD version 1.0 or later

A GSD file contains all the properties of a DP slave in ASCII format. For eachDP slave SIMATIC STEP 7 requires a module-specific GSD file so that the DPslave can be found in the hardware catalog.

The DP slave MCP is displayed in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the “HW config” hard-ware catalog in the following path:

Profile: StandardPROFIBUS DP > Other field devices > NC/RC > Motion Control> SINUMERIK MCP

If the module is not displayed, the GSD file must be installed. To do this, in “HWconfig” use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. Before installing theGSD file, please read the following instructions concerning the graphics files.

SIMATIC STEP 7

GSD file





The graphics files belonging to the GSD file:

SI8109_N.BMP

SI8109_S.BMP

are used to display the DP slave MCP in the “HW config” station window. Theyare automatically installed by STEP 7 when the GSD file is installed. They mustbe located in the same directory as the GSD file.

21.6.2 Functions of the machine control panel

The machine control panel offers the following functions:

Standard

Handwheel

Additional I/Os

The function transfers input/output data from the function keys and user-specifickeys and outputs:

Input data: 8 bytes

Output data: 8 bytes

The input/output data is compatible with the input/output data from the previousmachine control panel:

The input/output data for machine control panel MCP 483 is compatible with theinput/output data from the previous machine control panel:

– Machine control panel (MCP), MPI

– 19” machine control panel

The function transfers the absolute values for the two handwheels that can beconnected to the machine control panel:

Input data: 2 x 2 bytes

Absolute valuehandwheel 1

Low byte High byte

Absolute value handwheel 2

For each handwheel the current handwheel value is transferred as a 16-bit ab-solute value relative to the starting value. The starting value for the sensorcounter in the handwheel is 0.

The absolute values are transferred in big endian format.

The data for both handwheels is always transferred. The absolute value for ahandwheel that is not connected is always 0.

The function transfers the data for all non-standard inputs/outputs:

Direct control keys

Customer keys: 6 signals (bit 0 to bit 6)

Rotary switch

with the following distribution:

Graphics files

Standard

Handwheel

Additional I/Os




Input data: 5 bytes

Low byte High byte

CustomerkeysDirect control keys (OP

012)

1. Rotaryswitch

2. Rotaryswitch


Low byte High byte

Reserved,always 0

CustomerLEDs

21.6.3 Configuring the DP slave MCP

This section describes how to configure a DP slave MCP with reference to thehardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in Fig. 21-13 by way ofexample.

The hardware configuration comprises the following modules:

SIMATIC station 300 with SINUMERIK 810D/840D and PLC 317-2DP

SINUMERIK MCP with module: standard, handwheel, extended

Configuring the DP slave MCP as an S7 project involves the following steps:

1. Add the DP slave MCP to the configuration(see Fig. 21-13, page 21-13: 1)

2. Set the PROFIBUS address

3. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MCP according to the functionsrequired.(see Fig. 21-13, page 21-13: 2)

4. Set the I/O addresses for the individual slots

HW config – [SINUMERIK840D (configuration) –– PROFIBUS MCP]

StandardProfile:

Station Edit Insert Target System View Tools Window Help

PROFIBUS(1): DP master system(1)

(9) SINUMEI/ONC/RC

MOTION CONTROLSINUMERIK MCP

Universal module

standard, handwheel

standard, handwheel, ex

standard

standard, extended


Slot DP identification Order number/designation I address O address Com...

1 55 standard, handwheel, extended 0...7 0...72 2IO ––> standard, handwheel, exten 258...2613 192 ––> standard, handwheel, exten 8...12 8...9

(0) 810D/840D

2

X1X23

PLC 317–2DP 2AJ10MPIDPIM360

4 S7 FM NCU

1

2

Fig. 21-13 Configuration with DP slave MCP





The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MCP isto be added:

– You have created the S7 project

– You have set up a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS master-capableSINUMERIK controller

To add a DP slave MCP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog usingthe menu command View > Catalog.

The DP slave MCP can be found at:


Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MCP (SINUMERIK MCP) in thehardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station windowby holding down the left mouse button.

The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the followingsymbol:

When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MCP is added to theconfiguration.

Note

As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it.When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes toa cursor with a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration.

Once you have added the DP slave MCP to the configuration, the “Properties –PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP” dialog box is displayed.

The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified:

– PROFIBUS address

– Data transfer rate

– Profile

Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCPTab card: Parameters

Address: <PROFIBUS address>Button: “Properties...”

Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUSTab card: Network settings

Data transfer rate: 12 MbaudProfile: DP

OK

OK

Preconditions: S7project

Adding a DP slaveMCP

PROFIBUSparameters

Dialog box




Note

The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MCP set in the S7 project must matchthe PROFIBUS address set on the module(DIP switch S3) (see Subsection21.3.2, Page 21-359).

There is no automatic adjustment!

The following data must match:

1. SIMATIC S7 configuration DP slave MCPPROFIBUS address

2. Machine control panel MCP 483PROFIBUS address (DIP switch S3)

The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be trans-ferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. Themodules are listed in the hardware catalog under the DP slave MCP. The follow-ing modules are available:

Universal module (not applicable)

standard

standard, handwheel

standard, extended

standard, handwheel, extended

Module: standard

The module transfers the data for the “Standard” function:

Input data: 8 bytes

Standard data(8 bytes)



Module: standard, handwheel

The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Handwheel” functions:

Input data: 12 bytes


Absolute valueHandwheel 1

(2 bytes)Low byte High byte


(2 bytes)



Adding a module





Module: standard, extended

The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Additional I/Os” functions:



Direct controlkeys (OP

012) (2 bytes)Low byte High byte

Customer keys(1 byte)

1. Rotaryswitch(1 byte)




Reserved(1 byte)

CustomerLEDs

(1 byte)

Low byte High byte

Module: standard, handwheel, extended

The module transfers the data for the “Standard”, “Handwheel” and “AdditionalI/Os” functions:



Low byte

Direct key(OP 012)(2 bytes)

High byte

Customizedkeys

(1 byte)




(2 bytes)


(2 bytes)



Reserved(1 byte)

CustomerLEDs

(1 byte)

Low byte High byte

If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MCP, the input/output addressesare automatically assigned by STEP 7.

Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the “Properties – DPslave” dialog box. The starting addresses for the I/O data for the slot can be sethere.

21.6.4 Linking to the basic PLC and user program

This section describes how to link the DP slave MCP

to the basic PLC program for transferring standard I/O data to the VDI inter-face

to the PLC user program (optional) to implement a user-specific response toa module failure

Setting the I/Oaddresses




Note

“Handwheel” functionThe “Handwheel” function is not currently supported by the basic PLC program.

“Additional I/Os” functionProcessing of additional I/O data is the sole responsibility of the user (machinemanufacturer) and is not supported by the basic PLC program.

In order to transfer the standard I/O data for the DP slave MCP using the basicPLC program, the corresponding I/O address range must be added to the com-munication parameters for function block FB1.

Function block FB1

The communication parameters of the MCP are designated as MCPx... (wherex = 1 or 2) in function block FB1. A maximum of 2 machine control panels aresupported by the basic PLC program.

To synchronize several MCPs, the PLC program must be adapted accordingly.This is the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility.

To operate a machine control panel MCP 483 as a DP slave, only the followingparameters are relevant:

MCPNum: INT // See below: Note

MCP1In: POINTER // Address of input signals MCP1Out: POINTER // Address of output signals

The MCP2... parameters are only needed if a 2nd MCP is used in addition tothe 1st MCP:


The parameters listed below serve to synchronize two MCPs:

MCP1Stop: BOOL // Transfer of the relevant operating component:MCP2Stop: BOOL // FALSE = start; TRUE = stop

MCP1NotSend: BOOL // Send and receive operation of the relevant MCP2NotSend: BOOL // operating component:

// FALSE = send and receive is active// TRUE = only receive is active

Note

Parameter: MCPNumUp to and including version 7.1 of the basic PLC program, parameter MCPNumshould always be set to 0.

Parameter: MCPxStop and MCPxNotSendThese parameters are irrelevant for connection via PROFIBUS DP.

Basic PLCprogram





ReferencesFor a detailed description of the basic PLC program or of function block FB 1,please refer to:

/FB1/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC ProgramChapter: FB 1: RUN_UP Basic program, startup section

The following function blocks can be used to assign the VDI interface:

FC 19: Machine control panel MCP 483, version M (milling)

FC 25: Machine control panel MCP 483, version T (turning)

Note

Function blocks FC 19, FC 24 and FC 25 are part of the basic PLC program. Itis the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility to call the block correctlyand/or assign the interface the appropriate parameters.

ReferencesA detailed description of the function blocks for transferring machine controlpanel signals to the VDI interface can be found in:

/FB1/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC ProgramChapter: FC 19: MCP_IFM ...Chapter: FC 24: MCP_IFM2 ...Chapter: FC 25: MCP_IFT ...

The following example shows the communication parameter settings for func-tion block FB 1 for a machine control panel:

MCPNum := 0 // Number of active MCPs

MCP1In := P#E 0.0 // Address of input data (8 bytes)MCP1Out := P#A 0.0 // Address of output data (8 bytes)

MCP1StatSend := P#A 0.0 // Preset; no significanceMCP1StatRec := P#A 0.0 // Preset; no significance

MCP1BusAdr := 0 // Preset; no significance

MCP1Timeout := S5T#700MS // Preset; no significanceMCP1Cycl := S5T#200MS // Preset; no significance

MCPMPI := FALSE // MCP/HT 6 operated on “extended” MPI bus

MCP1Stop := FALSE // Preset; no significanceMCP1NotSend := FALSE // Preset; no significance

MCPSDB210 := FALSE // Preset; no significance

If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does notcheck for module failure.

In this case the MCP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the ac-tive DP slave:

PLC operating system

PROFIBUS controller

If a failure of a DP slave MCP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP.

VDI interfaceparameterassignment

Example

PLC user program




The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program tocustomize the response to a DP slave MCP failure:

OB 82: Diagnostic interrupt

OB 86: Rack failure

Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking orga-nization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data.

Note

In the event of the failure of a machine control panel connected via OPI/MPI,the following alarm is tripped by the basic PLC program:

Alarm “40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure”; with x = 0, 1

If the machine control panel is being operated as a DP slave, the user(machine manufacturer) is responsible for triggering a corresponding alarm.

21.6.5 Input/output image

A key and the LED positioned above it form a logical unit. The key and the LEDhave the same number.

Key: Sxy = Key number xy

LED: LEDxy = LED number xy

Fig. 21-14 shows the arrangement of keys and LEDs on the machine controlpanel together with their internal designation. For the sake of clarity, the LEDdesignations are not shown in full.

S13 S14 S15 S16 S29 S30 S31 S44 S45 S46 S47 S48 S49 S50

S12 S07 S08 S26 S27 S28 S41 S42 S43

S11 S05 S06

S10 S03 S04

S09 S01 S02

S23 S24 S25

S20 S21 S22

S17 S18 S19

S38 S39 S40

S35 S36 S37

S32 S33 S34 Key

LEDLED01 LED02LED09 LED18 LED19LED17 LED33 LED34LED32

Fig. 21-14 Designation of keys and LEDs

Customizedresponse

Arrangement: Keys and LEDs





Arrangement of key signals in the input image of the DP slave MCP:

Table 21-16 Input image

Signals from machine control panel (keys)

Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

EB n+0 Spindle override Mode

D C B A JOGS09

TEACHS10

MDAS11

AUTOS12

EB n+1 Machine functions

REPOSS01

REFS02

var: INCS03

10000 INCS08

1000 INCS07

100 INCS06

10 INCS05

1 INCS04

EB n+2 KeyswitchPosition 0

KeyswitchPosition 2

SpindlestartS48

*SpindlestopS47

Feed startS50

*Feed stopS49

NC Start

S16

*NC Stop

S15

EB n+3 RESETS13

KeyswitchPosition 1

Singleblock

Feed overrideS13 Position 1 block

S14 E D C B A

EB n+4 Direction keys KeyswitchPosition 3

Axis selection

R15S46

R13S44

R14S45

Position 3R1S32

R4S35

R7S38

R10S41

EB n+5 Axis selection

R2S33

R3S34

R5S36

R12S43

R11S42

R9S40

R8S39

R6S37

EB n+6 Freely assignable customer keys

T9S25

T10S26

T11S27

T12S28

T13S29

T14S30

T15S31

notused


T1S17

T2S18

T3S19

T4S20

T5S21

T6S22

T7S23

T8S24

Signals marked with * are inverse signals.

Input image




Arrangement of LED signals in the output image of the DP slave MCP:

Table 21-17 Output image

Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)


AB n+0 Machine function Mode

1000 INCLED07

100 INCLED06

10 INCLED05

1 INCLED04

JOGLED09

TEACHLED10

MDALED11

AUTOLED12

AB n+1 Feed startLED50

Feed stopLED49

NC Start NC Stop Machine functionLED50 LED49

LED16 LED15REPOSLED01

REFLED02

var: INCLED03

10000 INCLED08

AB n+2 Axis selection Singleblock

Spindlestart

Spindlestop

R13LED44

R1LED32

R4LED35

R7LED38

R10LED41

blockLED14

startLED48

stopLED47

AB n+3 Axis selection

R3LED34

R5LED36

R12LED43

R11LED42

R9LED40

R8LED39

R6LED37

R15LED46

AB n+4 Freely assignable customer keys Axis selec-tion

T9LED25

T10LED26

T11LED27

T12LED28

T13LED29

T14LED30

T15LED31

R2LED33

AB n+5 Freely assignable customer keys

T1LED17

T2LED18

T3LED19

T4LED20

T5LED21

T6LED22

T7LED23

T8LED24

AB n+6 notused

notused

notused

notused

notused

notused

RESETLED13

R14LED45

AB n+7 notused

notused

notused

notused

notused

notused

notused

notused

Output image






Notes


Machine Control Panel MCP 310



MCP 310 Film 6FC5203-0AF23-1AA0


The machine control panel MCP 310 permits user-friendly operation of the ma-chine functions. It is suitable for machine-level operation of milling, turning,grinding and special machines.

The 49 keys are equipped with user-labeled slide-in strips for adapting to spe-cific machines. A DIN-A4 film for labeling the slide-in strips is included in thescope of supply.

The machine control panel is mounted from the rear with special tension jackssupplied with the panel.

Operating elements

Operating mode and function keys:

– 49 keys

– Direction keys for milling machines with rapid traverse override


Feed control with rotary override switch (23 positions)


Interfaces:

MPI interface / PROFIBUS DP

For 6 control devices

For 16 direct control keys for OP 012/OP 015A/TP 015A when connectedvia PROFIBUS DP

For 2 handwheels when connected via PROFIBUS DP (max. cable length:5 m)

Expansion slots:

6 slots for control devices (d = 16 mm)

1 slot for EMERGENCY STOP key or override rotary switch (up to d 22 cm)

Key type:

Membrane keys

Validity

Design

22





22.2.1 Operating elements front face

Position of operating elements

Keyswitch

Spindle control16 customer keysOperating modes andmachine functions

Feed control with override switch

Location for EMERGENCY STOPbutton or spindle override switch

Location for16 mm control units *)

*) Drill openings to required width, do not chip out: Risk of damage to panel!

Programcontrol

Fig. 22-1 Position of control elements on machine control panel MCP 310

If an EMERGENCY STOP button is added: see description in “Machine controlpanel MCP 483”, “Control elements and interfaces”

Warning

The openings for mounting control devices (footnote in Fig. 22-1) must not bechipped out, but drilled to the required width (risk of damage!).






22.2.2 Operating and display elements to rear

The control and display elements on the rear of the MCP 310 are located on theCOM board (shown with a gray background in the illustration below).

X50

X31 X10 X20 X70X60

X5154

COM board

Keyswitch

S1

COM board

X30

S3

H1, ..., H5 X61


Fig. 22-2 Rear of the MCP 310 showing the control and display elements and the interfaces

See “Machine control panel MCP 483”, “Control elements and interfaces”

22.2.3 Interfaces

The MCP 310 communicates via the COM board (see above). For position ofinterfaces, see Fig. 22-2.

See “Machine control panel MCP 483”, “Interfaces”

COM board

Description of rearcontrol anddisplay elements


Interfacedescription





22.3 Mounting and settings

Dimension drawing

310

175

15.3

3331.3

20.2

A

A

109.2578.9104.65

109.2573.9

109.65

1.5mm – 6mm

A–A2:1

Mounting frame

Rz

120

Mounting frame

Tension jacks (x 6)

Tightening torque 0.8 Nm

Dimensions in mm

Fig. 22-3 Dimension drawing for machine control panel MCP 310




22.3.1 Mounting


155+

1

285+1

Fig. 22-4 Panel cutout for machine control panel MCP 310

Max. 60 off vertical. For mounting positions greater than 60 a fan must addi-tionally be installed to keep the environmental temperature of the machine con-trol panel constantly below 55 C.


Mounting position





22.3.2 Settings via DIP switch S3

The connection type is set via switches 9 and 10:

Table 22-1 Connection type

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value

– – – – – – – – on on PROFIBUS DP

– – – – – – – – off off MPI

For connection type MPI, the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7:

Table 22-2 MPI parameters

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value

Data transfer rate

on – – – – – – – – 1.5 Mbaud

off – – – – – – – – 187.5 kbaud

Transmissioncycle time

Reception moni-toring

– on off – – – – – – – 200 ms 2400 ms

– off on – – – – – – – 100 ms 1200 ms

– off off – – – – – – – 50 ms 600 ms

MPI address

– – – off off off off – – – 0

– – – off off off on – – – 1

– – – off off on off – – – 2

– – – off off on on – – – 3

– – – off on off off – – – 4

– – – off on off on – – – 5

– – – off on on off – – – 6

– – – off on on on – – – 7

– – – on off off off – – – 8

– – – on off off on – – – 9

– – – on off on off – – – 10

– – – on off on on – – – 11

– – – on on off off – – – 12

– – – on on off on – – – 13

– – – on on on off – – – 14

– – – on on on on – – – 15

Choosing theconnection type

Connection type:MPI




For connection type PROFIBUS DP, the PROFIBUS address is set usingswitches 1 to 7:

Table 22-3 PROFIBUS address

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value

PROFIBUS address

off off off off off off off – – – 0

on off off off off off off – – – 1

off on off off off off off – – – 2

on on off off off off off – – – 3

: : : : : : : – – – : (etc.)

on off on on on on on – – – 125

off on on on on on on – – – 126

The code for the standard hardware is set with switch 8:

Table 22-4 Hardware code

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value

– – – – – – – off – – Standard hardware

The default setting for DIP switch S3 is:

Data transfer rate: 1.5 Mbaud

Transmission cycle time: 100 ms; reception monitoring 1200 ms

Bus address: 6

Connection type: MPI

Table 22-5 Standard setting

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Meaning / value

on off on off on on off off off off Standard hardware

Note

Switches 9 and 10 on DIP switch S3 (see Figure 21-3) are used to set theconnection type, i.e. the transfer protocol and the interface used:

– MPIIf MPI is selected, the MPI parameters are set using switches 1 to 7.

– PROFIBUS DPIf PROFIBUS DP is chosen, the PROFIBUS address is set using switches 1to 7.

The same code should be used for the standard hardware (switch 8 = off).

Connection type:PROFIBUS DP

Hardware code

Default setting





22.4 Technical data

Table 22-6 Technical data for machine control panel MCP 310

Safety



Front: IP65

Keyswitch: IP54

Rear: IP00

Approvals CE

Electrical data


Power consumption, max.Board7 W

Lamps6 x 1.2 W

Handwheels2 x 0.9 W

Total16 W

Mechanical data


Depth: 64.5 mmMounting depth: 33 mm




Vibration stressing

10 – 58 Hz: 0.015 mm58 – 200 Hz: 19.6 m/s2


5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2


Shock stressing






not permissible



Applicable standards EN 60721-3-3 EN 60721-3-1 / –3–2


Temperature limiting values0 ... 45°C (to front)0 ... 55°C (to rear)

–20 ... 60°C




max. 0.1 % /min





Table 22-7 Spare parts for machine control panel MCP 310


Order number

Keyswitch Keyswitch with key 1 6FC5247-0AF02-0AA0

Sets ofkeys

Set of keys (10 sets) for machine controlpanel

1 set 6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0

Rotaryspindleoverrideswitch

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, overridespindle / rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x16G, T=24, cap, knob, pointer, dials forspindle and rapid traverse

1 6FC5247-0AF12-0AA0

Rotaryfeed over-rideswitch

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, override feed /rapid traverse, rotary switch 1x 23G,T=32, cap, knob, pointer, dials for feedand rapid traverse

1 6FC5247-0AF21-0AA0

Set of ten-sion jacks

Set of tension jacks (x 9) for supplemen-tary componentswith 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm

1 set 6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0

Instructions on how to replace the rotary switch can be found in section “15 inchTFT operator panel, width 416 mm, without videolink receiver”.

Table 22-8 Accessories and options for machine control panel MCP 310


Order number

Actuating element 16 mm Emer-gency Stop mushroom-head push-button (red)

1 3SB2000-1AC01

EMERGENCYSTOPbutton

Switching element with one con-tact, 1NO contact

1 3SB2404-0B

buttonSwitching element with one con-tact, 1 NC contact

1 3SB2404-0C

Holder for 2 switching elements 1 3SB2908-0AA

Slide-inlabels

SINUMERIK 810D/840D slide-inlabels (3 A4 films)

1 set 6FC5248-0AF23-1AA0

Cable set foradditionalcontrol devices

SINUMERIK 810D/840D Cable setfor additional control devices

1 set 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0

Cable for hand-wheel connec-tion *)

SINUMERIK 810D/840D, Cablefor handwheel connectionMax. cable length: 5 m

1 6FX8002-4AA21-1xx0

Direct controlkey/handwheelconnection

Direct control key/handwheel con-nection option for6FC5203-0AF22-1AA1/-0AF23-1AA0

1 6FC5252-0AF00-0AA0

*) See illustration in “MCP 483”, “Spare parts and accessories”

Spare parts


Accessories





22.5.1 Membrane keyboard: labeling the slide-in labels

Fig. 22-5 Machine control panel MCP 310

The machine control panel (MCP) shown above is the standard shipped variant.

You can create your own slide-in labels to label the keys differently. A printableblank film (A4) is supplied with the panel for this purpose.

A spare parts kit containing 3 blank films is also available:Order No.: 6FC5248-0AF23-1AA0 (Item No. A5E00179115)

Fig. 22-6 Blank film for MCP 310

Instructions are given below on how to print the required key symbols on thefilm supplied or how to create your own individual film:

The software on the DOCONCD includes three files for the blank films:

Template_M_MCP310.doc (defaults for milling – standard shipped file, seeFig. 22-7)

Template_MCP310.doc (blank template for film: Item No. A5E00205580;see Fig. 22-8)

Preparing slide-inlabels




Symbols.doc Key symbols as Word file; strip lettering as jpg file (see Table 22-9)

Files Template_M_MCP310.docand Template_MCP310.docinclude a tablefunction showing the corresponding keyboard positions.

One example each for the MCP (milling) and the template is given below:

Fig. 22-7 Template_M_MCP310.doc for the “Milling” version

Fig. 22-8 Template_MCP310.doc(according to labeling plan/template: Item No. A5E00205580)

Within the table cells the key symbol required in each case can be copied andpasted into the corresponding table field.

The vertical bars shown in the diagram do not appear on the printed-out labels.





Printing in a vector program (e.g. Designer, Freehand, Corel-Draw):

– Draw a 15 x 15 mm square, with fill color white and an invisible borderline.

– Place the symbol in the center of this square.

– Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into a Word doc-ument (Symbols.doc).

Drawing in an image editing program (e.g. Photoshop, Picture Publisher,Paint)

– Create a square area (e.g. 100 x 100 pixels) with fill color white.

– Draw the symbol in the center of this square.

– Copy the entire image (square and symbol) and paste it into the Worddocument (Symbols.doc).

The following is a dimension drawing for the blank template for MCP 310:

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Height 1.48 cm

Narrow strip: width 23 cm, height 0.08 cm

1. Width: 1.9 cm2. Width: 0.4 cm3. Width: 3.05 cm

Fig. 22-9 Dimension drawing for slide-in labels for MCP 310

Note

The slide-in strips are printed on the front with a laser printer. HP Color LaserJet film C2936A is used.

To make the labels easier to slide in, they should be rounded by about 1.5 mm.

The outer lines of the strip are the cutting edge.

It is advisable to run a test print on normal paper before printing the labels onfilm.

Creating your ownsymbols

Dimensiondrawings




The file Symbols.doccontains the following key symbols:

Table 22-9 File Symbols.doc

7001 7013 7025 7124

7002 7014 7026 +C 7125

7003 7015 7027 +X 7126

7004 7016 Z 7028 –Y 7127

7005 7017 7029 +Z 7128

100% 7006 7018 7030 –X 7129

7007 7019 7031 +Y 7130

7008 7020 – 7032 –Z 7131

7009 7021 + 7033 –C 7132

7010 Y 7022 7120

X 7011 7023 7121

7012 7024 7123





22.6 Connection via PROFIBUS DP

This section describes:

Requirements for adding a DP slave MCP to the hardware configuration fora SIMATIC S7 project

Configuring a DP slave MCP with STEP7 “HW config”

Details of how to link the DP slave MCP to the basic PLC program and userprogram (optional)

Note

The instructions given in this chapter are essentially limited to the specialrequirements for configuring the DP slave MCP. For more details about workingwith SIMATIC STEP 7 please refer to the relevant SIMATIC documentation oronline help.

22.6.1 Prerequisites

The following components are needed to add a DP slave MCP to the hardwareconfiguration:

SIMATIC STEP 7

GSD file for DP slave MCP

Graphics files for DP slave MCP

SIMATIC STEP 7 is required in the following version or later:

SIMATIC STEP 7 as from Version 5.2, Service Pack 1

The GSD file for the DP slave MCP is required in the following version or later:

SI008109.GSD version 1.0 or later

A GSD file contains all the properties of a DP slave in ASCII format. For eachDP slave SIMATIC STEP 7 requires a module-specific GSD file so that the DPslave can be found in the hardware catalog.

The DP slave MCP is displayed in SIMATIC STEP 7 in the “HW config” hard-ware catalog in the following path:


If the module is not displayed, the GSD file must be installed. To do this, in “HWconfig” use menu command Tools > Install new GSD file. Before installing theGSD file, please read the following instructions concerning the graphics files.

SIMATIC STEP 7

GSD file




The graphics files belonging to the GSD file:

SI8109_N.BMP

SI8109_S.BMP

are used to display the DP slave MCP in the “HW config” station window. Theyare automatically installed by STEP 7 when the GSD file is installed. They mustbe located in the same directory as the GSD file.

22.6.2 Functions of the machine control panel

The machine control panel offers the following functions:

Standard

Handwheel

Additional I/Os

The function transfers input/output data from the function keys and user-specifickeys and outputs:

Input data: 8 bytes


The input/output data for machine control panel MCP 310 is compatible with theinput/output data from the previous machine control panel OP 032S.

The function transfers the absolute values for the two handwheels that can beconnected to the machine control panel:

Input data: 2 x 2 bytes


Low byte High byte


For each handwheel the current handwheel value is transferred as a 16-bit ab-solute value relative to the starting value. The starting value for the sensorcounter in the handwheel is 0.

The absolute values are transferred in big endian format.

The data for both handwheels is always transferred. The absolute value for ahandwheel that is not connected is always 0.

The function transfers the data for all non-standard inputs/outputs:

Direct control keys

Customer keys: 6 signals (bit 0 to bit 6)

Rotary switch

with the following distribution:

Graphics files

Standard

Handwheel

Additional I/Os





Input data: 5 bytes

Low byte High byte

CustomerkeysDirect control keys

(OP 012)

1. Rotaryswitch

2. Rotaryswitch


Low byte High byte

Reserved,always 0

CustomerLEDs

22.6.3 Configuring the DP slave MCP

This section describes how to configure a DP slave MCP with reference to thehardware configuration for a SIMATIC S7 project shown in Fig. 22-10 by way ofexample.

The hardware configuration comprises the following modules:

SIMATIC station 300 with SINUMERIK 810D/840D and PLC 317-2DP

SINUMERIK MCP with module: standard, handwheel, extended

Configuring the DP slave MCP as an S7 project involves the following steps:

1. Add the DP slave MCP to the configuration.(see Fig. 22-10, page 22-10: 1)

2. Set the PROFIBUS address.

3. Add the appropriate module to the DP slave MCP according to the functionsrequired.(see Fig. 22-10, page 22-10: 2)

4. Set the I/O addresses for the individual slots.

HW config – [SINUMERIK840D (configuration) –– PROFIBUS MCP]

StandardProfile:

Station Edit Insert Target System View Tools Window Help


(9) SINUMEI/ONC/RC

MOTION CONTROLSINUMERIK MCP

Universal module

standard, handwheel

standard, handwheel, ex

standard

standard, extended


Slot DP identification Order number/designation I address O address Com...

1 55 standard, handwheel, extended 0...7 0...72 2IO ––> standard, handwheel, exten 258...2613 192 ––> standard, handwheel, exten 8...12 8...9

(0) 810D/840D

2

X1X23

PLC 317–2DP 2AJ10MPIDPIM360

4 S7 FM NCU

1

2

Fig. 22-10 Configuration with DP slave MCP




The following status is required for the S7 project to which the DP slave MCP isto be added:

– You have created the S7 project

– You have set up a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS master-capableSINUMERIK controller

To add a DP slave MCP to the configuration, open the hardware catalog usingthe menu command View > Catalog.

The DP slave MCP can be found at:


Click with the left mouse button on the DP slave MCP (SINUMERIK MCP) in thehardware catalog and drag it onto the DP master system in the station windowby holding down the left mouse button.

The DP master system is displayed in the station window with the followingsymbol:

When you release the left mouse button, the DP slave MCP is added to theconfiguration.

Note

As you drag the DP slave the cursor appears as a circle with a slash through it.When the cursor is positioned exactly over the DP master system, it changes toa cursor with a plus sign, and the DP slave can be added to the configuration.

Once you have added the DP slave MCP to the configuration, the “Properties –PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCP” dialog box is displayed.

The following PROFIBUS parameters must either be set or verified:

– PROFIBUS address

– Data transfer rate

– Profile

Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUS interface SINUMERIK MCPTab card: Parameters

Address: <PROFIBUS address>Button: “Properties...”

Dialog box: Properties – PROFIBUSTab card: Network settings

Data transfer rate: 12 MbaudProfile: DP

OK

OK

Preconditions: S7project

Adding a DP slaveMCP

PROFIBUSparameters

Dialog box





Note

The PROFIBUS address of the DP slave MCP set in the S7 project must matchthe PROFIBUS address set on the module (DIP switch S3) (seeSubsection 22.3.2, Page 22-386).

There is no automatic adjustment!

The following data must match:

1. SIMATIC S7 configuration DP slave MCPPROFIBUS address

2. Machine control panel MCP 310PROFIBUS address (DIP switch S3)

The active functions and hence the number of user data elements to be trans-ferred are chosen by selecting the appropriate pre-configured module. Themodules are listed in the hardware catalog under the DP slave MCP. The follow-ing modules are available:

Universal module (not applicable)

Standard

Standard, handwheel

Standard, extended

Standard, handwheel, extended

Module: standard

The module transfers the data for the “Standard” function:

Input data: 8 bytes




Module: standard, handwheel

The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Handwheel” functions:




(2 bytes)Low byte High byte


(2 bytes)



Adding a module




Module: standard, extended

The module transfers the data for the “Standard” and “Additional I/Os” functions:




012) (2 bytes)Low byte High byte






Reserved(1 byte)

CustomerLEDs

(1 byte)

Low byte High byte

Module: standard, handwheel, extended

The module transfers the data for the “Standard”, “Handwheel” and “AdditionalI/Os” functions:



Low byte


012) (2 bytes)

High byte





(2 bytes)


(2 bytes)



Reserved(1 byte)

CustomerLEDs

(1 byte)

Low byte High byte

If you add a module to slot 1 of the DP slave MCP, the input/output addressesare automatically assigned by STEP 7.

Double clicking with the left mouse button on a slot opens the “Properties – DPslave” dialog box. The starting addresses for the I/O data for the slot can be sethere.

22.6.4 Linking to the basic PLC and user program

This subsection describes how to link the DP slave MCP

to the basic PLC program for transferring standard I/O data to the VDI inter-face

to the PLC user program (optional) to implement a user-specific response toa module failure

Setting the I/Oaddresses





Note

“Handwheel” functionThe “Handwheel” function is not currently supported by the basic PLC program.

“Additional I/Os” functionProcessing of additional I/O data is the sole responsibility of the user (machinemanufacturer) and is not supported by the basic PLC program.

In order to transfer the standard I/O data for the DP slave MCP using the basicPLC program, the corresponding I/O address range must be added to the com-munication parameters for function block FB1.

Function block FB1

The communication parameters of the MCP are designated as MCPx... (wherex = 1 or 2) in function block FB1. A maximum of 2 machine control panels aresupported by the basic PLC program.

To synchronize several MCPs, the PLC program must be adapted accordingly.This is the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility.

To operate a machine control panel MCP 310 as a DP slave, only the followingparameters are relevant:

MCPNum: INT // See below: Note


The MCP2... parameters are only needed if a 2nd MCP is used in addition tothe 1st MCP:


The parameters listed below serve to synchronize two MCPs:

MCP1Stop: BOOL // Transfer of the relevant operating component:MCP2Stop: BOOL // FALSE = start; TRUE = stop

MCP1NotSend: BOOL // Send and receive operation of the relevant MCP2NotSend: BOOL // operating component:

// FALSE = send and receive is active// TRUE = only receive is active

Note

Parameter: MCPNumUp to and including version 7.1 of the basic PLC program, parameter MCPNumshould always be set to 0.

Parameter: MCPxStop and MCPxNotSendThese parameters are irrelevant for connection via PROFIBUS DP.

Basic PLCprogram




ReferencesFor a detailed description of the basic PLC program or of function block FB 1,please refer to:

/FB1/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC ProgramChapter: FB 1: RUN_UP Basic program, startup section

The following function blocks can be used to assign the VDI interface:

FC 24: Machine control panel MCP 310, version M (milling)

Note

Function blocks FC 19, FC 24 and FC 25 are part of the basic PLC program. Itis the user’s (machine manufacturer’s) responsibility to call the block correctlyand/or assign the interface the appropriate parameters.

ReferencesA detailed description of the function blocks for transferring machine controlpanel signals to the VDI interface can be found in:

/FB1/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine P3 Basic PLC ProgramChapter: FC 19: MCP_IFM ...Chapter: FC 24: MCP_IFM2 ...Chapter: FC 25: MCP_IFT ...

The following example shows the communication parameter settings for func-tion block FB 1 for a machine control panel:

MCPNum := 0 // Number of active MCPs

MCP1In := P#E 0.0 // Address of input data (8 bytes)MCP1Out := P#A 0.0 // Address of output data (8 bytes)

MCP1StatSend := P#A 0.0 // Preset; no significanceMCP1StatRec := P#A 0.0 // Preset; no significance

MCP1BusAdr := 0 // Preset; no significance

MCP1Timeout := S5T#700MS // Preset; no significanceMCP1Cycl := S5T#200MS // Preset; no significance

MCPMPI := FALSE // MCP/HT 6 operated on “extended” MPI bus

MCP1Stop := FALSE // Preset; no significanceMCP1NotSend := FALSE // Preset; no significance

MCPSDB210 := FALSE // Preset; no significance

If an MCP is connected via PROFIBUS DP, the basic PLC program does notcheck for module failure.

In this case the MCP is monitored by a standard mechanism to monitor the ac-tive DP slave:

PLC operating system

PROFIBUS controller

If a failure of a DP slave MCP is detected, the PLC defaults to STOP.

VDI interfaceparameterassignment

Example

PLC user program





The following organization blocks can be added to the PLC user program tocustomize the response to a DP slave MCP failure:

OB 82: Diagnostic interrupt

OB 86: Rack failure

Please refer to the corresponding SIMATIC literature for details of linking orga-nization blocks and evaluating diagnostic data.

Note

In the event of the failure of a machine control panel connected via OPI/MPI,the following alarm is tripped by the basic PLC program:

Alarm “40026x machine control panel (x+1) failure”; with x = 0, 1

If the machine control panel is being operated as a DP slave, the user(machine manufacturer) is responsible for triggering a corresponding alarm.

22.6.5 Input/output image

A key and the LED positioned above it form a logical unit. The key and the LEDhave the same number.

Key: Sxy = Key number xy

LED: LEDxy = LED number xy

Figure 22-11 shows the arrangement of keys and LEDs on the machine controlpanel together with their internal designation. For the sake of clarity, the LEDdesignations are not shown in full.

S19 S20 S07 S33 S34 S48 S49 S50

S16 S17 S18 S06 S30 S31 S45 S46 S47

S13 S14 S15

S10 S11 S12

S09 S01 S02

S05 S27 S28

S04 S24 S25

S03 S21 S22

S42 S43 S44

S39 S40 S41

S36 S37 S38 Key

LEDLED01 LED02LED09 LED21 LED22LED03 LED37 LED38LED36

S35

S32

S29

S26

S23

LED23

Fig. 22-11 Designation of keys and LEDs

Customizedresponse

Arrangement: keys and LEDs




Arrangement of key signals in the input image of the DP slave MCP:

Table 22-10 Input image

Signals from machine control panel (keys)


EB n+0 Spindle override Mode

*NC StopS19

SP–S36

SP 100%S37

SP +S38

SingleblockS16

JOGS09

MDAS10

AUTOS13

EB n+1 Spindle KeyswitchPosition 3

Machine function

NC StartS20

SP rightS39

*SP StopS40

SP leftS41

Position 3REFS02

REPS01

TEACHS11

EB n+2 Feed Mach. fu. KeyswitchPosition 0

Machine function

Feed StartS35

*Feed StopS34

INC VARS03

Position 0INC1000

S07INC100

S06INC10S05

INC1S04

EB n+3 RESETS17

KeyswitchPosition 2

KeyswitchPosition 1

Feed overrideS17 Position 2 Position 1

E D C B A

EB n+4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

+S50

–S48

Rapid tra-verseS49

KT4X52.2

KT3X52.1

KT2X51.3

KT1X51.2

KT0X51.1

EB n+5 Free K. Opt. K. Axis selection

T16S18

KT5X52.3

6S47

5S46

4S45

ZS44

YS43

XS42

EB n+6 Freely assignable customer keys WCS/MCSS33

Freely assignable customer keys

T9S29

T10S30

T11S31

T12S32

S33T13S12

T14S14

T15S15


T1S21

T2S22

T3S23

T4S24

T5S25

T6S26

T7S27

T8S28

Signals marked with * are inverse signals.

Input image





Arrangement of LED signals in the output image of the DP slave MCP:

Table 22-11 Output image

Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)


AB n+0 Spindle override Mode

*NC StopLED19

SP–LED36

SP 100%LED37

SP +LED38

Singleblock

LED16

JOGLED09

MDALED10

AUTOLED13

AB n+1 Spindle notused

Machine functions

NC StartLED20

SP rightLED39

*SP StopLED40

SP leftLED41

usedREF

LED02REP

LED01TEACHLED11

AB n+2 Feed Mach. fu. notused

Machine functions

StartLED35

*StopLED34

var: INCLED03

used1000 INC

LED07100 INCLED06

10 INCLED05

1 INCLED04

AB n+3 notused

notused

notused

notused

notused

notused

notused

notused

AB n+4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

+LED50

–LED48

Rapid tra-verse

LED49

KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0

AB n+5 Free K. Opt.K. Axis selection

T16LED18

KT5 6LED47

5LED46

4LED45

ZLED44

YLED43

XLED42

AB n+6 Freely assignable customer keys WCS/MCSLED33

Freely assignable customer keys

T9LED29

T10LED30

T11LED31

T12LED32

LED33T13

LED12T14

LED14T15

LED15

AB n+7 Freely assignable customer keys

T1LED21

T2LED22

T3LED23

T4LED24

T5LED25

T6LED26

T7LED27

T8LED28

Output image



Machine Control Panel OP 032S

The following description applies to the component:

Machine control panel OP 032S Order No. 6FC5203-0AD10-1AA0

Key caps (49 pcs., 48 with LED, can all be assembled variably)

Feedrate override switch

Options for installing optional user keys,EMERGENCY STOP or a second override switch

10 free 24 V inputs6 free 24 V/250 mA outputs

Validity

Features

23

04.0423.1 Control elements



23.1 Control elements

Key 10LED 10

Key 1LED 1

Key 11LED 11

Key 41LED 41

FeedOverrideswitch

Recess fordial (EMER-GENCYSTOP,overrideswitch)

Key 50LED 50

OperatorSupplementary controlelements(EMERGENCY STOPor overrideswitch)

Supplementary control elements(6 buttons, 1 keyswitch)

Fig. 23-1 Front view of machine control panel, overview and location of control elements

When supplied, the following control elements are provided on the machinecontrol panel:

Key caps (49 pcs., 48 with LED, can all be assembled variably)

Feed override switch

The openings for the supplementary control elements are embossed on the rearside of the machine control panel. The diameter for the horizontal cutouts is 16.2 to 16.4 mm.The diameter for the EMERGENCY STOP button is 22.2 to 22.4 mm.

Recommendation: Drill the openings from the rear as follows:

Clamp the machine control panel for machining on the rear (use suitabledrilling support)

Switch the chip extractor on or cover the electrical parts to prevent chipsfrom falling on them

Note

Before drilling the opening, metal chips must be removed from the drills.

Use the appropriate drill to drill the desired openings (openings are cen-tered)

Control elementswhen supplied

Making theopenings with adrilling tool

23 Machine Control Panel OP 032S



The cutouts should be knocked out only if the control elements used cover thebroken edges on the front panel (no sharp broken edges).

23.2 Interfaces

Table 23-1 Example showing connection of additional override switch

Pin Meaning Switch/wiring

X31 pin 4 Ground = CCN C

X31 pin 3 Significance 22 = 4 4N.C.

N.C.

X32 pin 2 Significance 24 = 1616

8

N.C.

N.C.

X32 pin 1 Significance 23 = 88

2N.C.

N CX31 pin 2 Significance 21 = 2

2

1N.C.

X31 pin 1 Significance 20 = 1 Underside ofoverride switch

56.5

0

10.4

9

34.5

2

26.0556.486.75

16.3

117.1147.45177.8208.15

228.92233

259.98

0

130.7125.6

57

40

0

22.4

X20

X10

1) Location intended for EMERGENCY STOP or second override switch (22 mm)

2) Location for seven control devices (16 mm)

1)

2)

Prepared for 22mm emergency stop mounting geometry Recommended design: Recommended design: SIEMENS 3SB3000-1HA20

Contact 3SB3400-0A 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact

Plugconnector1 x 6–pin 3)

DIL switch

3)

1234

8 1

24/0V

4)

Module variants:3) 571241.9001.014) 571241.9001.00

LED:

Fig. 23-2 Rear view of machine control panel with dimensional data

Making the cutoutsby knocking out





X10

Operator panel frontinterface (MPI)

DIL switch(8-way),jumpering


Display: LED 1, 2: Not usedLED 3 (green): POWER (24 V supply)LED 4 (orange): SEND status (flashes in normal

operation)

ON

Protective earth

S3

Inputs

Outputs DIL switch8 1

Plugconnector1 x 6-pin

For module variants see Fig. 23-2

Pin

41

41

Pin

41

41

1234LED:X

20

Fig. 23-3 Rear view of the machine control panel with overview and location of interfaces

Connector designation: X10Connector type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal blockRecommended type: Phoenix CombiCon

Order no. MVSTBR 2.5/3-ST-5.08



1 P24 24V potentialV

2 M24 Ground 24VV

(Supplyvoltage)


Note

The power supply interface should be wired in accordance with the labeling onthe module.

Power supplyinterface (X10)




Connector designation: X20Connector type: 9-pin sub-D socket connector, straightMax. cable length: 200 mSpecial features: 1.5 MBaud/187.5 kBaud data transmission rate



1 Not assigned –

2 Not assigned –

3 RS_BTSS, RS485 data I/O, bidirectional

4 ORTSAS_BTSS, Out Request To Send AS O, output

5 M5EXT, 5V ground, external V, supply voltage

6 P5EXT, 5V potential, external V, supply voltage

7 Not assigned –

8 XRS_BTSS, RS485 data I/O, bidirectional

9 IRTSPG_BTSS, In Request To Send PG I/O, bidirectional

Note

The inputs/outputs implemented via X31 to X36 can be used as desired. Thefunction of the inputs/outputs is defined in the PLC user program. The following inputs/outputs via X31 to X36 and their use are examples.

OPI interface (X20)





The following settings are possible with this DIP switch (8-way):


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning / value

onoff

Baud rate 1.5 Mbaud187.5 kbaud

offonoff

onoffoff

Transmission cycletime200 ms100 ms50 ms

Reception monitoring

2400 ms1200 ms600 ms

onoff

on

on

Bus address1514

onoff

off

on

on

1312

onoff

on

off

on1110

onoff

offoff

9 8

onoff

on

on

7 6

onoff

offon

off

5 4

onoff

on

off

off 3 2

onoff

offoff

1 0

onoff

Interface to MPI customer operator panelstandard hardware

The PLC expects a message frame from the MCP at least every 500 msecs.The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic inter-vals when no key is pressed. This cycle time is set with S3 DIP switches 2 and3. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machine control panel tobe adjusted.

The MCP receives message frames from the PLC at cyclic intervals and re-sponds to them at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linked to thetransmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with S3 DIPswitches 2 and 3.

The bus address must be set to the value 6. Any other setting will be ignored bythe software.

The following default settings are suggested:


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning

off off on on off on off on

Baud rate: 1.5 MbaudTransmission cycle time: 100 msBus address: 6

Standard hardware

Assignments (S3)

Settings for thetransmission cycletime

Settings for thereceive cycle time

Bus address

Standard setting




These LEDs display the following:

LED 1, LED 2: Not usedLED 3: POWER, 24 V supplyLED 4: SEND, status change on protocol transmission

Connector designation: X31, X32Connector type: 4-pin plug connector

Connector: Berg type Dubox

Table 23-6 X31 and X32 assignments


X31 X32

1 KT-IN 0, user key 1 KT-IN 3, user key 4

2 KT-IN 1, user key 2 KT-IN 4, user key 5I inputs

3 KT-IN 2, user key 3 KT-IN 5, user key 6I, inputs

4 M5, ground M5, ground

Note:The inputs switch to ground (active low).

User key 1 (X31), 4 (X32)

User key 3 (X31), 6 (X32)

User key 2 (X31), 5 (X32)

Ground

View from connector side ofDubox connector (socket)

Machine control panel OP 032S (rear panel) 1) Color of line, red – pin 1 in cable set

rd1)

Plug connector1 2 3 41 2 3 4

Pin

X31 X32

Display(LED 1 ... 4)

Interfaces foroptional user keys(X31, X32, inputs)









X33 X34

1 SS 0, Keyswitch input 0

SS 2, Keyswitch input 2

2 SS 1, Keyswitch input 1

SS 3, Keyswitch input 3

I, inputs

3 / 4 M5, ground M5, ground

Note:The inputs switch to ground (active low).Other control elements can also be connected to these inputs.

Pin 1

Ground

Pin 1

X33 X34

Keyswitch

Position4

Position1





X35 X36

1 KT-OUT 0, user lamp 1 KT-OUT 3, user lamp 4

2 KT-OUT 1, user lamp 2 KT-OUT 4, user lamp 5O outputs

3 KT-OUT 2, user lamp 3 KT-OUT 5, user lamp 6O, outputs

4 M24, 24V ground M24, 24V ground

Note:The outputs are designed for 24V/250mA.

Pin 1

User lamp 1 (X35), 4 (X36)

User lamp 3 (X35), 6 (X36)

User lamp 2 (X35), 5 (X36)

Ground 24 V

Interfaces foroptionalkeyswitches (X33,X34, inputs)

Interfaces foroptional userlamps (X35, X36,outputs)


04.0423.3 Dimension drawing and panel cutout


23.3 Dimension drawing and panel cutout

5175 169162.5

49.4

12.56

0 13.8 154.7 260295.6

309.4

30.5

11.5

1)

1) Protective-conductor terminal M5, min. 6mm2

0

48.9

19.5

2 24

42.4

125.6

Fig. 23-4 Dimension drawing of machine control panel

M4

7

0.5

136.5 273277.4

279.704.4

6.710

05

38

145.5153158

1) DIN ISO 1101 Permissible mounting position of the operator panel plane max. 60 degrees to the perpendicular

1)

Front panel cutout for installation from the rear: W x H = 301.4 x 153 mmInstallation from the rear is necessary for user keys, etc.

Fig. 23-5 Panel cutout of machine control panel





23.4 Technical data

Table 23-9 Technical data for machine control panel OP 032S

Safety




Approvals CE

Electrical data


Power consumption, max. 10.8 W

Mechanical data








5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2







not permissible






–25 ... 55 °C




max. 0.1 % /min





The following control elements can be added:

EMERGENCY STOP

– Operator control element: 3SB3000-1HA20

– Switching element (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact) 3SB3400-0A

Cable set for additional control devices for interfaces X31-X36 A maximum of 6 cables are needed per MCP.60 x 500 mm cablesOrder No. 6FC5247-0AA35-0AA0

6 keys with lamps + 1 keyswitchThe keys and keyswitch are connected via X31-X34 (input signals).The lamps are connected to X35 and X36 (output signals).Recommended type for keys and keyswitch:

Rafix 16, Lumotast 25, Schlegel QUARTRON Sources: Schlegel (http://schlegel-ekontakt.de), RAFI (http://www.rafi.de)

Key cover (with label) 6FC5148-0AA13-0AA090 ergo-gray20 red20 yellow20 green20 medium gray

Key cover (clear; with sticker) 6FC5148-0AA14-0AA0

Mounting screws (100) 6FC3988-7BJ10

Additional override switch 6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1Override switch with wing cap, spacer, cover, 2 dials.– CBS 1/1x1GG (16/15°) switch

– Spindle override 50–120% dial

– Rapid traverse override 0–100% dial.

The second override switch must be connected via X31-X32.

Supplementarycontrol elements






Notes


Pushbutton Panel PP 012

24.1 System description

24.1.1 Introduction

PushbuttonpanelPP 012/H

PCBinput/output

PCBDirectKeys

Operator panel Control systems 810D,840D, S7-AS300 or MCU

NC CPU

COM PLC

Individual wiringinterface

PP 012 expansion

OPI/MPI

ConnectionFor 840D

Connection forCPU 3XY or MCU

COM MPI

Key-boardcontroller

Programming deviceHHU

PCB-PP 031R basic module

PCB distributor

HT6

Fig. 24-1 Pushbutton panel PP 012 in example configuration

Machine control panel for machine tools in conjunction with the control systems810D, 840D, S7-300 and FM-NC.

Applications

24

04.0424.1 System description



The PP 012 consists of

the basic module

the distributor

the direct keys

the frontplate.

The basic module can be equipped with a handheld unit connection and/oradditional inputs/outputs as options.

The p.c. board is connected to the control system via the MPI interface.

10 control devices can be installed, depending on the current requirements

4-stage mode selector switch

A programming device can be connected to the front panel, COM connec-tion

Selector switch for speed/rapid traverse and feedrate override

Handheld unit connection with jumpering pushbutton

16 inputs for direct keys

PCB_IO as an option, scanning up to 14 individual keys or 120 keys in amatrix, control of a maximum of 16 lamps

24.1.2 Interfaces and monitoring

The PP 012 is connected to the appropriate control system via the MPI/OPIinterface. DIP switches allow you to select a parameter set from three possiblevariants (see Tables 24-46 to 24-48).

Data and control signals correspond to the OPI. Handheld programming de-vices require an external 24 V power supply for operation.

The interface is not supplied with an external 5V potential (P5.EXT).

Carries the signals from the COM interface of the operator panel to the PP 012.

60 inputs and 26 outputs are assigned functions by the PP 012. The transmis-sion is word by word.

24V input voltage

Structure

Communication

Flexibility

MPI/OPI interface

PG interface

COM interface

Inputs/outputs inthe control system

Lower supply

24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012

04.0424.1 System description


PP 012 has monitoring LEDs for service and start-up:

Voltage monitoring (POWER ON > 4.7 V)

Temperature monitoring (enabled > 60 °C; disabled < 55 3 °C)

OPI LED flashes during data transfer

Bus request Repeater Segment 1

Bus request Repeater Segment 2

24.1.3 Operator panel front interface

The printed circuit board distributor has three isolated inputs.

When actuated, the EMERGENCY STOP chain will ensure your own personalsafety, as well as protect the product in hazardous situations. The EMER-GENCY STOP chain is also active when the handheld units are removed. TheEmergency Stop button can be jumpered on the handheld unit by pressing S11when the handheld unit is plugged/removed.

This is necessary to prevent the EMERGENCY STOP chain from being inter-rupted.

Note

To effectively deal with any malfunction by the jumpering key S11 (e.g.jamming), the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when amonitoring time (approximately 5 min.) expires (see Figs. 24-7 and 24-17).

The actuating elements S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15 are connected to thecontrol system via the MPI/OPI. In addition, they have isolated contacts (com-mon root) for custom-made wiring.

The lamps HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15 are connected to thecontrol system via MPI/OPI. Alternatively, they can also be controlled from ex-ternal non-isolated contacts.

Are also connected to the control system via MPI/OPI and have isolated con-tacts for custom-made wiring.

Monitoring

Inputs forcustom-madewiring

EMERGENCYSTOP chain

Actuatingelements

Lamps

Emergency stopand operatingmode selectorswitch


04.0424.2 Function blocks



24.2 Function blocks

Interface/CPU/monitoring

Distributor with repeater

Handheld unit connection XS12

I/O connection X20, X21

Direct control key connection X19

Interconnecting cable COM X26

4-stage mode selector switch WS1

Feed override WS2

Speed/rapid traverse override WS3

Max. 12 control devices, one of them an Emergency Stop button S13 and ajumper button S11

Max. 10 pilot lamps that can be controlled either from PLC or externally

Inputs for configuring global data (GD) (DIP switches)

Isolated operator panel front interface X15 with additional programming de-vice interface X16

DIP switches for generating S16, S17, S18 (baud rate, node address)

Power supply

16 isolated outputs for controlling lamps, four of them optional (key matrixoption)

14 isolated inputs for scanning individual keys/switches

Key matrix option – up to 120 keys can be scanned

Short-circuit-proof 24V output for external keys

Matrix keys momentary-contact

16 isolated inputs for scanning the direct keys from the operator panel.

Function blocksPP 012

Function blocksPCB input/output

Function blocksPCB direct keys


04.0424.3 Block diagrams


24.3 Block diagrams

Em

erg

ency

sto

p

X8

Mod

e gr

oups

X12

GN

D

5 6 7 8 301

23

HS

1

1M24

1In

terf

ace

MP

IP

ower

on60

10

29

X13

WS

1

X13

Filt

er

F1

2P24

1P24

1M24

S13

X2

2P24

GN

D

GN

D

Sw

itche

sG

D p

roje

ct4

1832 S16.1

Block S1/HS1

Block S2

Block S4

Block S7

Block S3

Block S10

Block S8

Block S9

Blocks S2/HS2

Blocks S3/HS3

Blocks S8/HS8

Blocks S4/HS4

Blocks S7/HS7

Blocks S9/HS9

Blocks S10/HS10

23

47

89

10

1011

1226

2728

X11

X3

X14

Test

conn

ecto

r

31 2

101115139

1

54

32

19

5101

6

2

7

38

4

1112

1211

101

23

4F

eed

Ove

rrid

e

WS

2

X17

X25

GN

D

16

X19

21

S18.4

17

S18.3

S18

.2

GN

D

= 1

PG OPI

X15

X16

Jum

per

P24

S11

M24

X4

7

69

105

41

12

8

112

3

Br1

34

Handwheel

XS

12

121 56 910 14

HHU/HT 6

8 15 7 1713 2 4 33P

24

3M24

Emergency Stop circuit1

Emergency Stop circuit2

X22

X23

X23

Cus

tom

er–S

peci

ficW

iring

X24

12

GND

S1

X11

X10

Block S1

9

43

2

6

11

Rep

eate

r1)

Torq

ue

zah

l/R

apid

tra

vers

eO

verr

ide

WS

31)

X18

.1 GN

D

2P24

M24

2P24

Block S14

Block S15

GN

D

1614

X6

123

(–)(+

)

X1

12

3

Blocks S14/HS14

Blocks S15/HS15

56

9X

14X

64

X26

CO

M

Con

n–ec

tion

to O

P

PC

B d

istr

ibu

tor

PC

B H

HU

78

X5

1 2 3 4

X18

.2

GN

DC 124 816

GN

DV

CC

GN

D

GN

D

VCC

Filt

er 3M24

3P24

GNDS

2

51 52 50 49 50 52 575859 60

124 816C

61

Dire

ct k

ey

16

3231

4443

2122

1413

123

456

78

PG

X27

WS

4A

utho

rizat

ion

key–

oper

ated

sw

itch

GN

DG

ND

VC

CG

ND

D0

... D

15S

B

X20

I/O (

optio

n)

X21

16

GND

16

With distributorII only

Fig. 24-2 Block diagram of PP 012


04.0424.3 Block diagrams



X20X21

D(15:0)

Memory

WD

R1

OU

T_E

NB

lock (HS

20...HS

23)

Block (H

S24...H

S27)

Output power switch24V / 0.5A

Block (H

S28...H

S31)

Block (H

S16...H

S18)

X46 X47 X42X41

X45 X47X46 X41

Block E

12

Block E

24

Block E

14

Block E

21

Block E

22

Block E

23

Block E

30

Block E

61B

lock E62

Block E

63

Block E

52

Block E

53

Block E

54

Block E

55

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6 R7

R8

R9

R10

W1

W2

W4

W8

X42

W3

W5

W6

W7

X43

W9

W10

W11

W12

Block E

19

PB

(even)

M24

P24

X44

M24

X40

I<0.7A

F110A

F210A

M24

Lock with

Authorization

keyswitch

M24

E12

E61

E30

E24

E63

E62

E22

E21

E14

E52

E23

E55

E54

E53

E19

(PB

)

HS

16

HS

19H

S18

HS

17

HS

20

HS

23H

S22

HS

21

HS

24

HS

27H

S26

HS

25

HS

28

HS

31H

S30

HS

29

P24_5

OptionKey Matrix

GN

D

VC

CG

ND

123 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 41 23 4 1 2 3 4

Fig. 24-3 Block diagram of PCB expansion card 12E/12A

GNDVCC

X19

Block F1

Block F2

Block F3

Block F4

X3017 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 20

M (GND)ext.

Block F5

Block F6

Block F7

Block F8

Block F9

Block F10

Block F11

Block F12

Block F13

Block F14

Block F15

Block F16

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

Fig. 24-4 Block diagram of PCB direct keys PP 012


04.0424.4 Operating elements


24.4 Operating elements

S8 S9 S10 S15

S1 S2 S3 S4

S7

S14

02610

2040 60

8090100110

70

120

0

60

80 90100

110

70

120Power

A B C I F G H ID

S11 XS12

LOGO

0

1 2

3

K

HS1 HS2 HS3 HS4 HS14

HS7 HS8 HS9 HS10 HS15

Fig. 24-5 Position of control elements

A: S13 EMERGENCY STOP button

B: WS1 Selector switch

C: S11 Jumper button

D: XS12 Connection for handheld units

E: X16 Programming device connection

F: X26 COM connection

G: Control devices for variable fitting

H: WS2 Feed override

I: WS3 Speed/rapid traverse override

K: Key-operated authorization switch (on request)





Applies to drives:



For details of other or additional reactions to an EMERGENCY STOP:

See machine tool manufacturer’s instructions!

Displays power supply, lights green when controller operating voltage >4.7 V

Position of controlelements

Overview ofcontrol elements

EMERGENCYSTOP key

Power


04.0424.4 Operating elements



2-way, 4 stages, 60° switching angle

Centrally mounted with front ring

Keyswitch variant CG4-1A251-600 * FS1 V750D/2J Can be changed by the customer to the knob-operated switch variant FS1

Key can be removed in all positions

Notice

When used as a mode selector switch, the keyswitch should be usedaccording to Guideline 89/392/EEC.

In slots S1 to S4, S7 to S10, S14 and S15, control devices can be installedas per Table 24-52.

For function and contacts, see Block Diagram, Fig. 24-2.

Pushbutton S11 (designed as a jumper button) is provided with a sealingcap. This prevents the pushbutton from being locked easily.

To effectively deal with any malfunction by the jumpering key S11 (e.g. jam-ming), the user PLC program must generate EMERGENCY STOP when amonitoring time (approximately 5min.) expires (see Figs. 24-7 and 24-17).

Selector switch

Variably fittedactuating elements

24 Pushbutton Panel PP 012 10.00



24.5 Interfaces

24.5.1 Overview

The letters refer to Fig. 24-6.A: S13: Emergency stop

B: WS1: Selector switch

C: X1 to X4, X6, X10, X11, X22 and X24:Input/output interface of individual wiring

D: X8: 24 V power supply

E: LED basic modules H 1...4:H 1: Not usedH 2: OvertemperatureH 3: Power OnH 4: SEND: Status change on protocol transmission

F: X15: Operator Panel InterfaceSocket: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, straight

G: X30: Direct control key connection

H: S16, S17, S18: DIP switches see Table 24-42

K: Connection for equipotential bonding connector via screw connection M5

L: LED distributor:H1: Bus segment 1H2: Bus segment 2

M: X40 ... X43: Connection PCB_IO keyboard matrix/lamps

N: X44: 24 V power supply;X45 ... X47: Connection PCB_IO single contacts/lamps

Notice

Using the key-operated authorization switch assigns inputs X47:1 ... 4.

It cannot be used in this case to scan keys on the extension panel at X47.

24 Pushbutton Panel PP 01210.00




H1H2H4

S18 S16 S17

X8

X1

X11

X10

X18.1 X18.2

X13X12

X17

X6

X3

X2

S11

S13H3

WS1

X15

X16XS12

X22

X24

X5

X23X4

X30Direct control keys

O

B

C

D

I

F

G

H

K

C

C

Basic module

L

I

PCB_IO

X26X40

X41

X42

X43

X47

X46

X45

X44

M N(GND)

Fig. 24-6 Device rear side





O Outputs

I Inputs

I/O Bi-directional signals

V Voltage

Button designation: S13

Button type: Mushroom turn-to-set button 3SB3000-1HA20 with holder3SB3000-1HA20 and 1 x NO contact 3SB3400-0B (inter-nal use) max. 4 x NC contacts

Table 24-1 Switching element: NC contact 3SB3400-0E

Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctionÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

OE_S13.xÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

I/O

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

NC contact S13.x EMER-GENCY STOP

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁ2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

BZ_S13.x ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Reference potential S13.x ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Switch designation: WS1

Switch type: CG4-1 A251-600 ΣFS1 V750 D/2J (keyswitch)

Table 24-2 Selector switch interface

Pin Signal Type Signal name Key-switchpos.

Function

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

11ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ERÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁMode

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


ÁÁÁÁ15ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ESÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Mode ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

⇑ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

BZ_WS ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Reference signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


EB ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁMode

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


VK ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Mode ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

24.5.2 PP 012 individual wiring

Notice

When PLC signals are linked with signals of the individual wiring, note that thesignal change of the individual contacts may take place at different moments.Simultaneously opening and closing the contacts of a key within the actuatingtravel is not possible.

Signal type

Nottaster S13

Selector switchinterface WS1





Connector X1: – directionpilot lamp HS14

Connector type: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08

Table 24-3 Connector X1

Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctionÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

BZ_S14ÁÁÁÁÁÁI/O

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Reference potential NO contactS14

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁ2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

S_S14.1 ÁÁÁÁ

I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

NO contact S14.1 – direction ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


S_S14.2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

NO contact S14.2 – direction ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


HS 14 ÁÁÁÁ

IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Pilot lamp HS14 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Connector X2: Pilot lamps HS7 to HS10



Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctionÁÁÁÁÁÁ1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁHS 7

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁPilot lamp HS7

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁ2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁHS 8

ÁÁÁÁIÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁPilot lamp HS8

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁAll inputsÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁ3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

HS 9ÁÁÁÁ

IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Pilot lamp HS9ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

All inputs“High” active

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

HS10ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Pilot lamp HS10ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Connector X3: Contacts S7 to S10



Pin Signal Type Signal name Function

1 OE_S7 NC contact S7

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

OE_S8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

NC contact S8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ








BZOE_S7-10

I/O

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Reference potential NC contactsS7-10


ÁÁÁ5ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁS_S7

I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNO contact S7



ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNO contact S8








ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


BZS_S7-10ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Reference potential NO contactsS7-10


ÁÁÁ11ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ2P24

ÁÁÁÁVÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ+24 V potential



2P24 ÁÁÁÁ

VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

+24 V potential ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Connector X1

Connector X2

Connector X3




Connector X4: Euchner terminal



Pin Signal Type Signal name ConnectionXS12 pin

Function

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


KEY 0 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Input 1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


KEY 1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Input 2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


KEY 2 ÁÁÁÁ

IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Input 3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

11 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


BZ_KEY ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Reference potential KEY0...2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ



1M24ÁÁÁÁ

VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Ground 24 VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

6


EMER-GENCY_STOP2.2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

EMERGENCYSTOP circuit 2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

12


S11

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


EMERGENCYSTOP circuit 2.1 ÁÁ


STOP circuit 2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


AUFR_RICHTÁÁÁÁÁÁ

I/O


Direction callÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1P24S11

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


ZUST_TA ÁÁÁÁ

I/O


ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

6(via S11)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

X24:2S11

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


ZS1/ZS1.1 *) ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁEnabling button

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ



ZS2/ZS2.1 *) ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Enabling button ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


ZSCom-mon/ZS2.2 *)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ



6ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ*) Two-channel

Connector X6 Connector X6: Direction +; Pilot lamp HS15



Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctionÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

BZ_S15 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Reference potential NO contactS15

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁ


S_S15.1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

I/O ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

NO contact S15.1 + directionÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


S_S15.2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNO contact S15.2 + directionÁÁÁÁÁÁ



HS 15 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

I ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Pilot lamp HS15 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Connector X4





Connector X10 / X11: Contacts S1 to S6; pilot lamps HS1 to HS6

Connector type X10: 4-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/4-G-5.08

Connector type X11: 12-pin Mini-Combicon MC 1.5/12-G-5.08

Table 24-8 Connectors X10/X11

Maleconnec-

tor

Pin Signal Type Signal nameFunction

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

OE_S2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


NC contact S2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

OE_S1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ



ÁÁÁÁX10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

BZOE_S1-4ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Reference potential NC con-tact S1 ... S4


ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


BZS_S1-S6ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Reference potential NO con-tact S1 .. S6

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

OE_S4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ




2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

OE_S3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ




3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

S_S4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


NO contact S4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

S_S3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ




5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

S_S2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ




6 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

S_S1.1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


NO contact S1.1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁ

X11 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

7 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

BZS_S1.2ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Reference potential NO con-tact S1.2



8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

S_S1.2ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


NO contact S1.2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


9ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

HS 4ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Pilot lamp HS4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


10ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

HS 3ÁÁÁÁÁÁI


Pilot lamp HS3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁAll inputsÁÁÁÁ


11 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

HS 2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Pilot lamp HS2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

All inputs“High” active

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

12 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

HS 1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Pilot lamp HS1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Connector X22: Handwheel



Pin Signal Type Signal nameÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁHR_A

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁHandwheel track AÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁ2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

XHR_AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁO


Handwheel track A negatedÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


HR_BÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

O ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Handwheel track BÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


XHR_BÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Handwheel track B negated

ConnectorsX10/X11

Connector X22




Connector X24: EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1



Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctionÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


2P24ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

+ 24 VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


OE_S11/ZS2.2 *)



NC contact S11 X4:9S11



EMER-GENCY_STOP 1.1


ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁEMERGENCY STOP circuit 1

S11



EMER-GENCY_STOP 1.2



EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1

*) Two-channel

Connector X8: Power supply

Connector type: 3-pin print terminal block MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08

For pin assignment See “Connection Conditions” chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”

Connector X15: Operator panel front interface (MPI)

Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, screw locking UNC4/40

Notice

Use MPI bus connector 6FX2003-0AA02!

Max. cable length: 200 m at 1.5 Mbaud

Table 24-11 Operator panel front interface (MPI) X15

Pin Signal Type Signal name

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

NC ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Not assigned

ÁÁÁÁ2 ÁÁÁÁNC ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNot assignedÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁRS

ÁÁÁÁI/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁRS-485 dataÁÁÁÁ


ORTSASÁÁÁÁ

OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Output Request to Send, user interfaceÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

5ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

GND_EXTÁÁÁÁVÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

5 V external groundÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

6ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

VCC_EXTÁÁÁÁ

VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

5 V external potentialÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

7ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

NCÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Not assignedÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

XRS ÁÁÁÁI/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

RS-485 dataÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

IRTSPG ÁÁÁÁ

I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

In Request to Send PG

Connector X24


Operator panelfront interface(MPI) X15





Connector X16 Programming device (PG) interface

Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, screw locking UNC4/40

Max. line length: 5 m


Pin Signal Type Signal nameÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNC

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁNot assignedÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁ2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3M24

ÁÁÁÁÁÁV

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁReference potential 24 VÁÁÁÁ


RSÁÁÁÁÁÁ

I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ORTSASÁÁÁÁÁÁ

OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Output Request to Send, user interfaceÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

5ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

GND_EXTÁÁÁÁÁÁ

VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

5 V external groundÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

6 / 7ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

N.C.ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Not assignedÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

XRS ÁÁÁÁÁÁI/O



9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

IRTSPG ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

I/OÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

In Request to Send PG

The power supply potential P24 is not provided by PP 012. An external 24 Vpower voltage supply enables handheld programming devices 702 and 705 to be connected. External terminals with a separate 5 V power supply can-not be operated (fiber-optic technology).

Connector X26: Serial interface RS-232-C (COM)

Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D, pin, straight, screw locking UNC4/40

Max. cable length: 25 m

For pin assignment: See “Connection Conditions” chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”

Connector: Handheld device interface XS12

Connector type: Euchner flange connector RC-17S1NM2H3PWCoding Y (315°)

Max. line length: 50 m

Table 24-13 Handheld unit interface XS12

Pin Signal Type Signal name FunctiongEnabling function

yp g

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

EMERGENCY_STOP2.1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Emergency Stop NCcontact 2.1


EMERGENCY STOP

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

MPI_A ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

I/O ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

RS-485 data ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

MPI

ÁÁÁ3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3M24 ÁÁÁV ÁÁÁÁÁÁGround 24 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁPowerÁÁÁÁÁÁ4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3P24

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ+ 24 V


Powersupply

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

5ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ZS1.1ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Enabling buttonÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁEnabling functionÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁ6ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ZS2.2ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Call enable keyÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Enabling function

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


HR_BÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Handwheel BÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁHandwheelÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁ8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

HR_AÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Handwheel AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Handwheel

Programmingdevice interface(PD) X16

Serial interfaceRS-232-C (COM)X26

Handheld deviceinterface XS12




Table 24-13 Handheld unit interface XS12FunctionSignal nameTypeSignal

Enabling functionPin

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


EMERGENCY_STOP1.2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


EMERGENCY STOPNC contact 1.2


EMERGENCY STOPÁÁÁÁÁÁ


EMERGENCY_STOP1.1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ




EMERGENCY STOP

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


KEY2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Key scanning No.3ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Jumper short-circuitconnector

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


EMERGENCY_STOP2.2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ




EMERGENCY STOP

13 MPI_B I/O RS-485 data MPI

14 ZS2.1 Enabling button Enabling function

15 HR_XA Handwheel A negated Handwheel

16 ZS1.2 N.C./enable keyNot assigned/enab-ling function

17 HR_XB Handwheel B negated Handwheel

Connector X30: Printed circuit board “Direct keys”

Connector type: Ribbon cable connector plug connector with protectiveshroud 20-pin, 2-row with lock

Table 24-14 Printed circuit board Direct keys

Pin Signal Type Signal nameÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

F1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Direct key 1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

F2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Direct key 2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

F3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Direct key 3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

F4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Direct key 4

5 F5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Direct key 5

6 F6 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Direct key 6

7 F7 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Direct key 7

8 F8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

IDirect key 8

9 F9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

IDirect key 9

10 F10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Direct key 10

11 F11 ÁÁÁDirect key 11

12 F12ÁÁÁÁÁÁDirect key 12

13 F13ÁÁÁÁÁÁDirect key 13

14 F14ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Direct key 14

15 F15ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Direct key 15

16 F16ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Direct key 16

17/18 P5_TACV

5 V keyboard controller

19/20 M_TACV

Ground of keyboard controller

The direct key module serves to connect the 16 direct keys of the operatorpanel.

Printed circuitboard direct keysX30





24.5.3 Individual wiring PCB input/output

Connector type: 4-pin, Combicon base casing MC 1.5/4-G-3.81

Table 24-15 Printed circuit board input/output X40


ÁÁÁÁ1 ÁÁÁÁP24_5 ÁÁÁV ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ24 V potentialÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁM24

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁGround 24 VÁÁÁÁ


E55/W8ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

IÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Input key 55/matrix row 8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

4ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

N.C.ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

–ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Not assigned




1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E52/W1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Input key 52/matrix row 1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E53/W2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁI


Input key 53/matrix row 2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E54/W4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

I ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E55/W8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ



5 HS24 Connection of lamp HS24

6 HS25O

Connection of lamp HS25

7 HS26O






ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

W3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Matrix row 3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

W5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Matrix row 5

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

W6 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Matrix row 6

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

W7 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Matrix row 7


6 HS29O


7 HS30O



Connector X40

Connector X41

Connector X42







ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

W9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Matrix row 9

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

W10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Matrix row 10

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

W11 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Matrix row 11

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

W12 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Matrix row 12

Connector type: 3-pin print terminal block MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08



1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ShieldÁÁÁÁÁÁ


GroundÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

M24 ÁÁÁÁÁÁV


Ground 24 VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

P24 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

24 V potential




ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

P24_5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

24 V potential

ÁÁÁÁ2 ÁÁÁÁM24 ÁÁÁV

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁGround 24 VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁE12/R1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁI

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁInput key 12/matrix line 1ÁÁÁÁ


E24/R2ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

I ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Input key 24/matrix line 2




ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E30/R3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ



ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E61/R4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ



ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E62/R5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ



ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E63/R6 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ




6 HS17O


7 HS18O



Connector X43

Connector X44

Connector X45

Connector X46








ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E14/R7 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ



ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E21/R8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ



ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E22/R9 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ



ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

4 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

E23/R10 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ




6 HS21O


7 HS22O



Connector X47




Table 24-23 Connector parts for I/O module

Connec-tor

PCB-IO

SignalMINI-COMBICON connector part

Grid 3.81

Connection PhoenixArticle

No.ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

MC 1 5/4 ST 3 81 Screw 1 5 1803594ÁÁÁÁ

MC 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1803594ÁÁÁÁ

MC 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1803594ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁX40

FRONT-MC 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1850686ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

X40,FK MCP 1 5/4 ST 3 81 Spring force 1 5 1851067

ÁÁÁÁX40,X43

FK-MCP 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Spring force 1.5 1851067ÁÁÁÁX43,

FK-MCP 1.5/4-ST-3.81 Spring force 1.5 1851067ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

X43,X45 Housing MCC 1/4-STZ-3.81 Crimp 1852192

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Socket connector MCC-MT 0 2 0 35 Crimp 0 2 to 0 35 1859988

ÁÁÁÁSocket connectorcontact

MCC-MT 0.2...0.35MCC MT 0 5 1 0

Crimp 0.2 to 0.35Crimp 0 5 to 1 0

18599881859991ÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁcontact MCC-MT 0.5...1.0 Crimp 0.5 to 1.0 1859991

MC 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1803633

X41,FRONT-MC 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Screw 1.5 1850725

X41,X42,X46

FK-MCP 1.5/8-ST-3.81 Spring force 1.5 1851106X46, Housing MCC 1/8 STZ 3 81 Crimp 1852231X46,X47

Housing MCC 1/8-STZ-3.81 Crimp 1852231X47

Housing MCC 1/8-STZ-3.81 Crimp 1852231X47

Socket connectorcontact

MCC-MT 0.2...0.35MCC-MT 0.5...1.0

Crimp 0.2 to 0.35Crimp 0.5 to 1.0

18599881859991

Connec-tor

PCB-IO

COMBICON connector partGrid 5.08

Connection PhoenixArticle

No.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

X44 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

MSTBA 2.5/3-G-5.08 Screw 2.5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1779990

Connector partsfor I/O module


04.0424.6 Connection for handheld units



24.6 Connection for handheld units

Whether a terminator or a handheld unit is connected can be determined byquerying word 0 bit 2, KEY 2. “Terminator connected” corresponds to “High” oninput KEY2.

Interlocking of axis motion via the PLC

Interlocking of the enable key

Jumpering of EMERGENCY STOP contacts on the handheld unit

Manipulation-proof: Sealing cap prevents accidental actuation of key

Jumper button, non-latching

Initiation of a monitoring time for checking the operability of the EMER-GENCY STOP jumpering function

Interruption in power supply for handheld unit connection, two-channel vari-ant, when S11 is actuated.

Warning

It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that the enable key is designed to DINEN 602041-1, Subsection 9.2.5.8, and, when released or pushed down, stopsdangerous movements reliably.

When S11 is utilized for the “EMERGENCY STOP” jumpering function, aninterlock of hazardous motions must be implemented via the PLC with S11 anda time monitor activated simultaneously, in addition to Fig. 24-7. If the signalingcontact on S11:31/32 is not properly closed again on expiry of the monitoringtime (approximately 5 minutes), then “EMERGENCY STOP” must be generatedby the PLC.

24.6.1 Functional reliability of EMERGENCY STOP and enabling circuits

See Fig. 24-7

The EMERGENCY STOP circuit is a two-channel configuration with the follow-ing layout:

For circuit 1:NC contacts S13→X4:6→X5:12→XS12:12→EMERGENCY STOP hand-held unit→XS12:1→X5:1→X4:7

For circuit 2:NC contacts S13→X24:4→X5:9→XS12:9→EMERGENCY STOP handheldunit→XS12:10→X5:10→X24:3.

Terminator

Properties ofjumper button S11

EMERGENCY STOPcircuits




To avoid interruption of the EMERGENCY STOP circuits on changeover be-tween the handheld unit and the terminator at XS12, the EMERGENCY STOPcontacts of the handheld unit can be jumpered via S11.

– Contact S11:13/14 jumpers via X23:1/2 the EMERGENCY STOP contactXS12:1/12 of the handheld unit in circuit 1,

– Contact S11:43/44 jumpers via X23:5/6 the EMERGENCY STOP contactXS12:9/10 of the handheld unit in circuit 2.

The time monitoring function in the PLC serves to detect malfunctions in push-button S11: If contact S11:31/32 does not close properly within the specified time frame, thePLC must interrupt the EMERGENCY STOP circuit. The contact is scanned viacircuit X23:8X23:8→X4:8→X4:1→optocoupler KEY0→Word 0, Bit 0 of the PLC input image (see Section 24.14).

The two-channel variant of the enable function is used for PP 012:

The enable key is called up with:X4:12→X5:17→XS12:16 andX24:2→X5:6 →XS12:6.

It is scanned viaXS12:5→X5:5→X4:10 and XS12:14→X5:14→X4:11.

In addition, the power supply for the handheld units connected at XS12:4 isinterrupted via contact S11:31/32→X23:8 and X5:4 when S11 is actuated.

The interlock between S11 and the enable key must be implemented in thePLC.

Note

Only 2-channel handheld units can be connected.

24.6.2 Two-channel enabling function

The circuit is illustrated in Fig. 24-7 and the terminal assignments in Table 24-24(see below).

The two-channel enable function applies to order nos.6FC5203-0AF25-1AA0 and6FC5203-0AF27-1AA0-Z

Enable circuit

Validity





HHU

XS12

Enabling buttonPowersupply

MPI

Emergency stop Handwheel

HT6

Powersupply

MPI

Emergency stop

1 2341469 1012 5 13

7 171 2341469 1012 5 13815

1 9 1012 411

Terminator

11

3P24

Emergency stop

X13

S13

X25

PG

inte

rfac

eO

PI X15

X16

Jumper

2P24S11

M24

X4769 105411 128 1 2 334

12

1

5

6

9

10

14

8157

17

132433M24X22

X23 X23

X2412

M (

GN

D)

11

Repeater

2P24

M24

PCB dis–

X5

1234

M (GND) P5

Filter

3M24

3P24

16

32 3144 4321 22

14 131 234

5 6

7 8

PP 012H

Br1EMERGENCY STOP circuit 1

Enabling button

EMERGENCY STOPCircuit 2

5146

1

23

4

123

4

12

1

5

6

9

10

14

8157

13243

11

Terminator(component PP 012H)

Handheld unitType B-MPI

Handheld terminalHT 66FC5403-0AA10-0AA0

HH

U/H

T 6

Br5 *)

2P24

16

Enabling button

16

16

*) Signal to PLC: Triggers a monitoring timer.If the signal level is still “low” or “open” when the monitoring time has expired (approximately5 min.), the PLC must initiate an EMERGENCY STOP (see also Fig. 24-17).

Customer–Specific

tributor II

1617

6FX2007-1AE13

Wiring

Fig. 24-7 Connection for handheld unit ZS (two-channel)




Table 24-24 Terminal assignments XS12 → handheld unit (two-channel)

PIN PP 012H HHU(MPI) HT6 Termin–ator

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

EMER-GENCY_STOP 2.1


EMERGENCY STOPbutton 2.1



BR1

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


MPI_AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

MPI_A MPI_AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ3 3M24 M (GND) M (GND)

4 3P24 P24 P24 BR3

5 ZS1.1 ZS1.1 ZS1.1

6 ZS2.2 ZS2.2 ZS2.2

7 HR_B HRB –

8 HR_A HRA –

9 EMER-GENCY_STOP 1.2



BR2




BR2

11 KEY2 KEY2 KEY2 BR3




BR1

13 MPI_B MPI_B MPI_B

14 ZS2.1 ZS2.1 ZS2.1

15 HR_XA HR_XA –

16 ZS1.2 ZS1.2 ZS1.2

17 HR_XB HR_XB –


04.0424.7 Dimension drawings and mounting instructions



24.7 Dimension drawings and mounting instructions

482.6

155

50

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

70

105

Identification of anode connection:Insert the LED into the key with the +polarity on the correct side.

Fig. 24-8 Dimension drawing of PP 012

The required panel cutout is 451.0 x 137.6 mm.

Mounting background

1.5 to 6 thick

Operator panel front Tension jacksA

A

132.5 132.5

Cutout symmetrical with operator panel front

451+1B B

A-A1.5 to 6

34.2 123.5 155.8 103.3 34.2

482.6

B-B Max. torque

0.5 Nm

35

137.

6+1

155

Fig. 24-9 Panel cutout for PP 012

Dimensiondrawing

Panel cutout


04.0424.8 Installation and mounting


24.8 Installation and mounting

The PP 012 (for dimensions, see Fig. 24-9 ) is secured by means of tensionjacks (supplied with panel) to the rear of the frontplate. Due to the surroundingseal located on the rear side, the frame profile complies with degree of protec-tion IP65 when all 9 tension jacks are fastened.

Only IP54 can be achieved for the complete pushbutton panel, however, due tothe installation of a keyswitch.

If necessary, the tension jacks (9 items) can be supplied as a spare part (OrderNo. 6FC5 248-0AF13-0AA0).

The 24 V supply is connected via a 3-pin terminal block (see Fig. 24-6 ) at con-nector X8 to the rear of the machine control panel. The equipotential bondingconductor is fastened using an M5 screw and must be linked with the centralground standard part.

Danger

The 24 V DC power supply must always be grounded and designed asProtective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) – protection by function low voltagewith safe isolation!

The PP 012 is connected to the 840D or S7-300 control by means of an MPIbus line. The MPI connector is plugged into X15 on the rear of the PP 012 andsecured with a screw.

Emergency stop, selector switch and single contacts are connected accordingto the required custom-made links.

(For function see Figs. 24-17 to 24-21)

Supply voltages for inputs and outputs must always be grounded!

Note

To use the actuating element WS1 as an operating modeselector switch, a keyswitch CG4-1A251-600 * FS1 V750D/2J should be usedin accordance with EC Directive 89/392/EEC.

Mountingpreparations

Connecting the24 V power supply

Connecting theMPI connection

Connectingindividual wiring


04.0424.9 Labeling control elements



24.9 Labeling control elements

Device front

02610

2040 60

8090100110

70

120

0

60

80 90100

110

70

120Power

Free layout of labeling areas thanks to the use of slide–in user labels

COMWS1 PG interface

WS3

WS2

Fig. 24-10 Control panel (example)

The following drawing is intended purely as an example; multiple slide-in labelscan also be arranged.

16

16

23.8

19

14

47

80

113

146

19

21.5

55.5

64.5

76.5

85.5

110

1038

7 7

0 Dim

ensi

on

s fo

r la

bel

ing

0Dim

ensi

on

s fo

r la

bel

ing

th

e sl

ide–

in u

ser

lab

els

Cor

ners

rou

nded

R1.

5or

cha

mfe

red

1.5x

45 d

egre

es

14.4

56.4

0

85

180

Cut

ting

edge

bor

derin

g

mus

t be

prin

ted

Win

dow

are

a bo

rder

ing

mus

t not

be

prin

ted

slid

e–in

lab

els

(S11

, XS

12)

(Des

ign

atio

n f

ield

, WS

1)

55

1

1

1

Dim

ensi

on

s fo

r la

bel

ing

th

e sl

ide–

in u

ser

lab

els

(var

iab

le s

wit

chin

g e

lem

ents

S1

to S

4; S

7 to

S10

; S

14;

S15

)

Fig. 24-11 Dimensions for texts on the slide-in labels

Dimensions forlabeling theslide-in labels


04.0424.9 Labeling control elements


HS1

HS2

HS3

HS4

S1

S1

S2

S3S4

S4

S3

HS14

S14

S14

HW-FAULT

1234 4 3 21 1

S18 S16 S17Off

S7–AS300(2)

S7–AS300

840 D

HS15

S15

HS7

HS8

HS9

HS10

S7

S8

S9

S10

S7S8

S9

S10

2P24

2P24

S11

HR–A*HR–AHR–B

*HR–B

S7HS7

S1HS1

S2 HS2

S3 HS3

S4 HS4

S14 HS14

S9 HS9

S15 HS15

S10 HS10

S8 HS8

WS3 WS2

S11WS1

1,6A

T

RequestBUS-

> ϑ

On

S15

X44

X30

Opt

ion

1

X43

4

1

X

42

8

1

X

41

8

1

X43

4

Opt

ion

8

X

47

1

4

X45

1

8

X

46

1

32

1

3 24

Boa

rd IN

– / O

UT

PU

T

S2

S1

Fig. 24-12 Labeling on rear of device

Labelingdevice rear side


04.0424.10 PP 012 expansion



24.10 PP 012 expansion

A

A64 33482.6

95

70

A–A

CenterOperator control element

25.526.6

1021

42.2

38

Fig. 24-13 PP 012 expansion

Order code 6FC5 247-0AA43-1AA0

Can be equipped with max. 12 control devices, diameter 22 mm, grid 33 mm

Labeling with exchangeable text labels

Front view withsection


04.0424.10 PP 012 expansion


Mounting background

1.5 to 6 thick

Operator panel front Tension jacks

A

A

451+1

482.6

34,2 123.5 155.8 103.3 34.2

132.5 132.5

95

77.6

+1

B B

B-BMax. torque

0.5 Nm

A-A1.5 to 6

35

Fig. 24-14 Panel cutout for PP 012 extension

The following drawing is intended purely as an example; multiple slide-in labelscan also be arranged.

16.1

Dimensions for labeling the slide-in user labels(variable switching elements S7 to S12)

23.8

20

13 46 79 112

1450

Corners rounded R1.5or chamfered 1.5 x 45 degrees

208

Cutting edge bordering

must be printed

Window area bordering

must not be printed

1

1

178

20

134679112

145 0

235

178

23.8

16.1

Dimensions for labeling the slide–in user labels(variable switching elements S1 to S6)

1

Slide-in direction

Slide-in direction

.8

Fig. 24-15 Dimensions for texts on the slide-in labels (PP 012 extension)

Panel cutout

Dimensions forlabeling theslide-in labels


04.0424.11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A



24.11 Functions of PCB expansion card 12E/12A

24.11.1 Inputs/outputs

Table 24-25 Inputs (possible combinations)

Without authorization key-operatedswitch

With authorization key-operated switch

Design Key matrix(option)

Switch/independentsingle con-

tacts

Design Key matrix(option)

Switch/independentsingle con-

tacts

ÁÁÁ1ÁÁÁÁÁNo ÁÁÁÁÁ14 contacts 14 No ÁÁÁÁÁ10 contactsÁÁÁÁÁÁ2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ7 keys

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ11 contacts 15 7 keys

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ7 contacts

3 12 keys 10 contacts 16 12 keys 6 contacts





8 60 keys 5 contacts 21 60 keys 1 contact


10 84 keys 3 contactsFunctions of keys in the matrix:

11 96 keys 2 contactsFunctions of keys in the matrix:+ non-latching keys

12 108 keys 1 contact+ non-latching keys+ single key actuation

no switch function13 120 keys 0 contacts

+ no switch function

16 outputs for driving lamps, four of which are optional.

8 inputs W3, W5, W6, W7, W9, W10, W11, W12 for matrix4 outputs A28 to A31 for controlling lamps

Inputs

Outputs

Optional keymatrix




24.11.2 Key assignment within matrix

Table 24-26 Key assignment within matrix

Key value Wn Matrix row Rn

Wn W8/E55

W4/E54

W2/E53

W1/E52

E19/PB

Rn E12 E24 E30 E61 E62 E63 E14 E21 E22 E23

1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 0 0 1 0 0 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

3 0 0 1 1 1 3 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

4 0 1 0 0 0 4 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

5 0 1 0 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

6 0 1 1 0 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

7 0 1 1 1 0 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

8 1 0 0 0 0 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

9 1 0 0 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

10 1 0 1 0 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

11 1 0 1 1 0

12 1 1 0 0 1





Scan input R1 ... Rnn ≤ 10 *)

*) n = number of matrix blocks

Numberof active blocks

= 1 ?

Yes

No

Save the activeblock Rn

Scan inputsW1, W2, W4, W8

Save the activeblock Wn

Scan parity bit E19

Parity“OK” ?

YesSave RnWn

Bounce suppressionfunction

Output of key RnWn

No

Fig. 24-16 Matrix scan sequence

Matrix keyboardscan


04.0424.12 Circuits and wiring


24.12 Circuits and wiring

There are various possible applications for connecting the key inputs KEY0 toKEY2:

1. Enable key connection according to Fig. 24-7.

2. Use as isolated inputs with reference potential at X4/5

3. Use of button S11 with PLC function without jumpering

For the required jumper assignment and their meaning, please refer to theTables below.

Table 24-27 Custom-made wiring

Br1 Br5ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

—


—

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Use of the connections X4:1;2;3 as isolated inputs. The refer-ence potential is at X4:4 here.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

X ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

X ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

PLC function

Table 24-28 Use of the connections

Potential Connect-ing

Application

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ2P24

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

X3/11,12 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Control of inputs HS1 to HS4, HS7 to HS10, HS14 and HS15

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2P24 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

X24/1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Controlling the inputs KEY 0 to KEY 2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

KEY0... 2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

X4/1 ... 3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Inputs KEY0 to KEY2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

M24 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

X4/5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Reference potential of inputs KEY 0 to KEY 2;no external use.

X5

M24

X4769 105 1112 8 1 2 3

2P24

11 12X3

External contactsBr1 Br52)

2P24S11

X24

2P24

4 43 2 1

2) Signal to PLC: Triggers a monitoring timer.

1) S11 connection with single–channel variant only

1)

If the signal level is still “low” or “open” when the monitoring time has expired (approximately5 min.), the PLC must initiate an EMERGENCY STOP (see also Fig. 24-7).

Fig. 24-17 Button S11 with PLC function

Custom-madewiring

Use ofconnections

Button S11 withPLC function





1M24

X1; X2; X6; X11

Blo

ck S

n

2P24

11 12 X3

External contact

HSn

Fig. 24-18 External control of signaling lamps in keys HSn

1 1

2 2

EMER-GENCYSTOP key


To PLC

3

4

1 1

2 2

Optional


Ext. control ofpilot lampsHS1 ... HS10






1

2

8

16

4

C

6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1WS3X18.1

X18.2

rd

rd

Fig. 24-20 Connection WS3 spindle speed override spindle speed/rapid traverse

5 V +10 %

X30

F1616

F1515

F1414

F1313

F1212

F1111

F1010

F99

F88

F77

F66

F55

F44

F33

F22

F11

20

19

18

17

+

PCB direct keysPP 012

–

Fig. 24-21 Direct control key connection

Connectingspindle overrideWS3

Connectingdirect control keys





Row

n=

1

Row

s n=

3 to

10

P24

M24PC

B e

xpan

sio

n

W1; W2; W4; W8only as an alternativeto the key matrix,X42, X43 Not assigned

Key

mat

rix

(op

tio

n)

Sin

gle

co

nta

cts

X47

X44

SE

4S

E3

SE

6S

E5

SE

8S

E7

SE

10S

E9

SE

12S

E11

SE

14S

E13

SM

1.11

SM

1.10

SM

1.8

SM

1.7

SM

1.9

SM

1.6

SM

1.5

SM

1.4

SM

1.2

SM

1.1

SM

1.3

Blo

ckS

M1

SM

1.12

Row

n=

2

Lam

ps

Lam

ps

SE

2S

E1

R1

X45

Inpu

ts R

1 to

R10

Whe

n th

ese

are

conn

ecte

d, th

eco

rres

pond

ing

indi

vidu

al c

onta

cts

SM

2.11

SM

2.10

SM

2.8

SM

2.7

SM

2.9

SM

2.6

SM

2.5

SM

2.4

SM

2.2

SM

2.1

SM

2.3

Blo

ckS

M2

SM

2.12

HS29

W1

W2

W3

W4

W5

W6

W7

W8

W9

W10

W11

W12M24

P24_5

SM

n.11

SM

n.10

SM

n.8

SM

n.7

SM

n.9

SM

n.6

SM

n.5

SM

n.4

SM

n.2

SM

n.1

SM

n.3

Blo

ckS

Mn

SM

n.12

X42

X41

R2

R3

R4R5R6

R7*)

R9*)R10*)

W1

W2

W8

W4

HS24

HS25

HS26HS27

M24P24_5

X46

assigned when the

key–operated authorization

switch is used

*)

X43

X40

R8*)

HS23

HS22

HS20

HS21

HS18

HS16

HS17

HS19

HS31

HS30

HS28

card

12E

/12A

Fig. 24-22 Connecting the extension panel to PCB expansion card 12E/12A

Connectingexpansion panel




nc =

not

con

nect

ed

PB

Inp

uts

PL

C

(W1)

(W2)

(W3)

(W4)

(W5)

(W6)

(W7)

(W8)

(W9)

(W10)

(W11)

(W12)

(even)

* Not usable

switch is used

M24

E52

E53

E54

E55

E19

P24

23

X44

M24P24_5

E12

E24

E30

E61

E62

E63

E14*

E21*

E22*

E23*

(W8)

X41

, X42

X40

X43

From centrallowersupply

SE

9*S

E8*

SE

5S

E4

SE

3S

E10

*S

E6

SE

7*S

E2

SE

1

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R8 *

R7 *

R9 *

R10 *

P24_5M24

X45

X47

X46

X45

Individualkeys

SE

W8

ncnc

ncnc

SM

1.7

SM

1.6

SM

1.5

SM

1.4

SM

1.2

SM

1.1

SM

1.3

Blo

ckS

M1

PP 012 extension PCB expansion card 12E/12A

switch is used authorization

1

Fig. 24-23 Wiring example eleven single keys and seven matrix keys

Wiring example





24.13 Technical data

24.13.1 PP 012

Table 24-29 Technical data for PP 012

Safety



Front panel IP54 Rear side IP10A


Electrical data



Mechanical data



Weight approx. 3 kg



Vibration stressing 2 – 9 Hz: 3 mm9 – 200 Hz: 10 m/s2


2 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 10 m/s2


Shock stressing 100 m/s2, 11 ms3M2 according to EN 60721–3–3

100 m/s2, 11 ms2M2 according to EN 60721–3–2




not permissible






–40 ... 70 °C




max. 0.1 % /min




24.13.2 Input/output interface of individual wiring

Contacts with floating outputs S1 to S4; S7 to S10; S11; S14; S15 (NC contactor NO contact)

Table 24-30 NO contacts S1 to S4; S7 to S10; S14; S15

AC DCÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Rated insulation voltage ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Ue ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

50 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

50 VÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Rated operating current ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Ie ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 A ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁRated operating current at 24 V ÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁIe ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


2 A

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Min. rated operating current at 5 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

IminÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


1 mA


Volume resistance ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


< 20 mΩ


Switching capacity ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

10 le ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1.1 le


Max. operating current for reference po-tential


ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

8 A ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

8 A

Contacts with floating outputs WS1/9–11; 13; 15;

Table 24-31 Selector switch

Load AC DC


Rated operating voltage ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Ue ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

300 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

300 V


Switching capacityresistiveÁÁÁÁÁ


10 A ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Switching capacityinductiveÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ > 2 A ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁSwitching capacity at resistiveÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 10 AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Switching capacity at24 V inductive


ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


6 AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Rated values for arc-freeswitching at 24 V

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


0.3 AÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

0.22 A

Contacts with floating outputs S13

Table 24-32 EMERGENCY STOP button

Utilization category(EN 60947–5–1)

AC DC

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁRated operating voltage

ÁÁÁÁÁÁUe

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ24 V

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ24 V

AC-12 le 10 A

Switching capacityAC-15 le 6 A

Switching capacityDC-12 le 10 A

DC-13 le 3 A

Min. rated operating current at5 V

lmin 1 mA

For further parameters, see pushbutton and indicator light SIGNUM 3SB3

Button contactmaker

Selector switch

EMERGENCYSTOP key





X4: KEY 0 to KEY 2

Table 24-33 Inputs X4: KEY 0 to KEY 2:

State Voltageswitched

Current switched

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁRated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁ24 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

H signalÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Signal level


+15 V to +30 V


Min. 4 mA (at 15 V)Max. 9.5 mA (at 30 V)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁL signal


Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

0 V or open ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

L signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Signal level ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

–3 V to +5 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁIn a group of ÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁ3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁCable length ÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁmax. 50 mAWG 20–16



X1, X2, X6, X11

Table 24-34 Inputs HS1 to HS4; HS7 to HS10; HS14; HS15

State Voltage switched Current switched


Pilot lamp ONÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


24 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

50 mA(making current


Pilot lamp ONÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


+18 V to +30 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

(making current max. 600 mA)


Pilot lamp OFF ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


open ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁCable length ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁMax. 10 m AWG 20–16ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


X30

Table 24-35 Input X30 direct keys, F1 to F16


ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁH signal


Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

5 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

H signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Signal level ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

+5 V or open ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁL signal


Rated value ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

L signalÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Signal level ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

–3 V to +1 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

< 11 mA


In a group of ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

16 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Cable length ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Max 0.6 m AWG 28ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


X44

Table 24-36 Inputs X44

Voltage supply

Total current Rated voltage Upper volt-age limit

Lower voltage limit

Fuse

Max. = 5 A, depend-ing on the lamp load


24 V DC ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

30.2 V DC ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

18.5 VDCÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 x 10 A

Inputs

Printed circuitboard input/output(option)




X41, X42, X43, X45, X46, X47: E12, E14, E21 to E24, E30, E52 to E55, E61 toE63, W1 to W12

Table 24-37 Inputs





+24 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

H signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


+15 V to +30 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Min. 3.6 mA (at 15 V)Max. 8 mA (at 30 V)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁL signal



0 V or open ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

L signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


–3 V to +5 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁIn a group of ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁCommon root ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁCable length Max. 50m, AWG 16

X41, X42, X43, X46, X47: HS16 to HS31

Table 24-38 Lamp outputs



H signalÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


+24 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

H signalÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


+20 V to +30 V ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Max. 0.5 A/output


L signal ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ



ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

L signalÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Open ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

< 25 µA

ÁÁÁÁÁÁIn a group of ÁÁÁÁÁÁ16 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁCable length Max. 50 m, AWG 16

Startingtotal current

Max. 5 A

X40:1, X45:1

Table 24-39 Outputs P24_5



Output total current ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ



Max. 700 mA

Rated value +24 V

Inputs

Lamp outputs

Outputs P24_5


04.0424.14 PLC interface



24.14 PLC interface

Table 24-40 Input signals

Inputs Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Word 0Low

Mode GD project Isolated inputsLow

WS1/4 ER

WS1/3 ES

WS1/2 EB

WS1/1 VK

*) DIPS16/1

X4/3 KEY2

X4/2 KEY1

X4/1 KEY0

Word 0High

+ direction I/O – direction Variable keysHigh ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ

S15 E14/R7Key

switch 0

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ

S14 E12/R1ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ

S4ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ

S3 ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ


S1

Word 1Low

I/O GD project Version activation GD projectLow

E23/R10key

switch 3

E22/R9Key

switch 2

E21/R8Key

switch 1

DIPS18/3

E19/PB(parity)

High(reserve)

*) DIPS16/1

DIPS18/4

Word 1High

GD project I/O Emergencystop

Variable keys

*) DIPS16/1

E30/R3 S13ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ

S10ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ

S9ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ


S7 E24/R2

Word 2Low

Direct keyLow

F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1

Word 2High

Direct keyHigh

F16GD project

F15 F14 F13 F12 F11 F10 F9

Word 3Low

I/O Spindle speed/rapid traverseLow

E55/W8 E54/W4 E53/W2 E52/W1 D C B A

Word 3High

I/O Feed overrideHigh

E63/R6 E62/R5 E61/R4 I D C B A

*) All bits identified with DIP-S16/1 are simultaneously switched when S16/1 is actuated.

Legend:

High active signals ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ

S1... S4;S7... S10;S14; S15

High active/Low active settable via S18.2S18.2 closed Low activeS18.2 open High active

Low active signals Ex/HSx I/O high active via a plug-on card supplied asan option


04.0424.14 PLC interface


Table 24-41 Output signals (see Table 24-40 for legend)

Outputs Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Word 0Lo

Pilot lampsLow

HS8 HS7 HS15 HS14 HS4 HS3 HS2 HS1

Word 0High

Not assigned Pilot lampsHigh

HS10 HS9

Word 1Lo

I/OLow


Word 1High

Option Key matrix on I/O I/OHigh


Word 2Lo

Not assignedLow

Word 2High

Not assignedHigh

Word 3Lo

Not assignedLow

Word 3High

Not assignedHigh

Notice

When the mode is switched over, “Low” can be output briefly for all signals onselector switch SW1!

I.e., all safety-relevant signals are linked such that they are only possible ifswitch WS1 has a defined position.


04.0424.15 Initialization



24.15 Initialization

The following settings are possible with the switches DIP S16, S17, S18:

Table 24-42 Assignments of S16, S17, S18 on PP 012

S17 S16 S18 Meaning

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

on Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud OPI

off Baud rate: 187.5 kbaud MPI

on on not applicable

on off 200 ms cycl. Cycle time

off on 100 ms cycl. Cycle time

off off 50 ms cycl. Cycle time

on on on on Bus address: 15

on on on off Bus address: 14

on on off on Bus address: 13

on on off off Bus address: 12

on off on on Bus address: 11

on off on off Bus address: 10

on off off on Bus address: 9

on off off off Bus address: 8

off on on on Bus address: 7

off on on off Bus address: 6

off on off on Bus address: 5

off on off off Bus address: 4

off off on on Bus address: 3

off off on off Bus address: 2

off off off on Bus address: 1

off off off off Bus address: 0

off off Set of parameters 1

on off Set of parameters 2

on on Set of parameters 3

on Hardware reset “ON”

off Hardware reset “OFF”

on Pushbutton panel – factory set-ting: NC function

off Pushbutton panelNO function

X Reserve GD project

Jumpering




Table 24-43 Default setting for 840D

Application:Connecting the PP 012 to an 840D

S17 S16 S18S17 S16 S18Meaning

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1Meaning

X off on off on on off off off off X off 187.5 kbaud/1.5 MbaudTrans cycle time 100 msTrans. cycle time 100 msBus address 6Bus address 6Parameter set 1

Requirement:None, can be directly connected to the MPI/OPI of the 840D

Table 24-44 Default setting for S7-300

Application:Connecting the PP 012 to an S7-300


4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1Meaning

off off on off on on off on off off X off 187.5 kbaudTrans cycle time 100 msTrans. cycle time 100 msBus address 6Bus address 6Parameter set 2

Requirement:A global data table created using HISTEP

Table 24-45 Setting for S7-300 with two machine control panels

Application:Connecting two PP 012s to an S7-300


4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1Meaning

off off on off on on off on off on X off 187.5 kbaudTrans cycle time 100 msTrans. cycle time 100 msBus address 6Bus address 6Parameter set 3

Requirement:A global data table created using HISTEP

The load on the PLC by the PP 012 can thus be adapted.

The PLC expects a message frame from the PP 012 at least every 500 msecs.The PP 012 sends a message frame to the PLC at cyclic intervals when no keyis pressed. This cycle time is set on S17 DIP switches 2 and 3.

DIP switchsettings

Settings for thetransmissioncycle time





The switchover of the sets of parameters (GD identifications) for communicationbetween control system and PP 012 is implemented via DIP switch S16/1 orS18/3. The switchover does not take effect until after the PP 012 power is switched on.

Transmit data = PP 012→ controllerReceive data = controller → PP 012

Table 24-46 Parameter set

Index Designation Parame-ter set 1

Parame-ter set 2

Parame-ter set 3

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Receive GD circuit no.ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Receive GI no.ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Object number for receive GI ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Internalassign-

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Send GD circuit no. ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

assign-mentsÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Transmit GI no. ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

mentsÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

2

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Object number for transmit GI ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

1

When the PP 012 is operated in conjunction with an S7-300 CPU, set of param-eters 2 is selected and a global data table is created using HISTEP.

The communication link to the PP 012 must be parameterized as follows:

Table 24-47 Global data for set of parameters 2

GD identification ebf/s7-300:: ebf/PP 012::ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

GD 1.1.1ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

>>ab60:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

eb0:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁGD 1.2.1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁeb60:8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ>>ab0:8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁThe specifications “ab60” and “eb60” for S7 are only examples; the signals canalso be transferred to other locations.

The GD identification is generated by the compiler.

GD 1.1.1 PP 012 is receiverGD 1.2.1 PP 012 is transmitter

This assignment corresponds to set of parameters 2 as per Table 24-46.

Note

Make sure that a data width of eight bytes is always assigned for the input andoutput image!

If two PP 012s are to be connected to an S7-300 CPU, set of parameters 3must be set, and the following global data table must be created using HISTEP.

Communicationparameters

Global data table




Table 24-48 Global data for set of parameters 3

GD identification ebf/s7-300:: ebf/PP 012:: ebf/PP 012_2::ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ



eb0:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁGD 1.2.1


eb60:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

>>ab0:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁGD 2.1.1




eb0:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


eb118:8ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ


>>ab0:8

Further GD communications can be configured in the following lines.

Danger

The transmission path (MPI/OPI) from PP 012 to the central controller must bemonitored by the user.


04.0424.16 Example of parameter settings for communication SIMATIC S7 / PP 012



24.16 Example of parameter settings for communicationSIMATIC S7 / PP 012

Your program can read the information of the GD package status from the oper-ands you assign the corresponding GDS identification in the global data table inthe STEP 7 tool “Communication Configuration”.

If a communication error occurs, the operating system writes error information tothese operands (described in the Table below). You can then use this informa-tion to create conditional program branches as a response to the communica-tion errors.

For the status information of the communication, a double word (32 bit) is pro-vided.

For the contents of the double word, see the Table below:

Table 24-49 Status information

Bit Status: Description of error Fromsend CPU

FromreceiveCPU

0 Area length error in sender + +

1 Block cannot be found in sender + +

2 I/O access error in sender + +

3 GD packet lost– by sender – in transit– by receiver

+ +

4 Syntax error in GD packet + +

5 GD object missing from GD packet +

6 Wrong assignment of GD object length insender and receiver

+

7 Address range length error in sender +

8 GD package cannot be found in receiver +

9 I/O access error in receiver +

10 Timeout in receiver +

11 Restart of receiver +

12–30 Reserved +

31 Receive new data +

References: / / SIMATIC S 7, User Manual

Note

Monitoring of the MPI link between SIMATIC S7 and PP 012 can beimplemented with the global data bit, bit 31. The user can reset bit 31 andprovide it with a watchdog. If this bit is not set again within the predefined timeinterval, a fault in the line is the cause.


04.0424.16 Example of parameter settings for communication SIMATIC S7 / PP 012


Table 24-50 Example

GD identifier as314//cpu1: pp012_1//cpu1:

GST md120

GDS 1.1 md130

SR 1.1 4 1

GD 1.1.1 >>ab120:8 ab0:8

GDS 1.2 md140

SR1.2 4 4

GD 1.2.1 eb118:8 >>eb0:8


04.0424.17 Service information



24.17 Service information

1. Prize the button cap off forwards with a screwdriver

2. Lever out the button holder using lamp remover LZ5

3. Change the lamp using service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube

4. Refit the button holder and cap in reverse order

Note

Lamp remover LZ5 is not a SIEMENS product. It can be obtained from theSchlegel company.

1. Prize the cap and the label holder off forwards with a screwdriver

2. Use the lamp remover of service tool LZ5 or a suitable insulating tube tochange the lamp

3. Refit the cap and the label holder

Notice

When using LEDs, make sure that they are connected with the correct polarity(see Fig. 24-8: Dimension drawing of PP 012) !

1. Screw off the dummy plug

2. Press the contact maker onto the base and install the lamp if necessary

3. Insert the pushbutton through the front plate and screw on the cap nut withseveral turns

4. Screw the cap nut tight. Please note the position of the anti-rotation element

5. Screw the cap nut tight (max. torque 0.8 Nm)

1. Create the slide-in labels (see Fig. 24-10)

2. Remove the protective film from the label slot

3. Slide in the labels (with print facing the operator side)

4. Align the texts in the window

Note

Slide in the labels when the PP 012 operator panel front is not yet installed.

Lamp replacementfor illuminatedkeys, illuminatedswitches

Changing thelamps on pilotlamps

Mountingadditional controlelements

Insert slide-inlabels


04.0424.17 Service information


1. Loosen the cap nut on the pushbutton until the contact maker has almostbeen reached.

2. Pull the pushbutton and the contact maker approximately 3 mm out of thefixture (the locating pin of the pushbutton must be freed).

3. Turn the pushbutton approx. 20° to the right or left, remove it from the con-tact maker and remove the cap nut.

4. Change the contact element, remove the defective contact maker from thefixture and press the new contact maker down into the fixture.

5. Insert the pushbutton into the opening and screw on the cap nut partially.

6. Press the pushbutton down until it rests on the contact maker. When doingso, observe the position of the locking lose.

7. Screw the cap nut tight (max. torque 0.8 Nm).

Changing acontact maker





24.18 Configuration

24.18.1 Configurer

Note

When replacing the existing PP 031 devices with variants of the PP 012,downwards compatibility cannot always be assumed!

Table 24-51 Delivery variants

Pushbutton panel PP 012 6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 X – X A A 0

PP 012 basic unitEMERGENCY STOP with 2 NC contacts + 1NO contact, keyswitch, 8 illuminated keys withincandescent lamps, button caps 2*GR, 2*RT,2*GB, 2*Kl, 2* dummy plugs BVR22, program-ming device and RS-232-C interfaces, fee-drate override, cover plate for 2nd override,with blank special film for slide-in labels withdimensional drawing,PCB direct control keys with ribbon cable 1)

6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 4 – 0 A A 0

PP 012HSame as basic device, plus handheld deviceconnection socket 17-pin and jumper button

6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 5 – 1 A A 0

connection socket, 17-pin, and jumper buttonwith repeater function and distributor box,two-channel enabling function

PP 012/SSpecial variant based on PP 012;the components included are clearlyidentified by a list of optional extras

6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 6 – 0 A A 0 – Z

PP 012H/SSpecial variant based on PP 012H;the components included are clearly

6 F C 5 2 0 3 – 0 A F 2 7 – 1 A A 0 – Z

the components included are clearlyidentified by a list of optional extras,two-channel enabling function

1) When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 0113 Part 1, “Pushbuttons/Colors” section.




Extensions to the PP 012 (can be ordered and installed by the customer separately)

Override switch, 16-level speed 6 F C 5 2 4 7 – 0 A A 3 4 – 0 A A 1

“+/–” keys raised 6 F C 5 2 4 7 – 0 A A 4 1 – 0 A A 0

PCB expansion card 12E/12A 6 F C 5 2 4 7 – 0 A A 4 2 – 0 A A 0

Extension panel with 12 slots 6 F C 5 2 4 7 – 0 A A 4 3 – 1 A A 0

2x NC contacts for Emergency Stop buttons 3 S B 3 4 0 0 – 0 E

Spare parts kit PP 031-MC 5 covers, 5 films, 2 sealing caps,set of key caps, 5 incandescent lamps withbase, 1 dummy plug, 1 illuminated key contactmaker, 1 printing drawing A5E00122711A-A1

6 F C 5 2 4 7 – 0 A A 2 7 – 0 A A 0

Extensions for project-specific variants

Slide-in labels as per customer layout

Set of light emitting diodes (ultra-bright)

Knob FS1 for WS1

Actuator and contact maker 1) according to Table 24-52

Key-operated authorization switch at customer request

PCB_input/output with key matrix at customer request

1) When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the corresponding functionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part 1 or VDE 0113 Part 1, “Pushbuttons / Colors” section.





24.18.2 Project-specific components

Table 24-52 Control elements that can be retrofitted by the userFunction Upper part

actuator/accessoriesHolder switching ele-ment/pilot lamp

Mount-inglocation

Application

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Pilot lamp ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Lamp nipple28 mm ∅ RXJN-GB (yellow)RXJN-GN (green)RXJN-RT (red)RXJN-BL (blue)RXJN-KL (transp. glass)RXJN-WS (white)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Lampholder AL5 with in-candescent lampT5.5K/30 or spot LEDL5.5K28UG (green)L5.5K28UR (red)L5.5K28UW (white)L5.5K28UY (yellow) L5.5K28UB (blue)


S1 ... S4S7 ... S10S14, S15

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Lamp


I/RF reset ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Pushbutton 28 mm ∅RXJT-GB (yellow)RXJT-GN (green)RXJT-RT (red)RXJT-BL (blue)RXJT-KL (transparentglass)RXJT-GSW (black)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Butt ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

S111 NC contact (internal), 2 NO con-tact + 1 NC contact (external)For S1 1 NC contact (internal), 2NO contact + 1 NC contact (ext.)For S2...S4, S7...S10 1 NC con-tact (internal), 1 NO contact + 1NC contact (external)For S14, S15 1 NC contact int., 2NO contacts ext.ÁÁÁÁÁÁ


Illuminated keyswith fixture forT5.5K


Pushbutton 28 mm ∅RXJT-GB (yellow)RXJT-GN (green)RXJT-RT (red)RXJT-BL (blue)RXJT-KL (transparentglass)


Illuminated key contac-tor ATL2 with incandes-cent lamp T5.5K/30 orspot LEDL5.5K28UG (green)L5.5K28UR (red)L5.5K28UW (white)L5.5K28UY (yellow)L5.5K28UB (blue)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

For S1 1 NC contact (internal), 2NO contact + 1 NC contact (ext.)For S...S4, S7...S10 1 NC contact(internal), 1 NO contact + 1 NCcontact (external)For S14, S15 1 NC contact (inter-nal), 2 NO contacts (external)Lamp externally controllable


KeyswitchSwitching angle900

2 positions keys, removablein both positions


Safety lock cylinder28 mm ∅RXJSSA 15 E


Button contact makerAT2


ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

For S1 1 NC contact (internal), 2NO contact + 1 NC contact (ext.)For S1...S4, S7...S101 NC contact (int.), 1 NO contact+ 1 NC contact (ext.) S14, S15 1NC contact (int.), 2 NO contacts(ext.)

Raised keys6FC5247-0AA41-0AA0

2 RTAO pushbuttonswith plunger elongation

2 AT2Special design

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁDesignation

fieldReplaceable text insertstrips

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁDummy plug BVR22 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

S14 and S15 with base unit

Selectorswitch

Knob FS1 WS1 Re-equipping to knob-operatedswitch

Speed/rapid traverseoverride

6FC5247-0AA34-0AA1 WS3 Connection to PCB PP 031R

Emergency Switching element: 2 3SB3400-0ES13

Expans. NC contact EMER-Emergencystop

gNC contacts S13

pGENCY STOP

Note

When assigning the colors for keys and pilot lamps to the correspondingfunctionality, observe the standard EN 60204 Part1 or VDE 0113 Part1, Section“Pushbuttons/Colors”.




24.18.3 Rating plates

One of the following rating plates is attached to the components and modules:

Example:

Key: F2 Place of manufactureL3 Date of manufactureA5E00112382 ID numberA/B/C/D Product version6FC5203-0AF24-0AA0 Order numberPP 012 Component name

Example:

A5E00017606 A1 L2 F2

Key: A5E00017606 ID numberA1 Product versionL2 Date of manufactureF2 Place of manufacture

In case of technical queries or service, please quote all data on the rating plateto the local SIEMENS office responsible for your equipment.

Components

Printed circuitboards






Notes


MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel

The following description applies to the MPI Interface(order number 6FC5203-0AE00-0AA0)

A customer operator panel can be connected via the MPI interface. 64 digitalinputs and 64 digital outputs with CMOS level (5) are available on the modulefor this purpose.

The mounting position is subject to the following restrictions:

Mounting positions max. 75 off vertical permissible.

For mounting positions greater than 60 a fan must additionally be installedto keep the environmental conditions constantly below 55 C.

25.1 Interfaces

ON

X231

LEDs

S3

X20

MPI connection

X10

X221X211

H3H1H4H2

289.464.7

207.3

92.7

7.2

3.5Holes 3.6

Equipotential bonding terminal

Fig. 25-1 Front view of the MPI interface for customer operator panel

Validity

Brief description

Installation


25






X10

Pin Name Type

1 SHIELD

2 M24 VI

3 P24

Signal names

SHIELD shield connectionP24 24 V potentialM24 24 V ground

Signal type

VI Voltage Input

Note

The maximum length of the equipotential bonding connection (stranded cable,10 mm2) must not exceed 30 cm.

Connector designation: X20Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, straightMax. cable length: 200 mSpecial features: 1.5 MBaud/187.5 kBaud data transmission rate

Table 25-2 X20 pin assignments for MPI

X20


1/2 Not assigned 6 2P5 VO

3 RS_OPI B 7 Not assigned

4 RTSAS_BTSS O 8 XRS_OPI B

5 2M VO 9 RTSPG_BTSS I

Signal names

RS_BTSS, XRS_BTSS Differential RS485 data-OPIRTSPG_BTSS Request to Send PG OPIRTSAS_BTSS Request to Send AS OPI2M Ground signal, isolated2P5 +5 V, isolated

Signal type

B Bi-directionalO OutputVO Voltage OutputI Input


MPI interface

25 MPI Interface for Customer Operator Panel



Connector designation: X211, X221 (2 x 32-pin)X231 (2 x 10-pin)

Connector type: Ribbon cable connector DIN 41651Max. cable length: 0.5 m

Potential pins:

The inputs/outputs (interfaces X211, X221, X231) can be loaded with a maxi-mum current of 0.2 A via the internal 5 V power supply of the MPI interface module. This value stands for the total of all currents flowing overthese interfaces.

64 outputs may drive a maximum current of 200 mA.

The maximum current per output is limited to 5 mA.

X221


1 OUT 0 33 IN 14 I

2 OUT 1 34 P5 V

3 OUT 2 35 IN 15

4 OUT 3 36 IN 16

5 OUT 4 37 IN 24

6 OUT 5 38 IN 17

7 OUT 6 39 IN 25I

8 OUT 7O

40 IN 18I

9 OUT 8O

41 IN 26

10 OUT 9 42 IN 19

11 OUT 10 43 IN 27

12 OUT 11 44 IN 20

13 OUT 12 45 M (GND) V

14 OUT 13 46 IN 21

15 OUT 14 47 IN 28I

16 OUT 15 48 IN 22I

17 M (GND) V 49 IN 29

18 IN 0 50 IN 23 V

19 IN 8 51 IN 30 I

20 IN 1 52 P5 V

21 IN 9 53 IN 31 I

22 IN 2 I 54 Not assigned

23 IN 10 55 M (GND) V

24 IN 3 56 OUT 16

25 IN 11 57 OUT 17

26 IN 4 58 OUT 18

27 M (GND) V 59 OUT 19O

28 IN 5 60 OUT 20O

29 IN 12 61 OUT 21

30 IN 6 I 62 OUT 22

31 IN 13 63 OUT 23

32 IN 7 64 Not assigned

Digital inputs/outputs withC-MOS level (5V)





X211


1 Not assigned 33 IN 39

2 OUT 47 34 IN 45

3 OUT 46 35 IN 38 I

4 OUT 45 36 IN 44

5 OUT 44O

37 IN 37

6 OUT 43O

38 M (GND) V

7 OUT 42 39 IN 36

8 OUT 41 40 IN 43

9 OUT 40 41 IN 35

10 M (GND) V 42 IN 42

11 Not assigned 43 IN 34 I

12 IN 63 I 44 IN 41

13 P5 V 45 IN 33

14 IN 62 46 IN 40

15 IN 55 47 IN 32

16 IN 61I

48 M (GND) V

17 IN 54I

49 OUT 39

18 IN 60 50 OUT 38

19 IN 53 51 OUT 37

20 M (GND) V 52 OUT 36

21 IN 52 53 OUT 35

22 IN 59 54 OUT 34

23 IN 51 55 OUT 33

24 IN 58 56 OUT 32O

25 IN 50I

57 OUT 31O

26 IN 57I

58 OUT 30

27 IN 49 59 OUT 29

28 IN 56 60 OUT 28

29 IN 48 61 OUT 27

30 IN 47 62 OUT 26

31 P5 V 63 OUT 25

32 IN 46 I 64 OUT 24

Note

The inputs/outputs are assigned CMOS level (5 V). The outputs are notshort-circuit-proof. Applying a higher voltage to the inputs will destroy them.




X231


1 OUT 48 11 OUT 56

2 OUT 49 12 OUT 57

3 OUT 50 13 OUT 58

4 OUT 51O

14 OUT 59O

5 OUT 52O

15 OUT 60O

6 OUT 53 16 OUT 61

7 OUT 54 17 OUT 62

8 OUT 55 18 OUT 63

9/10 M (GND) V 19/20 P5 V

Signal names

OUT 0 ..63 OutputsIN 0 .. 63 InputsP5 5 V power supplyM 0 V

Signal type

O OutputI InputV Voltage

Signal Description

OUT 0 – OUT 63: Output signals with C-MOS level 5V max. 5mA.

IN 0 – IN 63: CMOS inputs with 5V level

Note

OUT 0 to OUT 47:are switched over at cyclic intervals between 5 V and 0 V level after POWERON. After booting of the control, these outputs can be triggered via the PLC.

OUT 48 to OUT 63:are set to 5 V level after POWER ON (connection and triggering of relaypossible). After booting of the control, these outputs can be triggered via thePLC.

IN 0 to 63:5 V ––> Status FALSE read from PLC0 V ––> Status TRUE read from PLC

LED H1, ..., H4:H3: POWER: 24V supplyH1: Not usedH4: SEND: Status change on protocol transmissionH2: Not used

LEDs


04.0425.2 Settings



25.2 Settings


Table 25-3 Assignments of S3 on MPI interface for customer operator panel

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning

Baud rate

onoff

1.5 Mbaud187.5 kbaud

Transmission cycle time Reception monitoring

offonoff

onoffoff

200 ms100 ms 50 ms

2400 ms1200 ms 600 ms

Bus address

onoff

on

on

1514

onoff

offon

on

1312

onoff

on

off

on1110

onoff

offoff

9 8

onoff

on

on

7 6

onoff

offon

off

5 4

onoff

on

off

off 3 2

onoff

offoff

1 0

onoff

MPI interface to customer operator panelstandard hardware


Table 25-4 MPI interface for customer operator panel, default settings of S3 for 840D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:

on off on off on on off on – Baud rate: 1.5 Mbaud– Transmission cycle time: 100 ms– Bus address: 6– MPI interface to customer operatorpanel

Table 25-4 MPI interface for customer operator panel, default settings of S3 for 810D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning:

off off on off on on off on – Baud rate: 187.5 kbaud– Transmission cycle time: 100 ms– Bus address: 6– MPI interface to customer operatorpanel

Jumpering


04.0425.2 Settings


The PLC expects a message frame from the interface module at least every500 msecs. If no key is pressed, the interface module sends message frames tothe PLC at cyclic intervals. The S3 switches (2 and 3) are used to set this cycletime. In this way, the load on the PLC caused by the interface module can beadjusted.

The machine control panel receives message frames at cyclic intervals from thePLC and answers these at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitoring time is linkedto the transmission cycle time of the machine control panel and is set with theS3 DIP switch (2 and 3).

The bus address for 840D must be set to “6”. Other addresses can be selected,but these must then also be set at FB1 in the basic PLC program.


Settings for receiptcycle time

Bus address





25.3 Technical data

Table 25-5 Technical data of MPI interface for customer operator panel

Safety



IP00


Electrical data


Power consumption Max. 5 W

Mechanical data







5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.8 m/s2







not permissible









max. 0.1 % /min



19” Machine Control Panel

The following description applies to the machine control panels:


19” machine control panelKey variant, screwmounted

6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0

19” machine control panel,membrane

Membrane variant,screw mounted

6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0

Machine control panel(MCP)

Membrane variant,mounted with tensionjacks

6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0

26.1 Function blocks

Microcontroller

Program memory

Data memory

64 inputs/48 outputs (5 V, no electrical isolation)

Voltage monitor

Temperature monitor

Watch dog timer

Isolated operator panel front interface (MPI)Baud rate for SINUMERIK 840D/810D: 1.5 MBdBaud rate for SINUMERIK FM-NC: 187.5 kbaud

Fig. 26-1 View (example: machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0; milling version)

Validity

26

04.0426.2 Block diagram



26.2 Block diagram

Isolated MPI

Terminal block

9-pinSub-Dsocketconnector

P24

48 outputs 64 inputs

Controller

Monitoring:voltage, temperature,watchdog

KeyboardLEDs

SerialI/Ocontroller

5

6

9

1

Program memory Data memory

2P5

24 V

5 V

5 V1P5

X20

X10

DC/DC converter

Fig. 26-2 Block diagram of machine control panel

26 19” Machine Control Panel





Front view

5

% %8

Y

4 6

7

Z

1

10010

100001000

[.]

X

9

WCSMCS

A B C FI G HD I

– +

T1 T2 T3

T4

T7

T10

T13 T14 T15

T12T11

T8 T9

T6T5

R1 R2 R3

R4

R7

R10

R13 R14 R15

R12R11

R8 R9

R6R5

J

Fig. 26-3 Machine control panel for milling machine (M-version)

A: EMERGENCY STOP keyB: Installation locations for control devices (d = 16 mm)C: Reset buttonD: Program controlE: Operating modes, machine functionsF: User keys (T1 to T15)G: Direction keys with rapid traverse override (R1 to R15)H: Spindle controlI: Feed controlJ: Keyswitch (four positions)

% %–X

+X

–Z +Z

–C

+C

1

10010

100001000

[.]

+Y

–Y

WCSMCS

T1 T2 T3

T4

T7

T10

T13 T14 T15

T12T11

T8 T9

T6T5

R1 R2 R3

R4

R7

R10

R13 R14 R15

R12R11

R8 R9

R6R5

Fig. 26-4 Machine control panel for turning machine (T version)

The machine control panel operates on 5 VDC.

Position ofcontrol elements






64 inputs (30 keys, 2 rotary selector switches, keyswitch with four positions)

48 outputs (LEDs, assigned to the keys)

All keys are scanned individually, i.e. all keys can be pressed simultaneously.

EMERGENCY STOP button (A)Press the red button in emergency situations, if

1. life is at risk,

2. there is the danger of machine or workpiece being damaged.





Connect cable tobutton


Emergencystop button

Terminal

1

2

41 2

4

3

3


Warning


Overviewoperatingelements







26.3.2 Interfaces

Rear view of machine control panel

Operator panel frontinterface (MPI) X20


Switch S3

X10

X20

S3 3 1

4 2

EMERGENCYSTOP key

”

1 2 3 4

LED1...4Connection for equipotential bonding conductor

Fig. 26-6 Position of interfaces on rear side of machine control panel

X20: Operator panel front interface (MPI)

Socket: 9-pin female Sub-D connector strip, straight


Phoenix terminal block: 3-pin, straight

S3: DIL switch (8-way)

For setting of baud rate see: Section 26.4 “Jumpering”

References: /PHF/, NCU 570 Manual/PHD/, NCU 571-573 Manual

LEDs 1...4:

LED1: Not used

LED2: Not used

LED3: POWER: 24 V supply

LED4: SEND: Status change on protocol transmission


Overviewinterfaces





Connector designation: X20Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket connector, straightMax. cable length: 200 mSpecial features: 1.5 MBaud/187.5 kBaud data transmission rate

Table 26-1 X20 pin assignments for machine control panel

X20


1/2 Not assigned 6 2P5 VO

3 RS_OPI B 7 Not assigned

4 RTSAS_BTSS O 8 XRS_OPI B

5 2M VO 9 RTSPG_BTSS I

Signal names

RS_BTSS, XRS_BTSS Differential RS485 data-OPIRTSPG_BTSS Request to Send PG OPIRTSAS_BTSS Request to Send AS OPI2M Ground signal, isolated2P5 +5 V, isolated

Signal type

B Bi-directionalO OutputVO Voltage OutputI Input

Connector designation: X10Connector type: 3-pin Phoenix terminal block




2 M24 Ground 24 VV

(Supplyvoltage)


Operator panelfront interface(MPI)



04.0426.4 Mounting, connection and settings of machine control panel


26.4 Mounting, connection and settings of machine controlpanel

Dimension drawing

146.2

4.8 +0,1

155

8,80

0 8.8

125

241.

2

357.

4

473.

648

2.6

Rearinstallation

1) Required clearance2) M4 retaining screw, DIN 125 washer (plain)3) Mounting position max. 75 to the vertical (see note)4) M5 grounding connector5) Installation locations for control devices (see Figure 26-3 and warning in Subsection 26.3.1)

Frontinstallation

1)

Detail

500

46.5

42

Front

3)

4)

4)

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇ

ÉÉÉÉÇÇÇÇÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

without flangeM4 welding stud

2)

Mountinglevel

> 6

0

5)

Fig. 26-7 Dimension drawing of machine control panel (version 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0 / 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0)

Note

For mounting positions greater than 60 a fan must additionally be installed tokeep the environmental conditions of the machine control panel constantlybelow 55 C.





26.4.1 Mounting

The machine control panels 6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0 and6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 are attached using 10 M4 x 10 screws. Lockingelements are recommended in order to avoid damage to the surface.

1.5

1.0/100

07.

7–0

.5

116.

20.

2

232.

40.

2

348.

60.

2

457.

1+

0.5

464.

80.

2

129.7+0.5

7.7–0.5

137.40.2

0

1) Recommended for rear mounting only2) DIN ISO 11013) Distance when mounting the machine control panel and operator panel: 18

2)

3)

Panel cutout of machine control panelR1.51)

4.3 or M4

Panel cutout for operator panel front

Dimensions in mm

Fig. 26-8 Panel cutout for machine control panels 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0 and 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0

Screw fastening




The machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0 is attached using tensionjacks (see Fig. 26-9).

Cutout symmetrical panel symmetrical to operator panel

Installation surface1.5 to 6 thick Operator

panel Clip

max. torque0.5 Nm

132.5

451+1

132.5

155.8123.534.2 34.2103.3

1.5 to 6

35

482.6

155

137.

6 +

1Fig. 26-9 Panel cutout for machine control panel 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0

26.4.2 Connections

The 24V supply is connected to the X10 connector at the rear of the machinecontrol panel via a 3-pin terminal block (see Fig. 26-6). The equipotential bond-ing conductor is fixed by means of an M5 screw.

The machine control panel is connected to the OPI on the NCU (X101) using anMPI bus cable via the interface (X4) or the PCU interface (MPI/DP). The MPIconnector is plugged into X20 on the rear of the machine control panel (see Fig.26-6) and fixed with a screw.


Connecting the24V power supply

Connecting theMPI connection(X20)





26.4.3 Machine control panel settings



8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning / value

onoff

Baud rate 1.5 Mbaud187.5 kbaud

offonoff

onoffoff

Transmission cycletime200 ms100 ms 50 ms

Reception monitoring2400 ms1200 ms 600 ms

onoff

on

on

Bus address1514

onoff

off

on

on

1312

onoff

on

off

on1110

onoff

offoff

9 8

onoff

on

on

7 6

onoff

offon

off

5 4

onoff

on

off

off 3 2

onoff

offoff

1 0

onoff

MPI interface to customer operator panelStandard hardware



8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Meaning

off off on on off on off on

Baud rate: 1.5 MbaudTransmission cycle time: 100 msBus address: 6

Standard hardware

The PLC expects a message frame from the machine control panel at least ev-ery 500 msecs. The machine control panel sends a message frame to the PLCat cyclic intervals when no key is pressed. This cycle time is set with S3 DIPswitches 2 and 3. This enables the load on the PLC resulting from the machinecontrol panel to be adjusted.

Jumpering





The machine control panel receives message frames at cyclic intervalsfrom the PLC and answers these at cyclic intervals. The receipt monitor-ing time is linked to the transmission cycle time of the machine control paneland is set with the S3 DIP switch (2 and 3).

The bus address must be set to the value 6. Any other setting will be ignored bythe software.

Settings for receiptcycle time

Bus address


04.0426.5 Setting the interface parameters



26.5 Setting the interface parameters

Before the machine control panel can exchange data with the PLC CPU via theMPI interface, the appropriate interface parameters for the configuration mustbe activated. They are activated by means of the MPI bus address settings us-ing DIP switch S3 in accordance with the following table.

Table 26-5 Correlation between MPI bus address and GD parameters with machinecontrol panel

MPI ad-dress

Sequence for configuring pur-poses

Preset GD parameters Receive -Transmit

0, ..., 3 Reserved

4 5. Machine control panel 5 . 1 . 1 – 5 . 2 . 1


6 Reserved


8 4. Machine control panel 4 . 1 : 1 – 4 . 2 . 1








AS 314(PLC)

Send

Receive

Mac

hine

cont

rol p

anel

Fig. 26-10 Receiving and transmitting from view of machine control panel




26.6 Technical data

Table 26-6 Technical data for machine control panel

Safety





Electrical data



Mechanical data


Depth: 88.5 mmMounting depth: 46.5 mm


Basic color of casing Anthracite, acc. to SN 47030, Part 2, Color code: 614





5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2







not permissible






–20 ... 60 °C (membrane)–25 ... 55 °C (mech)




max. 0.1 % /min





26.7 Spare parts

For machine control panel no. 6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0 the followingsets of key cover labels are available:

Table 26-7 Key caps for machine control panel 6FC5 203-0AD10-0AA0

Order number Number Description

6FC5148-0AA14-0AA0 16 Transparent, with stickers

6FC5148-0AA13-0AA0

9020202020

ergo-grayred

greenyellow

mid-gray

The following slide-in labels are available for machine control panel numbers6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0:

Table 26-8 Slide-in labels for machine control panel 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0,6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0


6FC5248-0AF22-0AA0 33 A4 films, membrane keys for

labeling with laser printer

The following rotary switches are available for machine control panel numbers6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0, 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0:

Table 26-9 Rotary switch for machine control panel


6FC5247-0AA21-0AA0 2One rotary switch each for axis and spindleoverride with rotary knobs and covers

The following key sets are available for machine control panel numbers6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0, 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0:

Table 26-10 Key set for machine control panels above


6FC5148-0AA03-0AA0 10Set of keys for keyswitchconsisting of 10 x set of 3 577 213

Key covers andslide-in labels

Rotary switch formachine controlpanel

Set of keys




26.7.1 Slide-in label film

The slide-in label film shown in Fig. 26-11 can be ordered under the number6FC5 248-0AF22-0AA0 and printed with user-specific labels.

Distance fromside margin32

2.32

14

14

15

1114

115

1) Labeling area for 6FC5 203-0AD12-0AA0, ; 2) Labeling area for 6FC5 203-0AF22-1AA0

546

.815

.05

15.0

515

.05

15.0

515

,.515

.05

15.0

515

,.5

44

44

44

44

44

35

190

1)

2)

Fig. 26-11 Slide-in labels for machine control panel 6FC5203-0AD12-0AA0 and 6FC5203-0AF22-1AA0,A4 format for laser printers with clear window for LEDs, no lines or text






Notes


Standard PC Keyboard MF-II

This description applies to the following components:


SINUMERIK 810D/840D/840C Standard PC keyboard(MF-II)incl. 2m PS/2 cable (KBPC PX/US; S26381-K340-V110)incl. detachable trackball rest

6FC5203-0AC01-0AA0

Fig. 27-1 View of standard PC keyboard MF-II

The standard PC keyboard MF-II combines USB and PST technologies, de-pending on the connecting cable. This professional keyboard has a striking,modern design and useful extra features. For greater ease of use it includes fiveadditional function keys for one-stroke launch of applications. The detachabletrackball rest offers ergonomic operation and can simply be removed if space isat a premium. These features make the standard PC keyboard MF-II the idealchoice for professional use.

Compact design with low profile, ergonomic keys, up to 6 charactersassignable to one key

MF-II compatible, 104/105 key layout

System compatibility: PS/2 and USB

Interface: PS/2 or USB, depending on the cable usedPower On function only with PS/2 cable, ACPI function only with USB cable(T26139-Y3812-V1)

Operating systems: Windows 3.11/95/NT/XP

Restricted suitability for industrial use; not intended for permanent use. Onlyfor use in installation and servicing

Validity

Brief description

Features

27

04.04



Table 27-1 Technical data for the standard PC keyboard MF-II

Input voltage + 5V DC

Power consumption Max. 0.3 W

Degree of protection to DIN EN60529 (IEC 60529)

IP20

Humidity classification in accor-dance with DIN EN 60721–3–3

Class 3K5 condensation and icing excluded,Low air temperature 0 °C

Permissible ambient temperatureStorage and transporta-

tion–20 ... 50 °C

Operation15 ... 32 °C

Weight Approx. 1 kg

Width Height Depth

Di-men-

Without trackball rest 472 mm 36 mm 175 mmmen-sions With trackball rest 472 mm 36 mm 248 mm

Product security IEC 60959, UL 1950

Ergonomics ISO 9241–4/EN 29241–4

Electromagnetic compatibilityCE certification in accordance with EU Directives89/336/EEC (EN 55022/B) EN 55024 EN61000–3–2 EN 61000–3–3

Technical data

27 Standard PC Keyboard MF-II


CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C


Designation Key type Order number

CNC full keyboard KB 483C mechanical 6FC5203-0AF20-0AA0

28.1 Brief descriptionThe CNC full keyboard KB 483C is an operating component of the CNCs SI-NUMERIK 810D, 840Di and 840D. It is fitted with short-stroke keys.

It is supplied with a USB cable (1.5 m) and tension jacks for mounting.

The key layout is predefined and cannot be modified, i.e. the key caps cannotbe transposed.

Fig. 28-1 Layout of CNC full keyboard KB 483C

Keys

– 78 mechanical keys in standard/US QUERTY layout

Keygroups

– Alpha keygroup with special characters

– Numerical keygroup with special characters

– Cursor keygroup

– NC function keys with hot keys for fast selection of operating area

Connections

– USB 1.1

Validity

Design

28

04.0428.2 Dimension drawings



28.2 Dimension drawings

X302

482.6

PE

con

nect

ion

M5

scre

w te

rmin

al 132.

511

0.5

0.5

20.210.8 447.2 0.5

PE connection screw terminal Cable clamp

US

B c

able

incl

uded

in th

e sc

ope

of s

uppl

y

Dimensions in mm

Fig. 28-2 Front, side and rear views of CNC full keyboard KB 483C

28 CNC Full Keyboard KB 483C





see Fig. 28-1

The key codes assigned to the relevant node in the matrix are stored in the key-board table. When a key is actuated, the appropriate code is read from the tableand sent to the PCU.

Note

In contrast to standard USB keyboards, no key code is transmitted when theShift key alone is pressed.

The keyboard does not support Suspend mode or a Remote Wakeup function.

1. Keyboard level 2. Keyboard level

Labeling Key functionon standardPC keyboard

Shift key USBcode


Shiftkey

USBcode

q q 14 Q q 14

w w 1a W w 1a

e e 08 I e 08

r r 15 R r 15

t t 17 T t 17

y y 1c Y y 1c

u u 18 U u 18

i i 0c I i 0c

o o 12 O o 12

p p 13 M p 13

a aNo shift key

04 A aSHIFT

04

s sNo shift key

16 S sSHIFT

16

d d 07 D d 07

f f 09 F f 09

g g 0a G g 0a

h h 0b H h 0b

j j 0d J j 0d

k k 0e K k 0e

l l 0f L l 0f

z z 1d Z z 1d

x x 1b X x 1b

c c 06 C c 06

Key assignments

Keyboard codes







Shift key USBcode


Shiftkey

USBcode

v v 19 V v 19

b b 05 B b 05

n n No shift key 11 N n SHIFT 11

m m

y

10 M (GND) m 10

’ ’ 34 ” ” 34

* * SHIFT 25 None 35

[ [ 2f 2f

] ] 30 30

\ \ 31 | | 31

, , 36 < < 36

; ; 33 : : 33

Blank space Blank space 2c +/– ~ 35

1 1 1e ! ! 1e

2 2 1f @ @ 1f

3 3 20 # # 20

4 4 21 $ $ SHIFT 21

5 5 22 % % 22

6 6 23 ^ ^& 23

7 7 24 & & 24

8 8 25 * * 25

9 9No shift key

26 ( ( 26

0 0No shift key

27 ) ) 27

– –(NB) 56 _ 2d

. . 37 > > 37

/ / 38 ? ? 38

= = 2e Not assigned

+ + 57 ~ ~ 35

BACKSPACE BACKSPACE 2a BACKSPACEShift keyBACKSPACE

2a

DEL DEL 4c DEL Shift DEL SHIFT 4c

INSERT INSERT 49 INSERT Shift INSERTSHIFT

49

INPUT RETURN 28 INPUT Shift RETURN 28

TAB TAB RIGHT 2b TAB TAB LEFT 2b

ALARM CANCEL ESC 29

HELP F12 45

CHANNEL F11 44

MACHINE Shift F11 SHIFT 44 Not assigned

PROGRAMMANAGER

7 (NB)No shift key

5F

PROGRAM 1 (NB)No shift key

59






Shift key USBcode


Shiftkey

USBcode

ALARM 9 (NB)No shift key

61

OFFSET 3 (NB)No shift key

5b Not assigned

CUSTOM Shift F12 SHIFT 45

g

NEXT WINDOW Home 4a NEXT WINDOW Shift Home 4a

END END 4d END Shift ENDSHIFT

4d

PAGE UP Page up 4b PAGE UPSHIFT

4b

PAGE DOWN Page Down 4e PAGE DOWN 4e

SELECT 5 (NB) 5d Not assigned

CURSOR UP Cursor up No shift key 52 CURSOR UPShift Cursorup

52

CURSOR DOWN Cursor down 51CURSORDOWN

Shift Cursordown

SHIFT

51

CURSOR RIGHTCursor right

4f CURSOR RIGHTShift Cursorright

SHIFT4f

CURSOR LEFT Cursor left 50 CURSOR LEFTShift Cursorleft

50

CTRL Control CONTROLNot assigned

ALT Alt ALTNot assigned

SHIFT No USB key code is transferred if the SHIFT key is pressed on its own

28.3.2 Interfaces

The interface (see Fig. 28-2) is designed as a ”high powered interface”(5 V/500 mA). As a result, the keyboard can be connected only to USB hubswhich possess their own power supply and whose downstream ports are capa-ble of supplying a 500 mA current. A standard USB cable of max. 5 m in length(recommended: 1.5 m) is supported.

Connector designation: X302Connector type: USB-B connector, 4-pin

For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”

USB upstream portX 302


04.0428.4 Mounting



28.4 Mounting

112.

5+1

450+1

Dimensions in mm

Fig. 28-3 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard KB 483C (plate thickness 1.5 - 6.0 mm)

Dimension drawing for mounting

Detail: Mounting of tension jacksTorque: 0.8 Nm

Rear viewwith tension jacksrear view with tension jacks

Dimensions in mmMounting frame

Fig. 28-4 Dimension drawing for mounting the CNC full keyboard KB 483C

Panel cutout




Mounting position

Mounting position max. 60 to the vertical

Front

Fig. 28-5 Mounting position


Table 28-1 Set of tension jacks for CNC full keyboard KB 483C


6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9Tension jack set for supplementary compo-nents with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm

Set of tensionjacks





28.6 Technical data

Table 28-2 Technical data for CNC full keyboard KB 483C

Safety

Protective class / Approvals III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 / CE

Degree of protection accord-ing to EN 60529 Front: IP54 Rear side: IP00

Sealing to cabi-ing to EN 60529(IEC 60529)

Front: IP54 Rear side: IP00Sealing to cabi

net: IP65

Noise immunity

ESD Air discharge ± 8 kV / contact discharge ± 4 kV

HF radio 10 V/m, 80% AM, 1 kHz / 80 – 1000 MHz

Burst (on USB cable) ± 2.5 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz

HF conducted ” ” 10 V, 80 % AM, 1 kHz / 0.15 – 80 MHz

Electrical data

Supply volt. / current (typ.) 4.75, ..., 5.25 V / 80 mA


Mechanical data

Dimensions Width: 483 mm Depth: 31 mmHeight: 133 mm

pMounting depth: 20.2 mm


Max. distance from PCU 5 m (recommended: 1.5 m)

Basic color of casing Anthracite 614

Key colors Pastel Turquoise RAL 6034, Pantone YellowLight Basic 700, Medium Basic 701





5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2







not permissible






–25 ... 55 °C




max. 0.1 % /min



CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C


Designation Keyboard Order number

CNC full keyboard KB 310C mechanical 6FC5203-0AF21-0AA0


The CNC full keyboard KB 310C is an operating component of the CNCs SI-NUMERIK 810D, 840Di and 840D. It is fitted with short-stroke keys.

It is supplied with a USB cable (1.5 m) and tension jacks for mounting.

The key layout is predefined and cannot be modified, i.e. the key caps cannotbe transposed.

Fig. 29-1 Layout of CNC full keyboard KB 310C

Keys

Standard/US QWERTY layout

75 mechanical keys

Validity

Design

29




Arrangement

Alpha keygroup with special characters

Numerical keygroup with special characters

Cursor keygroup

NC function keys with hot keys for fast selection of operating area

Connections

USB 1.1

29.2 Dimension drawings

X302 – USB-B Cable clamp for USB-cablePE terminals

175

153

Mou

ntin

g br

acke

ts

Dimensions in mm 310

31

20

Fig. 29-2 Front, side and rear views of CNC full keyboard KB 310C






see Fig. 29-1

see “CNC Full Keyboard 483C”, “Control elements” section

29.3.2 Interfaces

The interface (see Fig. 29-2) is designed as a “high powered interface” (5 V/500mA). As a result, the keyboard can be connected only to USB hubs which pos-sess their own power supply and whose downstream ports are capable of sup-plying a 500 mA current. A standard USB cable of max. 5 m in length (recom-mended: 1.5 m) is supported.

Connector designation: X302Connector type: USB-B connector, 4-pin

For pin assignment see “Connection Conditions” chapter, Subsection “Secon-dary Electrical Conditions”

Key assignments

Keyboard codes

USB upstream portX 302


04.0429.4 Mounting



29.4 Mounting

Note

When mounting, install and secure the USB connecting cable properly toensure that it cannot chafe against the frame of the keyboard.

155+

1

285+1

Fig. 29-3 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard KB 310C (plate thickness 1.5 – 6.0 mm)

Panel cutout


04.0429.4 Mounting


Dimension drawing for mounting

Detail: Mounting of tension jacksTorque: 0.8 Nm

Dimensions in mm

Fig. 29-4 Dimension drawing for mounting the CNC full keyboard KB 310C

Mounting position

Mounting position max. 60 to the vertical

Front

Fig. 29-5 Mounting position





29.5 Technical data

Table 29-1 Technical data for CNC full keyboard KB 310C

Safety

Protective class / Approvals III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 / CE

Degree of protection accord- Front: Rear side: Sealing to cabi-g ping to EN 60529 IP54 IP00

gnet: IP65

Noise immunity




HF conducted “ ” 10 V, 80 % AM, 1 kHz / 0.15 – 80 MHz

Electrical data

Supply volt. / urrent, typ. 4.75, ..., 5.25 V / 80 mA


Mechanical data

Dimensions Width: 310 mm Depth: 31 mmHeight: 175 mm

pMounting depth: 20 mm


Max. distance from PCU 5 m (recommended: 1.5 m)

Basic color of casing Anthracite 614

Key colors Pastel Turquoise RAL 6034, Pantone YellowLight Basic 700, Medium Basic 701





5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2







not permissible






–20 ... 60 °C




max. 0.1 % /min





Table 29-2 Set of tension jacks for CNC full keyboard KB 310C


6FC5248-0AF14-0AA0 Set of 9Tension jack set for supplementary compo-nents with 2.5 mm profile, length 20 mm

Set of tensionjacks






Notes


CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S


OP 032S CNC full keyboard Order No. 6FC5203-0AC00-1AA0

Standard/US QWERTY layout

74 mechanical keys

Alpha keygroup with special characters

Numerical keygroup with special characters

Cursor keygroup

NC function keys

Fig. 30-1 Front view of CNC full keyboard OP 032S

30.1 Interfaces

Connector designation: X111Connector type: Mini DIN connector 6-pin, straightCable length to PCU: max. 2.5 m

Validity

Features

PS2 keyboardinterface to PCU(X111)

30

04.0430.2 Mounting instructions, dimension drawing and panel cutout



30.2 Mounting instructions, dimension drawing and panelcutout

0

13.8 295.6 309.4154.7

175169

162.5

12.56

0

Fig. 30-2 Dimension drawing of CNC full keyboard OP 032S

5

7.5

6.74.4

0

136.5 273277.4

279.7

0.5

145.5153

158

M4 (6 times) 1)

7 (4 times)

1) Riveted, press-fit nut M4 or

threaded hole M4

Front panel cutout for installation from the rear: W x H = 301.4 x 153 mm

Fig. 30-3 Panel cutout for CNC full keyboard OP 032S (rear view)

30 CNC Full Keyboard OP 032S



30.3 Technical data

Table 30-1 Technical data for CNC full keyboard OP 032S

Safety

Protective class / approvals III; PELV acc. to EN 50178 / CE

Degree of protection accord- Front: IP54 Rear side: IP20g ping to EN 60529

Noise immunity




HF conducted ” ” 10 V, 80 % AM, 1 kHz / 0.15 – 80 MHz

Electrical data

Supply volt. / current, typ. 4.75, ..., 5.25 V / 80 mA


Mechanical data

Dimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: 24 mmDimensions Width: 310 mm Height: 175 mm Depth: 24 mm






5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm9 – 200 Hz: 9.81 m/s2







not permissible






–25 ... 55 °C




max. 0.1 % /min






Table 30-2 Spare parts and accessories

Designation Remarks Order number

Retaining screws 100 jacks 6FC3998-7BJ10

Key covers 1 set 6FC5248-0AA02-0AA0



3.5” Floppy Disk Drive

The following description applies to the SINUMERIK 3.5” floppy disk drive(order number 6FC5235-0AA05-0AA1)

The AT-compatible floppy disk drive with lockable front door is used to read andwrite data from/to 3.5” disks. It can be installed in a customer operator panelfront.

3.5” floppy disk drive including connecting cables for connection to the PCU20/50/70 (length: max. 0.5 m).

50

145

Fig. 31-1 Front view

Ribbon cable socket connector

48.6 185

Fig. 31-2 Side view (right)

Validity

Function

Function block

Dimensiondrawings

31

04.04



185

17

1 2 3

Fig. 31-3 Top view

M3 fixing screw Max. depth ofengagement: 4 mm Ribbon cable socket connector (34-pin)

Shieldconnection M4

X111(not assigned)

X121(power supply interface)

Ground terminal

Fig. 31-4 Rear view

X121: 3-pin terminal block

Table 31-1 Pin assignments for power supply

X1


1 P24 external +24 V DCVI2 M external Ground VI

(Voltage Input)3 PE Protective conductor

(Voltage Input)

Powersupply interface

31 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive

04.04


6

3.6

112

133.8

118

130

25 32 38.7R3

42

M3 fixing screwMax. depth of engagement: 4 mm

Mounting depth (calculated from surface of mounting panel): 185 mm depth dimension (see Figs. 31-2 and 31-3) + 20 mm clearance for cable outlet

Panel cutout

Fig. 31-5 Dimension drawing for drive mounting

Caution

The disk drive can be mounted in any position except upside down.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

5.5

0

3.5

Ø2.4+0.1

8.5–0.1

Ø5

710 degrees

2.5

_______1) all around

SIEMENS

Section A - B

49.9–0.2

44.2

5.53

0

138.5–0.1

R1.5

144.6–0.2139.1

11)

5.5

03 B

A

Fig. 31-6 Dimension drawing of blanking plate

Installationinstructions

Dimensiondrawingblanking plate


04.04



Table 32-3 Technical data for floppy disk drive

Safety




Approvals CE

Electrical data


Power consumption Max. 5 W

Mechanical data


Depth: 202 mmMounting depth:185 mm


Distance from PCU max. 0.5 m

Mechanical ambient conditions

Vibration stressing 10 – 100 Hz: 1.5g101 – 200 Hz: 1.0g201 – 600 Hz: 0.5g




not permissible









max. 0.1 % /min

Technical data



3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface

This description applies to the following components:


3 5” floppy disk drive with USB interface6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1

3.5” floppy disk drive with USB interface6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2

Cover (spare part) 6FC5247-0AA20-0AA0

The floppy disk drive is used for reading and writing data from/onto 3.5” floppy disks with 1.44 MB capacity

Can be mounted in front panels

System can be booted from floppy drive

Connection: USB 1.1

Can be supplied in two variants to suit different operating conditions.

3.5” floppy disk drive with 1 m long USB cable connected.

Validity

Features

Scope of delivery

32

04.0432.1 Notes about operation



32.1 Notes about operation

It is not permissible to use a longer USB cable.

The drives are high-power devices (power consumption up to 500 mA); theymust not therefore be operated on low-power USB outputs (up to 100 mA).

Floppy disks should not be left in the drive for longer than necessary as

1. they and the drive are not then protected against dust,

2. the risk of data errors increases at temperatures higher than 45 C.

32.1.1 Floppy disk drive (order no. 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA1)

A PCU operating with PCU basic software WinNT4.0 = V07.03.03 is required tooperate the USB floppy disk drive (Order No. ...-1AA1) on the SINUMERIKPCU 50 (566 MHz / 1.2 GHz) with Windows NT 4.0. You can install this version by loading service pack V07.03.03 (available fromyour local Siemens sales office).

The service pack V07.03.03 adds the driver for the USB floppy disk drive to thesoftware version V07.03.02 which is preinstalled on shipped PCU 50s.

The USB disk drive can be operated on SINUMERIK PCU 50s and PCU 70swith Windows XP without a separate driver.

To use the USB floppy disk drive on the following SIMATIC panels OP/TP 270 MP 270B MP 370a separate driver is required. This driver can be downloaded from the Siemenswebsite (Service & Support page for SIMATIC panels) (USB Storage DriverV1.0). The driver also includes documentation with installation instructions.

No separate driver is required to operate the USB floppy disk drive on SIMATICpanel PCs (except for Windows NT 4.0 operating system).

32.1.2 Floppy disk drive (Order No. 6FC5235-0AA05-1AA2)

A PCU 50 / 70 (566 MHz / 1.2 GHz) with BIOS V02.03.07 and PCU basic soft-ware WinNT4.0 V07.03.03 or WinXP V07.03.02.01 is required to operate theUSB floppy disk drive (Order No. ...-1AA2). You can install the PCU basic software WinNT V07.03.03 by loading servicepack V07.03.03 (available from your local Siemens sales office).Service pack V07.03.03 adds the driver for the USB floppy disk drive to the soft-ware version V07.03.02 which is preinstalled on shipped PCU 50s.

Longer USB cable

Required power

Leaving floppy disksin drive

SINUMERIK PCU 50and PCU 70

SIMATIC panels andpanel PCs

SINUMERIK PCU 50and PCU 70

32 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive with USB Interface

04.0432.1 Notes about operation


The USB disk drive can be operated on SINUMERIK PCU 50s andPCU 70s with Windows XP without a separate driver.

Only one floppy disk drive may be connected to each PCU 50 / 70; the drivemust be connected before the PCU is switched on.

When the BIOS settings remain unchanged, the USB floppy disk drive can beaccessed as drive b: In operation with HMI Advanced, the entry “FloppyDisk=”in file MMC.INI must therefore be adapted.

Reading the emergency boot disks V02.03.x or V02.04.x from the USB diskdrive takes a very long time. We therefore recommend the use of the emer-gency boot disks V02.05.00 (available from your local Siemens sales office).

The USB floppy disk drive is approved for operating systems MS Win-dows 2000 and MS Windows XP. The appropriate drivers for the disk drive aresupplied with the operating system software.

To use the USB floppy disk drive on the following SIMATIC panels OP/TP 270 MP 270B MP 370a separate driver is required. This driver can be downloaded from the Siemenswebsite (Service & Support page for SIMATIC panels) (USB Storage DriverV1.0). The driver also includes documentation with installation instructions.

SIMATIC panel PCs

SIMATIC panels





32.2 Description


50

145

Fig. 32-1 Front view

Fig. 32-2 Top view

Fig. 32-3 Side view from right




32.2.2 Hardware interface

Table 32-1 Connector assignments - USB standard 1.1

Contact No. Signal name Description

1 Vcc Power supply

2 – Data Data–

3 + Data Data +

4 Ground Ground

The cable is fitted with a standard USB-A connector at the device end

Strain relief

Fig. 32-4 Strain relief of cable

32.2.3 Software interface

The drive complies with USB standard 1.1.

Note

The driver software is not included in the scope of supply.

Pin assignments

Cable





32.2.4 Installation instructions

133.80mm.

112.00mm.

42.0

0mm

.

118.00mm.

32.0

0mm

.

38.7

0mm

.

d 6.00mm

d 3.30mm

Fig. 32-5 Panel cutout

Caution

The mounting position of the disk drive is shown in Figs. 32-6 and 32-7. Thedrive must not be installed upside down.

+/– 20

Fig. 32-6 Side view of mounting position




+/– 20

Fig. 32-7 Front view of mounting position

Note

The front cover must be closed to prevent ingress of dirt or damage.





32.3 Technical data

Order number ...-1AA1

Table 32-2 Technical data for the USB floppy disk drive(order number 6FC235-0AA05-1AA1)

Safety


Degree of protection ac-cording to EN 60529


Approvals CE

Electrical data

Input voltage 5.25 V DC


Mechanical data




Orientation any (except upside down)

Distance from PCU max. 5 m

Mechanical ambient con-ditions

Operation Transportation/Storage

Vibration stressing 10 – 200 Hz: 0.5 g 10 – 200 Hz: 1 g

Shock stressing 5 g; 30 ms 10 g; 11 ms

Applicable Standards EN 60721–3–3, 3M4 EN 60721–3–2, 2M2



Moisture condensation, wa-ter spray and the formationof ice

not permissible


Operation Transportation/storage





Relative air humidity limits(no condensation)

20 ... 80 % 5 ... 90 %

Permissible change in rela-tive air humidity

max. 0.1 % /min




Order number ...-1AA2

Table 32-3 Technical data for the USB floppy disk drive(order number 6FC235-0AA05-1AA2)

Safety


Degree of protection ac-cording to EN 60529


Approvals CE

Electrical data

Input voltage 5.25 V DC


Mechanical data




Orientation any (except upside down)

Distance from PCU max. 5 m

Mechanical ambient con-ditions

Operation Transportation/storage

Vibration stressing 10 – 200 Hz: 0.5 g 10 – 200 Hz: 1 g

Shock stressing 5 g; 30 ms 10 g; 11 ms

Applicable standards EN 60721–3–3, 3M4 EN 60721–3–2, 2M2



Moisture condensation, wa-ter spray and the formationof ice

not permissible


Operation Storage Transportation



Temperature limiting values 4 ... 50 °C –22 ... 60 °C –40 ... 65 °C


Relative air humidity limits(no condensation)

20 ... 80 %at 4 ... 52 °C

5 ... 90 %at –22 ... 60 °C

5 ... 95 %at –40 ... 65 °C

Permissible change in rela-tive air humidity

max. 0.1 % /min






Notes


Heat Dissipation

For the technical data for the control components (e.g. degree of protection,power loss, etc.), please refer to the “Technical data ...” section for the individualcomponent.

Note

To calculate the heat dissipation, the total power loss PVtotal of allheat-generating components in a casing must be taken into account.Total power lossPVtotal= Pv1 + Pv2 + Pv3 + ...[ω]

Convection surface area A [m2]:The surface areas of the front and bottom faces are not included in theconvection surface area calculation.

Heat dissipation can take place as follows:


Heat dissipation by natural convection and internal air turbulence

Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling

Heat dissipation by open-circuit ventilation

Means of heatdissipation

33

04.04



PVtot[W] A [m2] =

5 T [K]

Operatorpanel front

T1 T2

Operatorpanel front

T1 T2

Air flow through fan: 100...165 m3/h

PVtot[W] A [m2] =

10 * T [K]

Operatorpanel front

T1 T2

Notes:Air filters must be provided tomaintain the permissibleenvironmental conditions stated inthe “Technical data ...” section.

The necessary free convection surface area A[m2] of the space to beenclosed (steel or aluminum sheet, 1.5 mm thick), relative to a temperaturedifference T2 – T1 = T 10 K, is calculated as an approximation from:

The approximate air flownecessary for removing lost heat iscalculated from:


Heat dissipation by natural convection and

internal air turbulence

Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling

3.5 * PVtot [W] V [m3/h] =

T [K]

Recommendation:The fan must be mounted in such away to ensure optimum heatdissipation.In addition, ventilation clearance ofmin. 100 mm must also be providedin front of the fan.In the case of open-circuit coolingor ventilation, the ventilation slotsmust be kept clear.

Operatorpanel front

T1 T2

Heat dissipation by open-circuit ventilation

Fig. 33-1 Means of heat dissipation

Note

If the convection surface area A [m2] is not large enough for “Heat dissipationby natural convection”, then “Heat dissipation by natural convection andinternal air turbulence” or “Heat dissipation by open-circuit cooling orventilation” should be used.

For hot spots and heat concentration in narrow casings, “Heat dissipation bynatural convection and internal air turbulence” is recommended.

For thermally critical applications, the total power loss PVtotal can also bedetermined as follows:– Current measurement at 24 V supply voltage– Power loss with PVtotal [W] = U (24 V) * I (measured value in amps)

33 Heat Dissipation

04.04


The power loss (thermal) dissipated by the components in an operator unitshould be dissipated using open-circuit ventilation. The required volumetric flow V must be calculated for a temperature difference of T2 – T1 = ∆T 10 K.

External temperature = T1 = 45 degreesInternal temperature = T2 = 55 degrees ––> ∆T = 10 K

OP 012 13 WPCU 50 40 W

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––PVtotal = 53 W

(max. 180 W)

Example for heat dissipation with open-circuit ventilation: PCU 50 with OP 012

Calculating the thermal powerloss(including internal power supply unit):

3.5 * PVtotal [W] V = = 18.6 [m3/h]

T [K]

Operatorpanel front

T1 T2

PCU

Fig. 33-2 Calculating heat dissipation for PCU 50 with OP 012

Calculating thethermal power lossPCU 50

33 Heat Dissipation

04.04



33 Heat Dissipation

Notes


Connection Conditions

34.1 Secondary electrical conditions

The controller is tested for compliance with the ambient conditions specifiedbelow. Trouble-free operation is only ensured if:

these ambient conditions are maintained when storing, transporting andoperating the equipment.

original components and spare parts are used. This applies in particular tothe use of specified cables and plug connectors.

the equipment has been correctly mounted/installed.

The equipment may not commissioned until it has been clearly identified thatthe machine in which the controller is installed, is in full conformance with thespecifications in EC Directive 98/37/EC.

References: /EMV/, Planning Guide

The connection conditions must be carefully maintained for the completesystem. Please contact your local Siemens office or representative for anyassistance.

Note

Please refer to the documentation for the respective operator components forinformation on deviations to the standard connection conditions.

Compliance withthe connectionconditions

Additionalinformation

Assistance andsupport

34

04.0434.1 Secondary electrical conditions



34.1.1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Relevant standards: EN 50081–1 and –2, EN 55011, EN 55022, EN 61800–3

Table 34-1 Limit values, radio interference suppression in industrial environments

Limit value in accordance with

Cable-borne interference suppression Limit value class A

Radio interference Limit value class A

If compliance with limit value class B (residential areas) is required, please con-tact your local Siemens office or representative.

Notice

The user must consider radio interference suppression for the completeinstallation. Particular attention should be paid to cables. Please contact yourlocal Siemens office or representative for assistance and support.

Relevant standards: EN 50178, EN 61000–3–2 and –3–3,EN 61000–6–2, EN 61000–4–2, –3, –4, –5, –6, –8 and –11EN 61800–3

Tested phenomena:

Static discharge

Radio frequency radiation

Cable-borne interference (burst)

Surge voltages

Cables subject to HF radiation

Magnetic fields with electrical power frequencies

Voltage dips and interruptions

Voltage fluctuations and flicker

Harmonic currents

RI suppression

Noise immunityand low-frequencyphenomena

34 Connection Conditions



34.1.2 Power supply

The AC power supply is only required for external equipment and accessoriesand is not included in the standard scope of delivery.

Table 34-2 Requirements of AC power supply

Rated voltage 230 V AC

Tolerance

Frequency

Ramp-up time at power-on

–20 %, +10 % (184 V to 253 V)

50/60 Hz 10 %

Any

Harmonic content According to EN 50178 10 %

Transient voltage dips

Voltage interruptions at rated voltage andcurrent

Restoration time

Events per hour

3 ms

10 s

10

Warning

The DC supply is always referenced to ground and may not be generatedby an auto-transformer.

To ensure protective separation of the end user interface, the DC powersupply must be implemented with protective separation according toEN 50178. Refer to Subsection 34.1.3.

In the case of supply cables > 10 m, protective elements must be fitted atthe device input in order to protect against lightning (surge voltage).

The DC supply voltage must be connected to the ground/shield of the NCfor EMC and/or functional reasons. For EMC reasons, this connectionshould only be made at one point. As a rule, the connection is provided asstandard in the S7-300 I/Os. If this is not the case in exceptionalcircumstances, the ground connection should be made to the grounding railof the NC cabinet; also refer to /EMC/ EMC Design Guideline.

Requirements ofAC power supply

Requirements ofDC power supplies





Table 34-3 Requirements of the DC supply

Rated voltage according to IEC 61131-2

Voltage range (average value)

Voltage ripple at rated voltage andcurrent peak-to-peak

Ramp-up time at power-on

24 V DC

20.4 V DC to 28.8 V DC

5 % (unfiltered 6-pulse rectification)

Any

Harmonic content According to EN 50178 10 %

Non-periodic overvoltages Value

Duration of overvoltage

Restoration time

Events per hour

35 V

500 ms

50 s

10

Transient voltage dips Duration of voltage dips

Restoration time

Events per hour

5 ms

10 s

10

34.1.3 Protective separation acc. to EN 50178

The complete system includes end user interfaces (EUI) and interfaces for ser-vicing, startup and maintenance.

End user interfaces are interfaces freely accessible to the machine operator, i.e.tools or other equipment is not required. The end user interfaces are imple-mented with protective separation in accordance with EN 50178.

Warning

The interfaces for servicing/installation and start-up/maintenance purposes areprovided without protective separation.

If necessary, these interfaces can be isolated safely using a supplementaryadapter (insulation voltage 230 V AC). These adapters are not included in theSiemens scope of delivery. You can buy these parts from your local dealer whowill help you to make the proper choice.

Warning

Protective separation can only be achieved if the system configurationspecified below is strictly adhered to. When mounting additional components(e.g. S7-300 FM, IP) with an end user interface, please make sure that the enduser interface has a basic insulation for at least 230 V AC.

User interfaces (UI)

Interfaces forservicing, startupand maintenance




Basic insulation Protective separation

M (GND)

3 x 400 V AC

MP

Housing/shield

840D / 611 digital

1

2

3

4

10

44

5

6

11

S7-300 I/Os

MSTT/MCPPCU

9

24 V

8

Person

M (GND)

7

10

11

Terminalblock

11

ÎÎÎMachine

5

4

HHU/ HT 6

Distribution box

Fig. 34-1 Protective separation acc. to EN 50178

Fig. 34-1 shows the various electrical potentials of the 840D/611D/S7-300 sys-tem. Legend:

1. Isolated power supply to SIMODRIVE electronics with 230 V AC basic in-sulation

2. Floating transistor triggers for the three-phase rectifier bridge with 230 V ACbasic insulation

3. Floating transistor triggers for each axis of the three-phase inverter bridgewith 230 V AC basic insulation

4. Floating signal connections from the NC to the PCU or HHU with 230 V ACbasic insulation.

5. Non-floating signal line between NC and I/O devices.

6. Non-floating end user interface with protective separation for 230 V ACthrough interfaces 1 to 4 and 7.

7. Protective separation of 5 V DC power supply provided from a24 V DC supply.

8. 24 V DC power supply unit for external devices and for the machine adapta-tion control according to applicable standards in the form of a PELV circuit(Protective Extra Low Voltage).

9. Floating interfaces to the machine (not accessible to the end user).

10. Floating signal interfaces directly accessible to the end user (e.g. V.24).Make sure that there is either protective separation with respect to the linesupply voltage or that there are two basic insulation levels, for 230 V ACeach, for these interfaces.

11. 5 V DC power supply with basic insulation, fed from a 24 V DC supply.





34.1.4 Grounding concept

The grounding concept is described below using a SINUMERIK 840D as anexample. The 840D system consists of a number of individual components,each of which must comply with EMC and the appropriate safety standards. Theindividual system components are:

NCU box

Machine control panel MCP

Keyboard

Operator panels (operator panel front + PCU)

NCU terminal block

Distributor box and handheld unit

S7-300 I/O with IM 361 interface module

Single I/O module (EFP)

The NCU box is a 50 mm wide cassette that is integrated into the infeed/regen-erative feedback (I/RF) unit, FD and MSD.

The individual modules are attached to a metal cabinet panel by means ofscrews. Make sure that near the screws a low-impedance contact of the NCUbox with the cabinet wall can be made. Insulating paints at the contact pointmust be removed.The electronic grounding points of the modules are interconnected via the de-vice and drive bus and at the same time conducted to the X131 terminal of theI/RF module.

The ground and module ground M should be connected at the power supplyterminal of the IM 361. Further, for the EFP, “SHIELD” and “M24” must be con-nected in connector X1.




Operator panelfront

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

PA/SL PA/SL

Powerelectronics

Machine bed

Grounding bar

Ground terminal

PA/SLM (GND)

G

PA

Gatingelectronics

NCU

SL in the motor cable

Machine

control panel

S7-300 I/Os/EFP

PA

MB

MB: Shielded signal cable with reference ground

PA: Equipotential bonding conductorS: Mains connection

M: MotorG: Encoder

– Ground (frame) –

PCU

PA/SL

Terminalblock

PA/SL

Distributorbox

Cross sections 10 mm2

S SL, min.

MB

S16S/2SL: Protective conductor

S 1616 S 35S 35

Fig. 34-2 Grounding concept

Reference: /EMC/ EMC Configuring Guidelines

34.1.5 RI suppression measures

In addition to the protective grounding of system components, specialprecautions must be taken to guarantee safe, interference-free operation of thesystem. These measures include shielded signal cables, special equipotentialbonding and grounding conductors.

To ensure safe, interference-free operation of the installation, it is essential touse the cables specified in the individual diagrams.

For digital signal transmission, the shield must have a conductive connection atboth sides of the housing.

Exception:

Standard shielded cables grounded on only one side can be used fordevices from other manufacturers (printers, programming devices, etc.).

These external devices (e.g. not from Siemens) may not be connected tothe control during normal operation. However, if the system cannot beoperated without them, then the cable shields must be connected at bothends. Furthermore, the external device must be connected to the control viaan equipotential bonding cable.

Shieldedsignal cables





Definition:

Signal cables (e.g.)

– Data cables (MPI, sensor cables, etc.)

– Binary inputs and outputs

– Emergency Stop cables

Load cables (e.g.)

– Low-voltage supply cables (230 V AC, +24 V DC etc.)

– Supply cables to contactors (primary and secondary circuit)

Reference: /EMC/ EMC Configuring Guidelines

In order to achieve the best possible noise immunity of the complete system(control, power module, machine), the following EMC measures must becarefully observed:

Signal cables and load cables must be routed at the greatest possibledistance from one another.

If necessary, signal and load cables may cross one another (if possible, atan angle of 90°), but must never be laid close or parallel to one another.

Only cables offered by the NC manufacturer should be used as signalcables from and to the NC or PLC.

Signal cables may not be routed close to strong external magnetic fields(e.g. motors and transformers).

Pulse-carrying HC/HV cables must always be laid completely separatelyfrom all other cables.

If signal cables cannot be routed a sufficient distance away from othercables, then they must be installed in grounded cable ducts (metal).

The clearance (surface through which interference can be coupled-in)between the following cables must be kept to a minimum:

– Signal cable and signal cable (twisted)

– Signal cable and associated equipotential bonding conductor

– Equipotential bonding conductor and PE conductor (routed together)

Note

For more information about interference suppression measures and connectionof shielded cables, see Reference: /EMC/ EMC Configuring Guidelines

Cable definitions

Rules for routingcables




34.1.6 Pin assignment for interfaces

The pins of the component interfaces are generally assigned as specified in thetables below. Any deviations are indicated at the relevant point.

Signal type I: InputO: OutputB: Bidirectional (inputs/outputs)V: Supply voltage–: Ground (reference potential) or N.C. (not connected)

Parallel interface on the PCU 50/70 for connecting a printer, for example

Table 34-4 Assignment for the parallel interface LPT1

Maleconnector


1 Strobe (CLK)O

Open Collector

1 142–9 Data bits 0, ..., 7

OTTL level

1 1410

ACK(ACKNOWLEDGE)

11 BUSY I kΩ Pull Up12 PE (PAPER END)

I kΩ Pull Up

13 SELECT

14 AUTO FEED O Open Collector

15 Error I kΩ Pull Up

2516 INIT

O Open Collector13 25 17 SELECT IN

O Open Collector

18–25 GND – Ground (reference potential)

Serial interface on PCU 20/50/70/HT 6

Table 34-5 Assignment for the serial interface COM1 (PLC/RS-232-C/modem)

Maleconnector


1 – – Shield

2 TxD (D1) O Serial transmitted data

1 143 RxD (D2) I Serial received data

144 RTS (S2) O Request To Send

5 CTS (M2)I

Clear To Send

6 DSR (M1)I

Data Set Ready

7 GND (E2) – Ground (reference potential)

8 DCD (M5) I Receive signal level (carrier)

9–19 N.C. – Not assigned

20 DTR (S1) O Data Terminal Ready

13 25 21 N.C. – Not assigned13

22 RI (M3) I Incoming call


Parallel interfaceLPT1

Serial interfaceCOM1





Serial interface on PCU 20 / 50 / 70 / HT 6

Table 34-6 Assignment for the serial interface COM2 (RS-232-C/mouse)

Maleconnector


1 DCD (M5)I

Receive signal level (carrier)

2 RxD (D2)I

Serial received data

5 93 TxD (D1)

OSerial transmitted data

5 9 4 DTR (S1)O

Data Terminal Ready

5 GND (E2) – Ground (reference potential)

1 66 DSR (M1) I Data Set Ready

1 67 RTS (S2) O Request To Send

8 CTS (M2)I

Clear To Send

9 RI (M3)I

Incoming call

Table 34-7 Assignment for the PS/2 interfaces (keyboard/mouse interface)

Connector (viewof socket)


1 Keyboard_dataI

Keyboard data cable

2 Mouse_dataI

Mouse data cable

56 3 GNDV

Ground (reference potential)

34 4 P5V_fusedV

+5 V (protected)

12 5 Keyboard_CLKB

Keyboard clock line

6 Mouse_CLKB

Mouse clock line

Table 34-8 Assignment of the USB-A interface

Connector (viewof socket)


4 1USB_P5V_fused

V +5 V (protected)

32 USB_D0M Data–, USB channel 0

2 3 USB_D0P B Data+, USB channel 0

1 4 USB_GND V Ground (reference potential)

Serial interfaceCOM2

PS/2 interfaces

USB-A interface




Table 34-9 Assignment for the MPI/DP interface


1,2 N.C. – Not assigned

3 LTG_B B Signal line B of the MPI module

4 RTS_AS IControl signal for receive data stream. Signal 1 ac-tive if directly connected interface module is send-ing.

5 M5EXT OReturn line (GND) of 5 V supply. Current load from aload of 90 mA max. connected between P5EXT andM5EXT.

6 P5EXT V 5 V supply (current load see M5EXT)

7 N.C. – Not assigned

8 LTG_A B Signal line A of MPI module

9 RTS_PG ORTS signal from MPI module;Signal is “1” if PG is sending

Shield – On connector housing

Table 34-10 Assignment for the Ethernet RJ45 interface


1 TxD+O Transmitted data

2 TxD–O Transmitted data

3 RxD+ I Received data

4,5 GND –– (terminated internally with 75 Ω; not required fordata transmission)

6 RD– I Received data

7,8 GND–

– (terminated internally with 75 Ω; not required fordata transmission)

Shield On connector housing

Table 34-11 Assignments of VGA interface


1 R Red

2 G O Green

3 B Blue

4 N.C.–

Not assigned

5 – 8 GND–

System ground (reference potential)

9 5 V V +5 V (protected)

10 GND–

System ground (reference potential)

11 N.C.–

Not assigned

12 DDC_DAT B DDC data line

13 EXT_HO

Horizontal synchronization

14 EXT_VO

Vertical synchronization

15 DDC_CLK B DDC clock line

MPI/DP interface

Ethernet RJ45interface

VGA interface





D-STN and TFT displays with 5V CMOS interface and VGA resolution (640x480pixels) can be connected to this interface. Max. cable length: 50cm.

Table 34-12 Assignment for the display interface (CMOS)

Pin Name (DSTN) Meaning (DSTN) Name (TFT) Meaning (TFT)

1,2 P5V_D_fused+ 5 V (fused)Display VCC

P5V_D_fused+5 V (protected)VCC display

3 GND – GND –

4 CLK Shift clock CLK Shift clock

5 GND – GND –

6 LP Horiz. sync HSYNC Horiz.sync

7 FP Vert. sync VSYNC Vert.sync

8 – – R0 Red bit 0 (LSB)

9 – – R1 Signal Red bit 1

10 UD6 Upper data bit 6 R2

g

Red bit 2

11 GND – GND –

12 UD7 Upper data bit 7 R3 Red bit 3

13 UD2 Upper data bit 2 R4 Signal Red bit 4

14 UD3 Upper data bit 3 R5

g

Red bit 5 (MSB)

15 GND – GND –

16 UD1 Upper data bit 1 G0

Si l

Green bit 0(LSB)

17 UD0 Upper data bit 0 G1 Signal Green bit 1

18 LD3 Lower data bit 3 G2 Green bit 2

19 GND – GND –

20 LD2 Lower data bit 2 G3 Green bit 3

21 LD1 Lower data bit 1 G4Signal

Green bit 4

22 LD0 Lower data bit 0 G5

SignalGreen bit 5(MSB)

23 GND – GND –

24 UD5 Upper data bit 5 B0 Blue bit 0 (LSB)

25 UD4 Upper data bit 4 B1 Signal Blue bit 1

26 LD7 Lower data bit 7 B2

g

Blue bit 2

27 GND – GND –

28 LD6 Lower data bit 6 B3 Blue bit 3

29 LD5 Lower data bit 5 B4 Signal Blue bit 4

30 LD4 Lower data bit 4 B5

g

Blue bit 5 (MSB)

31 VCON Contrast voltage – –

32 M (GND) Data enable ENAB Data enable

33 DispOn Display ON DispOn Display ON

34 Res. Reserved Res. Reserved

CMOS displayinterface




All signals required for connecting operator panel fronts, with the exception ofthe display interface, are assigned to this interface.

Associated interface cable: K1

Connector type: 2 x 13-pin plug connector

Table 34-13 Assignment for the IO/USB interface


1 GNDV

Ground

2 P12VV

+power supply for backlight inverter

3 BL_ON O Backlight ON

4 P5V_fused V +5 V VCC (fused in A&D PC)

5 GND – Ground

6 P3V3_fused V + 3.3 V VCC (fused in A&D PC)

7 – 10 N.C. – Not assigned

11 P5V_fused V +5V VCC (fused in A&D PC)

12 USB_D1MB


13 USB_D1PB

USB data+ Channel 1

14 GND V Ground

15 LCD_SEL0 0

16 LCD_SEL1Display type select signal

1

17 LCD_SEL2 IDisplay type select signal

2

18 LCD_SEL3 3

19 RESET_N Reset signal (low active)


24 TEMP_ERR OLED temperature sensor; anode with 1 kΩin series on the board

25, 26 N.C. – Not assigned

Used to connect operator panel fronts with TFT displays with 640 x 480 pixels(VGA), 800 x 600 pixels (SVGA) or 1024x768 pixels (XGA).

Associated interface cable: K2, max. length: 0.5 m

Connector type: 2 x 10-pin plug connector

Table 34-14 Assignment of LVDS display interface


1, 2 P5V_D_fused V+ 5 V display supply voltage (fused in A&D PC)

3 RXIN0–I LVDS input signal

Bit 0 (–)

4 RXIN0+I LVDS input signal

Bit 0 (+)

5, 6 P3V3_D_fused V+ 3.3 V display supply voltage (fused in A&D PC)


Bit 1 (–)


Bit 1 (+)

9, 10 GND –System ground (reference poten-tial)

IO/USB interface

LVDS displayinterfaceChannel 1






MeaningTypeNamePin


Bit 2 (–)


Bit 2 (+)


15 RXCLKIN–O LVDS clock signal

(–)

16 RXCLKIN+O LVDS clock signal

(+)

17, 18 GND–

System ground (reference poten-tial)

19, 20 N.C. Not assigned

Used for expanding the LVDS display interface channel 1 to control TFT dis-plays with 1280 x 1024 pixels (SXGA).

Associated interface cable: K3Connector type: 2 x 10-pin plug connector



1, 2 GND V Ground


Bit 0 (–)


Bit 0 (+)

5, 6 GND V Ground


Bit 1 (–)


Bit 1 (+)



Bit 2 (–)


Bit 2 (+)

13, 14 GND – System ground (reference potential)

15 RXCLKIN–O


16 RXCLKIN+O


17, 18 GND System ground (reference potential)

19, 20 N.C.–

Not assigned

Table 34-16 Assignment of the Compact Flash interface


1 GND – 30 IDE_D14I/O

2 IDE_D3 31 IDE_D15I/O

3 IDE_D4 32 IDE_XCS1 O

4 IDE_D5 I/O 33 N.C. –

5 IDE_D6 34 IDE_XIORO

6 IDE_D7 35 IDE_XIOWO

LVDS displayinterfaceChannel 2

Compact Flashinterface




Table 34-16 Assignment of the Compact Flash interface

TypeNamePinTypeNamePin

7 IDE_XCS0 O 36 P3V3 V

8 – 12 GND – 37 IDE_XIRQ O

13 P3V3 V 38 P3V3 V

14 – 17 GND – 39 XCSEL O

18 IDE_A2 40 N.C. –

19 IDE_A1 O 41 IDE_XRST O

20 IDE_A0 42 IDE_XIORDY I

21 IDE_D0 43 N.C. –

22 IDE_D1 I/O 44 P3V3 V

23 IDE_D2 45 IDE_XLED

24 IDE_XIOCS16 46 IDE_PDIAG

25 IDE_XCD2 I 47 IDE_D8 I/O

26 IDE_XCD1 48 IDE_D9

27 IDE_D11 49 IDE_D10

28 IDE_D12 I/O 50 GND –

29 IDE_D13

Table 34-17 Assignments of the power supply interface


1 SHIELD – Shield potential

2 M24V

Ground 24 V

3 P24V

24 V DC potential






34.1.7 Handling membrane connectors

When replacing parts it can sometimes be necessary to disconnect membraneconnectors from the boards and reconnect them again.

This should be done as follows:

Clamping frameof socket

Fig. 34-3 Releasing (left) and attaching (right) a membrane connector

1. Loosen the dark clamping frame of the socket by pushing it up with the fin-gernails until it engages in its upper, unlocked position (Fig. 34-3 left).

2. Carefully pull off the membrane connector upward.

1. With the clamping frame in the upper position, carefully plug the membraneconnector into the socket.

2. Lock it in place by pushing down the clamping frame (see Figure 34-3,right).

Releasing amembraneconnector

Connecting amembraneconnector


04.0434.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions


34.2 Ambient climatic and mechanical conditions

Vibration stressing: EN 60068–2–6Shock stressing: EN 60068–2–27Climate: EN 60068–2–1/EN 60068–2–2/EN 60068–2–14

EN 60068–2–30/EN 60068–2–31/EN 60068–2–32/EN 60068–2–33/EN 60068–2–34

Long-term storage: EN 60721–3–1Transport: EN 60721–3–2Stationary operation: EN 60721–3–3

Table 34-18 Mechanical ambient conditions

Requirement criteria Values

Vibration stressing Frequency range

Constant deflection

Acceleration amplitude See technical data of theShock stressing Acceleration

See technical data of therelevant component

Duration of nominal shock

Number of nominal shocks

34.2.1 Transport and storage conditions

The following specifications apply to components in transport packaging:

Table 34-19 Climatic conditions for storage and transport

Temperature range See technical data of the relevant component

Relative atmospherichumidity

Annual average 10 ... 75%

Up to 30 days annually 95%

Temperature rate ofchange

Within one hour < 18 K

Atmospheric pressure The specified values apply toa transportation altitude of upto 3000 m above sea level

70 to 106 kPa

Test standards

Requirementstandards

Components inoriginal packaging





Backup batteries must only be transported in the original packaging. No specialapproval is needed for transporting backup batteries. The lithium content isapproximately 300 mg.

Note: The backup battery is classified as a hazardous substance, Class 9 inaccordance with the relevant air-freight transportation regulations.

Relevant standards: DIN EN 60086

Warning

Incorrect handling of backup batteries can lead to a risk of ignition, explosionand combustion.

The following regulations according to DIN EN 60086 must be adhered to:

Backup batteries

may not be charged

may not be heated or thrown into fires

may not be pierced or crushed

must not be tampered with mechanically or electrically in any way!

The PCU hard disk unit is provided with shock absorbers. However, thefollowing rules must be observed when handling this unit.

Caution

The hard disk unit

should always be transported in its original packaging

should not be thrown or dropped

should not be dismantled from the mechanical components with which itwas supplied

should not be handled by its springs

Transportingbackup batteries

Rules for handlingbackup batteries

Rules for handlinghard disks




34.2.2 Operating conditions

If the specified values cannot be maintained, a heat exchanger or an airconditioning unit must be provided.

Table 34-20 Climatic ambient conditions

Temperature range See technical data of the relevant component

Permissible change inrelative air humidity EN 60721–3–3, class 3K5


Moisture condensation,water spray and theformation of ice

Not permissible

Temperature rate ofchange

Within one hour max. 10 K

Atmospheric pressure When operated at analtitude of 2,000 m abovesea level. For higheraltitudes, the upper limittemperature must bereduced by 3.5 °C/500 m.

820 kPa to 1060 kPa

Table 34-21 Function-impairing gases

Sulfur dioxide (SO2) Concentration 10 cm3/m3

Temperature 25 °C 2 °C

Relative humidity 60 %

Hydrogen sulfide (H2S) Severity 1 cm3/m3

Temperature 25 °C 2 °C

Relative humidity 60 %

When working in areas where there is an unacceptably high dust hazard, thecontrol must be operated in a cabinet with a heat exchanger or in a cabinet witha suitable air intake.

Maximum permissible dust contents in the air circulating in the cabinet:

– Suspended solids 0.2 mg/m3

– Deposits 1.5 mg/m2/h

Climatic ambientconditions

Function-impairinggases

Function-impairing dust


04.0434.3 MPI/OPI network rules



34.3 MPI/OPI network rules

The following devices can be interconnected across the MPI bus:

NCU/CCU

PCU

HT 6

HHU

MSTT/MCP

The MPI interconnecting cables are available in different lengths.

When installing a network, observe the following basic rules:

1. The MPI connection can be routed from one user to the next by plugging theMPI connector of the outgoing cable onto the MPI connector of the incomingcable.

2. The bus line must be terminated at both ends. To do this, enable the termi-nating resistor in the MPI connector of the first and last node and disable theremaining terminating resistors (see Fig. 34-4).

Note

Only two inserted terminating resistors are permitted.

In the case of the HHU/HT 6, bus terminating resistors are permanentlyintegrated in the device.

3. At least one terminator must be supplied with 5 V voltage.For this, the MPI connector with inserted terminating resistor must be con-nected to a powered device.

Note

The connection at the NC control system can be used for this purpose.

4. Drop cables (feeder cable from bus segment to node) should be as short aspossible.

Note

Drop cables that are not used should be removed.

5. Each MPI node must first be connected and then enabled.When disconnecting the MPI node, first deactivate the connection, thenremove the connector.

6. A maximum of two of the HHU and HT 6 components can be connected foreach bus segment.

Application

Networkinstallations




It is also possible to use two identical components provided they have differ-ent station addresses.Setting the addresses (see also the section on the correspondingcomponents):

– HHU: Via DIP switch or display (see “Handheld unit” section),

– For HT 6, by adapting the address before commissioning (refer to Chap-ter “Handheld Terminal HT 6”).

No bus terminating resistors may be inserted at the distributor boxes of anHHU or HT 6 (refer to the note on item 2.)

If required, more than one HHU/HT 6 can be connected to a bus segmentusing intermediate repeaters.

7. The following cables lengths for MPI or OPI for standard use without re-peater may not be exceeded:

MPI (187.5 kbaud): Max. total cable length is 1000 m

OPI (1.5 Mbaud): Max. total cable length is 200 m.

ON

Terminating resistor

OFF ON

ON

46 46

55

Fig. 34-4 MPI connector

References: /Z/, Accessories and Equipment for Special-PurposeMachines






Notes

A-561 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Abbreviations

Motor Drive Side

Application Specific IC

Advanced Technology

Basic Input Output System

Communications Bus

Compact Disk ROM

Communication Module

Central Processing Unit

Cathode Ray Tube

Dual In–Line Package

Direct Key Module

Dynamic RAM

Single I/O Module

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Function Block

Function Unit

Function Module

Global Data

Ground

Handheld Unit

Human Interface Device

Human Machine Interface: Operator function of SINUMERIK for operation, pro-gramming and simulation. The meaning of HMI is identical with MMC.

Height Unit

Input/Output

Integrated Circuit

AS

ASIC

AT

BIOS

C Bus

CDROM

COM

CPU

CRT

DIP

DKM

DRAM

EFP

EMC

FB

FBG

FM

GD

GND

HHU

HID

HMI

HU

I/O

IC

A

04.04

A-562 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved


Integrated Drive Electronics

Industry Standard Architecture (AT standard)

Liquid Crystal Display

Light Emitting Diode

Line Print Terminal

Machine Control Panel

Motion Control Unit, digital single–axis/positioning control

Multifunction Keyboard II

Modulator–demodulator

Multi–Point Interface

Not Connected

Numeric Control

Numerical Control Unit

Non Maskable Interrupt

Operator Panel Front

Operator Panel Interface

Peripherals Bus

Push Button Panel

Personal Computer

PC Extended Technology

PC Memory Card International Association

PC Unit

Protective Extra Low Voltage

I/Os

Programming device

Programming device interface

Programmable Logic Control (component of the NC)

Push Button Panel

Personal System/2

Random Access Memory

Read Only Memory

Interface standard in accordance with CCITT RS–232–C

IDE

ISA

LCD

LED

LPT

MCP

MCU

MFII

Modem

MPI

N.C.

NC

NCU

NMI

OP

OPI

P bus

PBP

PC

PC/XT

PCMCIA

PCU

PELV

PER

PG

PG interface

PLC

PP

PS/2

RAM

ROM

RS–232–C

A Abbreviations

04.04

A-563 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Small Computer System Interface (parallel interface for up to 7 simultaneousdevices)

Single in Line Module

Serial I/O controller, Siemens PROFIBUS Controller

Super Twisted Nematic (flat screen technology)

Super VGA (screen resolution 800 x 600, 16 million colors)

Thin Film Transistor (flat screen technology)

Unit Operator Panel

Universal Serial Bus

Video Graphics Adapter (screen resolution 640 x 480, 16 colors)

Watch Dog

Extended VGA (screen resolution 1024 x 768)

SCSI

SIM

SPC

STN

SVGA

TFT

UOP

USB

VGA

WD

XGA

A Abbreviations

04.04

A-564 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved


A Abbreviations

Notes

B-565 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

References

General Documentation

SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE, Automation Systems for Machine Tools Catalog NC 60Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-B1-7600

Industrial Communication and Field DevicesCatalog IK PIOrder No.: E86060-K6710-A101-B2-7600

SIMATICProducts for Totally Integrated Automation and Micro AutomationCatalog ST 70Order No.: E86060-K4670-A111-A8-7600

MOTION-CONNECTCable, Connectors & System Components for SIMATIC, SINUMERIK, Masterdrives and SIMOTIONCatalog NC ZOrder No.: E86060-K4490-A001-B1-7600

Saftey Integrated Application ManualThe saftey program for industries of the worldOrder No.: 6ZB5000-0AA02-0BA0

Electronic Documentation

The SINUMERIK System (03.04 Edition)DOC ON CD (includes all SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802D/802SC and SIMODRIVEpublications)Order No.: 6FC5298-7CA00-0BG0

/BU/

/IKPI/

/ST7/

/Z/

/CD1/

B

04.04

B-566 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved


User Documentation

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.99 Edition)Short Guide AutoTurn OperationOrder No.: 6FC5298-4AA30-0BP2

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02.02 Edition)Operator’s Guide AutoTurn Graphic Programming SystemProgramming/SetupOrder No.: 6FC5298-4AA40-0BP3

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (10.00 Edition)Operator’s Guide MMC Order No.: 6FC5298-6AA00-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Operator’s Guide HMI Advanced Order No.: 6FC5298-6AF00-0BP3

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Operator’s Guide HT 6Order No.: 6FC5298-0AD60-0BP3

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (02.01 Edition)Short Guide OperationOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AA10-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.02 Edition)Operation/Programming ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD00-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.03 Edition)Operation/Programming ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD10-0BP2

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (06.03 Edition)Operation/Programming ShopTurn Order No.: 6FC5298-6AD50-0BP2

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (03.04 Edition)Operator’s Guide HMI EmbeddedOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AC00-0BP3

/AUK/

/AUP/

/BA/

/BAD/

/BAH/

/BAK/

/BAM/

/BAS/

/BAT/

/BEM/

B References

04.04


SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)User’s Guide Measuring CyclesOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AA70-0BP3

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (04.03 Edition)Motion Control Information System (MCIS)User’s Guide Tool Data InformationOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AE01-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.02 Edition)Operator’s Guide CAD Reader Order No.: (included in online help)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Diagnostics GuideOrder No.: 6FC5298-7AA20-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.01 Edition)Short Guide ManualTurnOrder No.: 6FC5298-5AD40-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (04.01 Edition)Short Guide ShopMillOrder No.: 6FC5298-5AD30-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (07.01 Edition)Short Guide ShopTurnOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AF20-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Programming Guide FundamentalsOrder No.: 6FC5298-7AB00-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Programming Guide Advanced Order No.: 6FC5298-7AB10-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)List Manual System VariablesOrder No.: 6FC5298-7AE10-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Short Guide ProgrammingOrder No.: 6FC5298-7AB30-0BP0

/BNM/

/BTDI/

/CAD/

/DA/

/KAM/

/KAS/

/KAT/

/PG/

/PGA/

/PGA1/

/PGK/

B References

04.04



SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)Programming Guide ISO MillingOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AC20-0BP2

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)Programming Guide ISO TurningOrder No.: 6FC5298-6AC10-0BP2

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Programming Guide CyclesOrder No.: 6FC5298-7AB40-0BP0

PCIN 4.4Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC ModuleOrder No.: 6FX2060 4AA00-4XB0 (English, French, German)Order from: WK Fürth

SINUMERIK 840Di (02.01 Edition)System Overview Order No.: 6FC5298-6AE40-0BP0

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)SIMODRIVE 611DLists Order No.: 6FC5297-7AB70-0BP0

SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES VC/MC (10.03 Edition)Planning Guide General Information for Asynchronous Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC62-0BP0

SIMODRIVE 611 (10.03 Edition)Planning Guide 1PH2 Asynchronous MotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC63-0BP0


/PGM/

/PGT/

/PGZ/

/PI/

/SYI/

a) Lists

/LIS/

b) Hardware

/ASAL/

/APH2/

/APH4/

B References

04.04


MASTERDRIVES MC (04.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1PH7 Asynchronous MotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC66-0BP0


MASTERDRIVES VC/MC (01.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1PL6 Asynchronous MotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC67-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.03 Edition) Operator Components ManualOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AA50-0BP3

SIMODRIVE Sensor (03.03 Edition)User’s Guide (HW) Absolute Position Sensor with PROFIBUS DPOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB10-0YP2

SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE (06.99 Edition)Planning Guide (HW) EMC Installation GuideOrder No.: 6FC5297-0AD30-0BP1

The current Declaration of Conformity is available under the following Internetaddress:http://www4.ad.siemens.de

Please enter the ID No.: 15257461 in the ’Search’ field (top right) and click on’go’.

SINUMERIK/SIMOTION (02.03 Edition)ADI4 – Analog Drive Interface for 4 AxesManual Order No.: 6FC5297-0BA01-0BP1

SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC (05.03 Edition)Planning Guide 1FK6 Three-Phase AC ServomotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD05-0BP0

SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC (01.03 Edition)Planning Guide 1FK7 Three-Phase AC Servomotors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD06-0BP0

MASTERDRIVES MC (04.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1FS6 Three-Phase AC ServomotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD08-0BP1

/APH7M/

/APH7S/

/APL6/

/BH/

/BHA/

/EMV/

/GHA/

/PFK6/

/PFK7/

/PFS6/

B References

http://www4.ad.siemens.de

04.04



SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition)Planning Guide 1FT5 Three-Phase AC ServomotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD01-0BP0

SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC (01.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1FT6 Three-Phase AC ServomotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD02-0BP0

SINAMICS, MASTERDRIVES (09.03 Edition)MICROMASTER SIEMOSYN-MOTORS 1FU8 Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC80-0BP0

SINUMERIK 810D (11.02 Edition)Configuring Manual CCU (HW)Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD10-0BP1

SINUMERIK 840D (11.03 Edition)Configuring Manual NCU (HW)Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC10-0BP3

SIMODRIVE 611 / SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES MC (01.04 Edition)Planning Guide Three-Phase AC ServomotorsGeneral PartOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD07-0BP1

SIMODRIVE 611 ,MASTERDRIVES VC/MC (06.04 Edition)Planning Guide Asynchronous MotorsContent: General Part, 1PH2, 1PH4, 1PH7, 1PL6Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC61-0BP0

SIMODRIVE (03.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1FE1 Built-In Synchronous Motors Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle DrivesOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC00-0BP5

SIMODRIVE (12.02 Edition)Installation Guide 1FE1 051.–1FE1 147. Built-In Synchronous Motors Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle DrivesOrder No.: 610.43000.02

/PFT5/

/PFT6/

/PFU/

/PHC/

/PHD/

/PJAL/

/PJAS/

/PJFE/

/PJF1/

B References

04.04


SIMODRIVE (06.02 Edition)Planning Guide 1FN1, 1FN3 Linear Motors ALL General Information about Linear Motors1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor1FN3 1FN3 Three-Phase AC Linear MotorCON ConnectionsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB70-0BP4

SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES MC (06.04 Edition)Planning Guide Synchronous ServomotorsContent: General Part, 1FT5, 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7, 1FS6Order No.: 6SN1197-0AC20-0BP0

SIMODRIVE (05.03 Edition)Planning Guide 1FW6 Integrated Torque Motors Order No.: 6SN1197-0AD00-0BP1

SIMODRIVE 611 (02.03 Edition)Planning Guide InvertersOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AA00-0BP6

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES (03.04 Edition)Planning Guide 1FW3 Complete Torque MotorsOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC70-0BP0

SIMODRIVE Sensor (07.02 Edition)Configuring/Installation Guide (HW) Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG HOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP1

/PMH2/ SIMODRIVE Sensor (03.04 Edition)Configuring/Installation Guide (HW) Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG H2Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB31-0BP0

/PMHS/ SIMODRIVE (12.00 Edition)Installation Guide Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives SIZAG2 Toothed-Wheel EncoderOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB00-0YP3

SIMODRIVE (03.04 Edition)Planning Guide ECO Motor Spindle for Main Spindle DrivesOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD04-0BP1

/PJLM/

/PJM2/

/PJTM/

/PJU/

/PKTM/

/PMH/

/PMS/

B References

04.04



SIMODRIVE (12.01 Edition)Planning Guide 1PH2, 1PH4, 1PH7 Motors AC Induction Motors for Main Spindle DrivesOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AC60-0BP0

SIMODRIVE (11.01 Edition)Planning Guide Hollow-Shaft Motors for 1PM4 and 1PM6 Main Spindle DrivesOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AD03-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions Basic Machine (Part 1)(the various sections are listed below)Order No.: 6FC5297-7AC20-0BP0

A2 Various Interface SignalsA3 Axis Monitoring, Protection ZonesB1 Continuous-Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look AheadB2 AccelerationD1 Diagnostic ToolsD2 Interactive ProgrammingF1 Travel to Fixed StopG2 Velocities, Setpoint/Actual Value Systems, Closed-Loop

ControlH2 Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLCK1 Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation ModeK2 Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames, Actual Value System for

Workpiece, External Zero OffsetK4 CommunicationN2 EMERGENCY STOPP1 Transverse AxesP3 Basic PLC ProgramR1 Reference Point ApproachS1 SpindlesV1 FeedsW1 Tool Offset

/PPH/

/PPM/

c) Software

/FB1/

B References

04.04


SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2) (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions Extended Functions (Part 2)including FM-NC: Turning, Stepper Motor(the various sections are listed below)Order No.: 6FC5297-7AC30-0BP0A4 Digital and Analog NCK I/OsB3 Several Operator Panels and NCUsB4 Operation via PG/PCF3 Remote DiagnosticsH1 JOG with/without HandwheelK3 CompensationsK5 Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement L1 FM-NC Local BusM1 Kinematic TransformationM5 MeasurementN3 Software Cams, Position Switching SignalsN4 Punching and NibblingP2 Positioning AxesP5 OscillationR2 Rotary AxesS3 Synchronous SpindlesS5 Synchronized Actions (up to and including SW 3)S6 Stepper Motor ControlS7 Memory ConfigurationT1 Indexing AxesW3 Tool ChangeW4 Grinding

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D(CCU2) (03.04 Edition) Description of Functions Special Functions (Part 3)(the various sections are listed below)Order No.: 6FC5297-7AC80-0BP0F2 3-Axis to 5-Axis TransformationG1 Gantry AxesG3 Cycle TimesK6 Contour Tunnel MonitoringM3 Coupled Motion and Leading Value CouplingS8 Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless GrindingS9 Setpoint Exchange (S9)T3 Tangential ControlTE0 Installation and Activation of Compile CyclesTE1 Clearance ControlTE2 Analog AxisTE3 Master-Slave for DrivesTE4 Transformation Package HandlingTE5 Setpoint ExchangeTE6 MCS CouplingTE7 Retrace SupportTE8 Path-Synchronous Switch SignalV2 PreprocessingW5 3D Tool Radius Compensation

/FB2/

/FB3/

B References

04.04



SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions Drive Functions (the various sections are listed below)Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA80-1BP1DB1 Operational Messages/Alarm ReactionsDD1 Diagnostic FunctionsDD2 Speed Control LoopDE1 Extended Drive FunctionsDF1 Enable CommandsDG1 Encoder ParameterizationDL1 Linear Motor MD DM1 Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and

Controller DataDS1 Current Control LoopDÜ1 Monitors/Limitations

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital (02.00 Edition)Description of Functions ANA MODULEOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB80-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D (07.99 Edition)Description of Functions DigitizingOrder No.: 6FC5297-4AC50-0BP0DI1 Start-upDI2 Scanning with Tactile Sensors (scancad scan)DI3 Scanning with Lasers (scancad laser)DI4 Milling Program Generation (scancad mill)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (09.03 Edition)Motion Control Information System (MCIS)DNC NC Program Management Order No.: 6FC5297-1AE81-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.03 Edition)Motion Control Information System (MCIS)Description of Functions DNC NC Program ManagementOrder No.: 6FC5297-1AE80-0BP0

DN1 DNC Plant / DNC CellDN2 DNC IFC SINUMERIK, NC Data Transfer via Network

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)Description of Functions ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE10-0BP3

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions Remote Diagnosis Order No.: 6FC5297-0AF00-0BP3FE1 Remote Diagnosis ReachOutFE3 Remote Diagnosis pcAnywhere

/FBA/

/FBAN/

/FBD/

/FBDM/

/FBDN/

/FBFA/

/FBFE/

B References

04.04


SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.02 Edition)HMI Configuring PackageOrder No.: (supplied with the software)

Part 1 User’s GuidePart 2 Description of Functions

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.03 Edition)HMI Configuring PackageProTool/Pro Option SINUMERIKOrder No.: (supplied with the software)

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital (10.03 Edition)Description of Functions HLA ModuleOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB60-0BP3

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (06.03 Edition)Motion Control Information System (MCIS)Description of Functions TDI Ident ConnectionOrder No.: 6FC5297-1AE60-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.02 Edition)Description of Functions ManualTurnOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AD50-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.01 Edition)Description of Functions Configuring OP 030 Operator Interface(the various sections are listed below)Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC40-0BP0BA Operator’s GuideEU Development Environment (Configuring Package)PSE Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface(IK Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration)

SINUMERIK 840D (03.96 Edition)Description of Functions C-PLC ProgrammingOrder No.: 6FC5297-3AB60-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (01.04 Edition)Description of Functions Computer Link (SinCOM) Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD61-0BP0NFL Host Computer InterfaceNPL PLC/NCK Interface

SINUMERIK 840D / SIMODRIVE (11.03 Edition)Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety IntegratedOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AB80-0BP2

/FBH/

/FBH1/

/FBHL/

/FBIC/

/FBMA/

/FBO/

/FBP/

/FBR/

/FBSI/

B References

04.04



SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (11.03 Edition)Description of Functions ShopMillOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AD80-0BP2

SIMATIC (01.01 Edition)Description of Functions FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEPOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AA70-0YP4

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions Synchronized Actions Order No.: 6FC5297-7AD40-0BP2

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (03.04 Edition)Description of Functions ShopTurnOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AD70-0BP2

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (01.02 Edition)IT SolutionsDescription of Functions Tool Data Communication SinTDCOrder No.: 6FC5297-5AF30-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (02.01 Edition)IT SolutionsDescription of Functions Tool Information System (SinTDI) with Online Help Order No.: 6FC5297-6AE00-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (01.03 Edition)Motion Control Information System (MCIS)Description of Functions TPM Total Productive MaintenanceOrder No.: Document is supplied with the software

SIMODRIVE 611 universal/universal E (07.03 Edition)Description of Functions Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control and PositioningOrder No.: 6SN1197-0AB20-0BP8

SIMODRIVE 611 universal (04.02 Edition)Installation Guide (enclosed with SIMODRIVE 611 universal)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (11.02 Edition)Description of Functions Tool Management Order No.: 6FC5297-6AC60-0BP1

/FBSP/

/FBST/

/FBSY/

/FBT/

/FBTC/

/FBTD/

/FBTP/

/FBU/

/FBU2/

/FBW/

B References

04.04


SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.02 Edition)Manual @EventOrder No.: 6AU1900-0CL20-0BA0

SINUMERIK 840Di (09.03 Edition)Manual SINUMERIK 840DIOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AE60-0BP2

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (06.03 Edition)System Description Commissioning Tool SINUMERIK SinuCOM NC Order No.: (an integral part of the online help for the start-up tool)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)List Manual System VariablesOrder No.: 6FC5297-7AE10-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (08.01 Edition)Description of Functions Configuring Package HMI Embedded Software Update, Configuration InstallationOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AE10-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/810D (09.03 Edition)Planning Guide Configuring SyntaxThis publication is included with the software and available as a pdf file

SIMODRIVE POSMO A (08.03 Edition)User’s Guide Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DPOrder No.: 6SN2197-0AA00-0BP6

SIMODRIVE POSMO A (05.03 Edition)Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO A)

SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA (07.03 Edition)User’s Guide Distributed Servo Drive SystemsOrder No.: 6SN2197-0AA20-0BP5

SIMODRIVE POSMO SI (04.02 Edition)Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO SI)

SIMODRIVE POSMO CD/CA (04.02 Edition)Installation Guide (enclosed with POSMO CD/CA)

/HBA/

/HBI/

/INC/

/PGA1/

/PJE/

/PS/

/POS1/

/POS2/

/POS3/

/POS4/

/POS5/

B References

04.04



SIMATIC S7–300 (2002 Edition)Manual: Technological FunctionsOrder No.: 6ES7398-8AA03-8BA0– Reference manual: CPU Data (Hardware)– Reference manual: Module data

SIMATIC S7–300 (03.97 Edition)Manual STEP 7, Fundamentals, V. 3.1Order No.: 6ES7810-4CA02-8BA0

SIMATIC S7–300 (03.97 Edition)Manual STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1Order No.: 6ES7810-4CA02-8BR0

SIMATIC S7–300 (04.02 Edition)FM 353 Positioning Module for Stepper DriveOrder together with configuring package

SIMATIC S7–300 (04.02 Edition)FM 354 Positioning Module for Servo DriveOrder together with configuring package

SIMATIC S7–300 (01.03 Edition)FM 357-2 Multimodule for Servo and Stepper DrivesOrder together with configuring package

SIMODRIVE 611–A/611–DSimoPro 3.1Program for Configuring Machine-Tool Drives Order No.: 6SC6111-6PC00-0BA Order from: WK Fürth

/S7H/

/S7HT/

/S7HR/

/S7S/

/S7L/

/S7M/

/SP/

B References

04.04


SIMODRIVE 611 analog (10.00 Edition)Description Start-Up Software for Main Spindle and Asynchronous Motor Modules Version 3.20Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA30-0BP1

SIMODRIVE 611A (10.00 Edition)Installation and Start-Up Guide Order No.: 6SN1197-0AA60-0BP6

SINUMERIK 810D (11.02 Edition)Installation and Start-Up Guide (incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software)Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD20-0BP1

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 (03.04 Edition)Installation and Start-Up Guide (incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611 digital start-up software)Order No.: 6FC5297-7AB10-0BP0

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D (03.04 Edition)Installation and Start-Up Guide HMIOrder No.: 6FC5297-6AE20-0BP3AE1 Updates/SupplementsBE1 Expanding the Operator InterfaceHE1 Online HelpIM2 Starting up HMI EmbeddedIM4 Starting up HMI Advanced TX1 Creating Foreign Language Texts

d) Installation andStart-Up

/BS/

/IAA/

/IAC/

/IAD/

/IAM/

B References

04.04



B References

Notes

Index-581 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reservedSINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components – Manual (BH) – 04.04 Edition

Index

Symbols“Milling” MCP, 10-164

Numbers15” TFT, System features, 9-11515” TFT

Communication, 9-115, 10-155Description, 10-156Description of Functions, 9-116Function blocks, 9-116Heat dissipation, 9-152, 10-178Interface, 9-120, 10-158Mechanical design, 9-134, 10-162Mounting, 9-140, 10-169Operator panel front, 9-113, 9-115, 9-117,

10-153, 10-155, 10-156Overview, 9-114, 10-154Spare parts, 9-148, 10-174System features, 10-155Technical data, 9-147, 10-172

19” machine control panel, 26-48324 V power supply, 13-204, 14-231, 15-245,

20-345, 26-491

AAC power supply, 34-541Actuation field, 4-55, 6-79, 8-104Alpha key group, 1-22, 3-44, 3-45, 4-54, 4-55,

6-79, 8-104Alt key, 1-23Ambient conditions, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234Anti-rotation element, 13-224Area switchover, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 6-79, 7-94,

8-104Key, 1-22

AT module, 13-226AT/PCI specification, 13-225Atmospheric pressure, 34-557

BBacklight inverter, 1-28, 2-40, 4-64, 5-74, 6-87,

7-100, 8-111

Backlighting, 1-28, 1-30, 2-40, 4-64, 5-74, 6-87,7-100, 8-111

Backspace key, 1-23Backup battery, 13-217, 13-221, 13-222, 14-238

Rules, 34-556Transportation, 34-556

BatteryChange, 13-221Clip, 13-221Connector, 13-228Plug, 13-221Voltage, 13-221

BIOSParameters, 13-209Settings, 13-209, 13-221Setup, 13-211, 13-212

Blank film, 1-29Blank labels, 1-25Board retainer, 13-222, 13-228Boot manager, 13-208, 13-209Boot Sequence, 13-211Boot sequence, 13-212Booting, 14-236

CCable, clamp, 1-30Cable connector, 2-37, 4-58Cable set, 23-415Cap for the USB port, 1-28, 2-40, 3-52, 4-64,

5-74, 6-87, 7-100, 8-111Cardbus, 13-215Casing cover screws, 13-220Casing screws, 1-29, 1-30Central operator panel front, 15-254Changing the

Battery, 13-221BIOS settings, 13-211Device fan, 13-220

Changing the power supply, 13-218Chip extractor, 23-406Clamping elements, 1-21Clearance, 1-26, 3-50, 4-59, 5-72, 6-83, 8-108,

12-197, 13-207, 14-234Climatic ambient conditions, 34-555, 34-557Climatic conditions, 34-555Closure cap, 6-87, 8-111

C

04.04

Index-582 Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved


CMOS interface, 12-191CNC Full Keyboard KB 310C/310, 28-501,

29-509Color display, 1-21, 6-77COM1, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231

Interface, 34-547COM1/RS-232, 13-204, 14-231COM2, 13-204, 14-231

Interface, 34-548Components, 5-74Connecting, 26-491

Lead, 12-198, 13-208, 14-235Plate, 13-228

Connecting theHandheld unit, 18-310Power supply, 13-208

Connecting the handheld programming unit, 17-293

Connection, 20-345Conditions, 34-539Mini HHU connection kit, 19-335Mini HHU handwheel signals, 19-335

Connection for handheld units, 24-438Contact change, 24-469Contact problems, 13-226Control, panel, 13-224Control cabinet, 6-87Control cabinet., 15-256Control elements, 24-444Control key group, 1-22, 3-44, 3-45, 4-54, 4-55,

6-79, 8-104Control parameters, 1-29, 4-65, 5-75, 6-89Convection surface area, 9-152, 10-178Cover plate, 11-183, 11-186, 11-188, 13-204,

14-231, 15-256Ctrl key, 1-23Cursor down key, 1-23Cursor key group, 1-22, 3-44, 3-45, 4-54, 4-55,

6-79, 8-104Cursor keys, 13-212Cursor left key, 1-23Cursor right key, 1-23Cursor up key, 1-23Customer keys, 21-352Customer operator panel

Bus address, 25-481Digital I/Os, 25-477Interfaces, 25-475Jumpering, 25-480LEDs, 25-479MPI interface, 25-475, 25-476Power supply interface, 25-476Receipt cycle time, 25-481Transmission cycle time, 25-481

Customized keys, 20-340

DData memory, 26-483DC supply, 34-541DC/DC converter, 26-484Decimal point, 1-22, 3-45, 4-55, 6-79, 8-104Degree of, protection, 1-21, 1-25, 2-33, 2-36,

3-43, 4-53, 4-60, 5-67, 5-70, 6-82, 7-93, 7-96,8-103, 8-106

Delete key, 1-23Description, of interfaces, 16-269Description of control elements

Axis selection switch, 19-332Enabling button, 19-332Function keys, 19-332Handwheel, 19-332Rapid traverse button, 19-332Traversing keys, 19-332

Design for, industrial use, 12-198, 13-208, 14-235Device fan, 13-205, 13-219, 13-220, 15-253,

15-257Cable, 13-220Connection, 13-222

Dial, 23-415Dimension drawing, for mounting TP 015A, 6-83DIMM, 14-239DIN-A4 film, 1-26, 4-62DIP switch S2, 15-252, 15-253Direct control key, module, 4-64, 6-87, 8-111Direct control key connection, 1-30Direct control key submodule, 6-82, 6-83, 6-87,

11-180Direct control keys, 4-53, 8-103, 11-180

Vertical, 11-180Direction keys, 20-340, 21-352, 26-485Disconnecting the, handheld unit, 18-310Disconnecting the handheld programming

unit, 17-293Disk A, 13-209Dismantling, 15-255Display

Cable K2, 1-24, 1-30, 2-35, 2-37, 3-47, 3-48,4-56, 4-57, 4-58, 5-69, 5-70, 6-81, 6-82,7-95, 7-96, 8-105, 8-106, 11-183

Holder, 1-28Interface, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81,

7-95, 8-105Interface (LVDS), 34-550, 34-551, 34-552Setting, 14-234, 15-251Support, 1-30Support plate, 1-30, 4-57, 6-82, 8-106, 11-183Switch S1, 15-257Type, 15-251, 15-257

Distributed Installation, 5-67, 6-77, 15-245Distribution box, interface, 18-313Distributor box, 34-544Drive holder, 13-218

C Index

04.04


Drive connection, 14-238Dust, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234

Function-impairing, 34-557

EEFP, 34-544Electrical isolation, 26-483Electromagnetic compatibility, 34-540Electrostatic discharge, 1-29, 2-40, 4-65, 5-75,

6-89, 7-100, 8-112Embedded operating system, 12-191EMC, 34-540EMC noise immunity, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69,

6-81, 7-95, 8-105EMERGENCY STOP, 9-115, 9-117, 10-155,

18-310, 19-332, 20-340, 21-352, 23-405,23-406, 23-407, 23-415, 24-423, 26-485,26-486

End key, 1-23Enter key, 1-23Esc-key, 1-23Escape key, 13-212Etc. key, 1-22, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 6-79, 7-94, 8-104Ethernet, 12-191, 12-193, 13-202, 13-204,

14-229, 14-231Interface, 34-549

Exit menu, 13-212Expanding, the memory, 14-239Expansion board, 13-204, 13-223, 13-225,

13-228, 14-231, 14-238Extender, 13-227External floppy disk drive, 13-205, 14-232, 14-238External keyboard, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69,

6-81, 7-95, 8-105External monitor, 13-204, 14-231

FF10 key, 1-23F11 key, 1-23F12 key, 1-23F2 key, 13-212F9 key, 1-23Fan, 13-228, 14-232

Connection, 13-222Feed

Control, 20-340, 21-352, 26-485Override switch, 23-405

Film, 1-28, 4-62Film for softkey labels, 1-26Film labels, 1-31Fire protection, 12-191, 12-197Firmware, 11-180Flat mounting, 15-253, 15-256Floppy check, 13-209

Floppy disk drive, 1-21, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 7-93,12-191, 13-205, 14-232, 31-521Dimension drawing, 31-521Dimension drawing of blanking plate, 31-523Front view, 31-521Function, 31-521Mounting, 31-523Mounting dimension drawing, 31-523Power supply interface, 31-522Rear view, 31-522Side view, 31-521Technical data, 31-524Top view, 31-522USB INT, 13-223, 32-525

Floppy disk drive with USB interface, Front view, 32-528

FrontPanel, 4-64, 5-74, 7-100, 8-111, 9-136, 10-165Panel cutout, 30-518Plate, 13-204, 14-231

Front panel, 6-87Function-impairing dust, 34-557Function-impairing gases, 34-557

GGases, Function-impairing, 34-557Ground terminal, 13-205, 14-232Grounding concept, 34-544Guide rail, 13-227, 13-228

HHandheld programming unit

Cable interface, 17-279Connecting and disconnecting during opera-

tion, 17-290Distribution box, 17-283Distribution box for 3-core enabling, 17-283Distribution box for 4-core enabling, 17-286Function blocks, 17-276Input signals, 17-294Interface signals, 17-294Output signals, 17-295Parameterizing basic PLC program, 17-296RS232 (V.24) interface, 17-280Technical data, 17-297

Handheld terminal, 17-275Handheld unit, 18-305

ASCII code, 18-323Block diagram, 18-307Changing labeling strip, 18-306Connecting and disconnecting during opera-

tion, 18-308Control elements, 18-312Digital display, 18-321

C Index

04.04



DIP switch, 18-316Distribution box, 18-325Distributor box, connection, 18-307Enabling buttons, 18-313GD parameters, 18-317Handwheel, 18-313Input image, 18-319Interface signals, 18-318Keyswitch, 18-313, 18-319LED, 18-313Magnetic clamp, 18-306Operating and display elements, 18-305Operating more than one, 18-311Output image, 18-320Override switch, 18-313PLC module, 18-318Rotary selector settings, 18-319Signal chart, 18-322Spare parts, 18-329, 19-337Technical data, 18-314User interface, 18-318

Hard disk, 1-26, 13-208, 14-235, 15-256Connection, 13-217Drive, 13-203, 13-217, 13-218Holder, 13-217Use, 14-230

Hardware clock, 13-221Hardware reset, 12-195, 13-205, 14-232Heat, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234Heat dissipation, 6-83, 15-253, 33-535Hinge bolts, 15-254HMI Advanced, 13-224Hollow rivet, 13-220Home key, 1-23Hotkey group, 1-22Hotkeys, 1-21, 3-44Housing cover, 13-203, 14-230HT 6

Connecting cable, 17-280PC card interface, 17-281PS/2 keyboard interface, 17-282Threaded bushes, 17-279User interface, 17-277

Humidity, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234

II/O / USB cable K1, 1-30, 2-37, 3-48, 4-57, 4-58,

5-70, 6-82, 7-96, 8-106, 11-183I/O devices, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81,

7-95, 8-105, 12-198, 13-208, 14-235I/O USB cable K1, 1-24, 1-30, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56,

5-69, 6-81, 7-95, 8-105I/RF module, 34-544IAM, 13-224Inclined position, 12-197, 13-207, 14-235Individual wiring, 24-443

Industrial, use, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81,7-95, 8-105

Initialization, 24-462Input key, 13-209, 13-212Insert key, 1-23Interconnecting cables, 13-208, 14-235Interface, 9-118, 9-120, 10-156, 10-158

Assignments, 15-250Interface, 24-457Interfaces, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81, 7-95,

8-105, 11-180, 13-202, 14-229, 15-249,16-269, 24-426

IO USB cable, 13-205, 14-233IO/USB interface, 34-551ISA, module, 13-227

KK1, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81, 7-95, 8-105K2, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81, 7-95, 8-105Key cap, 23-405Key functions, 1-23Key symbols, 18-306Keyboard, 13-204, 13-208, 14-231, 14-235,

15-252, 26-484Controller, 1-28, 1-29, 2-40, 4-64, 4-65, 5-74,

5-75, 6-87, 7-100, 8-111Keyboard connection, 12-193Keyboard controller, 1-30, 6-87, 6-89Keyswitch, 20-340, 21-352, 23-406, 23-415,

26-485, 26-486Knurled screws, 4-58

LLAN, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Laser printer, 1-26, 4-62LCD, unit, 6-87LCD unit, 1-28, 2-40, 4-64, 6-87, 7-100, 8-111LED, 12-191LEDs, 9-131, 20-340, 26-484, 26-486Line

Cable, 13-221Switch, 12-198, 13-208

Lithium battery, 13-221Local area network, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Locking, 13-224Low current USB, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81, 7-95, 8-105LPT mode, 13-212LPT1, 13-204, 14-231

Interface, 13-202, 14-229, 34-547Lugs, 1-31Lumotast, 23-415LVDS, 14-229LVDS interface, 12-191, 13-205, 14-233

C Index

04.04


MM-version, 26-485Machine area key, 1-22, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 6-79,

7-94, 8-104Machine control panel, 9-117

24 V power supply, 20-345, 26-491Block diagram, 26-484Bus address, 20-347, 20-349, 21-362, 22-389,

26-493Configuring, 26-494Control elements, 20-340, 26-485, 26-486Dimension drawing, 26-489Function blocks, 26-483Interface parameters, 26-494Interfaces, 20-342, 21-354, 26-487Jumpering, 26-492Mounting, 26-489MPI connection, 20-345, 26-491Operator panel interface, 20-343, 26-488Power supply interface, 20-343, 21-356,

26-488Receipt cycle time, 26-493Receive cycle time, 20-347Technical data, 26-495Transmission cycle time, 20-346, 26-492

Machine control panel MCP 310, 22-381Machine control panel MCP 483C, 20-339,

21-351Machine key, 1-23Main board, 13-221Mains, switch, 14-236Malfunction, 13-226MCP, 9-135, 34-544Membrane connector, 1-30, 1-31Membrane keyboard, 1-21, 4-53, 6-77, 7-93,

8-103Memory

Configuration, 13-224, 13-225Expansion, 13-223, 14-238Module, 13-223, 14-239

Memory Cache, 13-209Menu, 13-209MF2 keyboard, 9-117Microcontroller, 26-483Milling machine, 26-485Mini DIN connector, 30-517Mini handheld unit

Axis selection switch, 19-334Circuit diagram, 19-333Coding of axis selection switch, 19-334Configuration, 19-334Connection, 19-335Control elements, 19-331Description of control elements, 19-332Dimensions, 19-331Dimensions of flange socket, 19-335sample connection, 19-333Technical data, 19-336

Monitor, 13-202, 14-229Motherboard, 13-218, 13-221Mounting, 1-21, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 5-67, 5-71,

6-82, 7-93, 7-97, 8-103, 8-108, 12-195,13-201, 13-205, 14-233, 14-234Bracket, 3-50, 4-57, 4-59, 5-72, 6-87, 8-108,

8-111, 9-145, 12-195, 15-254Bracket flat, 6-87Cut-out, 24-442Depth, 1-21, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 5-67, 7-93,

8-103Direction, 15-253Format, 1-21, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 5-67, 7-93,

8-103Panel, 1-25, 3-49, 4-61, 12-197PCU, 15-253Position, 12-197Screw, 15-255Slot, 15-257TCU, 16-270Videolink receiver, 15-260

Mounting hole, 6-82Mounting slot, 1-30, 4-57Mouse, 1-30, 4-54, 4-55, 4-64, 5-69, 6-79, 6-81,

6-87, 6-89, 8-104, 8-111, 13-204, 13-208,14-231, 14-235, 15-252Connection, 1-30

Mouse connector, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231MPI

Connection, 24-443Module, 34-549

MPI interface, 25-475MPI/DP, 13-204, 14-231

Interface, 13-202, 14-229, 34-549MPI/L2-DP, 12-193

Interface, 12-191MPI/OPI networking rules, 34-558Multi-Point-Interface, 12-193

NNatural convection, 9-152, 10-178NCU box, 34-544NCU terminal block, 34-544Noise immunity, 34-540Noise immunity of the complete system, 34-546Numerical key group, 1-22, 3-44, 3-45, 4-54,

4-55, 6-79, 8-104

OOEM agreement, 13-212, 13-225OP 010

Assembly with PCU 50, 1-26Dimensions, 1-27Front panel, 2-40Installation, 1-25

C Index

04.04



Interfaces, 1-24Mounting, 1-26Mounting hole, 1-25Power consumption, 1-27Preparation for mounting, 1-25Spare part replacement, 1-29Spare parts, 1-28Technical data, 1-27

OP 010CAssembly with PCU 50, 3-48Installation, 3-48Interfaces, 3-47Keyboard, 3-45Mounting, 3-49Preparation for mounting, 3-48Spare parts, 3-52Technical data, 3-51View, 3-44

OP 010S, 15-260, 16-270Installation, 2-36Interfaces, 2-35Mounting, 2-36Panel cutout, 2-33Spare part replacement, 2-40Spare parts list, 2-40Spare parts, 2-40Technical data, 2-39User interface, 2-34

OP 012, 6-82, 12-197Assembly with PCU 50, 4-57Installation, 4-57Interfaces, 4-56Keyboard, 4-55Mounting, 4-61Preparing for mounting, 4-60Softkey labeling, 4-62Spare part replacement, 4-65Spare parts list, 4-64Spare parts, 4-64Technical data, 4-63View, 4-54

OP 015Assembly with PCU 50, 7-96Assignments, 7-95Interfaces, 7-95Mounting, 7-96Preparation for mounting, 7-96Spare part replacement, 7-100Spare parts list, 7-100Spare parts, 7-100Technical data, 7-99User interface, 7-94

OP 015AAssembly with PCU 50, 8-106Interfaces, 8-105Keyboard, 8-104Mounting, 8-106Preparing for mounting, 8-106Softkey labeling, 8-109

Spare parts list, 8-111Spare parts, 8-111Technical data, 8-110View, 8-104

OP 032SCNC keyboard dimension drawing, 30-518CNC keyboard panel cutout, 30-518Control elements, 23-406Dimension drawing of machine control panel,

23-413Panel cutout of machine control panel, 23-413Power supply interface, 23-408

OperatingConditions, 34-557Modes, 20-340, 21-352System, 13-202

Operator panel, 9-115, 10-155, 15-245, 34-544Interface, 26-483

Operator panel front, 8-111, 12-197, 15-252Optional user keys, 23-405Order number, 1-28, 2-40, 3-52, 4-64, 5-74, 6-87,

7-100, 8-111, 13-217, 14-238Overall length, 13-226Override switch, 23-407, 23-415Overtemperature, 1-21

PPage down key, 1-23Page up key, 1-23Panel, cut-out, 1-26, 2-36, 3-49, 4-61, 5-71, 6-83,

7-97, 8-108Parallel interface, 13-204, 14-231PC card, 13-202, 13-204, 13-215, 14-229,

14-231, 14-236PC card connector, 12-193PC keyboard, standard, 13-202, 14-229PCI module, 13-226, 13-227PCI slot, 13-202, 13-204, 14-229, 14-231PCI/ISA slot, 13-204, 14-231PCU, 1-21, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 4-62, 6-85, 8-109,

9-116, 15-254Assembly, 6-82Assembly with OP 010, 1-26Assembly with OP 012, 4-57Connection, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69,

6-81, 7-95, 8-105Mounting, 2-37

PCU 20Accessories, 12-199Connections, 12-193Interfaces, 12-193Mounting, 12-197Technical data, 12-199View, 12-192

PCU 50, 1-21, 5-67, 6-77, 7-93, 8-103, 13-203Accessories, 13-223Assembly with OP 010C, 3-48

C Index

04.04


Assembly with OP 015, 7-96Connections, 13-204Interfaces, 13-204Mounting bracket, 13-223Mounting preparation, 13-206Notes on installation, 13-207Overview, 13-201Spare parts, 13-217Technical data, 13-216

PCU 70, 5-67, 6-77, 14-229Accessories, 14-238Expansion boards, 14-239Interfaces and connections, 14-231Mounting, 14-234Spare parts, 14-238Startup, 14-234System information, 14-239Technical data, 14-237

PELV, 34-543Plastic support, 13-228PLC interface, 24-460Plug connector, 13-205, 14-232POST Errors, 13-209Power

Consumption, 13-221Supply, 9-115, 10-155, 12-191, 12-198,

13-202, 13-204, 13-208, 13-217, 13-219,14-229, 14-231, 14-235, 14-238, 24-431,34-541

POWER LED, 1-22, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 5-68, 6-79,7-94, 8-104

Power supply, 1-21, 12-191Power supply cover, 13-203, 14-230PP 012

Circuits, 24-451COM interface, 24-418Communication parameters, 24-464Configuration, 24-470Connecting the 24V supply, 24-443Connections, 24-451Control elements, 24-423Design, 24-443Dimension drawing, 24-442Emergency button, 24-427Euchner male connector, 24-432Expansion, 24-446Function blocks, 24-420Global data table, 24-464Inputs/outputs, 24-418Interface operator panel, 24-419Interfaces, 24-418Labeling, 24-444Monitoring, 24-419Mounting, 24-443MPI/OPI interface, 24-418Operator Panel Interface, 24-431Panel cutout, 24-447PCB I/O, 24-448PG interface, 24-418

PLC input signals, 24-460PLC output signals, 24-461Power, 24-423Programming device interface, 24-432Project-specific components, 24-472Rating plates, 24-473Service information, 24-468System description, 24-417Technical data, 24-456Voltage supply, 24-418Wiring, 24-451

PP 031-MC, Direct control key connection,11-180

Press-fit nut, 30-518Primary Master, 13-209Primary Slave, 13-209Printer, 13-204, 14-231Processor, 13-201PROFIBUS, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Program, memory, 26-483Program key, 1-23Program Manager key, 1-23Protective

Cap, 1-25Earth, 23-408

Protective cap, USB interface, 6-82Protective cover, 1-30, 2-37, 3-48, 4-56, 4-57,

6-82, 6-90, 7-96, 8-105, 8-106, 13-204Protective extra low voltage, 34-543Protective separation, 34-542, 34-543PS/2, 12-193

Interface, 34-548Keyboard, 13-204, 14-231Keyboard interface, 12-191, 13-202, 14-229Mouse, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Mouse interface, 13-202, 14-229

Pushbutton panel, 11-180Pushbutton panel PP 012, 24-417

QQuick Boot Mode, 13-209QWERTY

Control elements, 28-503, 29-511Interfaces, 28-503, 29-511

QWERTY keyboard, 9-117

RRAFI, 23-415RAM, 13-202, 14-229RAM bank, 13-222, 13-223, 14-239Rating plate, 13-203Ready for

Modes, 26-485Operation, 12-198, 14-235

Recall, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 6-79, 7-94, 8-104

C Index

04.04



Key, 1-22Receive time frame, cyclic, 9-137Relative humidity, 18-314, 34-555, 34-557Repeater, 17-290, 18-311Replacing the, hard disk, 13-217Reset, 12-195, 13-205, 14-232, 20-340, 21-352,

26-485RESET button, 17-282Resolution, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 5-67, 6-77, 7-93,

8-103, 15-251Retaining screws, 1-31, 4-62, 6-85, 8-109RI suppression, 34-540RI suppression measures, 34-545Ribbon cable, 1-24, 2-35, 3-47, 4-56, 5-69, 6-81,

7-95, 8-105, 13-217, 13-218RJ45 socket, 12-193Rotary, selector switch, 20-340, 26-486RS 485, 13-204, 14-231RTS signal, 34-549

SS7, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231S7-300, 34-544Safety, 12-199, 13-216, 14-237Screen resolution, 12-191, 13-202SDRAM, 13-223, 14-238, 14-239

Module, 13-223, 14-239Seal, 1-25, 2-36, 4-60, 5-70, 6-82, 7-96, 8-106Sealing area, 1-25, 3-49, 4-61Secondary conditions,, electrical, 34-539Secondary electrical conditions, 34-539Secondary Master, 13-209Secondary Slave, 13-209Select key, 1-23Selector switch, 24-424Serial interface, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Serial mouse, 13-204, 14-231Service menu, 13-209Settings, Machine control panel, 20-346, 26-492Setup menu, 13-212SETUP prompt, 13-209Shared PCI/ISA slot, 13-202, 14-229Shielded signal cables, 34-545Shift key, 1-21, 1-23, 3-43, 4-53, 8-103, 13-212Shipping lock, 1-26, 13-203, 13-218Shock stressing, 34-555Signal type, 7-95, 17-280, 17-282, 24-427,

34-547SIMATIC Manager STEP 7, 21-369, 22-394Single I/O module, 34-544Slide-in labels, 1-28, 1-29, 6-87Slot, 13-226, 13-228SO-DIMM module, 13-224Socket, 13-218Soft key, labeling strips, 11-183Softkey

Bar, 1-25

Labeling, 1-25, 1-28Labeling strips, 1-30, 4-57, 6-82, 8-106

Softkeys, 1-21, 3-43, 4-53, 8-103Vertical, 4-56, 6-81, 8-105

Spacebar, 1-23Spacer ring, 9-136, 10-165Spare parts, 1-28, 2-40, 3-52, 4-64, 7-100, 8-111Spindle control, 20-340, 21-352, 26-485Split rivet, 13-219, 13-220Startup, Guide, 13-224Status LED, 1-21, 1-22, 2-33, 2-34, 3-43, 3-44,

4-53, 4-54, 5-67, 5-68, 6-79, 7-93, 7-94,8-103, 8-104

STN slimline screen, 1-21Storage conditions, 34-555Sub D connector, 13-204, 14-231Sub-D socket, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231Summary screen, 13-209Sunlight, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234Switch S2, 15-253, 15-257Switching states, 11-180System

Booting, 13-208, 13-224Parameters, 13-208

TT version, 26-485Tab key, 1-23Technical data

Videolink receiver, 15-263Videolink transmitter, 15-262

TEMP LED, 1-22, 2-34, 3-44, 4-54, 5-68, 6-79,7-94, 8-104

TemperatureChange, 34-555LED, 15-252Limiting values, 2-39Monitor, 15-252Monitoring, 26-483Threshold, 15-252

Tension, jacks, 1-25Tension jacks, 1-21, 1-25, 1-26, 1-28, 2-33, 2-36,

2-37, 2-40, 3-43, 3-48, 3-49, 3-52, 4-53, 4-60,4-61, 4-64, 5-67, 5-70, 5-71, 5-74, 6-78, 6-82,6-83, 6-87, 6-90, 7-93, 7-96, 7-97, 7-100,8-103, 8-106, 8-108, 8-111, 12-197, 26-491

Terminal block, 26-484Terminator, 24-438TFT

Display, 13-205, 14-233Slimline screen, 2-33, 3-43, 4-53, 7-93, 8-103

Thermal power loss, 6-91, 33-537Threaded

Bolt, 9-136, 10-165Hole, 30-518Screws, 1-25, 1-26, 2-37, 3-49, 4-61, 5-71,

6-83, 7-97, 8-108

C Index

04.04


Tightening torque, 15-253Torque, 1-31, 1-26, 2-37, 3-49, 4-61, 5-71, 6-83,

7-97, 8-108Switch S1, 15-251, 15-253

Touch controller, 6-89Touch screen, 6-77TP 012

Assembly with PCU 50, 5-70Interfaces, 5-69Mounting, 5-70Operation, 5-67Preparing for mounting, 5-70Spare part replacement, 5-75Spare parts, 5-74Spare parts list, 5-74View, 5-68

TP 015ADegree of protection, 6-77Direct control keys, 6-77Interfaces, 6-81, 11-180Keyboard, 6-79Mounting, 6-77, 6-82Operation, 6-78Replacing spare parts, 6-89Scope of delivery, 6-78Shift key, 6-77Softkey labeling, 6-85Softkeys, 6-77Spare parts list, 6-87Status LED, 6-77Technical data, 6-86Tension jacks, 6-77View, 6-79

Trackball, 14-231Tracker ball, 4-55, 6-79, 8-104Transmit time frame, cyclic, 9-137Transport conditions, 34-555Turning, machine, 26-485

UUniversal Serial Bus, 12-193Uppercase characters, 1-21Upright mounting, 15-253, 15-257, 15-258USB, 12-193, 13-204, 14-231

Connection, 1-28, 2-40, 3-52, 5-74, 6-87,7-100, 8-111

Connector, 15-252Floppy disk drive, 14-238Front interface, 1-22, 1-24, 2-34, 2-35, 3-44,

3-47, 4-54, 4-56, 5-68, 5-69, 6-79, 6-81,7-94, 7-95, 8-104, 8-105

Interface, 1-21, 1-30, 1-31, 6-82, 6-87, 6-89,7-100, 12-191, 13-202, 14-229, 15-251,15-252, 34-548

Interface X 102, 15-253Interface X 106, 15-253Mouse, 4-64, 6-87, 8-111Sealing cap, 6-90Signal, 15-252

USB interface, 12-191Floppy disk drive, 32-525

USB module, 6-89USB socket, 12-193User keys, 26-485User main menu, 13-209User-specific functions, 1-25, 4-62, 6-85, 8-109

VVent slots, 12-197, 13-207, 14-234Ventilation, 12-197VGA, 13-204, 14-231

Interface, 13-202, 14-229, 34-549Resolution, 1-21

Vibration stressing, 34-555Videolink

Cable, 15-242, 15-245Receiver, 6-87, 8-111, 15-242, 15-245Transmitter, 6-87, 8-111, 9-139, 9-143,

15-242, 15-245, 15-251, 15-256Videolink receiver, 1-21, 1-26Virtual memory, 13-225Voltage monitoring, 26-483

WWatch dog, 26-483Windows NT, 13-202Windows XP, 13-202Working memory, 13-223, 14-239

XX1, 24-428X10 / X11, 24-430X11, 3-47, 4-56, 6-81, 8-105, 11-180X2, 24-428X3, 24-428X4, 24-429XGA, 12-191XT module, 13-226

C Index

04.04



C Index

Notes

From

Name

Company/Dept.

Address

Phone: /

Suggestions

Corrections

For Publication/Manual:

Manufacturer Documentation

Manual

Order No.: 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0Edition: 04.04

Should you come across any printingerrors when reading this publication,please notify us on this sheet.Suggestions for improvement are alsowelcome.

To SIEMENS AGA&D MC BMSP.O. Box 3180

D-91050 Erlangen, Germany(Phone: ++49-(0)180-5050-222 [Hotline] Fax: ++49-(0)9131-98-2176 [Documentation] Email: [email protected])

Fax: /

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810DOperator Components

Suggestions and/or corrections

User Documentation

SINUMERIK

840D/810D

SINUMERIK

Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Documentation (04.2004)

Brochure CatalogOrdering Info.NC 60 *)

Description ofFunctionsDrive Functions *)

Description ofFunctions-- Basic Machine *)-- Extended Functions-- Special Functions

611D840D/810D

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

ApplicationManual

SafetyIntegratedApplicationManual

SafetyIntegrated

840D/840Di810D

-- Lists *)-- List Syst. Var.

Installation &Start-Up Guide *)-- 810D-- 840D/611D-- HMI

SINUMERIK

840D

Description ofFunctionsDigitizing

611D

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

840D/810D

Configuring KitHMI Embedded

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

Description ofFunctionsSINUMERIKSafety Integrated

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D611, Motors

SIMODRIVE

DOC ON CD *)The SINUMERIK System

General Documentation

Electronic Documentation



SINUMERIK

840D/810D/FM-NC

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

User Documentation

DiagnosticsGuide *)

Operator’s Guide-- HT 6

AutoTurn-- Short Guide-- Programming/

Setup

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

Program. Guide-- Short Guide-- Fundamentals *)-- Advanced *)-- Cycles-- Measuring Cycles-- ISO Turning/Milling

OperatorComponents(HW) *)

Description ofFunctionsSynchronizedActions

840D/810D

SINUMERIK

Operator’s Guide-- ManualTurn-- Short Guide ManualTurn-- ShopMill-- Short Guide ShopMill-- ShopTurn-- Short Guide ShopTurn

840D/810D


*) These documents are a minimum requirement

Operator’s Guide *)-- Short Guide-- HMI Embedded-- HMI Advanced

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

Configuring(HW) *)-- 810D-- 840D

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

SINUMERIK

840D/810D

Description ofFunctionsOperator InterfaceOP 030

Description ofFunctionsTool Manage-ment

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

SINUMERIKSIMODRIVE

840D611D

840D611D

Description ofFunctionsLinear Motor

Description of Functions-- Hydraulics Module-- Analog Module

MOTIONCONTROLSYSTEMS

EMCGuidelines


SINUMERIK

Description ofFunctionsISO Dialects forSINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

SINUMERIK

Manual(HW + Installationand Start-Up)

840Di

SINUMERIK

System Overview

840Di

840D/840Di/810D/

SINUMERIK

Description ofFunctionsRemote Diagnosis

840D/810D

SINUMERIK

840D/810D

MCIS-- Computer Link-- Tool Data Information System-- NC Data Management-- NC Data Transfer-- Tool Data Communication

SINUMERIK

Description ofFunctions-- ManualTurn-- ShopMill-- ShopTurn

840D/840Di/810D

SINUMERIK

840D/840Di/810D

Manual@ Event

© Siemens AG, 2004Subject to change without prior notice

Order No.: 6FC5 297-7AA50-0BP0

Printed in Germany

Siemens AG Automation & Drives Motion Control Systems P. O. Box 3180, D – 91050 Erlangen Germany www.siemens.com/motioncontrol

Date post:	24-Nov-2014
Category:	Documents
Upload:	machinehistories
View:	293 times
Download:	74 times

09_manual

Documents